C60 Breaker Protection System Instruction Manual

C60 Breaker Protection System Instruction Manual
GE
Digital Energy
C60
Breaker Protection System
Instruction Manual
Product version: 7.3x
GE publication code: 1601-0100-AB1 (GEK-119613)
ISO 9001
E
IN
G
LISTED
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
S T ER
GI
ED
RE
E83849
M U LT I L
1601-0100-AB1
Copyright © 2014 GE Multilin Inc. All rights reserved.
C60 Breaker Protection System Instruction Manual for version 7.3x.
C60, FlexLogic, FlexElement, FlexCurve, FlexAnalog, FlexInteger, FlexState, EnerVista,
CyberSentry, HardFiber, Digital Energy, Multilin, and GE Multilin are trademarks or
registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc. This documentation is
furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission
of GE Multilin. The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to
change without notice.
Part number: 1601-0100-AB1 (November 2014)
C60 Breaker Protection System
Table of contents
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1
Safety symbols and definitions ..................................................................... 1-1
1.2
For further assistance ..................................................................................... 1-2
2.1
Product description.......................................................................................... 2-1
2.2
2.3
Security .............................................................................................................. 2-3
Order codes ....................................................................................................... 2-6
1.1.1
2 PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION
2.1.1
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.4
3.1
3.2
Order codes with enhanced CT/VT modules............................................................. 2-7
Order codes with process bus modules ....................................................................2-10
Replacement modules.......................................................................................................2-13
Protection elements............................................................................................................2-14
User-programmable elements ......................................................................................2-17
Monitoring................................................................................................................................2-19
Metering....................................................................................................................................2-20
Inputs .........................................................................................................................................2-21
Power supply ..........................................................................................................................2-22
Outputs .....................................................................................................................................2-23
Communication protocols ...............................................................................................2-25
Inter-relay communications ...........................................................................................2-26
Environmental........................................................................................................................2-27
Type tests .................................................................................................................................2-28
Production tests....................................................................................................................2-28
Approvals .................................................................................................................................2-29
Maintenance...........................................................................................................................2-29
Unpack and inspect ......................................................................................... 3-1
Panel cutouts .................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.3
Overview..................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Specifications .................................................................................................. 2-14
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.9
2.4.10
2.4.11
2.4.12
2.4.13
2.4.14
3 INSTALLATION
General cautions and warnings ...................................................................................... 1-1
Horizontal units ....................................................................................................................... 3-2
Vertical units............................................................................................................................. 3-3
Rear terminal layout ............................................................................................................. 3-7
Wiring ................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.3.1
Typical wiring ........................................................................................................................... 3-9
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
3.3.10
3.4
Direct input and output communications .................................................3-25
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
3.4.9
3.5
3.6
Connect to the C60 in EnerVista ................................................................................... 3-47
Use Quick Connect via the front panel RS232 port ............................................. 3-48
Use Quick Connect via a rear Ethernet port............................................................ 3-49
3.9
Set up CyberSentry and change default password .................................3-54
4.1
EnerVista software interface.......................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.2
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................4-1
Settings files ..............................................................................................................................4-1
Event viewing............................................................................................................................4-2
File support ................................................................................................................................4-2
EnerVista main window .......................................................................................................4-2
Settings templates .................................................................................................................4-3
Secure and lock FlexLogic equations ............................................................................4-8
Settings file traceability..................................................................................................... 4-10
Front panel interface .....................................................................................4-12
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8
4.2.9
4.2.10
4.2.11
iv
Configure serial communication .................................................................................. 3-45
Configure Ethernet communication ........................................................................... 3-46
Automatic discovery of UR devices............................................................................. 3-47
Connect to the C60.........................................................................................3-47
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
4 INTERFACES
EnerVista communication overview ........................................................................... 3-42
System requirements......................................................................................................... 3-43
Install software ..................................................................................................................... 3-43
Configure the C60 for software access ......................................................3-44
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.8
Description.............................................................................................................................. 3-25
Fiber: LED and ELED transmitters................................................................................. 3-27
Fiber laser transmitters..................................................................................................... 3-27
G.703 interface...................................................................................................................... 3-28
RS422 interface..................................................................................................................... 3-32
RS422 and fiber interface ................................................................................................ 3-34
G.703 and fiber interface ................................................................................................. 3-34
IEEE C37.94 interface ......................................................................................................... 3-35
C37.94SM interface............................................................................................................. 3-38
Activate relay ..................................................................................................3-41
Install software ...............................................................................................3-42
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.7
Dielectric strength ............................................................................................................... 3-10
Control power........................................................................................................................ 3-10
CT/VT modules ...................................................................................................................... 3-11
Process bus modules ......................................................................................................... 3-12
Contact inputs and outputs ............................................................................................ 3-13
Transducer inputs and outputs.....................................................................................3-20
RS232 faceplate port.......................................................................................................... 3-22
CPU communication ports .............................................................................................. 3-22
IRIG-B......................................................................................................................................... 3-24
Front panel display.............................................................................................................. 4-12
Front panel keypad ............................................................................................................. 4-12
Menu navigation .................................................................................................................. 4-13
Menu hierarchy..................................................................................................................... 4-13
Changing settings................................................................................................................ 4-14
Faceplate .................................................................................................................................4-15
LED indicators........................................................................................................................ 4-17
Custom LED labeling .......................................................................................................... 4-20
Breaker control ..................................................................................................................... 4-26
Change passwords ............................................................................................................. 4-27
Invalid password entry...................................................................................................... 4-28
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5 SETTINGS
4.3
Logic diagrams ............................................................................................... 4-29
5.1
5.2
Settings menu ................................................................................................... 5-1
Introduction to elements ................................................................................ 5-4
5.3
Product setup.................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.1
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.6
5.3.7
5.3.8
5.3.9
5.3.10
5.3.11
5.3.12
5.3.13
5.3.14
5.3.15
5.3.16
5.3.17
5.3.18
5.3.19
Introduction to AC sources ................................................................................................ 5-5
Security ....................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Display properties ................................................................................................................5-25
Clear relay records ..............................................................................................................5-27
Communications ..................................................................................................................5-28
Modbus user map ................................................................................................................5-81
Real time clock.......................................................................................................................5-82
Fault reports ...........................................................................................................................5-86
Oscillography .........................................................................................................................5-88
Data logger .............................................................................................................................5-90
Demand ....................................................................................................................................5-91
User-programmable LEDs ...............................................................................................5-93
User-programmable self tests .......................................................................................5-96
Control pushbuttons ...........................................................................................................5-97
User-programmable pushbuttons...............................................................................5-98
Flex state parameters .....................................................................................................5-103
User-definable displays.................................................................................................. 5-104
Direct inputs and outputs..............................................................................................5-106
Teleprotection.....................................................................................................................5-113
Installation............................................................................................................................5-114
5.4
Remote resources ........................................................................................5-114
5.5
System setup.................................................................................................5-115
5.4.1
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
5.6
AC inputs ...............................................................................................................................5-115
Power system......................................................................................................................5-117
Signal sources.....................................................................................................................5-118
Breakers.................................................................................................................................5-120
Disconnect switches ........................................................................................................5-125
FlexCurves ............................................................................................................................5-128
Phasor Measurement Unit ............................................................................................5-135
FlexLogic ........................................................................................................5-155
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
5.6.5
5.6.6
5.6.7
5.6.8
5.7
Remote resources configuration ...............................................................................5-114
FlexLogic operands ..........................................................................................................5-155
FlexLogic rules ....................................................................................................................5-167
FlexLogic evaluation ........................................................................................................5-167
FlexLogic example ............................................................................................................5-167
FlexLogic equation editor..............................................................................................5-172
FlexLogic timers .................................................................................................................5-172
FlexElements .......................................................................................................................5-172
Non-volatile latches .........................................................................................................5-177
Grouped elements........................................................................................5-178
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.7.6
5.7.7
5.7.8
5.7.9
Overview................................................................................................................................5-178
Setting group 1...................................................................................................................5-178
Phase current......................................................................................................................5-179
Neutral current...................................................................................................................5-187
Ground current...................................................................................................................5-190
Breaker failure ....................................................................................................................5-193
Voltage elements...............................................................................................................5-203
Supervising elements ......................................................................................................5-209
Sensitive directional power ..........................................................................................5-211
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.8
Control elements ..........................................................................................5-214
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.8.4
5.8.5
5.8.6
5.8.7
5.8.8
5.8.9
5.9
Overview ............................................................................................................................... 5-214
Trip bus .................................................................................................................................. 5-214
Setting groups .................................................................................................................... 5-216
Selector switch................................................................................................................... 5-217
Synchrocheck ..................................................................................................................... 5-224
Digital elements................................................................................................................. 5-228
Digital counters.................................................................................................................. 5-231
Monitoring elements ....................................................................................................... 5-233
Autoreclose.......................................................................................................................... 5-248
Inputs/outputs ..............................................................................................5-262
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.9.4
5.9.5
5.9.6
5.9.7
Contact inputs .................................................................................................................... 5-262
Virtual inputs ....................................................................................................................... 5-264
Contact outputs................................................................................................................. 5-264
Virtual outputs.................................................................................................................... 5-267
Resetting ............................................................................................................................... 5-268
Direct inputs and outputs ............................................................................................. 5-268
Teleprotection inputs and outputs ........................................................................... 5-272
5.10 Transducer inputs/outputs.........................................................................5-274
5.10.1 DCmA inputs ....................................................................................................................... 5-274
5.10.2 RTD inputs ............................................................................................................................ 5-274
5.10.3 DCmA outputs .................................................................................................................... 5-276
5.11 Testing ............................................................................................................5-279
5.11.1
5.11.2
5.11.3
5.11.4
5.11.5
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.1
6.2
Actual Values menu ......................................................................................... 6-1
Status.................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
6.2.8
6.2.9
6.2.10
6.2.11
6.2.12
6.2.13
6.2.14
6.2.15
6.2.16
6.2.17
6.2.18
6.2.19
6.2.20
6.2.21
6.3
Contact inputs ..........................................................................................................................6-3
Virtual inputs .............................................................................................................................6-3
RxGOOSE boolean inputs ....................................................................................................6-3
RxGOOSE DPS inputs.............................................................................................................6-4
Teleprotection inputs ............................................................................................................6-4
Contact outputs.......................................................................................................................6-4
Virtual outputs..........................................................................................................................6-5
Autoreclose................................................................................................................................6-5
RxGOOSE status.......................................................................................................................6-5
RxGOOSE statistics.................................................................................................................6-5
Digital counters........................................................................................................................6-6
Selector switches ....................................................................................................................6-6
Flex States ..................................................................................................................................6-6
Ethernet.......................................................................................................................................6-7
Real time clock synchronizing ..........................................................................................6-7
Direct inputs ..............................................................................................................................6-8
Direct devices status .............................................................................................................6-8
EGD protocol status...............................................................................................................6-8
Teleprotection channel tests.............................................................................................6-9
Remaining connection status ...........................................................................................6-9
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) ............................................................................ 6-10
Metering ...........................................................................................................6-11
6.3.1
6.3.2
vi
Test mode function .......................................................................................................... 5-279
Test mode forcing............................................................................................................. 5-280
Force contact inputs ....................................................................................................... 5-281
Force contact outputs .................................................................................................... 5-281
Phasor measurement unit test values.................................................................... 5-282
Metering conventions ........................................................................................................ 6-11
Sources ..................................................................................................................................... 6-15
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.3.6
6.3.7
6.3.8
6.3.9
6.3.10
6.4
Records............................................................................................................. 6-22
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.5
7.1
8.1
9 MAINTENANCE
9.1
In-service maintenance ...................................................................................................... 9-1
Out-of-service maintenance............................................................................................. 9-1
Unscheduled maintenance (system interruption)................................................... 9-2
Back up and restore settings ......................................................................... 9-2
9.2.1
9.2.2
Back up settings ..................................................................................................................... 9-2
Restore settings ...................................................................................................................... 9-3
Upgrade firmware ............................................................................................ 9-4
Upgrade software............................................................................................. 9-5
Replace module ................................................................................................ 9-6
Battery ............................................................................................................... 9-7
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
A FLEXANALOG
OPERANDS
Fault type determination .................................................................................................... 8-1
General maintenance ...................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
Target messages .................................................................................................................... 7-6
Relay self-tests ........................................................................................................................ 7-7
Fault locator ...................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1
9.2
Virtual inputs ............................................................................................................................ 7-2
Clear records ............................................................................................................................ 7-2
Set date and time................................................................................................................... 7-3
Relay maintenance................................................................................................................ 7-3
Phasor Measurement Unit one-shot............................................................................. 7-4
Security ....................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Targets menu .................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.1
7.2.2
8 THEORY OF
OPERATION
Model information................................................................................................................6-25
Firmware revisions ..............................................................................................................6-25
Commands menu ............................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.1.6
7.2
Fault reports ...........................................................................................................................6-22
Event records .........................................................................................................................6-23
Oscillography .........................................................................................................................6-23
Data logger .............................................................................................................................6-23
Phasor Measurement Unit records..............................................................................6-24
Breaker maintenance.........................................................................................................6-24
Product information ...................................................................................... 6-25
6.5.1
6.5.2
7 COMMANDS AND
TARGETS
Synchrocheck.........................................................................................................................6-19
Tracking frequency..............................................................................................................6-20
FlexElements ..........................................................................................................................6-20
RxGOOSE analogs ................................................................................................................6-20
Sensitive directional power .............................................................................................6-21
Phasor Measurement Unit ...............................................................................................6-21
PMU aggregator ...................................................................................................................6-22
Transducer inputs/outputs ..............................................................................................6-22
Replace battery for RH/RL power supply.................................................................... 9-7
Replace battery for SH/SL power supply .................................................................... 9-8
Dispose of battery.................................................................................................................. 9-9
9.7
Clear files and data after uninstall ............................................................. 9-12
A.1
FlexAnalog items .............................................................................................A-1
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B RADIUS SERVER
CONFIGURATION
B.1
RADIUS server configuration .........................................................................B-1
C MISCELLANEOUS
C.1
C.2
Warranty ...........................................................................................................C-1
Revision history ...............................................................................................C-1
ABBREVIATIONS
INDEX
viii
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C60 Breaker Protection System
Chapter 1: Introduction
Introduction
This chapter outlines safety and technical support information.
1.1 Safety symbols and definitions
Before attempting to install or use the device, review all safety indicators in this document to help prevent injury,
equipment damage, or downtime.
The following safety and equipment symbols are used in this document.
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates practices not related to personal injury.
1.1.1 General cautions and warnings
The following general safety precautions and warnings apply.
DANGER
Ensure that all connections to the product are correct so as to avoid accidental risk of shock
and/or fire, for example such as can arise from high voltage connected to low voltage terminals.
Follow the requirements of this manual, including adequate wiring size and type, terminal torque settings, voltage,
current magnitudes applied, and adequate isolation/clearance in external wiring from high to low voltage circuits.
Use the device only for its intended purpose and application.
Ensure that all ground paths are uncompromised for safety purposes during device operation and service.
Ensure that the control power applied to the device, the AC current, and voltage input match the ratings specified on
the relay nameplate. Do not apply current or voltage in excess of the specified limits.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1-1
FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE
1
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Only qualified personnel are to operate the device. Such personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all safety
cautions and warnings in this manual and with applicable country, regional, utility, and plant safety regulations.
Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to current transformers, voltage
transformers, control, and test circuit terminals. Make sure all sources of such voltages are isolated prior to
attempting work on the device.
Hazardous voltages can exist when opening the secondary circuits of live current transformers. Make sure that
current transformer secondary circuits are shorted out before making or removing any connection to the current
transformer (CT) input terminals of the device.
For tests with secondary test equipment, ensure that no other sources of voltages or currents are connected to such
equipment and that trip and close commands to the circuit breakers or other switching apparatus are isolated,
unless this is required by the test procedure and is specified by appropriate utility/plant procedure.
When the device is used to control primary equipment, such as circuit breakers, isolators, and other switching
apparatus, all control circuits from the device to the primary equipment must be isolated while personnel are
working on or around this primary equipment to prevent any inadvertent command from this device.
Use an external disconnect to isolate the mains voltage supply.
CAUTION
NOTICE
LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) Class 1M. Class 1M
devices are considered safe to the unaided eye. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
This product is rated to Class A emissions levels and is to be used in Utility, Substation Industrial
environments. Not to be used near electronic devices rated for Class B levels.
1.2 For further assistance
For product support, contact the information and call center as follows:
GE Digital Energy
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
Worldwide telephone: +1 905 927 7070
Europe/Middle East/Africa telephone: +34 94 485 88 54
North America toll-free: 1 800 547 8629
Fax: +1 905 927 5098
Worldwide e-mail: multilin.tech@ge.com
Europe e-mail: multilin.tech.euro@ge.com
Website: http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin
1-2
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C60 Breaker Protection System
Chapter 2: Product description
Product description
This chapter outlines the product, order codes, and specifications.
2.1 Product description
2.1.1 Overview
The C60 Breaker Protection System is part of the Universal Relay (UR) series of products. It is a microprocessor-based relay
for breaker monitoring, control, and protection in electrical substations and industrial automation.
Voltage, current, and power metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total
waveform root mean square (RMS) magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor).
Diagnostic features include an event recorder capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events and oscillography capable of
storing up to 64 records with programmable trigger, content, and sampling rate. The internal clock used for time-tagging
can be synchronized with an IRIG-B signal, using the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) over the Ethernet port, or using
the Precision Time Protocol (PTP). The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized with an IRIG-B signal or via
the SNTP over the Ethernet port. This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be determined throughout
the system. Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic™ equations) to trigger oscillography data capture that can be
set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a computer. These tools significantly
reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a system fault.
Several options are available for communication. A faceplate RS232 port can be used to connect to a computer for the
programming of settings and the monitoring of actual values. The rear RS485 port allows independent access by operating
and engineering staff. It can be connected to system computers with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. All serial ports use the
Modbus RTU protocol. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is supported on the RS485 interface. IEC 60870-5-103, DNP, and
Modbus cannot be enabled simultaneously on this interface. Also only one of the DNP, IEC 60870-5-103, and IEC 60870-5104 protocols can be enabled at any time on the relay. When the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is chosen, the RS485 port has a
fixed even parity and the baud rate can be either 9.6 kbps or 19.2 kbps. The 100Base-FX or 100Base-TX Ethernet interface
provides fast, reliable communications in noisy environments. The Ethernet port supports IEC 61850, Modbus/TCP, TFTP,
and PTP (according to IEEE Std. 1588-2008 or IEC 61588), and it allows access to the relay via any standard web browser
(C60 web pages). The IEC 60870-5-104 protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. The Ethernet port also supports the
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) of IEC 62439-3 (clause 4, 2012) when purchased as an option.
Settings and actual values are accessible from the front panel or EnerVista software.
The C60 uses flash memory technology that allows field upgrading as new features are added. Firmware and software are
upgradable.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The following single-line diagram illustrates the relay functionality using American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
device numbers.
Table 2-1: ANSI device numbers and functions supported
2
Device
number
Function
Device
number
Function
25
Synchrocheck
50P BF
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent, Breaker
Failure
27P
Phase Undervoltage
51G
Ground Time Overcurrent
27X
Auxiliary Undervoltage
51N
Neutral Time Overcurrent
32
Sensitive Directional Power
51P
Phase Time Overcurrent
50DD
Disturbance Detector
52
AC Circuit Breaker
50G
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
59N
Neutral Overvoltage
50N
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent
59P
Phase Overvoltage
50N BF
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent, Breaker
Failure
59X
Auxiliary Overvoltage
50P
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent
79
Autoreclose
Figure 2-1: Single-line diagram
59N
50P
51P
Trip
52
50NBF
32
50BF
59X
27
25
27
25
27X
Close
Metering
79
Close
52
50P
51P
Transducer
input
FlexElementTM
Trip
50BF
50NBF
32
59N
C60 Breaker Protection System
834710AC.CDR
Table 2-2: Other device functions
Function
Function
Breaker Arcing Current (I2t)
Event Recorder
Function
Open Pole Detector
Breaker Control
DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104
Communications
Phasor Measurement Units (2, optional)
Breaker Flashover
Fault Detector and Fault Report
Setting Groups (6)
Breaker Restrike
FlexElements™ (8)
Time synchronization over IRIG-B or IEEE
1588
Contact Inputs (up to 96)
FlexLogic Equations
Time Synchronization over SNTP
Contact Outputs (up to 64)
IEC 60870-5-103 Communications
Transducer Inputs/Outputs
2-2
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SECURITY
Function
Function
Function
Control Pushbuttons
IEC 61850 Communications
User Definable Displays
CyberSentry™ Security
Metering: Current, Voltage, Power, Energy,
Frequency
User Programmable LEDs
Demand
Modbus Communications
User Programmable Self-Tests
Digital Counters (8)
Modbus User Map
Virtual Inputs (64)
Digital Elements (48)
Non-Volatile Latches
Virtual Outputs (96)
Direct Inputs/Outputs (32)
Non-Volatile Selector Switch
VT Fuse Failure
Disturbance Detection
Oscillography
Data Logger
User Programmable Pushbuttons
2
2.2 Security
The following security features are available:
•
Password security — Basic security present by default
•
EnerVista security — Role-based access to various EnerVista software screens and configuration elements. The
feature is present by default in the EnerVista software.
•
CyberSentry security — Advanced security available as a software option. When purchased, the options are
automatically enabled, and the default Password security and EnerVista security are disabled.
2.2.0.1 EnerVista security
The EnerVista security management system is a role-based access control (RBAC) system that allows an administrator to
manage the privileges of multiple users. This allows for access control of UR devices by multiple personnel within a
substation and conforms to the principles of RBAC as defined in ANSI INCITS 359-2004. The EnerVista security
management system is disabled by default to allow the administrator direct access to the EnerVista software after
installation. It is recommended that security be enabled before placing the device in service.
Basic password or enhanced CyberSentry security applies, depending on purchase.
2.2.0.2 Password security
Password security is a basic security feature present by default.
Two levels of password security are provided: command and setting. Use of a password for each level controls whether
users can enter commands and/or change settings.
The C60 supports password entry from a local or remote connection. Local access is defined as any access to settings or
commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote
access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet
and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality.
When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the
corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the C60, the remote password must be used. If the
connection is to the RS232 port of the faceplate, the local password applies.
Password access events are logged in the Event Recorder.
2.2.0.3 CyberSentry security
CyberSentry embedded security is a software option that provides advanced security services. When this option is
purchased, the basic password security is disabled automatically.
CyberSentry provides security through the following features:
•
An Authentication, Authorization, Accounting (AAA) Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) client that is
centrally managed, enables user attribution, provides accounting of all user activities, and uses secure standardsbased strong cryptography for authentication and credential protection
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-3
SECURITY
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
•
A Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) system that provides a permission model that allows access to UR device
operations and configurations based on specific roles and individual user accounts configured on the AAA server (that
is, Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, Observer roles)
•
Security event reporting through the Syslog protocol for supporting Security Information Event Management (SIEM)
systems for centralized cybersecurity monitoring
•
Strong encryption of all access and configuration network messages between the EnerVista software and UR devices
using the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol, the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), and 128-bit keys in Galois Counter
Mode (GCM) as specified in the U.S. National Security Agency Suite B extension for SSH and approved by the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) FIPS-140-2 standards for cryptographic systems
2
Example: Administrative functions can be segmented away from common operator functions, or engineering type access,
all of which are defined by separate roles (see figure) so that access of UR devices by multiple personnel within a
substation is allowed. Permissions for each role are outlined in the next section.
Figure 2-2: CyberSentry user roles
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Observer
Supervisor
842838A2.CDR
The following types of authentication are supported by CyberSentry to access the UR device:
•
Device Authentication (local UR device authenticates)
•
Server Authentication (RADIUS server authenticates)
The EnerVista software allows access to functionality that is determined by the user role, which comes either from the local
UR device or the RADIUS server.
The EnerVista software has a device authentication option on the login screen for accessing the UR device. When the
"Device" button is selected, the UR uses its local authentication database and not the RADIUS server to authenticate the
user. In this case, it uses its built-in roles (Administrator, Engineer, Supervisor, Observer, Operator) as login names and the
associated passwords are stored on the UR device. As such, when using the local accounts, access is not user-attributable.
In cases where user-attributable access is required especially to facilitate auditable processes for compliance reasons, use
RADIUS authentication only.
When the "Server" Authentication Type option is selected, the UR uses the RADIUS server and not its local authentication
database to authenticate the user.
No password or security information is displayed in plain text by the EnerVista software or UR device, nor is such
information ever transmitted without cryptographic protection.
CyberSentry user roles
CyberSentry user roles (Administrator, Engineer, Operator, Supervisor, Observer) limit the levels of access to various UR
device functions. This means that the EnerVista software allows for access to functionality based on the user’s logged in
role.
Example: Observer cannot write any settings.
The table lists user roles and their corresponding capabilities.
2-4
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SECURITY
Table 2-3: Permissions by user role for CyberSentry
Roles
Device Definition
Administrator
Engineer
Supervisor
Observer
Complete access Complete access Command
menu
except for
CyberSentry
Security
Authorizes
writing
Default role
R
R
R
R
Operator
R
2
Settings
|---------- Product Setup
|--------------- Security
(CyberSentry)
RW
R
R
R
R
|--------------- Supervisory
See table notes
R
R
See table
notes
R
|--------------- Display Properties
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Clear Relay Records
(settings)
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Communications
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Modbus User Map
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Real Time Clock
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Oscillography
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Data Logger
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Demand
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- User-Programmable RW
LEDs
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- User-Programmable RW
Self Tests
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Control Pushbuttons RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- User-Programmable RW
Pushbuttons
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Flex state
Parameters
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- User-Definable
Displays
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Direct I/O
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Teleprotection
RW
RW
R
R
R
R
RW
RW
R
R
|---------- System Setup
|--------------- Installation
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- FlexLogic
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- Grouped Elements
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- Control Elements
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- Inputs / Outputs
R
RW
RW
R
R
|--------------- Contact Inputs
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Contact Input
threshold
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Virtual Inputs
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Contact Outputs
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Virtual Outputs
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Resetting
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Direct Inputs
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Direct Outputs
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Teleprotection
RW
RW
R
R
R
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-5
ORDER CODES
Roles
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Supervisor
Observer
|--------------- Direct Analogs
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Direct Integers
2
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- Transducer I/O
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- Testing
RW
RW
R
R
R
NA
|---------- Front Panel Labels Designer
NA
NA
NA
NA
|---------- Protection Summary
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Commands
RW
RW
RW
R
R
|---------- Virtual Inputs
RW
RW
RW
R
R
|---------- Clear Records
RW
RW
RW
R
R
|---------- Set Date and Time
RW
RW
RW
R
R
User Displays
R
R
R
R
R
Targets
R
R
R
R
R
Actual Values
R
R
R
R
R
|---------- Front panel labels designer
R
R
R
R
R
|---------- Status
R
R
R
R
R
|---------- Metering
R
R
R
R
R
|---------- Transducer I/O
R
R
R
R
R
|---------- Records
R
R
R
R
R
|---------- Product Info
R
R
R
R
R
Maintenance
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- Modbus analyzer
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
|---------- Change front panel
RW
RW
RW
R
R
|---------- Update firmware
Yes
No
No
No
No
|---------- Retrieve file
Yes
No
No
No
No
Table Notes:
RW = read and write access
R = read access
Supervisor = RW (default), Administrator = R (default), Administrator = RW (only if Supervisor role is disabled)
NA = the permission is not enforced by CyberSentry security
CyberSentry server authentication
The UR has been designed to direct automatically the authentication requests based on user names. In this respect, local
account names on the UR are considered as reserved and not used on a RADIUS server.
The UR detects automatically whether an authentication request is to be handled remotely or locally. As there are five local
accounts possible on the UR, if the user ID credential does not match one of the five local accounts, the UR forwards
automatically the request to a RADIUS server when one is provided.
If a RADIUS server is provided, but is unreachable over the network, server authentication requests are denied. In this
situation, use local UR accounts to gain access to the UR system.
2.3 Order codes
The order code is on the product label and indicates the product options applicable.
The C60 is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount or reduced-size (¾) vertical unit. It consists of the following
modules: power supply, CPU, CT/VT, contact input and output, transducer input and output, and inter-relay
communications. Module options are specified at the time of ordering.
2-6
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ORDER CODES
The order codes shown here are subject to change without notice. See the ordering page at
http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/order.htm for the latest options.
The order code depends on the mounting option (horizontal or vertical) and the type of CT/VT modules (enhanced
diagnostic CT/VT modules or HardFiberTM process bus module). The process bus module provides an interface to
HardFiber Bricks.
2.3.1 Order codes with enhanced CT/VT modules
2
Table 2-4: C60 order codes for horizontal units
BASE UNIT
CPU
SOFTWARE
C60
C60
- *
|
T
U
V
**
|
|
|
|
00
01
03
04
14
15
A0
A1
A3
A4
AE
AF
B0
B1
B3
B4
BE
BF
C0
C1
C3
C4
CE
CF
D0
D1
D3
D4
DE
DF
E0
E1
E3
E4
EE
EF
F0
F1
F3
F4
FE
FF
G0
G1
G3
G4
GE
GF
J0
J1
J3
J4
JE
JF
K0
K1
K3
K4
KE
KF
L0
L1
L3
L4
LE
LF
M2
M9
MF
ML
MR
MX
N3
N9
NF
NL
NR
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- F **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- M **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- P **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
- U **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- W/X
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Full Size Horizontal Mount
Base Unit
RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 1 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 3 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
No software options
Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
IEC 61850
Ethernet Global Data and IEC 61850
Two Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs)
IEC 61850 and two PMUs
CyberSentry Lvl 1
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and two PMUs
CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588
IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588 and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
PRP and Ethernet Global Data
PRP and IEC 61850
PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP and two PMUs
PRP, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588 and PRP
IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103 and EGD
IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103, EGD, and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 60870-5-103
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, and EGD
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, EGD, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and EGD
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, EGD, and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
PRP + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
PRP + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
2-7
ORDER CODES
MOUNT/COATING
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
C60
- *
**
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
2
POWER SUPPLY
(redundant supply must
be same type as main supply)
- * *
H |
A |
C
D
R
A
P
G
S
B
K
M
Q
U
L
N
T
V
W
Y
I
J
ENHANCED DIAGNOSTICS CT/VT DSP
(requires all DSPs to be enhanced diagnostic)
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
* - F **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
|
H
|
L
|
L
|
8L
8M
8N
8R
- H
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
(select a maximum of 3 per unit)
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
(select a maximum of 1 per unit)
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- M **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8L
8M
8N
8R
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- P **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- U **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- W/X
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RH
|
RL
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
2A
2B
2G
2H
2I
2J
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
Full Size Horizontal Mount
Horizontal (19” rack)
Horizontal (19” rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
Chinese display
English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with German display
Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
No module
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 Contact inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA inputs
8 DCmA inputs
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode Laser
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
Table 2-5: C60 order codes for reduced-size vertical units
BASE UNIT
CPU
SOFTWARE
2-8
C60
C60
- *
|
T
U
V
**
|
|
|
|
00
01
03
04
14
15
A0
A1
A3
A4
AE
AF
B0
B1
B3
B4
BE
BF
C0
C1
C3
C4
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- F **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- M **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- P/R
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
Base Unit
RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 1 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 3 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
No software options
Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
IEC 61850
Ethernet Global Data and IEC 61850
Two Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs)
IEC 61850 and two PMUs
CyberSentry Lvl 1
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and two PMUs
CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588
IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588 and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
PRP and Ethernet Global Data
PRP and IEC 61850
PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
C60
- *
MOUNT/COATING
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
**
CE
CF
D0
D1
D3
D4
DE
DF
E0
E1
E3
E4
EE
EF
F0
F1
F3
F4
FE
FF
G0
G1
G3
G4
GE
GF
J0
J1
J3
J4
JE
JF
K0
K1
K3
K4
KE
KF
L0
L1
L3
L4
LE
LF
M2
M9
MF
ML
MR
MX
N3
N9
NF
NL
NR
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
V
B
POWER SUPPLY
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
F
K
M
Q
U
L
N
T
V
W
Y
I
J
ENHANCED DIAGNOSTICS CT/VT DSP
(requires all DSPs to be enhanced diagnostic)
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
(select a maximum of 3 per unit)
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
(select a maximum of 1 per unit)
For the last module, slot P is used for digital
input/output modules; slot R is used for inter-relay
communications modules.
* - F **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
|
L
|
8L
8M
8N
8R
ORDER CODES
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- M **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8L
8M
8N
8R
|
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- P/R
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
2A
2B
2G
2H
2I
2J
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
PRP and two PMUs
PRP, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588 and PRP
IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103 and EGD
IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103, EGD, and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 60870-5-103
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, and EGD
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, EGD, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and EGD
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, EGD, and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
PRP + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
PRP + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
Vertical (3/4 rack)
Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with German display
Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
No module
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 Contact inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA inputs
8 DCmA inputs
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode Laser
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode
2
2-9
ORDER CODES
C60
2
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
- *
**
- *
*
*
- F **
- H
**
- M **
- P/R
**
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
2.3.2 Order codes with process bus modules
Table 2-6: C60 order codes for horizontal units with process bus
BASE UNIT
CPU
SOFTWARE
2-10
C60
C60
- *
|
T
U
V
**
|
|
|
|
00
01
03
04
14
15
A0
A1
A3
A4
AE
AF
B0
B1
B3
B4
BE
BF
C0
C1
C3
C4
CE
CF
D0
D1
D3
D4
DE
DF
E0
E1
E3
E4
EE
EF
F0
F1
F3
F4
FE
FF
G0
G1
G3
G4
GE
GF
J0
J1
J3
J4
JE
JF
K0
K1
K3
K4
KE
KF
L0
L1
L3
L4
LE
LF
M2
M9
MF
ML
MR
MX
N3
N9
NF
NL
NR
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- F **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- M **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- P **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- U **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- W/X
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Full Size Horizontal Mount
Base Unit
RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 1 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 3 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
No software options
Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
IEC 61850
Ethernet Global Data and IEC 61850
Two Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs)
IEC 61850 and two PMUs
CyberSentry Lvl 1
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and two PMUs
CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588
IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588 and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
PRP and Ethernet Global Data
PRP and IEC 61850
PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP and two PMUs
PRP, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588 and PRP
IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103 and EGD
IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103, EGD, and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 60870-5-103
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, and EGD
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, EGD, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and EGD
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, EGD, and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
PRP + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
PRP + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + two PMUs + 61850-90-5
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MOUNT/COATING
C60
- *
**
FACEPLATE/
DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY
(redundant supply must
be same type as main supply)
- * *
H |
A |
C
D
R
A
P
G
S
B
K
M
Q
U
L
N
T
V
W
Y
I
J
PROCESS BUS MODULE
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
* - F **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
|
H
|
L
|
L
|
XX
|
ORDER CODES
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
81
- M **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
|
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
(select a maximum of 1 per unit)
- P **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
- U **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
- W/X
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RH
|
RL
|
|
XX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2A
2B
2G
2H
2I
2J
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
Full Size Horizontal Mount
Horizontal (19” rack)
Horizontal (19” rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
Chinese display
English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with German display
Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
None
Eight-port digital process bus module
None
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 Contact inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode Laser
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
Table 2-7: C60 order codes for reduced-size vertical units with process bus
BASE UNIT
CPU
SOFTWARE
C60
C60
- *
|
T
U
V
**
|
|
|
|
00
01
03
04
14
15
A0
A1
A3
A4
AE
AF
B0
B1
B3
B4
BE
BF
C0
C1
C3
C4
CE
CF
D0
D1
D3
D4
DE
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- F **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- M **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- P/R
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
Base Unit
RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 1 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 3 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
No software options
Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
IEC 61850
Ethernet Global Data and IEC 61850
Two Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs)
IEC 61850 and two PMUs
CyberSentry Lvl 1
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and two PMUs
CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588
IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588 and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
PRP and Ethernet Global Data
PRP and IEC 61850
PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP and two PMUs
PRP, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
2-11
2
ORDER CODES
C60
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
- *
2
MOUNT/COATING
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY
PROCESS BUS MODULE
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
**
DF
E0
E1
E3
E4
EE
EF
F0
F1
F3
F4
FE
FF
G0
G1
G3
G4
GE
GF
J0
J1
J3
J4
JE
JF
K0
K1
K3
K4
KE
KF
L0
L1
L3
L4
LE
LF
M2
M9
MF
ML
MR
MX
N3
N9
NF
NL
NR
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
V
B
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
F
K
M
Q
U
L
N
T
V
W
Y
I
J
* - F **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
|
L
|
XX
|
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
(select a maximum of 1 per unit)
For the last module, slot P is used for digital and transducer
input/output modules; slot R is used for inter-relay
communications modules.
2-12
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
81
- M **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
|
- P/R
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
2A
2B
2G
2H
2I
2J
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588 and PRP
IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103 and EGD
IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103, EGD, and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 60870-5-103
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, and EGD
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, EGD, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, and two PMUs
IEEE 1588, PRP, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and EGD
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, EGD, and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and two PMUs
IEC 60870-5-103, IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, IEC 61850, and two PMUs
IEC 61850 + 2 x PMU + 61850-90-5
CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + 2 x PMU + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + IEC 61850 + 2 x PMU + 61850-90-5
PRP + IEC 61850 + 2 x PMU + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + 2 x PMU + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 61850 + 2 x PMU + 61850-90-5
PRP + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + 2 x PMU + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + 2 x PMU + 61850-90-5
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850 + 2 x PMU + 61850-90-5
IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850 + 2 x PMU + 61850-90-5
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry UR Lvl 1 + IEC 61850 + 2 x PMU + 61850-90-5
Vertical (3/4 rack)
Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with German display
Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
None
Eight-port digital process bus module
None
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 Contact inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode Laser
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
C60
- *
**
- *
*
*
- F **
ORDER CODES
- H
**
- M **
- P/R
**
7W
Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
RS422, 2 Channels
2.3.3 Replacement modules
Replacement modules can be ordered separately. When ordering a replacement CPU module or faceplate, provide the
serial number of your existing unit.
Not all replacement modules apply to the C60 relay. The modules specified in the order codes for the C60 are available as
replacement modules for the C60.
The order codes shown here are subject to change without notice. See the ordering page at
http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/order.htm for the latest options.
Table 2-8: UR order codes for replacement modules, horizontal units
UR
POWER SUPPLY (redundant supply only available in
|
horizontal units and must be same type as main supply) |
CPU
|
|
|
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CT/VT MODULES
|
|
(not available for the C30)
|
|
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
|
|
|
|
|
- **
SH
RL
T
U
V
3C
3D
3R
3A
3P
3G
3S
3B
3K
3M
3Q
3U
3L
3N
3T
3V
3I
3J
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
8L
8N
8M
8R
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
2I
2J
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- *
A |
H |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
125 / 300 V AC/DC
24 to 48 V (DC only)
RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 1 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 3 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and English display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and French display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Russian display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Chinese display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and English display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and French display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Russian display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with German display
Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 Contact inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
Bi-phase, single channel
Bi-phase, dual channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode Laser
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
4 DCmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
8 DCmA inputs
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-13
2
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Table 2-9: UR order codes for replacement modules, vertical units
POWER SUPPLY
CPU
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY
2
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CT/VT MODULES
(not available for the C30)
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
UR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- **
SH
RL
T
U
V
3F
3D
3R
3A
3K
3M
3Q
3U
3L
3N
3T
3V
3I
3J
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
8F
8G
8H
8L
8N
8V
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
2I
2J
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- *
B |
V |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
125 / 300 V AC/DC
24 to 48 V (DC only)
RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 1 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 3 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
Vertical faceplate with keypad and English display
Vertical faceplate with keypad and French display
Vertical faceplate with keypad and Russian display
Vertical faceplate with keypad and Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with German display
Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 Contact inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
Standard 4CT/4VT
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
Standard 8VT with enhanced diagnostics
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
Bi-phase, single channel
Bi-phase, dual channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode Laser
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
4 DCmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
8 DCmA inputs
2.4 Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
2.4.1 Protection elements
The operating times include the activation time of a trip rated form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated. FlexLogic
operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. Take this into account when using FlexLogic to interconnect with other
protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic equations, or interfacing with other intelligent electronic
devices (IEDs) or power system devices via communications or different output contacts. If not specified, the operate times
given here are for a 60 Hz system at nominal system frequency. Operate times for a 50 Hz system are 1.2 times longer.
2-14
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC
Current:
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
Level accuracy:
for 0.1 to 2.0  CT:
for > 2.0  CT:
Curve shapes:
Phasor or RMS
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
97% to 98% of pickup
±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated (whichever is greater)
±1.5% of reading > 2.0  CT rating
IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short Inverse; GE IAC Inverse,
Short/Very/ Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves™ (programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s base
curve)
Curve multiplier:
Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset type:
Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE)
Curve timing accuracy at 1.03 to 20 x pickup:
±3.5% of operate time or ±½ cycle (whichever is greater) from pickup to operate
Voltage restraint:
Modifies pickup current for voltage in the range of 0.1 < V < 0.9 VT Nominal in a fixed linear relationship
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
Level accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0  CT rating:
> 2.0  CT rating:
Overreach:
Pickup delay:
Reset delay:
Operate time:
Timer accuracy:
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
97 to 98% of pickup
±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated (whichever is greater)
±1.5% of reading
<2%
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
<16 ms at 3  pickup at 60 Hz (Phase/Ground IOC)
<20 ms at 3  pickup at 60 Hz (Neutral IOC)
±3% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater)
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
Measured power:
Number of stages:
Characteristic angle:
Calibration angle:
Minimum power:
Pickup level accuracy:
Hysteresis:
Pickup delay:
Timer accuracy:
Operate time:
3-phase, true RMS
2
0 to 359° in steps of 1
0.00 to 0.95° in steps of 0.05
–1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001
±1% or ±0.001 pu, whichever is greater
2% or 0.001 pu, whichever is greater
0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
±3% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater)
<50 ms
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
Level accuracy:
Curve shapes:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
102 to 103% of pickup
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
GE IAV Inverse;
Definite Time (0.1s base curve)
Curve multiplier:
Time dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Curve timing accuracy at <0.90 x pickup:
±3.5% of operate time or ±1/2 cycle (whichever is greater) from pickup to operate
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
Level accuracy:
Curve shapes:
Curve multiplier:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
102 to 103% of pickup
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
GE IAV Inverse, Definite Time
Time Dial = 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-15
2
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Curve timing accuracy at <0.90 x pickup:
±3.5% of operate time or ±1/2 cycle (whichever is greater) from pickup to operate
PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
2
Voltage:
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
Level accuracy:
Pickup delay:
Operate time:
Timer accuracy:
Phasor only
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
97 to 98% of pickup
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s
30 ms at 1.10  pickup at 60 Hz
±3% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater)
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
Level accuracy:
Pickup delay:
Reset delay:
Curve timing accuracy at >1.1 x pickup:
Operate time:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
97 to 98% of pickup
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 (definite time) or user-defined curve
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
±3.5% of operate time or ±1 cycle (whichever is greater) from pickup to operate
30 ms at 1.10  pickup at 60 Hz
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
Level accuracy:
Pickup delay:
Reset delay:
Timer accuracy:
Operate time:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
97 to 98% of pickup
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
±3% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater)
30 ms at 1.10  pickup at 60 Hz
BREAKER FAILURE
Mode:
Current supervision:
Current supv. pickup:
Current supv. dropout:
Current supv. accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0  CT rating:
above 2  CT rating:
BREAKER ARCING CURRENT
Principle:
Initiation:
Compensation for auxiliary relays:
Alarm threshold:
Fault duration accuracy:
Availability:
1-pole, 3-pole
phase, neutral current
0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
97 to 98% of pickup
±0.75% of reading or ±2% of rated (whichever is greater)
±2.5% of reading
accumulates breaker duty (I2t) and measures fault duration
programmable per phase from any FlexLogic operand
0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1
0.25 of a power cycle
1 per CT bank with a minimum of 2
BREAKER FLASHOVER
Operating quantity:
Pickup level voltage:
Dropout level voltage:
Pickup level current:
Dropout level current:
Level accuracy:
Pickup delay:
Timer accuracy:
Operate time:
2-16
phase current, voltage, and voltage difference
0 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001
97 to 98% of pickup
0 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001
97 to 98% of pickup
±0.5% or ±0.1% of rated, whichever is greater
0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
±3% of operate time or ±42 ms, whichever is greater
<42 ms at 1.10  pickup at 60 Hz
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
BREAKER RESTRIKE
Principle:
Availability:
Pickup level:
Reset delay:
detection of high-frequency overcurrent condition ¼ cycle after breaker opens
one per CT/VT module (not including 8Z modules)
0.1 to 2.00 pu in steps of 0.01
0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
SYNCHROCHECK
Max voltage difference:
Max angle difference:
Max freq. difference:
Hysteresis for max. freq. diff.:
Dead source function:
0 to 400000 V in steps of 1
0 to 100° in steps of 1
0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01
None, LV1 & DV2, DV1 & LV2, DV1 or DV2, DV1 xor DV2, DV1 & DV2 (L = Live, D = Dead)
2
AUTORECLOSURE
Two breakers applications
Single- and three-pole tripping schemes
Up to four reclose attempts before lockout
Selectable reclosing mode and breaker sequence
OPEN POLE DETECTOR
Functionality:
Current pickup level:
Line capacitive reactances (XC1, XC0):
Remote current pickup level:
Current dropout level:
Detects an open pole condition, monitoring breaker auxiliary contacts, the current in each
phase, and optional voltages on the line
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
300.0 to 9999.9 sec.  in steps of 0.1
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
pickup + 3%, not less than 0.05 pu
THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
Thermal overload curves:
Base current:
Overload (k) factor:
Trip time constant:
Reset time constant:
Minimum reset time:
Timer accuracy (cold curve):
Timer accuracy (hot curve):
IEC 255-8 curve
0.20 to 3.00 pu in steps of 0.01
1.00 to 1.20 pu in steps of 0.05
0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1
0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1
0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1
±100 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
±500 ms or 2%, whichever is greater for Ip < 0.9 × k × Ib and I / (k × Ib) > 1.1
TRIP BUS (TRIP WITHOUT FLEXLOGIC)
Number of elements:
Number of inputs:
Operate time:
Timer accuracy:
6
16
<2 ms at 60 Hz
±3% or 10 ms, whichever is greater
2.4.2 User-programmable elements
FLEXLOGIC
Programming language:
Lines of code:
Internal variables:
Supported operations:
Inputs:
Number of timers:
Pickup delay:
Dropout delay:
Reverse Polish Notation with graphical visualization (keypad programmable)
512
64
NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs), NAND (2 to 16 inputs),
latch (reset-dominant), edge detectors, timers
any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
32
0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-17
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
FLEXCURVES™
Number:
Reset points:
Operate points:
Time delay:
4 (A through D)
40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
FLEX STATES
2
Number:
Programmability:
up to 256 logical variables grouped under 16 Modbus addresses
any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
FLEXELEMENTS™
Number of elements:
Operating signal:
Operating signal mode:
Operating mode:
Comparator direction:
Pickup Level:
Hysteresis:
Delta dt:
Pickup and dropout delay:
8
any analog actual value, or two values in differential mode
signed or absolute value
level, delta
over, under
–90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
20 ms to 60 days
0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Type:
Number:
Output:
Execution sequence:
set-dominant or reset-dominant
16 (individually programmed)
stored in non-volatile memory
as input prior to protection, control, and FlexLogic
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
Number:
Programmability:
Reset mode:
48 plus trip and alarm
from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
self-reset or latched
LED TEST
Initiation:
Number of tests:
Duration of full test:
Test sequence 1:
Test sequence 2:
Test sequence 3:
from any contact input or user-programmable condition
3, interruptible at any time
approximately 3 minutes
all LEDs on
all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s
all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
Number of displays:
Lines of display:
Parameters:
Invoking and scrolling:
16
2  20 alphanumeric characters
up to 5, any Modbus register addresses
keypad, or any user-programmable condition, including pushbuttons
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons:
Operation:
7
drive FlexLogic operands
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)
Number of pushbuttons:
Mode:
Display message:
Drop-out timer:
Autoreset timer:
Hold timer:
2-18
12 (standard faceplate);
16 (enhanced faceplate)
self-reset, latched
2 lines of 20 characters each
0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
SELECTOR SWITCH
Number of elements:
Upper position limit:
Selecting mode:
Time-out timer:
Control inputs:
Power-up mode:
2
1 to 7 in steps of 1
time-out or acknowledge
3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
step-up and 3-bit
restore from non-volatile memory or synchronize to a 3-bit control input or synch/restore mode
2
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
Number of elements:
Operating signal:
Pickup delay:
Dropout delay:
Timing accuracy:
48
any FlexLogic operand
0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
±3% or ±4 ms, whichever is greater
2.4.3 Monitoring
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Maximum records:
Sampling rate:
Triggers:
Data:
Data storage:
64
64 samples per power cycle
any element pickup, dropout, or operate; contact input change of state; contact output change
of state; FlexLogic equation
AC input channels; element state; contact input state; contact output state
in non-volatile memory
EVENT RECORDER
Capacity:
Time-tag:
Triggers:
Data storage:
1024 events
to 1 microsecond
any element pickup, dropout, or operate; contact input change of state; contact output change
of state; self-test events
in non-volatile memory
DATA LOGGER
Number of channels:
Parameters:
Sampling rate:
Trigger:
Mode:
Storage capacity:
1 to 16
any available analog actual value
15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1
any FlexLogic operand
continuous or triggered
(NN is dependent on memory)
1-second rate:
01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days

60-minute rate:
01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days
FAULT LOCATOR
Method:
Voltage source:
Maximum accuracy if:
Relay accuracy:
Worst-case accuracy:
VT%error +
CT%error +
ZLine%error +
single-ended
wye-connected VTs, delta-connected VTs and neutral voltage, delta-connected VTs and zerosequence current (approximation)
fault resistance is zero or fault currents from all line terminals are in phase
±1.5% (V > 10 V, I > 0.1 pu)
user data
user data
user data
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-19
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
RELAY ACCURACY%error + (1.5%)
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
2
Output format:
Number of channels:
TVE (total vector error):
Triggering:
Reporting rate:
Number of clients:
AC ranges:
Network reporting format:
Network reporting style:
Post-filtering:
Calibration:
per IEEE C37.118 or IEC 61850-90-5 standard
14 synchrophasors, 8 analogs, 16 digitals
<1%
frequency, voltage, current, power, rate of change of frequency, user-defined
1, 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per second for P and M class, and 100 or 120 times
per second for P class only
one over TCP/IP port and one over UDP/IP per aggregator
as indicated in appropriate specification sections
16-bit integer (for IEEE C37.118) or 32-bit IEEE floating point numbers
rectangular (real and imaginary for IEEE C37.188) or polar (magnitude and angle) coordinates
none, 3-point, 5-point, 7-point
±5° (angle) and ±5% (magnitude)
2.4.4 Metering
RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND
Accuracy at
0.1 to 2.0  CT rating:
2.0  CT rating:
±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated (whichever is greater)
±1.0% of reading
RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy:
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
REAL POWER (WATTS)
Accuracy at 0.1 to 1.5 x CT rating and 0.8 to 1.2 x VT rating:
±1.0% of reading at –1.0  PF < –0.8 and 0.8 < PF 10
REACTIVE POWER (VARS)
Accuracy at 0.1 to 1.5 x CT rating and 0.8 to 1.2 x VT rating:
±1.0% of reading at –0.2  PF  0.2
APPARENT POWER (VA)
Accuracy at 0.1 to 1.5 x CT rating and 0.8 to 1.2 x VT rating:
±1.0% of reading
WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)
Accuracy:
Range:
Parameters:
Update rate:
±2.0% of reading
±0 to 1  106 MWh
three-phase only
50 ms
VAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)
Accuracy:
Range:
Parameters:
Update rate:
±2.0% of reading
±0 to 1  106 Mvarh
three-phase only
50 ms
FREQUENCY
Accuracy at
V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu:
I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu:
I > 0.25 pu:
2-20
±0.01 Hz (when voltage signal is used for frequency measurement)
±0.05 Hz
±0.02 Hz (when current signal is used for frequency measurement)
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
DEMAND
Measurements:
Accuracy:
Phases A, B, and C present and maximum measured currents
3-Phase Power (P, Q, and S) present and maximum measured currents
±2.0%
2.4.5 Inputs
2
AC CURRENT
CT rated primary:
CT rated secondary:
Relay burden:
Conversion range:
Standard CT:
Sensitive Ground CT module:
Current withstand:
Short circuit rating:
1 to 50000 A
1 A or 5 A by connection
< 0.2 VA at rated secondary
0.02 to 46  CT rating RMS symmetrical
0.002 to 4.6  CT rating RMS symmetrical
20 ms at 250 times rated
1 sec at 100 times rated
continuous 4xInom
150000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 250 V maximum (primary current to external CT)
AC VOLTAGE
VT rated secondary:
VT ratio:
Relay burden:
Conversion range:
Voltage withstand:
50.0 to 240.0 V
1.00 to 24000.00
< 0.25 VA at 120 V
1 to 275 V
continuous at 260 V to neutral
1 min/hr at 420 V to neutral
FREQUENCY
Nominal frequency setting:
Sampling frequency:
Tracking frequency range:
CONTACT INPUTS
Dry contacts:
Wet contacts:
Selectable thresholds:
Tolerance:
Contacts per common return:
Recognition time:
Debounce time:
Continuous current draw:
25 to 60 Hz
64 samples per power cycle
20 to 70 Hz
1000  maximum
300 V DC maximum
17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
±10%
4
< 1 ms
0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
4 mA (when energized)
CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING
Dry contacts:
Wet contacts:
Selectable thresholds:
Tolerance:
Contacts per common return:
Recognition time:
Debounce time:
Continuous current draw:
Auto-burnish impulse current:
Duration of auto-burnish impulse:
1000  maximum
300 V DC maximum
17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
±10%
2
< 1 ms
0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
4 mA (when energized)
50 to 70 mA
25 to 50 ms
DCMA INPUTS
Current input (mA DC):
Input impedance:
0 to –1, 0 to +1, –1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable)
379 ±10%
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-21
SPECIFICATIONS
Conversion range:
Accuracy:
Type:
RTD INPUTS
2
Types (3-wire):
Sensing current:
Range:
Accuracy:
Isolation:
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
–1 to + 20 mA DC
±0.2% of full scale
Passive
100 Platinum, 100 and 120 Nickel, 10 Copper
5 mA
–50 to +250°C
±2°C
36 V pk-pk
IRIG-B INPUT
Amplitude modulation:
DC shift:
Input impedance:
Isolation:
1 to 10 V pk-pk
TTL–Compatible
50 k
2 kV
DIRECT INPUTS
Input points:
Remote devices:
Default states on loss of comms.:
Ring configuration:
Data rate:
CRC:
CRC alarm:
Responding to:
Monitoring message count:
Alarm threshold:
Unreturned message alarm:
Responding to:
Monitoring message count:
Alarm threshold:
32
16
On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Yes, No
64 or 128 kbps
32-bit
Rate of messages failing the CRC
10 to 10000 in steps of 1
1 to 1000 in steps of 1
Rate of unreturned messages in the ring configuration
10 to 10000 in steps of 1
1 to 1000 in steps of 1
TELEPROTECTION
Input points:
Remote devices:
Default states on loss of comms.:
Ring configuration:
Data rate:
CRC:
16
3
On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
No
64 or 128 kbps
32-bit
2.4.6 Power supply
LOW RANGE
Nominal DC voltage:
Minimum DC voltage:
Maximum DC voltage:
Voltage loss hold-up:
NOTE: Low range is DC only.
24 to 48 V
20 V
60 V for RL power supply module, 75 V for SL power supply module
200 ms duration at maximum load
HIGH RANGE
Nominal DC voltage:
Minimum DC voltage:
Maximum DC voltage:
Nominal AC voltage:
Minimum AC voltage:
Maximum AC voltage:
2-22
125 to 250 V
88 V
300 V
100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz
88 V at 25 to 100 Hz
265 V at 25 to 100 Hz
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Voltage loss hold-up:
ALL RANGES
Volt withstand:
Power consumption:
SPECIFICATIONS
200 ms duration at maximum load
2  Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms
typical = 15 to 20 W/VA
maximum = 45 W/VA
contact factory for exact order code consumption
INTERNAL FUSE
Ratings:
Low range power supply:
High range power supply:
Interrupting capacity:
AC:
DC:
2
8 A / 250 V
4 A / 250 V
100 000 A RMS symmetrical
10 000 A
2.4.7 Outputs
FORM-A RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s:
Carry continuous:
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):
Voltage
Current
24 V
1A
48 V
0.5 A
125 V
0.3 A
250 V
0.2 A
Operate time:
Contact material:
30 A as per ANSI C37.90
6A
< 4 ms
silver alloy
LATCHING RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s:
30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Carry continuous:
6 A as per IEEE C37.90
Break (DC resistive as per IEC61810-1):
Voltage
Current
24 V
6A
48 V
1.6 A
125 V
0.4 A
250 V
0.2 A
Operate time:
Contact material:
Control:
Control mode:
< 4 ms
silver alloy
separate operate and reset inputs
operate-dominant or reset-dominant
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
Applicable voltage:
Trickle current:
approx. 15 to 250 V DC
approx. 1 to 2.5 mA
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR
Threshold current:
approx. 80 to 100 mA
FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s:
30 A as per ANSI C37.90
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-23
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Carry continuous:
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):
2
Voltage
Current
24 V
1A
48 V
0.5 A
125 V
0.3 A
250 V
0.2 A
8A
Operate time:
Contact material:
< 8 ms
silver alloy
FAST FORM-C RELAY
Make and carry:
Minimum load impedance:
0.1 A max. (resistive load)
Input voltage Impedance
2 W Resistor
1 W Resistor
250 V DC
20 K
50 K
120 V DC
5 K
2 K
48 V DC
2 K
2 K
24 V DC
2 K
2 K
Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a
required 95% voltage drop across the load
impedance.
Operate time:
Internal Limiting Resistor:
SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY
Operate and release time:
Maximum voltage:
Maximum continuous current:
Make and carry:
for 0.2 s:
for 0.03 s:
Breaking capacity:
Operations/
interval
<100 s
265 V DC
5 A at 45°C; 4 A at 65°C
30 A as per ANSI C37.90
300 A
UL 508
Utility application
Industrial application
(autoreclose scheme)
5000 ops /
1 s-On, 9 s-Off
5 ops /
0.2 s-On, 0.2 s-Off
within 1 minute
10000 ops /0.2 s-On,
30 s-Off
10 A
L/R = 40 ms
10 A
L/R = 40 ms
1000 ops /
0.5 s-On, 0.5 s-Off
Break capability
(0 to 250 V DC)
< 0.6 ms
100  2 W
3.2 A
L/R = 10 ms
1.6 A
L/R = 20 ms
0.8 A
L/R = 40 ms
CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT (FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)
Capacity:
Isolation:
100 mA DC at 48 V DC
±300 Vpk
DIRECT OUTPUTS
Output points:
2-24
32
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
DCMA OUTPUTS
Range:
Max. load resistance:
–1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
12 k for –1 to 1 mA range
12 k for 0 to 1 mA range
600  for 4 to 20 mA range
Accuracy:
±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range
±0.5% of full-scale for –1 to 1 mA range
±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 20 mA range
99% Settling time to a step change:
100 ms
Isolation:
1.5 kV
Driving signal:
any FlexAnalog quantity
Upper and lower limit for the driving signal: –90 to 90 pu in steps of 0.001
2
2.4.8 Communication protocols
IEC 61850
IEC 61850:
Supports IEC 61850 Edition 2.0. See the UR Series Communications Guide and its conformance
statements.
RS232
Front port:
19.2 or 115.2 kbps, Modbus RTU
RS485
1 rear port:
Typical distance:
Isolation:
up to 115 kbps, Modbus RTU, DNP 3, IEC 60870-5-103
1200 m
2 kV, isolated together at 36 Vpk
ETHERNET (FIBER)
Parameter
Fiber type
100 Mb multimode
Wavelength
1310 nm
Connector
LC
Transmit power
–20 dBm
Receiver sensitivity
–30 dBm
Power budget
10 dB
Maximum input power
–14 dBm
Typical distance
2 km
Duplex
full/half
Redundancy
yes
ETHERNET (10/100 MB TWISTED PAIR)
Modes:
Connector:
10 Mb, 10/100 Mb (auto-detect)
RJ45
SIMPLE NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL (SNTP)
Clock synchronization error:
<10 ms (typical)
PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (PTP)
PTP IEEE Std 1588 2008 (version 2)
Power Profile (PP) per IEEE Standard PC37.238TM2011
Slave-only ordinary clock
Peer delay measurement mechanism
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-25
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP)
(IEC 62439-3 CLAUSE 4, 2012)
Ethernet ports used:
Networks supported:
2 and 3
10/100 Mb Ethernet
OTHER
TFTP, SFTP, HTTP, IEC 60870-5-104, Ethernet Global Data (EGD), IEEE C37.118
2
2.4.9 Inter-relay communications
SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS
Interface type
Typical distance
RS422
1200 m
G.703
100 m
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power and does not take into consideration the clock source provided
by the user.
NOTE
LINK POWER BUDGET
Emitter, fiber type
Transmit
power
Received
sensitivity
Power
budget
820 nm LED, Multimode
–20 dBm
–30 dBm
10 dB
1300 nm LED, Multimode
–21 dBm
–30 dBm
9 dB
1300 nm ELED, Single mode
–23 dBm
–32 dBm
9 dB
1300 nm Laser, Single mode
–1 dBm
–30 dBm
29 dB
1550 nm Laser, Single mode
+5 dBm
–30 dBm
35 dB
NOTE
These power budgets are calculated from the manufacturer’s worst-case transmitter power and worst case
receiver sensitivity.
The power budgets for the 1300 nm ELED are calculated from the manufacturer's transmitter power and
receiver sensitivity at ambient temperature. At extreme temperatures these values deviate based on
component tolerance. On average, the output power decreases as the temperature is increased by a factor
1 dB / 5 °C.
MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER
Emitter, fiber type
Maximum optical
input power
820 nm LED, Multimode
–7.6 dBm
1300 nm LED, Multimode
–11 dBm
1300 nm ELED, Single mode
–14 dBm
1300 nm Laser, Single mode
–14 dBm
1550 nm Laser, Single mode
–14 dBm
2-26
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE
Emitter, fiber type
Cable type
Connector
type
Typical
distance
820 nm LED,
multimode
62.5/125 μm
ST
1.65 km
1300 nm LED,
multimode
62.5/125 μm
ST
3.8 km
1300 nm ELED,
single mode
9/125 μm
ST
11.4 km
1300 nm Laser,
single mode
9/125 μm
ST
64 km
1550 nm Laser,
single mode
9/125 μm
ST
105 km
2
Typical distances listed are based on the following assumptions for system loss. As actual losses vary from one
installation to another, the distance covered by your system can vary.
NOTE
CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)
ST connector:
2 dB
FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode:
1300 nm multimode:
1300 nm single mode:
1550 nm single mode:
Splice losses:
3 dB/km
1 dB/km
0.35 dB/km
0.25 dB/km
one splice every 2 km at 0.05 dB loss per splice
SYSTEM MARGIN
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for all other losses.
Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
2.4.10 Environmental
AMBIENT TEMPERATURES
Storage temperature:
Operating temperature:
–40 to 85°C
–40 to 60°C; the LCD contrast can be impaired at temperatures less than –20°C
HUMIDITY
Humidity:
operating up to 95% (non-condensing) at 55°C (as per IEC60068-2-30 variant 1, 6 days)
OTHER
Altitude:
Pollution degree:
Overvoltage category:
Ingress protection:
2000 m (maximum)
II
II
IP20 front, IP10 back
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-27
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.4.11 Type tests
C60 TYPE TESTS
Test
2
Reference standard
Test level
Dielectric voltage withstand
EN 60255-5
2.2 kV
Impulse voltage withstand
EN 60255-5
5 kV
Damped oscillatory
IEC 61000-4-18 / IEC 60255-22-1
2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 / IEC 60255-22-2
Level 3
RF immunity
EN 61000-4-3 / IEC 60255-22-3
Level 3
Fast transient disturbance
EN 61000-4-4 / IEC 60255-22-4
Class A and B
Surge immunity
EN 61000-4-5 / IEC 60255-22-5
Level 3 and 4
Conducted RF immunity
EN 61000-4-6 / IEC 60255-22-6
Level 3
Power frequency immunity
EN 61000-4-7 / IEC 60255-22-7
Class A and B
Voltage interruption and ripple DC
IEC 60255-11
12% ripple, 200 ms interrupts
Radiated and conducted emissions
CISPR11 / CISPR22 / IEC 60255-25
Class A
Sinusoidal vibration
IEC 60255-21-1
Class 1
Shock and bump
IEC 60255-21-2
Class 1
Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3
Class 1
Power magnetic immunity
IEC 61000-4-8
Level 5
Pulse magnetic immunity
IEC 61000-4-9
Level 4
Damped magnetic immunity
IEC 61000-4-10
Level 4
Voltage dip and interruption
IEC 61000-4-11
0, 40, 70, 80% dips; 250 / 300 cycle interrupts
Damped oscillatory
IEC 61000-4-12
2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Conducted RF immunity, 0 to 150 kHz
IEC 61000-4-16
Level 4
Voltage ripple
IEC 61000-4-17
15% ripple
Ingress protection
IEC 60529
IP40 front, IP10 back
Cold
IEC 60068-2-1
–40°C for 16 hours
Hot
IEC 60068-2-2
85°C for 16 hours
Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30
6 days, variant 1
Damped oscillatory
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
2.5 kV, 1 MHz
RF immunity
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz
Safety
UL 508
e83849 NKCR
Safety
UL C22.2-14
e83849 NKCR7
Safety
UL 1053
e83849 NKCR
Safety
IEC 60255-27
Insulation: class 1, Pollution degree: 2, Over
voltage cat II
2.4.12 Production tests
THERMAL
Products go through an environmental test based upon an Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.
2-28
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.13 Approvals
APPROVALS
Compliance
CE
Applicable council
directive
According to
Low voltage directive
EN 60255-5
EMC directive
EN 60255-26 / EN 50263
2
EN 61000-6-5
C-UL-US
---
UL 508
UL 1053
C22.2 No. 14
2.4.14 Maintenance
MOUNTING
Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (±2 inch-pounds) of torque.
CLEANING
Normally, cleaning is not required. When dust has accumulated on the faceplate display, wipe with a dry cloth.
NOTICE
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energized
state once per year, for one hour continuously.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-29
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2
2-30
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C60 Breaker Protection System
Chapter 3: Installation
Installation
This chapter outlines installation of hardware and software. You unpack, check, mount, and wire the unit, then install the
software and configure settings.
3.1 Unpack and inspect
Use this procedure to unpack and inspect the unit.
1.
Open the relay package and check that the following items have been delivered:
–
C60
–
Mounting screws
–
GE EnerVista™ DVD (software and documentation)
–
C60 Instruction Manual (soft copy on DVD; printed copy if ordered)
–
UR Series Communications Guide (soft copy on DVD; printed copy if Instruction Manual ordered)
–
Certificate of Calibration
–
Test Report
–
EC Declaration of Conformity
2.
Inspect the unit for physical damage.
3.
View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been delivered. The model number is at the top right.
C60
RATINGS:
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA
Contact Outputs: Refer to Instruction Manual
Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
E83849
-
M
A
A
B
9
®
®
7
0
0
0
0
9
9
-
LISTED
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
Model:
Mods:
Wiring Diagram:
Inst. Manual:
Serial Number:
Firmware:
Mfg. Date:
PO Num:
Item Num:
-
M
A
A
B
C60D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A
000
See manual
1601-0100
MAZB98000029
D
NOV 26, 2012
600001234.56
9
7
0
0
0
0
9
9
-
834725A2.CDR
4.
For any issues, contact GE Digital Energy as outlined in the For Further Assistance section in chapter 1.
5.
Check that you have the latest copy of the C60 Instruction Manual and the UR Series Communications Guide, for the
applicable firmware version, at http://gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/manuals/index.htm
The Instruction Manual outlines how to install, configure, and use the unit. The Communications Guide is for advanced use
with communication protocols. The warranty is included at the end of this instruction manual and on the GE Digital Energy
website.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-1
PANEL CUTOUTS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.2 Panel cutouts
This section does not apply to the HardFiber Brick; see its instruction manual.
3.2.1 Horizontal units
The C60 is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable faceplate. The faceplate can be specified as
either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains additional user-programmable
pushbuttons and LED indicators.
The modular design allows the relay to be upgraded and repaired by qualified service personnel. The faceplate is hinged to
allow access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth.
3
The case dimensions are shown in the following figure, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning
the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or
from adjacent equipment.
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
supplied with the relay.
Figure 3-1: Horizontal dimensions (enhanced panel)
11.016”
[279,81 mm]
9.687”
[246,05 mm]
17.56”
[446,02 mm]
7.460”
[189,48 mm]
6.995”
[177,67 mm]
6.960”
[176,78 mm]
19.040”
[483,62 mm]
842807A1.CDR
3-2
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
PANEL CUTOUTS
Figure 3-2: Horizontal mounting (enhanced panel)
18.370”
[466,60 mm]
0.280”
[7,11 mm]
Typ. x 4
CUT-OUT
4.000”
[101,60 mm]
17.750”
[450,85 mm]
3
842808A1.CDR
Figure 3-3: Horizontal mounting and dimensions (standard panel)
3.2.2 Vertical units
The C60 is available as a reduced size (¾) vertical mount unit, with a removable faceplate. The faceplate can be specified
as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains additional user-programmable
pushbuttons and LED indicators.
The modular design allows the relay to be upgraded and repaired by qualified service personnel. The faceplate is hinged to
allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth.
The case dimensions are shown in the following figure, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning
the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or
from adjacent equipment.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-3
PANEL CUTOUTS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
supplied with the relay.
Figure 3-4: Vertical dimensions (enhanced panel)
Mounting Bracket
Front of Panel
7.48”
(190.0 mm)
Front
Bezel
3
13.56”
(344.4 mm)
15.00”
(381.0 mm)
Vertical Enhanced Side View
Front of Panel
7.10”
(180.2 mm)
Vertical Enhanced Front View
1.55”
(39.3 mm)
7.00”
(177.7 mm)
4.00”
(101.6 mm)
0.20”
(5.1 mm)
Terminal Blocks
14.03”
(356.2 mm)
9.58”
(243.4 mm)
Front of Panel
Reference only
CUTOUT
13.66”
(347.0 mm)
1.38”
(35.2 mm)
Mounting Bracket
Vertical Enhanced Top View
0.213” (5.41 mm)
4 Places
Vertical Enhanced Mounting Panel
843809A2.cdr
3-4
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
PANEL CUTOUTS
Figure 3-5: Vertical and mounting dimensions (standard panel)
7.00"
(177.8 mm)
Front of
panel
Panel
Mounting bracket
Front
bezel
13.50"
(342.9 mm)
13.72"
(348.5 mm)
Vertical side view
Vertical front view
7.13”
(181.1 mm)
1.85"
(47.0 mm)
4.00
(101.6)
1.57”
(39.9 mm)
0.46”
(11.7 mm)
Panel shown for
reference only
9.00"
(228.6 mm)
13.65”
(346.7 mm)
14.40”
(365.8 mm)
Mounting bracket
Terminal blocks
7.00"
(177.8 mm)
Vertical bottom view
0.213" (5.4 mm),
4 places
843755A4.CDR
Vertical panel mounting
For details on side-mounting C60 devices with the enhanced front panel, see the following documents available on the UR
DVD and the GE Digital Energy website.
•
GEK-113180 — UR-series UR-V side-mounting front panel assembly instructions
•
GEK-113181 — Connecting the side-mounted UR-V enhanced front panel to a vertical UR-series device
•
GEK-113182 — Connecting the side-mounted UR-V enhanced front panel to a vertically-mounted horizontal UR-series
device
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-5
3
PANEL CUTOUTS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
For details on side-mounting C60 devices with the standard front panel, see the following figures.
Figure 3-6: Vertical side-mounting installation (standard panel)
3
3-6
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
PANEL CUTOUTS
Figure 3-7: Vertical side-mounting rear dimensions (standard panel)
3
3.2.3 Rear terminal layout
C60
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA
Contact Outputs: Refer to Instruction Manual
GE Multilin
E83849
-
M
A
A
B
9
7
0
0
0
0
9
9
-
LISTED
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
®
®
X
W
V
U
T
Model:
Mods:
Wiring Diagram:
Inst. Manual:
Serial Number:
Firmware:
Mfg. Date:
PO Num:
Item Num:
RATINGS:
Breaker Management Relay
S
R
c
P
b
N
a
M
L
K
J
c
-
H
b
a
M
A
A
B
C60D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A
000
See manual
1601-0100
MAZB98000029
D
NOV 26, 2012
600001234.56
9
7
G
c
0
0
0
0
9
9
-
F
b
D
B
a
b
LK1
Tx1
a
1
1
2
Rx1
ACT1
2
3
LK2
Tx1
3
4
4
5
Tx2
b
1
5
ACT2
a
1
2
LK3
6
6
2
3
Rx2
7
3
4
7
4
8
Tx2
8
ACT3
IN
Optional
direct
input/output
module
Optional
contact
input/output
module
Optional
contact
input/output
module
CT/VT
module
CPU module
(T module shown)
Power
supply
module
834774A3.CDR
WARNING
Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-7
PANEL CUTOUTS
NOTICE
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
The small form-factor pluggable ports (SFPs) are pluggable transceivers. Do not use non-validated
transceivers or install validated transceivers in the wrong Ethernet slot, else damage can occur.
The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments, which are three characters long and
assigned by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from
the first slot position (nearest to CPU module), indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. The figure shows an
example of rear terminal assignments.
Figure 3-8: Example of modules in F and H slots
3
3-8
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
3.3 Wiring
3.3.1 Typical wiring
Figure 3-9: Typical wiring diagram (T module shown for CPU)
A
B
Voltage inputs
C
Open delta
VT connection (ABC)
P8b
Surge
Form-C
output H3
V
Form-C
output H4
Current inputs
Contact input and output module
Critical failure
F5a
VA
F5c
VB
F6a
VB
F6c
VC
F7a
VC
F7c
VA
F5a
VA
F5c
VB
F6a
VB
F6c
VC
F7a
VC
F7c
VX
F8a
VX
F8c
IA5
F1a
IA
F1b
IA1
F1c
IB5
F2a
IB
F2b
IB1
F2c
IC5
F3a
IC
F3b
IC1
F3c
IG5
F4a
IG
F4b
IG1
F4c
VA
M5a
VA
M5c
VB
M6a
VB
M6c
VC
M7a
VC
M7c
VX
M8a
VX
M8c
IA5
M1a
IA
M1b
IA1
M1c
IB5
M2a
IB
M2b
IB1
M2c
IC5
M3a
IC
M3b
IC1
M3c
IG5
M4a
IG
M4b
IG1
M4c
3
52
Connection as
required
52
Connection as
required
HI
LO
Power supply
48 V DC output
Control power
Port 1
Tx2 100BaseFX
Rx2
Port 2
Tx3 100BaseFX
Rx3
Port 3
C60
TXD
RXD
SGND
Contacts shown
with no
control power
RS485
COM 2
com
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Computer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8
3 RXD
2 TXD
20
7 SGND
6
4
5
22
RS232 (front)
IRIG-B
Input
BNC
9-pin
connector
DB-9
CPU
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
C60
Breaker Protection
System
T
Surge
Filter
Tx1 100BaseFX
Rx1
Co-axial
CT/VT module
Surge
V
Voltage inputs
H8b
Form-C
output H2
Current inputs
Contact input H7a
Contact input H7c
Contact input H8a
Contact input H8c
Common H7b
V
CT/VT module
H7a
H7c
H8a
H8c
H7b
Form-C
output H1
6G
Contact input H5a
Contact input H5c
Contact input H6a
Contact input H6c
Common H5b
V
Contact input and output module
H1a
H1b
H1c
H2a
H2b
H2c
H3a
H3b
H3c
H4a
H4b
H4c
H5a
H5c
H6a
H6c
H5b
I
Shielded
twisted pairs
V
Form-C
output P4
I
Fibre
optic
Form-C
output P3
I
AC or DC
Voltage inputs
Contact input P7a
Contact input P7c
Contact input P8a
Contact input P8c
Common P7b
V
I
( DC only )
P7a
P7c
P8a
P8c
P7b
B1b
B1a
B2b
B3a
B3b
B5b
B6b
B6a
B8a
B8b
DC
Ground at
remote
device
Contact input P5a
Contact input P5c
Contact input P6a
Contact input P6c
Common P5b
Form-C
output P2
V
I
TC2
Form-C
output P1
V
I
Voltage supervision
P1a
P1b
P1c
P2a
P2b
P2c
P3a
P3b
P3c
P4a
P4b
P4c
P5a
P5c
P6a
P6c
P5b
I
TC1
I
Voltage and
current supervision
6G
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
The AC signal path is configurable
VA
25-pin
connector
Computer
No. 10AWG
minimum
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Module arrangement
P N M L K J H
Input/
output CT/VT
Ground bus
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
834773A1.CDR
G
F
Input/
output CT/VT
D
CPU
B
Power
supply
Modules must be
grounded if terminal
is provided
(Rear view)
3-9
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.3.2 Dielectric strength
The table outlines the dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware. Dielectric strength refers to the limits that
material can withstand without breakdown.
Table 3-1: Dielectric strength of UR series modules
Module type
Module function
Terminals
From
3
Dielectric strength (AC)
To
1
Power supply
High (+); Low (+); (–)
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
1
Power supply
48 V DC (+) and (–)
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
1
Power supply
Relay terminals
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
2
Reserved
N/A
N/A
N/A
3
Reserved
N/A
N/A
N/A
4
Reserved
N/A
N/A
N/A
5
Analog inputs/outputs
All except 8b
Chassis
< 50 V DC
6
Digital contact inputs/
outputs
All
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
G.703
All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
RS422
All except 6a, 7b, 8a
Chassis
< 50 V DC
7
8
CT/VT
All
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
9
CPU
All
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
NOTICE
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in the hardware to prevent damage caused
by high peak voltage transients, radio frequency interference (RFI), and electromagnetic interference
(EMI). These protective components can be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90
specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one minute.
3.3.3 Control power
NOTICE
Control power supplied to the relay must be connected to the matching power supply range of the
relay. If voltage is applied to the wrong terminals, damage can occur.
The C60, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are wellknown to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can
be avoided by powering up the relays once a year.
The power supply module can be ordered for two possible voltage ranges, and the C60 can be ordered with or without a
redundant power supply module option. Each range has a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges
are as follows (see the Specifications section of chapter 2 for details):
•
Low (LO) range — 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal
•
High (HI) range — 125 to 250 V nominal
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.
The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the
Typical Wiring Diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a form-C device that is energized once control power is applied
and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks detect a
critical failure (see the Self-Test Errors section in chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay de-energizes.
For high-reliability systems, the C60 has a redundant option in which two C60 power supplies are placed in parallel on the
bus. If one of the power supplies becomes faulted, the second power supply assumes the full load of the relay without any
interruptions. Each power supply has a green LED on the front of the module to indicate that it is functional. The critical fail
relay of the module also indicates a faulted power supply.
An LED on the front of the control power module shows the status of the power supply, as outlined in the table.
3-10
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
Table 3-2: Power supply LED on front panel
LED indication
Power supply
Continuous on
OK
On/off cycling
Failure
Off
Failure or no power
Figure 3-10: Control power connection
NOTE:
14 gauge stranded
wire with suitable
disconnect devices
is recommended.
AC or DC
Heavy copper conductor
or braided wire
3
B8b B8a B6a B6b B5b
–
FILTER SURGE
Switchgear
ground bus
+
+
LOW
HIGH
CONTROL
POWER
UR-series
protection system
827247A1.CDR
3.3.4 CT/VT modules
A CT/VT module can have voltage or current inputs on channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or channels 5 through 8 inclusive.
Channels 1 and 5 are intended for connection to phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Likewise, channels 2 and 6
are intended for connection to phase B, and channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to phase C.
Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single-phase source. For voltage inputs, these channels are labeled as
auxiliary voltage (VX). For current inputs, these channels are intended for connection to a CT between system neutral and
ground, and are labelled as ground current (IG).
NOTICE
Verify that the connection made to the relay terminals for nominal current of 1 A or 5 A matches the
secondary rating of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs can result in equipment damage or
inadequate protection.
To connect the module, size 12 American Wire Gauge (AWG) is used commonly; the maximum size is 10 AWG.
CT/VT modules can be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current input. Each AC
current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is
withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1
to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries can be used.
CT/VT modules with a sensitive ground input are also available. The ground CT input of the sensitive ground modules is 10
times more sensitive than the ground CT input of standard CT/VT modules. However, the phase CT inputs and phase VT
inputs are the same as those of regular CT/VT modules.
These modules have enhanced diagnostics that can automatically detect CT/VT hardware failure and take the relay out of
service.
CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical, as shown in the Typical Wiring Diagram.
The exact placement of a zero-sequence core balance CT to detect ground fault current is shown as follows. Twisted-pair
cabling on the zero-sequence CT is recommended.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-11
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-11: Zero-sequence core balance CT installation
UNSHIELDED CABLE
A
SHIELDED CABLE
Ground connection to neutral
must be on the source side
Source
B
C
N
G
Source
B
C
A
Stress cone
shields
Ground
outside CT
3
To ground;
must be on
load side
LOAD
LOAD
996630A6.CDR
The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as
input for the synchrocheck and volts-per-hertz features, which are optional features available for some UR models.
Substitute the tilde “~” symbol with the slot position of the module in the following figure.
NOTE
~ 8b
~ 8c
IG
IG1
~ 8a
VX
~ 8c
VX
~ 7c
~ 8a
IC1
IG5
~ 7a
~ 7c
VC
VC
~ 6a
~ 6c
VB
VB
~ 5a
~ 5c
VA
VA
~ 4c
~ 4b
IG
IG1
~ 3c
~ 4a
IG5
~ 3b
IC
IC1
IB
~ 2c
~ 2a
~ 2b
IB5
~ 3a
~ 1c
IA1
IB1
~ 1b
IA
IC5
~ 1a
IA5
Figure 3-12: CT/VT module wiring
~ 7a
~ 7b
IC5
IC
~ 6b
~ 6c
IB
IB1
~ 5c
~ 6a
IA1
IA
IB5
~ 5a
~ 5b
IA5
~ 4b
~ 4c
IG1
~ 4a
IG
~ 3b
~ 3c
IC
IC1
IG5
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 2b
IB
IB1
~ 2a
IB5
IC5
~ 1b
~ 1c
IA1
~ 1a
IA
IA5
Current inputs
Voltage inputs
8F, 8G, 8L, and 8M modules (4 CTs and 4 VTs)
Current inputs
8H, 8J, 8N, and 8R modules (8 CTs)
842766A3.CDR
3.3.5 Process bus modules
The C60 can be ordered with a process bus interface module. The module interfaces with the HardFiber Process Bus
System, or HardFiber Brick, allowing bidirectional IEC 61850 fiber optic communications with up to eight HardFiber Bricks.
The HardFiber system integrates seamlessly with the existing UR-series applications, including protection functions,
FlexLogic, metering, and communications.
This process bus system offers the following benefits:
•
3-12
Reduces labor associated with design, installation, and testing of protection and control applications using the UR by
reducing the number of individual copper terminations
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
•
Integrates seamlessly with existing UR applications, since the IEC 61850 process bus interface module replaces the
traditional CT/VT modules
•
Communicates using open standard IEC 61850 messaging
For details on the HardFiber system, see its Instruction Manual.
3.3.6 Contact inputs and outputs
Every contact input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as three terminals per row, with eight
rows in total. A given row of three terminals can be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for form-C relay outputs,
the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a form-A
output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered.
The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications.
The contact inputs are grouped with a common return. The C60 has two versions of grouping: four inputs per common
return and two inputs per common return. When a contact input/output module is ordered, four inputs per common is
used. If the inputs must be isolated per row, then two inputs per common return are selected (4D module).
The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A and so on) and contact arrangements that
can be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module
slot position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module
slot position, row number, and column position.
Some form-A / solid-state relay outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is
open, and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector
whose output is set to logic “On = 1” when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is
set to “On = 1” when there is a voltage across open contact (the detector allows a current of about 1 to 2.5 mA), and the
current monitor is set to “On = 1” when the current flowing through the closed contact exceeds about 80 to 100 mA. The
voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to seal-in
the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow. If enabled, the current monitoring can be used as
a seal-in signal to ensure that the form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld
the output contacts.
Block diagrams are shown as follows for form-A and solid-state relay outputs with optional voltage monitor, optional
current monitor, and with no monitoring. The actual values shown for contact output 1 are the same for all contact
outputs. Form-A contact output with or without a current or voltage monitoring option is not polarity sensitive. The polarity
shown in the figure is required for solid-state contact output connection.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-13
3
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-13: Form-A and solid-state contact outputs with voltage and current monitoring
~#a
~#a
I
I
~#b
V
~#c
a) Voltage with optional
current monitoring
~#b
~#c
+
Voltage monitoring only
+
Both voltage and current monitoring
~#a
~#a
V
3
Load
V
Load
V
I
~#b
I
~#b
Load
~#c
+
Load
~#c
b) Current with optional
voltage monitoring
+
Current monitoring only
Both voltage and current monitoring
(external jumper a-b is required)
~#a
~#b
Load
~#c
c) No monitoring
+
827862A4.CDR
The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic operands (CONT OP # VON, CONT OP
# VOFF, and CONT OP # ION) that can be used in protection, control, and alarm logic. The typical application of the voltage
monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the control
command.
See the Digital Elements section of chapter 5 for an example of how form-A and solid-state relay contacts can be applied
for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring.
WARNING
NOTE
Consider relay contacts unsafe to touch when the unit is energized.
USE OF FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE RELAY OUTPUTS IN HIGH-IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
For form-A and solid-state relay output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring circuit across
the contact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external
high-input impedance monitoring equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring
circuits can continue to read the form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened,
when measured as an impedance.
The solution is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the form-A contact
through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used
as a source, a 500 Ω, 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the form-A
contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.
Where a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute the slot position of the module. Where a number sign “#” appears,
substitute the contact number.
NOTE
3-14
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
NOTICE
WIRING
When current monitoring is used to seal-in the form-A and solid-state relay contact outputs, give the
FlexLogic operand driving the contact output a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output
contact (in situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the
region of the pickup value).
Table 3-3: Contact input and output module assignments
~6A module
~6B module
~6C module
~6D module
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output
Terminal
assignment
Output
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-C
~1a, ~1c
2 Inputs
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2a, ~2c
2 Inputs
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3a, ~3c
2 Inputs
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4a, ~4c
2 Inputs
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~6E module
~6F module
~6G module
3
~6H module
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
~1
Form-C
~1
Fast Form-C
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2
Fast Form-C
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Fast Form-C
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Fast Form-C
~4
Form-A
~4
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Fast Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-A
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Fast Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-A
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
Fast Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Fast Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~6K module
~6L module
~6M module
~6N module
Terminal
assignment
Output
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
~1
Form-C
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-A
~5
Fast Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~6
Fast Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7
Fast Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8
Fast Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-15
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
~6P module
3
~6R module
~6S module
~6T module
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-A
~5
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-A
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~6U module
~6v module
~67 module
~4A module
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output
Terminal
assignment
Output
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Not Used
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Solid-State
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-A
~3
Not Used
~4
Form-A
~4
2 Outputs
~4
Form-A
~4
Solid-State
~5
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-A
~5
Not Used
~6
Form-A
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-A
~6
Solid-State
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
Form-A
~7
Not Used
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Form-A
~8
Solid-State
~4B module
Terminal
assignment
~4C module
Output
Terminal
assignment
~4D module
Output
~4L module
Terminal
assignment
Output
Terminal
assignment
Output
2 Outputs
~1
Not Used
~1
Not Used
~1a, ~1c
2 Inputs
~1
~2
Solid-State
~2
Solid-State
~2a, ~2c
2 Inputs
~2
2 Outputs
~3
Not Used
~3
Not Used
~3a, ~3c
2 Inputs
~3
2 Outputs
~4
Solid-State
~4
Solid-State
~4a, ~4c
2 Inputs
~4
2 Outputs
~5
Not Used
~5
Not Used
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
2 Outputs
~6
Solid-State
~6
Solid-State
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
2 Outputs
~7
Not Used
~7
Not Used
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
2 Outputs
~8
Solid-State
~8
Solid-State
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Not Used
3-16
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
Figure 3-14: Contact input and output module wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
3
842762A3.CDR
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-17
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
~1
~2
~3
~4
~ 5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 5a DIGITAL I/O
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
6L
~1
~2
~3
~4
V
I
V
I
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 8b
SURGE
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
6M
~1
~2
~4
~5
~6
~6
~8
V
I
~3
~5
~7
V
I
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
DIGITAL I/O
3
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
~ 7a
~ 7b
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8b
~ 8c
6K
Figure 3-15: Contact input and output module wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)
~ 5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 5a DIGITAL I/O
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
6N
~1
~2
~3
~4
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 8b
SURGE
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
6P
~1
~2
~3
~4
~5
~ 5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 5a DIGITAL I/O
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
6R
~1
~2
~3
~4
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~6
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 8b
SURGE
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
6S
~1
~2
~3
~4
~ 5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 5a DIGITAL I/O
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
6T
~1
~2
~3
~4
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~5
~6
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 8b
SURGE
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
6U
~1
~2
~3
~4
~5
~6
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
842763A2.CDR
NOTICE
3-18
For proper functionality, observe the polarity shown in the figures for all contact input and output
connections.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
3.3.6.1 Contact inputs
A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power supply
module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group
has its own common (negative) terminal that must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply
module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA flows through the associated circuit.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this
contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. If a wet contact is used, then the negative side of the external
source must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact group. The maximum external source
voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC.
The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs detects a closed contact input is programmable as
17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
Figure 3-16: Dry and wet contact input connections
Contact input 1
Contact input 2
Contact input 3
Contact input 4
Common
Surge
~7a
~7c
~8a
~8c
~7b
~8b
B1b
B1a
B2b
B3a
B3b
B5b
B6b
B6a
B8a
B8b
(Wet)
24 to 250 V
3
Terminals from type 6B
contact input/output module
~7a
~7c
~8a
~8c
~7b
~8b
Contact input 1
Contact input 2
Contact input 3
Contact input 4
Common
Surge
Critical failure
48 V DC output
HI+
LO+
Control power
Surge
Filter
Power supply module
(Dry)
Terminals from type 6B
contact input/output module
827741A5.CDR
Where a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute the slot position of the module.
NOTE
There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We recommend
using an external DC supply.
3.3.6.2 Use of contact inputs with auto-burnishing
The contact inputs sense a change of the state of the external device contact based on the measured current. When
external devices are located in a harsh industrial environment (either outdoor or indoor), their contacts can be exposed to
various types of contamination. Normally, there is a thin film of insulating sulfidation, oxidation, or contaminates on the
surface of the contacts, sometimes making it difficult or impossible to detect a change of the state. This film must be
removed to establish circuit continuity — an impulse of higher than normal current can accomplish this.
The contact inputs with auto-burnish create a high current impulse when the threshold is reached to burn off this oxidation
layer as a maintenance to the contacts. Afterwards the contact input current is reduced to a steady-state current. The
impulse has a five-second delay after a contact input changes state.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-19
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-17: Current through contact inputs with auto-burnishing
current
50 to 70 mA
3 mA
time
25 to 50 ms
3
842749A1.CDR
Regular contact inputs limit current to less than 3 mA to reduce station battery burden. In contrast, contact inputs with
auto-burnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state was sensed. Then, within
25 to 50 ms, this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated. The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the
contacts, allowing for proper sensing of state changes. If the external device contact is bouncing, the auto-burnishing
starts when external device contact bouncing is over.
Another important difference between the auto-burnishing input module and the regular input modules is that only two
contact inputs have common ground, as opposed to four contact inputs sharing one common ground (see the Contact
Input and Output Module Wiring diagrams). This is beneficial when connecting contact inputs to separate voltage sources.
Consequently, the threshold voltage setting is also defined per group of two contact inputs.
The auto-burnish feature can be disabled or enabled using the DIP switches found on each daughter card. There is a DIP
switch for each contact, for a total of 16 inputs.
Figure 3-18: Auto-burnish DIP switches
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF
CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON
CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF
CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = ON
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON
CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = ON
842751A1.CDR
The auto-burnish circuitry has an internal fuse for safety purposes. During regular maintenance, check the auto-burnish
functionality using an oscilloscope.
3.3.7 Transducer inputs and outputs
Transducer input modules can receive input signals from external DCmA output transducers (DCmA In) or resistance
temperature detectors (RTDs). Hardware and software are provided to receive signals from these external transducers and
convert these signals into a digital format for use as required.
3-20
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard DCmA ranges. Software is provided to
configure virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs.
Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three
terminals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row can be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column
"a" having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single
input/output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.
Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to terminal 8b. The current outputs
require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The following figure illustrates the
transducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that can be ordered for the relay.
Where a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute the slot position of the module.
3
NOTE
Figure 3-19: Transducer input/output module wiring
842764A1.CDR
The following figure show how to connect RTDs.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-21
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-20: RTD connections
Three-wire shielded cable
Route cable in separate conduit from
current carrying conductors
RTD terminals
~8b
SURGE
RTD
Hot ~1a
Comp ~1c
For RTD ~1 & ~2 Return ~1b
Hot ~2a
~2
RTD
Comp ~2c
RTD
3
~1
RTD terminals
RTD
Maximum total lead resistance:
25 ohms for Platinum RTDs
859736A1.CDR
3.3.8 RS232 faceplate port
A nine-pin RS232C serial port is located on the faceplate for programming with a computer. All that is required to use this
interface is a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay. Cabling for the RS232 port is
shown in the following figure for both 9-pin and 25-pin connectors.
The baud rate for this port can be set, with a default of 19200 bps.
Figure 3-21: RS232 faceplate port connection
3.3.9 CPU communication ports
3.3.9.1 Overview
In addition to the faceplate RS232 port, there is a rear RS485 communication port.
3-22
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
The CPU modules do not require a surge ground connection.
Shielded
twisted-pairs
Tx1
Rx1
100Base-FX
Port 1
Tx2
Rx2
100Base-FX
Port 2
Tx3
Rx3
100Base-FX
Port 3
+
—
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
Ground at
remote
device
COMMON
+
—
BNC
RS485
COM2
IRIG-B
input
CPU
MM fiberoptic cable
T
Figure 3-22: CPU module communications wiring
Co-axial cable
Tx1
Rx1
100Base-FX
Port 2
Tx1
Rx1
100Base-FX
Port 3
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
Ground at
remote
device
Port 1
+
—
COMMON
+
—
BNC
RS485
COM2
IRIG-B
input
CPU
Shielded
twisted-pairs
100Base-TX
U
3
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
Ground at
remote
device
Port 1
100Base-TX
Port 2
100Base-TX
Port 3
+
—
COMMON
+
—
BNC
RS485
COM2
IRIG-B
input
CPU
Shielded
twisted-pairs
100Base-TX
V
Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
842722A4.CDR
3.3.9.2 RS485 port
RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data
alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of the port, continuous monitoring and control from a remote
computer, SCADA system, or Power Line Carrier (PLC) is possible.
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must be observed.
For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 “+” terminals connected together, and all RS485 “–” terminals
connected together. Though data is transmitted over a two-wire twisted pair, all RS485 devices require a shared reference,
or common voltage. This common voltage is implied to be a power supply common. Some systems allow the shield (drain
wire) to be used as common wire and to connect directly to the C60 COM terminal (#3); others function correctly only if the
common wire is connected to the C60 COM terminal, but insulated from the shield.
To avoid loop currents, ground the shield at only one point. If other system considerations require the shield to be
grounded at more than one point, install resistors (typically 100 ohms) between the shield and ground at each grounding
point. Each relay needs to be daisy-chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this
manner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also
possible to use commercially available repeaters to have more than 32 relays on a single channel. Avoid star or stub
connections entirely.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-23
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are provided internally at both communication ports. An
isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum
reliability, ensure that all equipment has similar transient protection devices installed.
Terminate both ends of the RS485 circuit with an impedance as shown in the figure.
Figure 3-23: RS485 serial connection
SCADA / PLC / computer
UR-series device
ZT (*)
Shield
Twisted pair
RS485 +
Optocoupler Data
Data Optocoupler
RS485 –
COM
3
COMP 485COM
Ground shield at SCADA / PLC /
computer only or at
UR-series device only
Relay
RS485 +
ZT (*) Terminating impedance at
each end (typically 120 Ω and 1 nF)
RS485 –
COMP 485COM
Up to 32 devices,
maximum 4000 feet
(1200 m)
Relay
ZT (*)
RS485 +
RS485 –
COMP 485COM
Last device
827757AA.CDR
3.3.9.3 100Base-FX fiber optic ports
The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 100 Mbps. Optical fiber
can be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 1310 nm in multimode.
Ensure that the dust covers are installed when the fiber is not in use. Dirty or scratched connectors can lead to high losses
on a fiber link.
3.3.10 IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices. The
IRIG-B code allows time accuracies of up to 100 ns. Using the IRIG-B input, the C60 operates an internal oscillator with 1 µs
resolution and accuracy. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes that can be either DC level shifted
or amplitude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment can use a
global positioning system (GPS) satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic
locations can be synchronized.
3-24
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 3-24: Options for the IRIG-B connection
GPS satellite system
GPS connection
UR-series device
4B IRIG-B (+)
IRIG-B
time code generator
(DC-shift or
amplitude modulated
signal can be used)
4A IRIG-B (–)
Receiver
RG58/59 coaxial cable
+
BNC (in)
3
GPS satellite system
GPS connection
IRIG-B
time code generator
(DC-shift or
amplitude modulated
signal can be used)
+
Twisted-pair cable
UR-series device
4B IRIG-B (+)
4A IRIG-B (–)
Receiver
BNC (in)
827756A8.CDR
Using an amplitude-modulated receiver causes errors up to 1 ms in event time-stamping.
NOTE
3.4 Direct input and output communications
3.4.1 Description
The direct inputs and outputs feature makes use of the type 7 series of communications modules, which allow direct
messaging between UR devices. These communications modules are outlined in the table later in this section.
The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration, as shown in the following figure. The
transmitter of one module is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then
connected to the receiver of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure
illustrates a ring of four UR-series relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to
UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx to UR1-Rx. A maximum of 16 UR-series relays can be connected in a single ring.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-25
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-25: Direct input and output single-channel connection
Tx
UR 1
Rx
Tx
UR 2
Rx
Tx
UR 3
Rx
Tx
UR 4
3
Rx
842006A2.CDR
The interconnection for dual-channel type 7 communications modules is shown as follows. Two-channel modules allow for
a redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path. The
required connections are: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1 to UR1-Rx1 for the
first ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, UR4-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, and UR2-Tx2 to UR1-Rx2 for the second ring.
Figure 3-26: Direct input and output dual-channel connection
Tx1
Rx1
UR 1
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR 2
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR 3
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR 4
Tx2
Rx2
842007A3.CDR
The following diagram shows the connection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication channels.
UR1 and UR3 have single type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two communication
channels can be of different types, depending on the type 7 modules used. To allow the direct input and output data to
cross-over from channel 1 to channel 2 on UR2, set the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting to “Enabled” on UR2. This
forces UR2 to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1.
3-26
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 3-27: Direct input and output single/dual channel combination connection
Tx
UR 1
Rx
Channel 1
Tx1
Rx1
UR 2
Tx2
Rx2
3
Channel 2
Tx
UR 3
Rx
842013A2.CDR
The inter-relay communications modules are available with several interfaces and some are outlined here in more detail.
Those that apply depend on options purchased. The options are outlined in the Inter-Relay Communications section of the
Order Code tables in Chapter 2. All of the fiber modules use ST type connectors.
3.4.2 Fiber: LED and ELED transmitters
The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Figure 3-28: LED and ELED fiber modules
7A, 7B, and
7C modules
7H, 7I, and
7J modules
Rx1
Rx1
Tx1
Tx1
Rx2
Tx2
1 channel
2 channels
831719A3.CDR
3.4.3 Fiber laser transmitters
The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser modules.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-27
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-29: 7x Laser fiber modules
72 and 7D
modules
73 and 7K
modules
Tx1
Tx1
Rx1
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
3
1 channel
2 channels
831720A5.CDR
The following figure shows configuration for the 2I and 2J fiber-laser modules.
Figure 3-30: 2I and 2J laser fiber modules
2I and 2J
modules
Rx1
Tx1
Rx2
Tx2
2 channels
831827A1.CDR
CAUTION
NOTICE
Observing any fiber transmitter output can injure the eye.
When using a laser Interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the
maximum optical input power to the receiver.
3.4.4 G.703 interface
3.4.4.1 Description
The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration.
The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps. The SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O  DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not
applicable to this module.
3-28
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end.
Connecting the shield to pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are connected internally to ground. Thus, if
pin X1a or X6a is used to ground the shield at one end, do not ground the shield at the other end. This interface module is
protected by surge suppression devices.
7S
Figure 3-31: G.703 interface configuration
G.703 communications
G.703
channel 1
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Surge
G.703
channel 2
Surge
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
~1a
~1b
~2a
~2b
~3a
~3b
~6a
~6b
~7a
~7b
~8a
~8b
3
842773A3.CDR
The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical
arrangement of these pins, see the Rear Terminal Layout section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be
maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
G.703 communications
G.703
channel 1
Surge
G.703
channel 2
Surge
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
X1a
X1b
X2a
X2b
X3a
X3b
X6a
X6b
X7a
X7b
X8a
X8b
X1a
X1b
X2a
X2b
X3a
X3b
X6a
X6b
X7a
X7b
X8a
X8b
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
7S
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
G.703
channel 1
Surge
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
G.703
channel 2
Surge
G.703 communications
7S
Figure 3-32: Typical PIN interconnection between two G.703 interfaces
831727A5.CDR
Pin nomenclature differs from one manufacturer to another. It is not uncommon to see pinouts numbered TxA,
TxB, RxA, and RxB. In such cases, assume that “A” is equivalent to “+” and “B” is equivalent to “–.”
NOTE
3.4.4.2 G.703 selection switch procedures
1.
With the power to the relay off, remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S) as follows. Record the original location of the
module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2.
Simultaneously pull the ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release
the module for removal. (For more information on accessing modules, see the Maintenance chapter.)
3.
Remove the module cover screw.
4.
Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
5.
Set the timing selection switches (channels 1 and 2) to the required timing modes.
6.
Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
7.
Re-insert the G.703 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position.
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the
module is inserted smoothly into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips
simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is inserted fully.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-29
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-33: G.703 timing selection switch setting
Bottom cover
Ejector/inserter clip
FRONT
Channel 1
Timing selection
switches
Top cover
3
Channel 2
Cover screw
Ejector/inserter clip
REAR
831774A3.CDR
Table 3-4: G.703 timing selections
Switches
Function
S1
OFF octet timing disabled
ON octet timing 8 kHz
S5 and S6
S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF loop timing mode
S5 = ON and S6 = OFF internal timing mode
S5 = OFF and S6 = ON minimum remote loopback mode
S5 = ON and S6 = ON dual loopback mode
3.4.4.3 G.703 octet timing
If octet timing is enabled (ON), this 8 kHz signal is asserted during the violation of bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting to
higher order systems. When C60s are connected back-to-back, octet timing is disabled (OFF).
3.4.4.4 G.703 timing modes
There are two timing modes for the G.703 module: internal timing mode and loop timing mode (default).
•
Internal Timing Mode — The system clock is generated internally. Therefore, set the G.703 timing selection to internal
timing mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For back-to-back connections, set octet timing (S1 = OFF) and
timing mode to internal timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF).
•
Loop Timing Mode — The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, set the G.703 timing
selection to loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (URto-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to octet timing (S1 = ON) and set timing mode to loop timing (S5 = OFF and S6 =
OFF).
The switch settings for the internal and loop timing modes are shown.
3-30
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 3-34: Switches
Internal timing mode
Loop timing mode
(factory default)
842752A2.CDR
3.4.4.5 G.703 test modes
In minimum remote loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any
processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 line-side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs,
passes through the data stabilization latch that also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer and
then returns to the transmitter. The differential received data is processed and passed to the G.703 transmitter module
after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and
passes it to the differential Manchester transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is
expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
Figure 3-35: G.703 minimum remote loopback mode
DMR
G7X
DMX
G7R
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver
DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
842774A1.CDR
In dual loopback mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver/
transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data
enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester transmitter module.
Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 transmitter module to be
returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks
are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing.
One source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the differential Manchester side of the
interface.
Figure 3-36: G.703 dual loopback mode
DMR
G7X
DMX
G7R
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver
DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
842775A1.CDR
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-31
3
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.4.5 RS422 interface
3.4.5.1 Description
There are two RS422 inter-relay communications modules available: single-channel RS422 (module 7T) and dual-channel
RS422 (module 7W). The modules can be configured to run at 64 kbps or 128 kbps. AWG 20-24 twisted shielded pair cable
is recommended for external connections. These modules are protected by optically-isolated surge suppression devices.
The shield pins (6a and 7b) are connected internally to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows:
•
Site 1 — Terminate shield to pins 6a or 7b or both
•
Site 2 — Terminate shield to COM pin 2b
Match the clock terminating impedance with the impedance of the line.
Figure 3-37: RS422 interface connections
Single-channel RS422 module
~ 3b
~ 3a
~ 2a
~ 4b
~ 6a
~ 5b
~ 5a
~ 4a
~ 6b
~ 7b
~ 7a
~ 8b
~ 2b
~ 8a
Rx –
RS422
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
Clock
COM
Surge
~ indicates the slot position
7W
Dual-channel RS422 module
7T
Tx –
Inter-relay comms.
~ 3b
~ 3a
~ 2a
~ 4b
~ 6a
~ 7a
~ 8b
~ 2b
~ 8a
Tx –
Rx –
RS422
channel 1
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
Inter-relay communications
3
Tx –
Rx –
RS422
channel 2
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
Clock
COM
Surge
842776A3.CDR
The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two single-channel RS422 interfaces installed in slot W.
All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
RS422
channel 1
Clock
Common
Surge
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
+
–
COM
W3b
W3a
W2a
W4b
W6a
W7a
W8b
W2b
W8a
W3b
W3a
W2a
W4b
W6a
W7a
W8b
W2b
W8a
+
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
+
–
COM
RS422
channel 1
Clock
Common
Surge
RS422 communications 7T
RS422 communications 7T
Figure 3-38: Typical PIN interconnect between two RS422 interfaces
–
64 or 128 kbps
831728A5.CDR
3.4.5.2 Two-channel application via multiplexers
The RS422 interface can be used for single-channel or two-channel applications over SONET/SDH or multiplexed systems.
When used in single-channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher-order systems in a typical way, observing
transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), and send timing (ST) connections. However, when used in two-channel applications, certain
criteria must be followed since there is one clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system functions correctly when
the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature. Terminal timing is a common
feature to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the
terminal timing feature, two-channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: the send timing
outputs from the multiplexer (data module 1) connects to the clock inputs of the UR RS422 interface in the usual way. In
addition, the send timing outputs of data module 1 are also paralleled to the terminal timing inputs of data module 2. By
using this configuration, the timing for both data modules and both UR RS422 channels are derived from a single clock
3-32
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
source. As a result, data sampling for both of the UR RS422 channels is synchronized via the send timing leads on data
module 1, shown as follows. If the terminal timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not wanted, the
G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.
Figure 3-39: Timing configuration for RS422 two-channel, three-terminal application
Data module 1
Signal name
7W
Tx1(+)
Tx1(-)
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
RS422
CHANNEL 1
Rx1(+)
Rx1(-)
Shld.
+
CLOCK
–
Tx2(+)
Tx2(-)
RS422
CHANNEL 2
Rx2(+)
Rx2(-)
Shld.
com
SURGE
W 2a
W 3b
W 4b
W 3a
W 6a
W 7a
W 8b
W 4a
W 5b
W 6b
W 5a
W 7b
W 2b
W 8a
SD(A) - Send data
SD(B) - Send data
RD(A) - Received data
RD(B) - Received data
RS(A) - Request to send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to send (RTS)
RT(A) - Receive timing
RT(B) - Receive timing
CS(A) - Clear To send
CS(B) - Clear To send
3
Local loopback
Remote loopback
Signal ground
ST(A) - Send timing
ST(B) - Send timing
Data module 2
Signal name
TT(A) - Terminal timing
TT(B) - Terminal timing
SD(A) - Send data
SD(B) - Send data
RD(A) - Received data
RD(B) - Received data
RS(A) - Request to send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to send (RTS)
CS(A) - Clear To send
CS(B) - Clear To send
Local loopback
Remote loopback
Signal ground
ST(A) - Send timing
ST(B) - Send timing
831022A3.CDR
Data module 1 provides timing to the C60 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data module 1 also provides
timing to data module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The data module pin numbers have been
omitted in the figure because they vary by manufacturer.
3.4.5.3 Transmit timing
The RS422 interface accepts one clock input for transmit timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz transmit
timing clock of the multiplexer interface is sampling the data in the center of the transmit data window. Therefore, it is
important to confirm clock and data transitions to ensure proper system operation. For example, the following figure
shows the positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit.
Figure 3-40: Clock and data transitions
Tx Clock
Tx Data
831733A1.CDR
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-33
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.4.5.4 Receive timing
The RS422 interface utilizes NRZI-MARK modulation code and therefore does not rely on an Rx clock to recapture data.
NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.
To recover the Rx clock from the data-stream, an integrated digital phase lock loop (DPLL) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is
driven by an internal clock, which is 16-times over-sampled, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a
data clock that can be used as the serial communication controller (SCC) receive clock.
3.4.6 RS422 and fiber interface
The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus fiberoptic interface configuration at 64 K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P,
and 74 modules are used in two-terminal with a redundant channel or three-terminal configurations where channel 1 is
employed via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber.
AWG 20-24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and ground the shield only at one end.
For the direct fiber channel, address power budget issues properly.
NOTICE
When using a laser interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed
maximum optical input power to the receiver.
7L, 7M, 7N,
7P, and 74
Figure 3-41: RS422 and fiber interface connection
RS422
communications
3
Clock
channel 1
Common
RS422
channel 1
Fiber
channel 2
Surge
+
–
COM
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
Tx2
~7a
~8b
~2b
~3b
~3a
~2a
~4b
~6a
Rx2
~8a
842777A2.CDR
The connections shown in the figure are for multiplexers configured as data communications equipment (DCE) units.
3.4.7 G.703 and fiber interface
The following figure shows the combined G.703 plus fiberoptic interface configuration at 64 kbps. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and
75 modules are used in configurations where channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer)
and channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting
the shield to pin 1a at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, address power budget issues properly. See previous
sections for details on the G.703 and fiber interfaces.
NOTICE
3-34
When using a laser interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the
maximum optical input power to the receiver.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
75, 7E, 7F, 7G,
G.703
and 7Q
communications
Figure 3-42: G.703 and fiber interface connection
G.703
channel 1
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Surge
Fiber
channel 2
~1a
~1b
~2a
~2b
~3a
~3b
Tx2
Rx2
842778A2.CDR
3.4.8 IEEE C37.94 interface
The UR-series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (module types 2G, 2H, 2I, 2J, 76, and 77) are designed to interface with
IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input and
output applications. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a
multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps,
where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication modules are either 64 kbps (with n fixed at 1) for 128 kbps (with
n fixed at 2). The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the
standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit
rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
•
IEEE standard — C37.94 for 1  128 kbps optical fiber interface (for 2G and 2H modules) or C37.94 for 2  64 kbps
optical fiber interface (for 76 and 77 modules)
•
Fiber optic cable type — 50 mm or 62.5 mm core diameter optical fiber
•
Fiber optic mode — multimode
•
Fiber optic cable length — up to 2 km
•
Fiber optic connector — type ST
•
Wavelength — 830 ±40 nm
•
Connection — as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports
the IEEE C37.94 standard. The figure shows the concept.
IEEE C37.94
fiber interface
Digital
multiplexer,
IEEE C37.94
compliant
UR-series
device
up to 2 km
842755A2.CDR
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-35
3
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a noncompliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard. The
following figure shows the concept.
IEEE C37.94
fiber interface
RS422
interface
UR-series
device
IEEE C37.94
converter
up to 2 km
Digital
multiplexer
with EIA-422
interface
842756A2.CDR
3
The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six switches to set the clock configuration. The following figure shows
the functions of these control switches.
Figure 3-43: Switches
Internal timing mode
Loop timing mode
(factory default)
842753A2.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, set the timing switch selection to internal
timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, set the timing selection to
loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.
The IEEE C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1.
With power to the relay off, remove the IEEE C37.94 module (type 2G, 2H, 2I, 2J, 76, or 77 module) as follows. Record
the original location of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct
slot.
2.
Simultaneously pull the ejector/inserter clips located at the top and bottom of each module in order to release the
module for removal.
3.
Remove the module cover screw.
4.
Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
5.
Set the timing selection switches (channels 1 and 2) to the required timing modes (see description earlier).
6.
Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
7.
Re-insert the IEEE C37.94 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged
position as the module is inserted smoothly into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is inserted fully.
3-36
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 3-44: IEEE C37.94 timing selection switch setting
Bottom cover
Ejector/inserter clip
FRONT
Channel 1
Timing selection
switches
Top cover
3
Channel 2
Cover screw
Ejector/inserter clip
REAR
831774A3.CDR
Modules shipped since January 2012 have status LEDs that indicate the status of the DIP switches, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3-45: Status LEDs
Tx1
CH1 Link/Activity LED
COMMS
Rx1
2B
C37.94SM
1300nm single-mode
ELED
2 channel
Tx1
Tx2
CH2 Link/Activity LED
REV. D
Technical support:
Tel: (905)294-6222
Fax: (905)201-2098
(NORTH AMERICA)
1 800 547-8629
Rx2
GE Multilin
Tx2
Made in Canada
CH1 Clock Configuration LED
CH2 Clock Configuration LED
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
842837A1.cdr
The clock configuration LED status is as follows:
•
Flashing green — loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-37
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
•
Flashing yellow — internal mode while receiving a valid data packet
•
Solid red — (switch to) internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet
The link/activity LED status is as follows:
•
Flashing green — FPGA is receiving a valid data packet
•
Solid yellow — FPGA is receiving a "yellow bit" and remains yellow for each "yellow bit"
•
Solid red — FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid
3.4.9 C37.94SM interface
3
The UR-series C37.94SM communication modules (2A and 2B) are designed to interface with modified IEEE C37.94
compliant digital multiplexers or IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converters that have been converted from 820 nm multimode fiber optics to 1300 nm ELED single-mode fiber optics. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link
for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard
provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94SM communication module is 64 kbps only
with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from
the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant
bit rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
•
Emulated IEEE standard — Emulates C37.94 for 1  64 kbps optical fiber interface (modules set to n = 1 or 64 kbps)
•
Fiber optic cable type — 9/125 m core diameter optical fiber
•
Fiber optic mode — Single-mode, ELED compatible with HP HFBR-1315T transmitter and HP HFBR-2316T receiver
•
Fiber optic cable length — Up to 11.4 km
•
Fiber optic connector — Type ST
•
Wavelength — 1300 ±40 nm
•
Connection — As per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that
supports C37.94SM, as shown.
C37.94SM
fiber interface
Digital
multiplexer
C97.94SM
UR-series
device
up to 10 km
842757A2.CDR
It also can be connected directly to any other UR-series relay with a C37.94SM module, as shown.
C37.94SM
fiber interface
UR-series
device with
C37.94SM
module
UR-series
device with
C37.94SM
module
up to 10 km
842758A2.CDR
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module has six switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The
following figure shows the functions of these control switches.
3-38
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 3-46: Switches
Internal timing mode
Loop timing mode
(factory default)
842753A2.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, set the timing switch selection to internal
timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, set the timing selection to
loop timing mode for connections to higher-order systems.
The C37.94SM communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1.
With power to the relay off, remove the C37.94SM module (module 2A or 2B) as follows. Record the original location of
the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2.
Simultaneously pull the ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release
the module for removal.
3.
Remove the module cover screw.
4.
Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
5.
Set the timing selection switches (channels 1 and 2) to the required timing modes (see description earlier).
6.
Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
7.
Re-insert the C37.94SM module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged
position as the module is inserted smoothly into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is inserted fully.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-39
3
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-47: C37.94SM timing selection switch setting
Bottom cover
Ejector/inserter clip
FRONT
Channel 1
Timing selection
switches
Top cover
3
Channel 2
Cover screw
Ejector/inserter clip
REAR
831774A3.CDR
Modules shipped since January 2012 have status LEDs that indicate the status of the DIP switches, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3-48: Status LEDs
Tx1
CH1 Link/Activity LED
COMMS
Rx1
2B
C37.94SM
1300nm single-mode
ELED
2 channel
Tx1
Tx2
CH2 Link/Activity LED
REV. D
Technical support:
Tel: (905)294-6222
Fax: (905)201-2098
(NORTH AMERICA)
1 800 547-8629
Rx2
GE Multilin
Tx2
Made in Canada
CH1 Clock Configuration LED
CH2 Clock Configuration LED
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
842837A1.cdr
The clock configuration LED status is as follows:
•
3-40
Flashing green — loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
ACTIVATE RELAY
•
Flashing yellow — internal mode while receiving a valid data packet
•
Solid red — (switch to) internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet
The link/activity LED status is as follows:
•
Flashing green — FPGA is receiving a valid data packet
•
Solid yellow — FPGA is receiving a "yellow bit" and remains yellow for each "yellow bit"
•
Solid red — FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid
3.5 Activate relay
The relay is in the default “Not Programmed” state when it leaves the factory. When powered up successfully, the "Trouble"
LED is on and the "In Service" LED is off. The relay in the “Not Programmed” state blocks signaling of any output relay. These
conditions remain until the relay is explicitly put in the “Programmed” state.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
When the relay is powered up, the "Trouble LED" is on, the "In Service" LED is off, and this message
displays, indicating that the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is safeguarding (output
relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. This
message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the "Programmed" state.
The relay can be activated on the front panel or in the EnerVista software.
To activate the relay using the front panel:
1.
Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message displays.
2.
Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the SECURITY message displays.
3.
Press the MESSAGE down arrow until the INSTALLATION message displays.
4.
Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message displays.
SETTINGS

 SETTINGS
 PRODUCT SETUP

 SECURITY


 DISPLAY
 PROPERTIES


 INSTALLATION


RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
5.
After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message displays, press a VALUE key to change the selection to
"Programmed."
6.
Press the ENTER key to save the change.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
7.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Programmed
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay is in "Programmed" state and the "In Service"
LED turns on.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-41
3
INSTALL SOFTWARE
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
To activate the relay using EnerVista software:
1.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Installation and change the Relay Settings field to "Programmed."
2.
Save the change.
3.6 Install software
3.6.1 EnerVista communication overview
The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 /
Ethernet ports.
3
To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, use a standard straight-through serial cable. Connect the DB-9 male end to
the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end to the computer COM2 port as described in the CPU Communication Ports
section earlier in this chapter.
Figure 3-49: Relay communication options
Regional
control
center
Remote
communications link
Ethernet
10/100 Mbps
Local
control
UR-series IED
EnerVista Engineer
GE Multilin F485
communications converter
Modem
RS485 115 kbps
RS232
EnerVista
Reports
EnerVista
Troubleshooting
Commissioning
Setting changes
842759A2.CDR
To communicate through the C60 rear RS485 port from a computer RS232 port, the GE Digital Energy RS232/RS485
converter box is required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a straight-through serial
cable. A shielded twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the C60 rear communications port. The
converter terminals (+, –, GND) are connected to the C60 communication module (+, –, COM) terminals. See the CPU
Communication Ports section in chapter 3 for details. The line is terminated with an R-C network (that is, 120 , 1 nF) as
described in this chapter.
3-42
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
INSTALL SOFTWARE
3.6.2 System requirements
The relay front panel or the EnerVista UR Setup software can be used to communicate with the relay. The software
interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the computer monitor can display more
information.
The minimum system requirements for the EnerVista software are as follows:
•
Pentium 4 (Core Duo recommended)
•
Windows XP with Service Pack 2 (Service Pack 3 recommended), Windows 7, or Windows Server 2008 Release 2 64-bit
•
1 GB of RAM (2 GB recommended)
•
500 MB free hard drive space (1 GB recommended)
•
1024 x 768 display (1280 x 800 recommended)
•
Serial port
•
Ethernet port of the same type as one of the UR CPU ports or a LAN connection to the UR
•
Internet access or a DVD drive
3
The following qualified modems have been tested to be compatible with the C60 and the EnerVista software:
•
US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686
•
US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2
•
PCTEL 2304WT V.92 MDC internal modem
3.6.3 Install software
After ensuring that the requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup software are met, install the software from the DVD, or
download EnerVista Launchpad software from http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin and install it.
To install the UR EnerVista software from the DVD:
1.
Insert the DVD into the DVD drive of your computer.
2.
Click the Install Now button and follow the instructions.
3.
When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4.
Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.
Figure 3-50: Adding a UR device in Launchpad window
5.
In the EnerVista Launch Pad window, click the Add Product button and select the appropriate product as follows.
Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software release, or select CD if you do not have an Internet
connection, then click the Add Now button to list software items for the product. EnerVista Launchpad obtains the
software from the Internet or DVD and automatically starts the installation program.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-43
CONFIGURE THE C60 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-51: Identifying the UR device type
3
6.
Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista UR Setup software is to be installed.
7.
Click the Next button to begin the installation. The files are installed in the directory indicated, and the installation
program automatically creates icons and adds an entry to the Windows start menu.
8.
Click Finish to complete the installation. The UR device is added to the list of installed intelligent electronic devices
(IEDs) in the EnerVista Launchpad window, as shown.
Figure 3-52: UR device added to Launchpad window
3.7 Configure the C60 for software access
You connect remotely to the C60 through the rear RS485 or Ethernet port with a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup
software. The C60 also can be accessed locally with a computer through the front panel RS232 port or the rear Ethernet
port using the Quick Connect feature.
•
To configure the C60 for remote access via the rear RS485 port, see the next section.
•
To configure the UR for remote access via the rear Ethernet port, see the Configure Ethernet Communication section.
•
To configure the C60 for local access with a computer through either the front RS232 port or rear Ethernet port, see
the Connect to the C60 section.
•
To discover automatically UR devices and configure the software for them, see the Automatic Discovery of UR Devices
section.
3-44
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
CONFIGURE THE C60 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS
3.7.1 Configure serial communication
A computer with an RS232 port and a serial cable are required. To use the RS485 port at the back of the relay, a GE Digital
Energy F485 converter (or compatible RS232-to-RS485 converter) is required. See the F485 instruction manual for details.
1.
Connect the computer to the F485 and the F485 to the RS485 terminal on the back of the UR device, or connect
directly the computer to the RS232 port on the front of the relay.
2.
In the EnerVista Launchpad software on the computer, select the UR device to start the software.
3.
Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, and click the Add Site button to define a new site.
4.
Enter a site name in the Site Name field. Optionally add a short description of the site along with the display order of
devices defined for the site. This example uses “Location 1” as the site name. When done, click the OK button. The new
site appears in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window.
5.
Click the Device Setup button, then select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window.
6.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
7.
Enter a name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.
8.
Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list. This displays a number of interface parameters that must be entered
for serial communications.
3
Figure 3-53: Configuring serial communication
9.
Enter the COM port used by the computer, the baud rate, and parity settings from the front panel SETTINGS  PRODUCT
SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  SERIAL PORTS menu, and the relay slave address setting from the front panel SETTINGS
 PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  MODBUS PROTOCOL  MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS menu in their respective
fields.
10. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the C60 and upload the order code to the software. If a
communications error occurs, ensure that the EnerVista UR Setup serial communications values entered in the
previous step correspond to the relay setting values.
11. Click the OK button when the relay order code has been received. The new device is added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.
The device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to the Connect to the C60 section to begin
communication.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-45
CONFIGURE THE C60 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.7.2 Configure Ethernet communication
Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay.
To set up the relay for Ethernet communications, you define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site. The
computer and UR device must be on the same subnet.
3
1.
Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
2.
Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site.
3.
Enter the desired site name in the “Site Name” field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along
with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we use “Location 2” as the site name. Click the
OK button when complete.
4.
The new site appears in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then select
the new site to re-open the Device Setup window.
5.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
6.
Enter the desired name in the “Device Name” field and a description (optional) of the site.
7.
Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This displays a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
Figure 3-54: Configuring Ethernet communication
8.
Enter the relay IP address specified in the front panel SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK
 IP ADDRESS in the IP Address field.
9.
Enter the relay slave address and Modbus port address values from the respective settings in the front panel SETTINGS
 PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL menu.
10. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the UR device and upload the order code. If an communications error
occurs, ensure that the three EnerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous steps correspond to the relay setting
values.
11. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device is added to the Site List window (or Online
window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the C60 section to
begin communications.
3-46
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
CONNECT TO THE C60
3.7.3 Automatic discovery of UR devices
The EnerVista UR Setup software can automatically discover and communicate to all UR-series IEDs located on an
Ethernet network.
Using the Discover button in the Device Setup window, a single click of the mouse triggers the software to detect
automatically any UR-series relays located on the network. The EnerVista UR Setup software then proceeds to configure all
settings and order code options in the window. This feature allows the user to identify and interrogate all UR-series devices
at a location.
To discover UR devices:
1.
In EnerVista, click the Device Setup button.
2.
In the window that opens, click the Discover button. If the required device is not found, add it manually as outlined
earlier.
3
Figure 3-55: Discover button to detect UR devices in network
3.8 Connect to the C60
There are four ways to the connect to the device, as follows:
•
RS232 port (outlined here)
•
RS485 port
•
Ethernet port (outlined here)
•
LAN
3.8.1 Connect to the C60 in EnerVista
For information on using the EnerVista software, see the Interfaces chapter.
To access the relay in EnerVista:
1.
Open the Settings > Product Setup > Display Properties window as shown. The window opens with a status
indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista UR Setup window.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-47
CONNECT TO THE C60
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-56: EnerVista window
Quick action hot links
3
Expand the site list by double-clicking
or selecting the +/– box.
Communications status indicators:
Green = OK
Red = No communications
UR icon = report is open
842743A3.CDR
2.
If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the
back of the relay and that the relay has been properly set up for communications (steps A and B earlier).
3.
If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, then a report (such as an oscillography or event record) is open.
Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.
4.
The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed.
3.8.1.1 Quick action hot links
The EnerVista UR Setup software has several quick action buttons to provide instant access to several functions that are
performed often when using URs. From the online window, users can select the relay to interrogate from a pull-down
window, then click the button for the action to perform. The following quick action functions are available:
•
View the event record
•
View the last recorded oscillography record
•
View the status of all C60 inputs and outputs
•
View all of the C60 metering values
•
View the C60 protection summary
•
Generate a service report
3.8.2 Use Quick Connect via the front panel RS232 port
To connect to the UR from a computer using a serial cable:
1.
Connect a nine-pin to nine-pin RS232 serial cable to the computer and the front panel RS232 port.
2.
Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE EnerVista DVD or
online from http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin). See the software installation section if not already installed.
3.
Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
4.
Click the Quick Connect button to open the window.
3-48
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
CONNECT TO THE C60
Figure 3-57: Quick Connect window to access a device
5.
Select the Serial interface and the correct COM Port, then click Connect.
6.
The EnerVista UR Setup software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named
“Quick Connect” and displays them on the left side of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly from the
C60 device. Use the Device Setup button to change the site names.
Each time that the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct
communications to the C60. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the C60 model
number.
3.8.3 Use Quick Connect via a rear Ethernet port
To use the Quick Connect feature to access the C60 from a computer through Ethernet, first assign an IP address to the
relay using the front panel keyboard.
1.
Press the MENU key until the Settings menu displays.
2.
Navigate to Settings  Product Setup  Communications  Network  IP Address Setting.
3.
Enter an IP address, for example “1.1.1.1,” and press the ENTER key to save the value.
4.
In the same menu, select the Subnet IP Mask setting.
5.
Enter a subnet IP address, for example “255.0.0.0,” and press the ENTER key to save the value.
Next, use an Ethernet cross-over cable to connect the computer to the rear Ethernet port. In case you need it, the
following figure shows the pinout for an Ethernet cross-over cable.
Figure 3-58: Ethernet cross-over cable PIN layout
2
1
3
4 5 6
7
8
END 1
Pin
Wire color
1
White/orange
2
Orange
3
White/green
4
Blue
5
White/blue
6
Green
7
White/brown
8
Brown
Diagram
END 2
Pin
Wire color
1
White/green
2
Green
3
White/orange
4
Blue
5
White/blue
6
Orange
7
White/brown
8
Brown
Diagram
842799A1.CDR
Now, assign the computer an IP address compatible with the relay’s IP address.
1.
From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-49
3
CONNECT TO THE C60
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
connections window.
3
2.
Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.
3.
Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list, and click the Properties button.
3-50
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
CONNECT TO THE C60
4.
Click the “Use the following IP address” box.
5.
Enter an IP address with the first three numbers the same as the IP address of the C60 relay and the last number
different (in this example, 1.1.1.2).
6.
Enter a subnet mask equal to the one set in the C60 (in this example, 255.0.0.0).
7.
Click the OK button to save the values.
Before continuing, test the Ethernet connection.
1.
Open a Windows console window, for example by selecting Start > Run from the Windows Start menu and typing
“cmd” or clicking the Start button and entering "cmd".
2.
Type the following command, substituting the IP address of 1.1.1.1 with yours:
3.
If the connection is successful, the system returns four replies similar to the following:
C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1
3
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
4.
Note that the values for time and TTL vary depending on local network configuration.
5.
If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
verify the physical connection between the C60 and the computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in
the Product Setup  Communications  Network  IP Address setting, then repeat step 2.
6.
If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
verify the physical connection between the C60 and the computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in
the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2.
7.
If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Destination host unreachable.
Destination host unreachable.
Destination host unreachable.
Destination host unreachable.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-51
CONNECT TO THE C60
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
verify the IP address is programmed in the local computer by entering the ipconfig command in the command
window.
C:\WINNT>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter <F4FE223E-5EB6-4BFB-9E34-1BD7BE7F59FF>:
Connection-specific DNS suffix. . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 1.1.1.2
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
C:\WINNT>
3
Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port, disable any configured proxy settings in Internet
Explorer.
1.
Start the Internet Explorer software.
2.
Select the Tools > Internet Options menu item and click the Connections tab.
3.
Click on the LAN Settings button to open the following window.
4.
Ensure that the “Use a proxy server for your LAN” box is not checked.
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the computer has been
disconnected from the C60 relay.
1.
Start the Internet Explorer software.
2.
Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
3-52
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
CONNECT TO THE C60
3.
Click the Quick Connect button to open the window.
4.
Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the C60, then click the Connect button. The
EnerVista UR Setup software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named “Quick
Connect” and displays them on the left side of the screen.
5.
Expand the sections to view data directly from the C60 device.
Each time that the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct
communications to the C60. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the C60 model
number.
When direct communications with the C60 via Ethernet is complete, make the following changes:
1.
From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network
connections window.
2.
Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item.
3.
Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.
4.
Set the computer to “Obtain a relay address automatically” as shown.
If the computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the computer has been
disconnected from the C60 relay.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-53
3
SET UP CYBERSENTRY AND CHANGE DEFAULT PASSWORD
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.9 Set up CyberSentry and change default password
If and when first using CyberSentry security, use the following procedure for set up.
3
1.
Log in to the relay as Administrator by using the VALUE keys on the front panel or through EnerVista connected serially
(so that no IP address is required). If logging in through EnerVista choose Device authentication. Enter the default
password "ChangeMe1#". Note that the "Lock relay" setting needs to be disabled in the Security > Supervisory menu.
When this setting is disabled, configuration and firmware upgrade are possible. By default, this setting is disabled.
2.
Enable the Supervisor role if you have a need for it.
3.
Make any required changes in configuration, such as setting a valid IP address for communication over Ethernet.
4.
Log out of the Administrator account by choosing None.
Next, device or server authentication can be chosen on the login screen, but the choice is available only in EnerVista. Use
device authentication to log in using the five pre-configured roles (Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, Observer).
When using a serial connection, only Device authentication is supported. When Server authentication is required,
characteristics for communication with a RADIUS server must be configured on the UR. This is possible only through the
EnerVista software. The RADIUS server itself also must be configured. At the end of this instruction manual, the appendix
called RADIUS Server gives an example of how to setup a simple RADIUS server. Once both the RADIUS server and the
parameters for connecting UR to the server have been configured, you can choose Server authentication on the login
screen of EnerVista.
Figure 3-59: Login screen for CyberSentry
During the commissioning phase, you have the option to bypass the use of passwords. Do so by enabling the Bypass
Access setting under Settings > Product Setup > Security > Supervisory. Be sure to disable this bypass setting after
commissioning the device.
You can change the password for any role either from the front panel or through EnerVista.
If using EnerVista, navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Security. Change the Local Administrator Password, for
example. It is strongly recommended that the password for the Administrator be changed from the default. Changing the
passwords for the other three roles is optional.
3-54
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
SET UP CYBERSENTRY AND CHANGE DEFAULT PASSWORD
Figure 3-60: Changing the default password
3
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-55
SET UP CYBERSENTRY AND CHANGE DEFAULT PASSWORD
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3
3-56
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C60 Breaker Protection System
Chapter 4: Interfaces
Interfaces
This chapter explains the EnerVista software interface, the front panel interface, and logic diagrams.
4.1 EnerVista software interface
4.1.1 Introduction
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and troubleshoot relay functions,
connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (offline) or connected
(online) to a UR device. In offline mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device. In online
mode, you communicate with the device in real-time.
The EnerVista UR Setup software is provided with every C60. This chapter outlines the EnerVista software interface
features. The EnerVista UR Setup Help File also provides details for getting started and using the software interface.
4.1.2 Settings files
The EnerVista software supports the following three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
•
In offline mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to relays
•
While connected to a communicating relay to modify directly any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then
save the settings to the relay
•
Create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while connected to the relay
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following types of relay settings:
•
Device definition
•
Product setup
•
System setup
•
FlexLogic
•
Grouped elements
•
Control elements
•
Inputs/outputs
•
Remote resources
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-1
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
•
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The following communications settings are not transferred to the C60 with settings files:
Modbus Slave Address
Modbus TCP Port Number
RS485 COM2 Baud Rate
RS485 COM2 Parity
COM2 Minimum Response Time
COM2 Selection
RRTD Slave Address
RRTD Baud Rate
IP Address
IP Subnet Mask
IP Routing
When a settings file is loaded to a C60 that is in-service, the following sequence occurs:
4
1.
The C60 takes itself out of service.
2.
The C60 issues a UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED major self-test error.
3.
The C60 closes the critical fail contact.
The Maintenance chapter outlines how to use a settings file in the .urs format for backup and restore.
4.1.3 Event viewing
While the interface is in either online or offline mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered parameters,
via one of the following:
•
Event recorder — The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in
chronological order from most recent to oldest
•
Oscillography — The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power
system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events
4.1.4 File support
The following support applies, where the Settings List is at the bottom left and the Site List is at the top left of the EnerVista
window:
•
Execution — Any EnerVista UR Setup file that is opened launches the application or provides focus to the already
opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a .urs extension) that had been removed from the Settings List
navigation menu, it is added back to the menu.
•
Drag and Drop — The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop
target for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and
any Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target.
New files that are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree, which is automatically sorted
alphabetically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items that are dropped in the selected
device menu in the Site List window are automatically sent to the online communicating device.
4.1.5 EnerVista main window
The EnerVista UR Setup software window has the following components:
1.
Title bar that shows the pathname of the active data view or the name of the software
2.
Main window menu bar
3.
Main window tool bar
4-2
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
4.
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
Site list / online window area
5.
Settings list / offline window area
6.
Software windows, with common tool bar
7.
Settings file data view windows, with common tool bar
8.
Workspace area with data view tabs
9.
Status bar
10. Quick action hot links
Figure 4-1: EnerVista UR Setup software window
2
7
6
1
3
10
4
4
5
9
8
842786A2.CDR
4.1.6 Settings templates
Settings file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An
example is a substation that has 10 similar feeders protected by 10 UR-series F60 relays.
In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical among devices. The templates feature allows
engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so that they are not available to users. For
example, these locked down settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and
concentrate on specific settings.
The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and be made available to field engineers
installing the devices. These are settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios.
The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings are visible in the EnerVista software. Settings
templates can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The
functionality is identical for both purposes.
Settings files conversion from previous firmware versions is supported.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-3
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
4.1.6.1 Enable the settings template
The settings file template feature is disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable the settings
template for UR settings files.
1.
Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Right-click the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The settings file template is now enabled and the file menus displayed in light blue. A message displays. The settings file is
now in template editing mode.
Alternatively, the settings template can also be applied to online settings, as follows.
1.
Select an installed device in the online window of the EnerVista UR Setup window.
2.
Right-click the selected device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
4
The software prompts for a template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be at
least four characters in length.
3.
Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode.
4.1.6.2 Edit the settings template
The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in
EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic equation editor settings are locked.
1.
Select an installed device or a settings file from the menu on the left side of the EnerVista UR Setup window.
2.
Right-click and select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to place the device in template editing mode.
3.
If prompted, enter the template password then click OK.
4.
Open the relevant settings window that contains settings to be specified as viewable.
By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of
the settings window also indicates that the EnerVista software is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the
phase time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.
4-4
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
Figure 4-2: Settings template with all settings specified as locked
5.
Specify the settings to make viewable by clicking them.
The setting available to view is displayed against a yellow background.
Figure 4-3: Settings template with two settings specified as editable
6.
Click the Save button to save changes to the settings template.
7.
Continue through any other settings window to specify all viewable settings.
4
4.1.6.3 Add password protection to a template
It is highly recommended that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security.
The following procedure describes how to add password protection to a settings file template.
1.
Select a settings file from the offline window on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup window.
2.
Select the Template Mode > Password Protect Template option.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-5
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
The software prompts for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.
3.
Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The settings file template is now secured with password protection.
When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation
step. It does not need to be added after the template is created.
NOTE
4
4.1.6.4 View the settings template
Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or
settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature:
•
Display only those settings available for editing
•
Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out
To display only settings available for editing:
1.
Select an installed device or a settings file from the left menu of the EnerVista UR Setup window.
2.
Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option.
3.
Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users are limited to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The effect of
applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown.
Figure 4-4: Applying templates using the View in Template Mode command
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via
the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve
settings be available.
842858A1.CDR
Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings menu, showing only the settings categories that contain
editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings menu is shown as follows.
4-6
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
Figure 4-5: Applying templates using the View in Template Mode settings command
Typical settings tree view without template applied.
Typical settings tree view with template applied via
the Template Mode > View In Template Mode
command.
842860A1.CDR
Use the following procedure to display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template.
1.
Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View All Settings option.
3.
Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
4
Once the template has been applied, users are limited to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings are
shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown as follows.
Figure 4-6: Applying templates using the View All Settings command
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via
the Template Mode > View All Settings command.
The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve
settings be available.
842859A1.CDR
4.1.6.5 Remove the settings template
It can be necessary at some point to remove a settings template. Once a template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and
it is necessary to define a new settings template.
1.
Select an installed device or settings file on the left side of the EnerVista UR Setup window.
2.
Right-click and select the Template Mode > Remove Settings Template option.
3.
Enter the template password and click OK to continue.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-7
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4.
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Verify that you want to remove the template by clicking Yes.
The EnerVista software removes all template information and all settings are available.
4.1.7 Secure and lock FlexLogic equations
The UR allows users to secure parts or all of a FlexLogic equation, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of
critical FlexLogic applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within
FlexLogic equations.
Secured FlexLogic equations remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device.
Locking can be tied to the serial number too.
4
4.1.7.1 Lock FlexLogic equation entries
To lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation:
1.
Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the
settings template feature.
2.
If prompted, enter a password.
3.
Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item.
By default, all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background. The icon on the
upper right of the window also indicates that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode.
4.
Specify which entries to lock by clicking them.
The locked entries display against a grey background as shown in the example.
Figure 4-7: Locking FlexLogic equation entries in Edit Mode
5.
Click the Save button to save and apply changes to the settings template.
6.
Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template.
7.
Apply a password to the template then click OK to secure the FlexLogic equation.
4-8
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
Once the template has been applied, users are limited to view and edit the FlexLogic entries not locked by the template.
The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic entries is shown here.
Figure 4-8: Locking FlexLogic entries through settings templates
Typical FlexLogic™ entries without template applied.
Typical FlexLogic™ entries locked with template via
the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
842861A1.CDR
The FlexLogic entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view and on the front panel display.
Figure 4-9: Secured FlexLogic in graphical view
4.1.7.2 Lock FlexLogic entries to the serial number
A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations also can be locked to a UR serial number. Once FlexLogic entries in a
settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a serial number.
1.
Right-click the setting file in the offline window area and select the Edit Settings File Properties item. The window
opens.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-9
4
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-10: Settings file properties window
4
2.
Enter the serial number of the C60 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.
3.
Click the OK button to apply the change.
The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic equations are now locked to the C60 device specified by the serial
number.
4.1.8 Settings file traceability
A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a C60 device have been
changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transferred to a C60 device, the date, time,
and serial number of the C60 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local computer. This
information can be compared with the C60 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised.
The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the C60
device or obtained from the C60 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability
information to the settings file.
Figure 4-11: Settings file traceability
1
SETTING FILE TRANSFERRED
TO UR-SERIES DEVICE
The serial number and last setting change date
are stored in the UR-series device.
The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer
date are added to the setting file when setting files
are transferred to the device.
Compare transfer dates in the setting file and the
UR-series device to determine if security
has been compromised.
4-10
2
SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE
SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND
ADDED TO SETTING FILE.
842864A2.CDR
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
With respect to the figure, the traceability feature is used as follows.
1.
The transfer date of a settings file written to a C60 is logged in the relay and can be viewed in the EnerVista software
or the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a settings file saved to a local computer is logged in the
EnerVista software.
2.
Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future indicates if any changes have
been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.
4.1.8.1 Settings file traceability information
The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they are sent to a UR device.
The UR serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup
offline window as shown in the example.
Figure 4-12: Device definition showing traceability data
Traceability data in settings
file device definition
4
842863A1.CDR
This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example.
Figure 4-13: Settings file report showing traceability data
Traceability data
in settings report
842862A1.CDR
4.1.8.2 Online device traceability information
The C60 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual
Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista online window as shown in the example.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-11
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-14: Traceability data in Actual Values window
Traceability data in online
device actual values page
842865A1.CDR
This information is also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION  SERIAL NUMBER
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION  LAST SETTING CHANGE
4.1.8.3 Additional traceability rules
The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature:
4
•
If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is
removed from the settings file
•
If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file
•
If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed
from the settings file
•
If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings
file
4.2 Front panel interface
This section explains use of the front panel.
4.2.1 Front panel display
Messages display on a backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. When the
keypad and display are not actively being used, the display defaults to user-defined messages. Any high-priority eventdriven message overrides the default messages and displays.
Settings files conversion from previous firmware versions is supported.
4.2.2 Front panel keypad
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is divided further into further submenus.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the submenus. The VALUE keys increment or decrement numerical setting values when
in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values can
be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advances to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point.
The HELP key can be pressed at any time for context-sensitive help messages.
The ENTER key stores setting values.
When entering an IP address on the front panel, key in the first sequence of the number, then press the • key for the
decimal place. For example, for 127.0.0.1, press 127, then •, then 0, then •, then 0, then •, then 1. To save the address, press
the ENTER key.
The figure shows the sequence to use to enter a setting. Subsequent sections provide more detail.
4-12
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-15: Front panel keypad use
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
1. Press to scroll top level:
SETTINGS
MENU
3. Press to scroll third level fields
HELP
MESSAGE
ESCAPE
4. Press to scroll through values
5. Press to save change
ENTER
VALUE
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
.
+/-
2. Press to scroll second level:
PRODUCT SETUP.
842231A1.cdr
4.2.3 Menu navigation
Press the MENU key to select a header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a
header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main headings:
•
Actual values
•
Settings
•
Commands
•
Targets
•
Factor Service
•
User displays (when enabled)
4.2.4 Menu hierarchy
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bars (), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar (). The header display pages represent the
highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE up and down arrow keys
move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE right
arrow from a header display displays specific information for the category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE
left arrow from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
Default values are indicated in this instruction manual in mixed case. In the example shown here, the default access level is
Restricted.
Highest level
Lowest level (setting value)
 SETTINGS
 PRODUCT SETUP

 SECURITY


ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted

 SETTINGS
 SYSTEM SETUP
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-13
4
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
4.2.4.1 Example
 ACTUAL VALUES
 STATUS
Press the MENU key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This page contains
system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display the other
actual value headers.

 SETTINGS
 PRODUCT SETUP
Press the MENU key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page contains
settings to configure the relay.

 SETTINGS
 SYSTEM SETUP
Press the MESSAGE down arrow to move to the next Settings page. This page contains settings
for System Setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE up and down arrows to display the other
setting headers and then back to the first Settings page header.

 SECURITY

From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE right arrow once to
display the first sub-header (Security).

4
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted

 SECURITY

Press the MESSAGE right arrow once more and this displays the first setting for Security.
Pressing the MESSAGE down arrow repeatedly displays the remaining setting messages for the
Security sub-header.
Press the MESSAGE left arrow once to move back to the first sub-header message.

 DISPLAY
 PROPERTIES
Pressing the MESSAGE down arrow displays the second setting sub-header associated with the
Product Setup header.

FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 10.0 s
Press the MESSAGE right arrow once more to display the first setting for Display Properties.
4.2.5 Changing settings
4.2.5.1 Entering numerical data
Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define
what values are acceptable for a setting.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 10.0 s
For example, select the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES  FLASH
MESSAGE TIME setting.

MINIMUM: 0.5
MAXIMUM: 10.0
Press the HELP key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the key again to view the
next context sensitive help message.
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
•
0 to 9 and decimal point — The relay numeric keypad works the same as a calculator. A number is entered one digit at
a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the MESSAGE left arrow or
pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
•
VALUE keys — The VALUE up arrow increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value
allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE up arrow again allows the setting selection to continue
upward from the minimum value. The VALUE down arrow decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to
4-14
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE down arrow again allows the setting selection to
continue downward from the maximum value.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 2.5 s
As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate numeric
keys in the sequence “2 . 5". The display message changes as the digits are being entered.

NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
Until ENTER is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Press ENTER to store the
new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation of the storing
process. Numerical values that contain decimal places are rounded-off if more decimal place digits
are entered than specified by the step value.
4.2.5.2 Entering enumeration data
Enumeration settings have data values that are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set has
two or more members.
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted," "Command," "Setting," and
"Factory Service."
4
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE up arrow displays the next selection while the
VALUE down arrow displays the previous selection.
ACCESS LEVEL:
Setting
If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting," press the VALUE keys until the proper selection displays.
Press HELP at any time for the context sensitive help messages.

NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
Changes are not registered by the relay until the ENTER key is pressed. Pressing ENTER stores the
new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation.
4.2.5.3 Entering alphanumeric text
Text settings have data values that are fixed in length, but user-defined in characters. They can be upper-case letters,
lower-case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.
There are several places where text messages can be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific
applications. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages.
For example, enter the text “Breaker #1”.
1.
Press the decimal point to enter text edit mode.
2.
Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
3.
Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4.
Press ENTER to store the text.
5.
If you have any problem, press HELP to view context sensitive help. Flash messages appear sequentially for several
seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing HELP displays how to edit and store new values.
4.2.6 Faceplate
4.2.6.1 Enhanced faceplate
The front panel consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional userprogrammable pushbuttons.
The faceplate is hinged to allow access to the removable modules.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-15
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-16: Enhanced faceplate
Five column LED indicator panel
Display
Keypad
Front panel
RS232 port
User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 16
4
842810A1.CDR
4.2.6.2 Standard faceplate
The front panel consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional userprogrammable pushbuttons.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over
the faceplate that must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following figure shows the horizontal
arrangement of the faceplate panel.
Figure 4-17: Standard horizontal faceplate
LED panel 1
LED panel 2
LED panel 3
Display
Front panel
RS232 port
Small user-programmable
(control) pushbuttons 1 to 7
User-programmable
pushbuttons 1 to 12
Keypad
827801A.DL
The following figure shows the vertical arrangement of the faceplate panel for relays ordered with the vertical option.
4-16
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-18: Standard vertical faceplate
GE Multilin
MENU
HELP
MESSAGE
ESCAPE
VALUE
ENTER
Display
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
.
+/-
1
3
5
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
2
4
6
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
Keypad
User-programmable
pushbuttons 1-6
LED panel 2
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE
IN SERVICE
VOLTAGE
TROUBLE
CURRENT
TEST MODE
FREQUENCY
TRIP
OTHER
ALARM
PHASE A
PICKUP
PHASE B
4
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
LED panel 1
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
USER 3
827830A3.CDR
4.2.7 LED indicators
4.2.7.1 Enhanced faceplate
The enhanced front panel display provides five columns of LED indicators. The first column contains 14 status and eventcause LEDs. The next four columns contain the 48 user-programmable LEDs.
The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these
latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS  INPUT/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu).
The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.
Figure 4-19: Typical LED panel for enhanced faceplate
842811A1.CDR
The status indicators in the first column are as follows:
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-17
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
•
IN SERVICE — This LED indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs, outputs, and internal systems are
OK, and that the device has been programmed
•
TROUBLE — This LED indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem
•
TEST MODE — This LED indicates that the relay is in test mode. For more information, see the Test Mode section in the
Settings chapter.
•
TRIP — This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as a trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; as such, a reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to reset.
•
ALARM — This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
•
PICKUP — This LED indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
The event-cause indicators in the first column are as follows.
Event-cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either
“Enabled” or “Latched.” If a protection element target setting is “Enabled,” then the corresponding event-cause LEDs
remain on as long as the operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target
setting is “Latched,” then the corresponding event-cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the
element is asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
4
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B, or C LEDs. This
includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, and so on. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate
operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B, or C LEDs.
•
VOLTAGE — This LED indicates voltage was involved
•
CURRENT — This LED indicates current was involved
•
FREQUENCY — This LED indicates frequency was involved
•
OTHER — This LED indicates a composite function was involved
•
PHASE A — This LED indicates phase A was involved
•
PHASE B — This LED indicates phase B was involved
•
PHASE C — This LED indicates phase C was involved
•
NEUTRAL/GROUND — This LED indicates that neutral or ground was involved
The user-programmable LEDs consist of 48 amber LED indicators in four columns. The operation of these LEDs is userdefined. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. Default labels are shipped in the label
package of every C60, together with custom templates. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used
to communicate with operators. See the User-Programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
4.2.7.2 Standard faceplate
The standard faceplate consists of three panels with LED indicators, keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is
used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions
can also be reset via the SETTINGS  INPUT/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is for connection to a
computer.
The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.
4-18
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-20: LED panel 1
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE
IN SERVICE
VOLTAGE
TROUBLE
CURRENT
TEST MODE
FREQUENCY
TRIP
OTHER
ALARM
PHASE A
PICKUP
PHASE B
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
USER 3
842781A1.CDR
Status indicators
•
IN SERVICE — Indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are fine, the
relay has been programmed
•
TROUBLE — Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem
•
TEST MODE — Indicates that the relay is in test mode. For more information, see the Test Mode section in the Settings
chapter.
•
TRIP — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; the reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
•
ALARM — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
•
PICKUP — Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
Event-cause indicators
Event-cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either
“Enabled” or “Latched.” If a protection element target setting is “Enabled,” then the corresponding event cause LEDs
remain on as long as operate the operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target
setting is “Latched,” then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the
element is asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B, or C LEDs. This
includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, and so on. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate
operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B, or C LEDs.
•
VOLTAGE — Indicates voltage was involved
•
CURRENT — Indicates current was involved
•
FREQUENCY — Indicates frequency was involved
•
OTHER — Indicates a composite function was involved
•
PHASE A — Indicates phase A was involved
•
PHASE B — Indicates phase B was involved
•
PHASE C — Indicates phase C was involved
•
NEUTRAL/GROUND — Indicates that neutral or ground was involved
User-programmable indicators
The second and third panels provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for
applying a customized label beside every LED is provided.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used
to communicate with operators. See the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-19
4
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-21: LED panels 2 and 3 (index template)
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
842782A1.CDR
Default labels for LED panel 2
The default labels are intended to represent the following:
•
4
GROUP 1...6 — The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group
•
BREAKER 1(2) OPEN — The breaker is open
•
BREAKER 1(2) CLOSED — The breaker is closed
•
BREAKER 1(2) TROUBLE — A problem related to the breaker has been detected
•
SYNCHROCHECK NO1(2) IN-SYNCH — Voltages have satisfied the synchrocheck element
•
RECLOSE ENABLED — The recloser is operational
•
RECLOSE DISABLED — The recloser is not operational
•
RECLOSE IN PROGRESS — A reclose operation is in progress
•
RECLOSE LOCKED OUT — The recloser is not operational and requires a reset
NOTE
Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support six
setting groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight setting
groups. Even though the LEDs have default labels, they are fully user-programmable.
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the
pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-programmable LEDs section of chapter 5. The
LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both panels as explained in
the next section.
Figure 4-22: LED panel 2 (default labels)
842784A1.CDR
4.2.8 Custom LED labeling
4.2.8.1 Enhanced faceplate
The following procedure requires these pre-requisites:
•
4-20
EnerVista UR Setup software is installed and operational
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
•
The C60 settings have been saved to a settings file
•
The UR front panel label cutout sheet (GE part number 1006-0047) has been downloaded from
http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/products/support/ur/URLEDenhanced.doc and printed
•
Small-bladed knife
To create custom LED labels for the enhanced front panel display:
1.
Start the EnerVista UR Setup software.
2.
Select the Front Panel Report item at the bottom of the navigation menu for the settings file. The front panel report
window displays.
Figure 4-23: Front panel report window
4
3.
Enter the text to appear next to each LED and above each user-programmable pushbutton in the fields provided.
4.
Feed the UR front panel label cutout sheet into a printer and press the Print button in the front panel report window.
5.
When printing is complete, fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels.
6.
Remove the UR label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures. These
tabs are used for removal of the default and custom LED labels.
Use the tool EXACTLY as outlined as follows, with the printed side containing the GE part number facing the
user.
NOTE
The label package shipped with every C60 contains the three default labels, the custom label template sheet, and the label
removal tool.
If the default labels are suitable for your application, insert them in the appropriate slots and program the LEDs to match
them. If you require custom labels, use the following procedures to remove the original labels and insert the new ones.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-21
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
To set up and use the label removal tool:
1.
Bend the tabs at the left end of the tool upwards as shown.
Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail as shown.
4
To remove the LED labels from the C60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels:
1.
4-22
Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath. Ensure that the bent tabs are pointing away from
the relay.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
2.
Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown. This attaches the label tool to the LED label.
3.
Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown.
4
4.
Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs, as shown.
To remove the user-programmable pushbutton labels from the C60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels:
1.
Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath, as shown. Ensure that the bent
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-23
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
tab points away from the relay.
2.
Slide the label tool under the user-programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown. This attaches the
label tool to the user-programmable pushbutton label.
3.
Remove the tool and attached user-programmable pushbutton label.
4.
Slide the new user-programmable pushbutton label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the
4
4-24
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
buttons.
4
4.2.8.2 Standard faceplate
Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated through a Microsoft Word file available from the following URL:
http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/products/support/ur/GET-8494A.doc
This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures
are contained in the downloadable file. The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text (x)
edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling.
1.
Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover (GE part number: 1501-0014).
F60
FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY
Push in
and gently lift
up the cover.
R
842771A1.CDR
2.
Pop out the LED module and/or the blank module with a screwdriver as shown. Be careful not to damage the plastic
covers.
( LED MODULE )
F60
FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY
( BLANK MODULE )
R
842722A1.CDR
3.
Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-25
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
4.
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Put the clear Lexan front cover back into place.
The following items are required to customize the display:
•
Printer
•
Microsoft Word 97 or later software for editing the template
•
1 each of: 8.5" x 11" white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (GE part number: 1516-0069), and a
custom module cover (GE part number: 1502-0015)
To customize the display:
4
1.
Open the LED panel customization template with Microsoft Word. Add text in places of the LED x text placeholders on
the template. Delete unused place holders as required.
2.
When complete, save the Word file to your computer for future use.
3.
Print the template(s) to a local printer.
4.
From the printout, cut-out the Background Template from the three windows, using the cropmarks as a guide.
5.
Put the Background Template on top of the custom display module (GE part number: 1513-0069) and snap the clear
custom module cover (GE part number: 1502-0015) over it and the templates.
4.2.9 Breaker control
The C60 can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker,
that can be presented on faceplate LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually
initiated from the faceplate keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic operand. A setting is provided to assign
names to each breaker; this user-assigned name is for the display of related flash messages. These features are provided
for two breakers; the user can use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.
It is assumed in the following discussion that the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1(2)  BREAKER
FUNCTION setting is "Enabled" for each breaker.
4.2.9.1 Control mode selection and monitoring
Installations can require that a breaker be operated in the three-pole only mode (3-pole), or in the one and three-pole (1pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as three-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open or closed
position. If the mode is selected as one-pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay. These inputs must be
in agreement to indicate the position of the breaker.
For the following discussion it is assumed that the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1(2)  BREAKER
1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL setting is “Enabled” for each breaker.
4.2.9.2 Faceplate (user key) control
After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user
cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state.
4.2.9.3 Control of two breakers
For the following setup example, the (Name) field represents the user-programmed variable name.
For this example, the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker 1 and breaker 2. The USER 1 key performs the
selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2 key manually closes the breaker, and
the USER 3 key manually opens the breaker.
4-26
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
ENTER COMMAND
PASSWORD
This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a COMMAND
PASSWORD is required, that is, if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and no commands have been
issued within the last 30 minutes.
Press USER 1
To Select Breaker
This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This message
displays for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again.
BKR1-(Name) SELECTED
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP
This message displays after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three possible actions
can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per the following items (1), (2) and (3).
(1)
USER 2 OFF/ON
To Close BKR1-(Name)
If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is pressed
again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an output relay to
close breaker 1.
(2)
USER 3 OFF/ON
To Open BKR1-(Name)
If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is pressed
again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an output relay to
open breaker 1.
(3)
BKR2-(Name) SELECTED
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP
If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different breaker is
selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1), (2) and (3). Repeatedly
pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers. Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2,
or 3 at any time cancels the breaker control function.
4.2.9.4 Control of one breaker
For this application, the relay is connected and programmed for breaker 1 only. Operation for this application is identical to
that described in the previous section for two breakers.
4.2.10 Change passwords
The information in this section refers to password security. For information on how to set the password for the first time or
change CyberSentry passwords, see the previous chapter or the Settings > Product Setup > Security > CyberSentry section
in the next chapter.
The C60 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.
Local access is defined as access to settings or commands via the faceplate. This includes both keypad entry and the
RS232 port. Remote access is defined as access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes
both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any change to the local or remote password enables this functionality.
When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the
corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the C60, the remote password must be used. If the
connection is to the RS232 port of the faceplate, the local password must be used.
There are two user security access levels, setting and command, for which you can set a password for each. Use of a
password for each level controls whether users can enter commands or change settings. Another option is to specify
setting and/or command access for individual user accounts.
•
•
Setting — Allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values:
–
Changing any setting
–
Test mode operation
Command — Restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following
operations:
–
Operating the breakers via faceplate keypad
–
Changing the state of virtual inputs
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-27
4
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
–
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Clearing the event records
–
Clearing the oscillography records
–
Clearing fault reports
–
Changing the date and time
–
Clearing the breaker arcing current
–
Clearing energy records
–
Clearing the data logger
–
Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states
To enter the initial setting or command password:
1.
Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the
display.
2.
Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the ACCESS LEVEL message appears on the display.
3.
Press the MESSAGE down arrow until the CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS message appears on the display.
4.
Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD or CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD message
appears on the display.
4
 SECURITY


ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted

 CHANGE LOCAL
 PASSWORDS

CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No

CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No

ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: ---------

ENCRYPTED SETTING
PASSWORD: ---------
5.
After the CHANGE...PASSWORD message appears on the display, press the VALUE up or down arrow to change the
selection to “Yes.”
6.
Press the ENTER key and the display prompts you to ENTER NEW PASSWORD.
7.
Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the ENTER key.
8.
When VERIFY NEW PASSWORD displays, re-type the password and press ENTER .
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: Yes
ENTER NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
VERIFY NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD
HAS BEEN STORED
9.
When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears, your new Setting (or Command) password is active.
4.2.11 Invalid password entry
By default, when an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the faceplate interface three times
within five minutes, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to “On” and the C60 does not allow settings or command
level access via the faceplate interface for five minutes.
4-28
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
By default, when an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via any external communications interface
three times within five minutes, the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to “On” and the C60 does not allow settings
or command access via the any external communications interface for five minutes. The REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic
operand is set to “Off” after five minutes for a Command password or 30 minutes for a Settings password.
These default settings can be changed in EnerVista under Settings > Product Setup > Security.
4.3 Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams in this instruction manual provide an overview of function and settings. A logic diagram is based on
•
Inputs-on the left side, which are setting and operands
•
Logical gates, which is Boolean algebra to combine logical lines using AND, OR, NOT, and other gates to get a new
logical state
•
Logical operators, which are timers, one-shot operations, latches, and so on
•
Outputs-on the right side, which are products of the manipulations with inputs, logical gates, and logical operators to
produce new operands and define the output state of the element
True and false values are denoted by 1 and 0 respectively. A function usually is high/on/enabled when 1.
Reading from right to left in the following diagram, the TRIP BUS 1 OP and TRIP BUS 1 PKP FlexLogic operands on the right side
are triggered when either the settings or reset latch in the middle of the diagram is triggered. When this applies, the TRIP
BUS 1 OP operand is triggered after the delay set by the TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY or TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY setting, while the
TRIP BUS 1 PKP operand initiates immediately. The settings or reset latch in the middle of the diagram is triggered as follows.
•
For the reset, one of three conditions are required to meet the OR requirement shown at the bottom left. That is, the
TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING setting must be 0=Disabled (which is negated by the NOT function to become 1=Enabled), output
from the TRIP BUS 1 RESET FlexLogic operand must be 1, or output from the RESET OP FlexLogic operand must be 1.
•
For the settings, one of 16 input conditions at the top left must be met for the OR, the TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION must be
Enabled, and the TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK output must output as 0, which is then negated/reversed by NOT to become 1.
Table 4-1: Logic diagram symbols
Symbol
Description
= Off
Output from FlexLogic operand, so user-defined
= Enabled
1 = Enabled and 0 = Disabled
OR
Any function input on the left side satisfies the condition
AND
All functions input on the left side are required to satisfy the condition

Not. Negates/reverses the output, for example 0 becomes 1.

Connection
S, R
Set, Reset
TPKP
Timer pickup. Triggered by the settings latch in the diagram.
TRST
Timer reset. Triggered by the reset latch in the diagram.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-29
4
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-24: Logic diagram
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1
SETTINGS
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2
= Off
Non-volatile,
set-dominant
***
OR
AND
S
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16
R
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
FUNCTION
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK
= Off
TPKP
Latch
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP
DELAY
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
DELAY
TRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
AND
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET OP
OR
842023A1.CDR
4
4-30
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C60 Breaker Protection System
Chapter 5: Settings
Settings
This chapter outlines front panel and/or software settings.
5.1 Settings menu
 SETTINGS
 PRODUCT SETUP


 SECURITY

See page 5-7

 DISPLAY
 PROPERTIES
See page 5-25

 CLEAR RELAY
 RECORDS
See page 5-27

 COMMUNICATIONS

See page 5-28

 MODBUS USER MAP

See page 5-81

 REAL TIME
 CLOCK
See page 5-82

 FAULT REPORTS

See page 5-86

 OSCILLOGRAPHY

See page 5-88

 DATA LOGGER

See page 5-90

 DEMAND

See page 5-91

 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 LEDS
See page 5-93

 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 SELF TESTS
See page 5-96
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-1
SETTINGS MENU
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

 CONTROL
 PUSHBUTTONS
See page 5-97

 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 PUSHBUTTONS
See page 5-98

 FLEX STATE
 PARAMETERS
See page 5-103

 USER-DEFINABLE
 DISPLAYS
See page 5-104

 DIRECT I/O

See page 5-106

 TELEPROTECTION

See page 5-113

 INSTALLATION

See page 5-114
 REMOTE RESOURCES




Access in EnerVista
See page 5-114
 SETTINGS
 SYSTEM SETUP

 AC INPUTS

See page 5-115

 POWER SYSTEM

See page 5-117

 SIGNAL SOURCES

See page 5-118

 BREAKERS

See page 5-120

 SWITCHES

See page 5-125

 FLEXCURVES

See page 5-128

 PHASOR MEASUREMENT
 UNIT
See page 5-135

 FLEXLOGIC
 EQUATION EDITOR
See page 5-172

 FLEXLOGIC
 TIMERS
See page 5-172

 FLEXELEMENTS

See page 5-172

 NON-VOLATILE
 LATCHES
See page 5-177

 SETTING GROUP 1

See page 5-178

 SETTING GROUP 2


 SETTING GROUP 3


 SETTING GROUP 4


 SETTING GROUP 5



5

 SETTINGS
 FLEXLOGIC


 SETTINGS
 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5-2
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SETTINGS MENU

 SETTING GROUP 6


 TRIP BUS

See page 5-214

 SETTING GROUPS

See page 5-216

 SELECTOR SWITCH

See page 5-217

 SYNCHROCHECK

See page 5-224

 DIGITAL ELEMENTS

See page 5-228

 DIGITAL COUNTERS

See page 5-231

 MONITORING
 ELEMENTS
See page 5-233

 AUTORECLOSE

See page 5-248

 CONTACT INPUTS

See page 5-262

 VIRTUAL INPUTS

See page 5-264

 CONTACT OUTPUTS

See page 5-264

 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

See page 5-267

 RESETTING

See page 5-268

 DIRECT INPUTS

See page 5-268

 DIRECT OUTPUTS

See page 5-269

 TELEPROT INPUTS

See page 5-272

 TELEPROT OUTPUTS

See page 5-273

 DCMA INPUTS

See page 5-274


 RTD INPUTS

See page 5-274


 DCMA OUTPUTS

See page 5-276

TEST MODE
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Isolated, Forcible
See page 5-279

TEST MODE FORCING:
On
Range: FlexLogic operand
See page 5-280

 FORCE CONTACT
 INPUTS
See page 5-281

 SETTINGS
 CONTROL ELEMENTS


 SETTINGS
 INPUTS / OUTPUTS


 SETTINGS
 TRANSDUCER I/O
 SETTINGS
 TESTING

C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5
5-3
INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

 FORCE CONTACT
 OUTPUTS
See page 5-281

 PMU
 TEST VALUES
See page 5-282
5.2 Introduction to elements
For URs, the term element is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The comparator is provided
with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to determine if the input is
within the defined range that sets the output to logic 1, also referred to as setting the flag. A single comparator can make
multiple tests and provide multiple outputs. For example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a pickup flag when the
current input is above the setting and sets an operate flag when the input current has been at a level above the pickup
setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators use analog actual values as the input.
The exceptions to this rule are digital elements, which use logic states as inputs.
NOTE
Elements are arranged into two classes, grouped and control. Each element classed as a grouped element is provided with
six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a grouped element is defined by
the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a control element is independent of the selected active
setting group.
5
The main characteristics of an element are shown on a logic diagram. This includes the inputs, settings, fixed logic, and the
output operands generated. The previous chapter explains how to read a logic diagram, and the abbreviations used in a
diagram are defined in the Abbreviations chapter.
Some settings are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities:
pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)
Where the current source is from a single current transformer (CT), the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary
current of the CT. Use the secondary current base to convert per-unit settings to/from a secondary current value, and use
the primary current base to convert to/from a primary current value.
Where the current source is the sum of two or more CTs with different nominal primary current, the primary base quantity
is the largest nominal primary current. For example, if CT1 = 300 / 5 A and CT2 = 100 / 1 A, then in order to sum these, CT2
is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the base quantity is 300 A primary, 5 A secondary for CT1, and 300/(100/1) = 3 A
secondary for CT2.
For voltage elements, the primary base quantity is the nominal phase-to-phase primary voltage of the protected system
provided that the VT ratio setting is set to the nominal ratio of the VTs and the secondary voltage setting is set to the
phase-to-phase voltage seen by the relay when the voltage of the protected system in nominal. The UR uses the
convention that nominal voltages in a three-phase system are phase-to-phase voltages.
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage, the base quantity is 13800 V. With 14400:120 V deltaconnected VTs, the secondary base quantity and secondary voltage setting is:
13800
--------------  120 = 115 V
14400
Eq. 5-1
For wye-connected VTs, the primary and secondary base quantities are as before, but the secondary voltage setting (here
a phase-to-ground value) is:
13800 120
--------------  -------- = 66.4 V
14400
3
Eq. 5-2
Many settings are common to most elements, outlined as follows:
5-4
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS
•
FUNCTION setting — This setting programs the element to operate when selected as “Enabled.” The factory default is
“Disabled.” Once “Enabled,” any element associated with the function becomes active and all options become
available.
•
NAME setting — This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.
•
SOURCE setting — This setting is used to select the AC source to be monitored. See the Introduction to AC Sources
section later.
•
PICKUP setting — For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or
below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings can be provided to define the
range of the measured parameters that cause the element to pick up.
•
PICKUP DELAY setting — This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the pickup
and operate output states.
•
RESET DELAY setting — This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the
Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.
•
BLOCK setting — The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or “flag not set.” The comparator
remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN
input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise
the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control.
•
TARGET setting — This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to "Disabled,"
no target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to
“Self-Reset,” the target message and LED indication follow the operate state of the element and self-resets once the
operate element condition clears. When set to “Latched,” the target message and LED indication remains visible after
the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET command is received by the relay.
•
EVENTS setting — This setting is used to control whether the pickup, dropout, or operate states are recorded by the
event recorder. When set to “Disabled,” element pickup, dropout, or operate are not recorded as events. When set to
“Enabled,” events are created for:
(Element) PKP (pickup)
(Element) DPO (dropout)
(Element) OP (operate)
The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to
the dropout state (logic 0). This can happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not 0.
5.2.1 Introduction to AC sources
5.2.1.1 Background
A mechanism called a source configures the routing of CT and VT input channels to measurement sub-systems. Sources, in
the context of UR series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one source contains all
the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given source can contain all or some of
the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages, and an auxiliary voltage
from a single VT for checking for synchronism.
The basic idea of an AC source is to select a point on the power system where the voltages and currents are of interest. To
illustrate the concept of sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme that follows. In
this application, the current flows as shown by the arrows. Some current flows through the upper bus bar to some other
location or power equipment, and some current flows into transformer winding 1. The current into winding 1 is the phasor
sum (or difference) of the currents in CT1 and CT2 (whether the sum or difference is used depends on the relative polarity of
the CT connections). The same considerations apply to transformer winding 2. The protection elements require access to
the net current for transformer protection, but some elements can need access to the individual currents from CT1 and
CT2.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-5
5
INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-1: Breaker-and-a-half scheme
CT1
through current
CT2
Winding 1
current
UR-series
relay
Winding 1
Power
transformer
Winding 2
CT3
CT4
827791A3.CDR
In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of
all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected can flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to
perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series of relays, provisions
have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the UR device where grouping, ratio correction, and
summation are applied internally via configuration settings.
5
A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protection device, for
example as additional information to calculate a restraint current, or to allow the provision of additional protection
features that operate on the individual currents, such as breaker failure.
Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user
to select which sets of CT inputs are to be added to form the net current into the protected device.
The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an AC source. This source can be given a specific name through
the settings and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform. Individual names can be
given to each source to help identify them for later use. For example, in the scheme shown in the preceding figure, the user
configures one source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this source as “Wdg1 I.”
Once the sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the
protection elements and as metered quantities.
5.2.1.2 CT/VT module configuration
CT and voltage transformer (VT) input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/
neutral/other voltage, phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform
RMS levels, fundamental frequency phasors, symmetrical components, and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed
by the hardware in each channel. These modules can calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module.
A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the
module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows. Channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are always provided as a group,
hereafter called a “bank,” and all four are either current or voltage, as are channels 5, 6, 7, and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6,
7 are arranged as phase A, B, and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage.
Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels,
and from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows.
Increasing slot position letter -->
CT/VT module 1
CT/VT module 2
CT/VT module 3
< bank 1 >
< bank 3 >
< bank 5 >
< bank 2 >
< bank 4 >
< bank 6 >
5-6
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The UR platform allows for a maximum of six sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The result
of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of
sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is as follows.
Item
Maximum number
CT/VT Module
2
CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel)
4
VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel)
2
5.2.1.3 CT/VT input channel configuration
Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are generated
automatically from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is assigned automatically to each bank
of channels in a given product. The bank naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by
the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the
slot in which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5.
See the HardFiber instruction manual for designations of HardFiber voltage and current banks.
For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents
the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the three channels.
Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and it displays them
in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described earlier) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1,
F5, M1, M5, U1, and U5.
5
5.3 Product setup
5.3.1 Security
5.3.1.1 Security overview
The following security features are available:
•
Password security — Basic security present by default
•
EnerVista security — Role-based access to various EnerVista software screens and configuration elements. The
feature is present by default in the EnerVista software.
•
CyberSentry security — Advanced security available as a software option. When purchased, the options are
automatically enabled, and the default Password security and EnerVista security are disabled.
Lost password
If all passwords are lost, recovery is possible by resetting the unit to default values. Note that the relay is reset to default
values, not just the passwords.
To reset the unit after a lost password:
1.
Email GE customer service at multilin.tech@ge.com with the serial number and using a recognizable corporate email
account. Customer service provides a code to reset the relay to the factory defaults.
2.
Enter the reset code on the front panel, under COMMANDS  RELAY MAINTENANCE  SERVICE COMMAND.
3.
Change the default password of ChangeMe1# as outlined in the Set Up CyberSentry and Change Default Password
section at the end of the Installation chapter.
Password requirements
A user account requires an alpha-numeric password that meets the following requirements:
•
Password is case-sensitive
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-7
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
•
Password cannot contain the user account name or parts of the user account that exceed two consecutive
characters
•
Password must be 6 to 20 characters in length
•
Password must contain characters from three of the following four categories:
–
English uppercase characters (A through Z)
–
English lowercase characters (a through z)
–
Base 10 digits (0 through 9)
–
Non-alphabetic characters (for example, ~, !, @, #, $,%, &)
5.3.1.2 Password security
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY
 SECURITY

5

ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,
Factory Service (for factory use only)

 CHANGE LOCAL
 PASSWORDS
See page 5-9

 CHANGE REMOTE
 PASSWORDS
See page 5-10

 ACCESS
 SUPERVISION
See page 5-10

 DUAL PERMISSION
 SECURITY ACCESS
See page 5-11

PASSWORD ACCESS:
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The C60 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.
Local access is defined as access to settings or commands via the faceplate. This includes both keypad entry and the
RS232 port. Remote access is defined as access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes
both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any change to the local or remote password enables this functionality.
ACCESS LEVEL — The "Restricted" option means that settings and commands can be accessed, but there is no access to
factory configuration. Access automatically reverts to the Restricted level according to the access level timeout setting
values. The access level is set to Restricted when control power is cycled.
The "Factory Service" level is not available and intended for factory use only.
There are two user security access levels, setting and command, for which you can set a password for each. Use of a
password for each level controls whether users can enter commands or change settings. Another option is to specify
setting and/or command access for individual user accounts.
•
•
5-8
Setting — Allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values:
–
Changing any setting
–
Test mode operation
Command — Restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following
operations:
–
Operating the breakers via faceplate keypad
–
Changing the state of virtual inputs
–
Clearing the event records
–
Clearing the oscillography records
–
Clearing fault reports
–
Changing the date and time
–
Clearing the breaker arcing current
–
Clearing energy records
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
–
Clearing the data logger
–
Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states
When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the
corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the C60, the remote password must be used. If the
connection is to the RS232 port of the faceplate, the local password must be used.
The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either by
the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command
sessions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout.
The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic operands:
•
ACCESS LOC SETG OFF — Asserted when local setting access is disabled
•
ACCESS LOC SETG ON — Asserted when local setting access is enabled
•
ACCESS LOC CMND OFF — Asserted when local command access is disabled
•
ACCESS LOC CMND ON — Asserted when local command access is enabled
•
ACCESS REM SETG OFF — Asserted when remote setting access is disabled
•
ACCESS REM SETG ON — Asserted when remote setting access is enabled
•
ACCESS REM CMND OFF — Asserted when remote command access is disabled
•
ACCESS REM CMND ON — Asserted when remote command access is enabled
A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of the remote and local security
operands listed.
NOTE
5
PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS — This setting allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.
Change local passwords
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
 CHANGE LOCAL
 PASSWORDS

CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes

CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes

ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: ----------
Range: 0 to 9999999999
Note: ---------- indicates no password

ENCRYPTED SETTING
PASSWORD: ----------
Range: 0 to 9999999999
Note: ---------- indicates no password
As outlined in the previous section, there are two user security access levels, setting and command. Use of a password for
each level controls whether users can enter commands or change settings.
Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE
SETTING PASSWORD setting is programmed to “Yes” via the front panel interface, the following message sequence is
invoked:
1.
ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
2.
VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
3.
NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.
To gain write access to a “Restricted” setting, program the ACCESS LEVEL setting in the main security menu to “Setting” and
then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the
password is correctly entered, access is allowed. Access automatically reverts to the “Restricted” level according to the
access level timeout setting values and when power is cycled.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-9
PRODUCT SETUP
NOTE
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands
and settings.
If a remote connection is established, local passcodes are not visible.
Change remote passwords
Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access, which are explained in the previous
section.
To set the command or setting password:
1.
In the EnerVista software or from the front panel, navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Security menu item to open
the remote password settings window.
2.
Click the command or setting password Change button.
3.
Enter the new password in the New Password field. Requirements are outlined in the Password Requirements section
earlier in this chapter. When an original password has already been used, enter it in the Enter Password field and click
the Send Password to Device button.
4.
Re-enter the password in the Confirm Password field.
5.
Click the OK button. The password is checked to ensure that it meets requirements.
5
If you establish a local (serial) connection to the relay, you cannot view remote passcodes.
NOTE
Access supervision
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  ACCESS SUPERVISION
 ACCESS
 SUPERVISION

 ACCESS LEVEL
 TIMEOUTS
See below

INVALID ATTEMPTS
BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3
Range: 2 to 5 in steps of 1

PASSWORD LOCKOUT
DURATION: 5 min
Range: 5 to 60 minutes in steps of 1
The following access supervision settings are available.
INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT — This setting specifies the number of times that an incorrect password can be entered
within a three-minute time span before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED or REMOTE ACCESS DENIED
FlexLogic operands are set to “On.” These operands are returned to the “Off” state upon expiration of the lockout.
PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION — This setting specifies the time that the C60 locks out password access after the number
of invalid password entries specified by the INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT setting has occurred.
5-10
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The C60 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. If password verification fails while accessing a
password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic operand is asserted.
The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be used to
protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS  RESET UNAUTHORIZED ALARMS
command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, password-protect the Command level. The operand does not
generate events or targets.
If events or targets are required, the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand can be assigned to a digital element programmed with
event logs or targets enabled.
The following table outlines access level timeout settings.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  ACCESS SUPERVISION  ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS
 ACCESS LEVEL
 TIMEOUTS

COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS
TIMEOUT: 5 min
Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1

SETTING LEVEL ACCESS
TIMEOUT: 30 min
Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the Restricted access level.
Note that the access level is set to Restricted when control power is cycled.
COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT — This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to
return to Restricted access from the Command password level.
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT — This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return
to Restricted access from the Command password level.
5
Dual-permission security access
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
 DUAL PERMISSION
 SECURITY ACCESS

LOCAL SETTING AUTH:
On
Range: selected FlexLogic operands (see below)

REMOTE SETTING AUTH:
On
Range: FlexLogic operand

ACCESS AUTH
TIMEOUT: 30 min.
Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
This feature provides a mechanism to prevent unauthorized or unintended upload of settings to a relay through the local
or remote interface.
The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only.
•
LOCAL SETTING AUTH — This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision. Valid
values for the FlexLogic operands are either “On” (default) or any physical “Contact Input ~~ On” value.
If this setting is “On,“ then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this
setting is any contact input on FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (on) prior to providing the local
setting password to gain setting access.
If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain
setting access, then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message displays on the front panel.
If this setting is "Off," firmware upgrades are blocked. If this setting is "On," firmware upgrades are allowed.
•
REMOTE SETTING AUTH — This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interface) setting access supervision.
If this setting is “On” (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is
required. If this setting is “Off,” then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is
provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to
providing the remote setting password to gain setting access.
If this setting is "Off," firmware upgrades are blocked. If this setting is "On," firmware upgrades are allowed.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-11
PRODUCT SETUP
•
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT — This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable
when the LOCAL SETTING AUTH setting is programmed to any operand except “On.” The state of the FlexLogic operand
is monitored continuously for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer
programmed with the ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is
immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the
timeout is restarted. The status of this timer updates every five seconds.
The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product
Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.
5
The Remote Settings Authorized setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interface) setting access supervision. If this
setting is “On” (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is required).
If this setting is “Off,” then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is provided. If this
setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (on) prior to providing the remote setting
password to gain setting access.
The Access Authorized Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. It applies when the Remote
Settings Authorized setting is programmed to any operand except “On” or “Off.” The state of the FlexLogic operand is
continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is permitted, and the timer
programmed with the Access Authorized Timeout setting value is started. When this timer expires, remote setting access
is denied immediately. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the timeout
is restarted. The status of this timer updates every five seconds.
5.3.1.3 EnerVista security
Enabling the security management system
The EnerVista security system allows an administrator to manage access privileges of multiple users of EnerVista.
It is disabled by default to allow the administrator to access EnerVista software immediately after installation. When
security is disabled, all users have administrator access. GE recommends enabling the EnerVista security before placing
the device in service.
5-12
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
To enable the security system and require password use:
1.
Select the Security > User Management menu item to open the user management window.
2.
Check the Enable Security check box in the lower-left corner to enable the security management system.
NOTE
If you force password entry by using this feature, ensure that you know the Administrator password. If you do
not know the password and are locked out of the software, contact GE Digital Energy for the default password
or a UR device. When using CyberSentry, the default password is "ChangeMe1#".
Security is now enabled for the EnerVista UR Setup software. Upon starting the software, users are now required to enter a
username and password.
Add a new user account
The following pre-requisites are required to add user accounts to the EnerVista security management system:
•
The user adding the account must have administrator rights
•
The EnerVista security management system must be enabled (previous section)
To add a user account:
1.
Select the Security > User Management item from the top menu to open the user management window.
2.
Enter a username in the User field. The username must be 4 to 20 characters in length.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-13
5
PRODUCT SETUP
3.
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Select the user access rights by enabling the check box of one or more fields.
The table outlines access rights.
Table 5-1: Access rights summary
5
4.
Field
Description
Delete Entry
Deletes the user account when exiting the user management window
Actual Values
Allows the user to read actual values
Settings
Allows the user to read setting values
Commands
Allows the user to execute commands
Event Recorder
Allows the user to use the digital fault recorder
FlexLogic
Allows the user to read FlexLogic values
Update Info
Allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of the Settings, Event
Recorder, and FlexLogic check boxes are enabled by themselves, the user is granted read access. When any
of them are enabled in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and write access. The
user is not granted write access to functions that are not checked, even if the Update Info field is enabled.
Admin
The user is an EnerVista UR Setup administrator and has all of the administrative rights. Exercise caution
when granting administrator rights.
Click OK to add the user account to the system.
Modify user privileges
The following pre-requisites are required to modify user privileges in the EnerVista security management system:
•
The user modifying the privileges must have administrator rights
•
The EnerVista security management system must be enabled (the Enable Security check box is enabled)
To modify user privileges:
1.
Select the Security > User Management item from the top menu to open the user management window.
2.
Locate the username in the User field.
5-14
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
3.
PRODUCT SETUP
Modify the user access rights by enabling or disabling one or more of the check boxes.
The table outlines access rights.
Table 5-2: Access rights summary
4.
Field
Description
Delete Entry
Deletes the user account when exiting the user management window
Actual Values
Allows the user to read actual values
Settings
Allows the user to read setting values
Commands
Allows the user to execute commands
Event Recorder
Allows the user to use the digital fault recorder
FlexLogic
Allows the user to read FlexLogic values
Update Info
Allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of the Settings, Event
Recorder, and FlexLogic check boxes are enabled by themselves, the user is granted read access. When any
of them are enabled in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and write access. The
user is not granted write access to functions that are not checked, even if the Update Info field is checked.
Admin
The user is an EnerVista UR Setup administrator and has all of the administrative rights. Exercise caution
when granting administrator rights.
5
Click OK to save the changes.
5.3.1.4 CyberSentry security
The EnerVista software provides the means to configure and authenticate the C60 access using either a server or the
device. Access to functions depends on user role.
The login screen of EnerVista has two options for access to the C60, these being Server and Device authentication.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-15
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-2: Login screen for CyberSentry
When the "Server" Authentication Type is selected, the C60 uses the RADIUS server and not its local authentication
database to authenticate the user.
When the "Device" button is selected, the C60 uses its local authentication database and not the RADIUS server to
authenticate the user. In this case, it uses built-in roles (Administrator, Engineer, Supervisor, Operator, Observer), as login
accounts and the associated passwords are stored on the C60 device. In this case, access is not user-attributable. In cases
where user-attributable access is required, especially for auditable processes for compliance reasons, use server
authentication (RADIUS) only.
No password or security information is displayed in plain text by the EnerVista software or the UR device, nor are they ever
transmitted without cryptographic protection.
5
NOTE
Only (TCP/UDP) ports and services that are needed for device configuration and for customer enabled features
are open. All the other ports are closed. For example, Modbus is on by default, so its TCP port 502, is open. But if
Modbus is disabled, port 502 is closed. This function has been tested and no unused ports have been found
open.
CyberSentry settings through EnerVista
CyberSentry security settings are configured under Device > Settings > Product Setup > Security.
5-16
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-3: CyberSentry security panel
5
For the Device > Settings > Product Setup > Supervisory option, the panel looks like the following.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-17
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-4: Supervisory panel
5
For the Security panel, the following settings are available.
Table 5-3: RADIUS server settings
Setting name
Description
Primary RADIUS IP
Address
Primary
Authentication Port
Maximum
Default
Units
Minimum
permission
0.0.0.0
IP address of the main RADIUS server.
Default value indicates no Primary
RADIUS server is configured, and hence
RADIUS is disabled.
223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
-
Administrator
RADIUS authentication port
1
65535
1812
-
Administrator
1
65535
1813
-
Administrator
Primary Accounting RADIUS accounting port
Port
Minimum
An identifier that specifies RADIUS
vendor-specific attributes used with the
protocol
RADIUS
Authentication
(Shared) Secret
Shared secret used in authentication. It
displays as asterisks. This setting must
meet the CyberSentry password
requirements.
RADIUS
Authentication
Method
Authentication method used by RADIUS EAP-TTLS
server. Currently fixed to EAP-TTLS.
EAP-TTLS
Timeout
Timeout in seconds between retransmission requests
0
Retries
Number of retries before giving up
0
5-18
Administrator
Value that
represents
General
Electric
Vendor ID
See the following N/A
See the
password section
Password
Requirements for requirements
section earlier
in this chapter
-
Administrator
EAP-TTLS
-
Administrator
9999
10
sec
Administrator
9999
3
-
Administrator
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Setting name
Description
Minimum
Maximum
Confirm RADIUS
Authentication
(Shared) Secret
Confirmation of the shared secret. The
entry displays as asterisks.
245 characters
See the
Password
Requirements
section
Default
Units
Minimum
permission
N/A
-
Administrator
Table 5-4: General security settings
Setting name
Description
Minimum
Maximum Default
Units
Minimum
permission
Session Lockout
Number of failed authentications before the
device blocks subsequent authentication
attempts for the lockout period
0 (lockout
disabled)
99
3
-
Administrator
Session Lockout
Period
The period in minutes that a user is prevented 0 (no period)
from logging in after being locked out
9999
3
min
Administrator
Syslog Server IP
Address
The IP address of the target Syslog server to
which all security events are transmitted
0.0.0.0
223.255.
255.254
0.0.0.0
-
Administrator
Syslog Server Port
Number
The UDP port number of the target syslog
server to which all security events are
transmitted
1
65535
514
-
Administrator
Device
Authentication
Disabled
When enabled, local Device authentication
with roles is allowed. When disabled, the UR
only authenticates to the AAA server (RADIUS).
NOTE: Administrator and Supervisor (if still
enabled) remain active even after Device
authentication is disabled. The only permission
for local Administrator is to re-enable Device
authentication when Device authentication is
disabled. To re-enable Device authentication,
the Supervisor unlocks the device for setting
changes, and then the Administrator can reenable Device authentication.
Enabled
Enabled
-
Administrator
Disabled
Indicates if the device receives firmware
upgrades. If Enabled and the firmware
upgrade attempt is made, the device denies
the upgrade and displays an error message
that the lock is set. On each firmware upgrade,
this setting goes back to the default.
Enabled
Enabled
-
Administrator
Enabled
Disabled
-
Supervisor
(Administrator
when Supervisor
is disabled)
Firmware Lock
(via Lock Relay)
5
The Lock Relay setting blocks settings and
firmware updates.
Factory Service
Mode
When enabled, the device can go into factory
service mode. To enable, Supervisor
authentication is necessary.
Restore to Defaults Sets the device to factory defaults
Supervisor Role
Disabled
No
When enabled, the Supervisor role is active. To Disabled
enable, Administrator authentication is
necessary. When disabled, the Supervisor role
is inactive. To disable, Supervisor
authentication is necessary.
Yes
No
-
Administrator
Enabled
Enabled
-
Administrator to
enable and
Supervisor to
disable
RADIUS user names Ensures that RADIUS user names are not the
same as local/device role names
See RADIUS
server
documents
See
RADIUS
server
document
s
-
Administrator
Password
See the
Password
Requirements
section earlier
in this chapter
Change
See the
following Me1#
password
section for
requireme
nts
Text
The specified
role and
Administrator,
except for
Supervisor,
where it is only
itself
Local/device roles except for Observer are
password-protected. All RADIUS users are
password-protected.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-19
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Table 5-5: Security alarm settings
Setting name
Description / Details
Min
Max
Default
Units
Minimum
permissions
Failed
Authentications
A threshold number indicating when an alarm
is set off to indicate too many failed
authentication attempts
0
99
(disabled)
3
-
Administrator
Firmware Lock
Disabled
A value indicating if the device can receive a
firmware upgrade. If Enabled and a firmware
upgrade attempt is made, the device alarm
activates. If Disabled, the device alarm does not
activate. On each firmware upgrade this setting
goes back to the default.
Enabled Enabled
-
Administrator
Settings Lock
A value indicating if the device can accept any Disabled
settings changes. If Enabled and a settings
change attempt is made, the device alarm
activates. If Disabled, the device alarm does not
activate.
Enabled Enabled
-
Supervisor
(Administrator if
Supervisor has
been disabled)
CyberSentry settings through the front panel
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY
 SECURITY

5

LOGIN:
None
Range: Administrator, Engineer, Supervisor,
Operator, Factory (for factory use only), None

 CHANGE LOCAL
 PASSWORDS
See page 5-21

 SESSION
 SETTINGS
See page 5-21

 RESTORE DEFAULTS

See page 5-21

 SUPERVISORY

See page 5-22

SYSLOG IP ADDRESS:
0.0.0.0
Range: 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255

SYSLOG PORT NUMBER:
514
Range: 1 to 65535
LOGIN — This setting is applicable for Device authentication only. This setting allows a user to log in with a specific role, as
outlined here. For the Supervisor role, enable the “Supervisor Role” setting.
Whenever a new role is logged in, the user is prompted to enter a password. Passwords must obey the requirements
specified earlier in the chapter in the Password Requirements section.The UR device supports five roles. Roles have their
corresponding passwords, except the Observer role, which does not require a password.
The roles are defined as follows:
•
Administrator — Complete read/write access to all settings and commands. This role does not allow concurrent
access. This role has an operand to indicate when it is logged on.
•
Engineer — Complete read/write access to all settings and commands except configuring Security settings and
firmware upgrades. This role does not allow concurrent access.
•
Operator — The Operator has read/write access to all settings under the Commands menu/section. This role does not
exist offline.
•
Supervisor — This is only an approving role. This role’s authentication commits setting changes submitted by
Administrator or Engineer. The Supervisor role authenticates to unlock the UR relay for setting changes and not
approve changes after the fact. Only a Supervisor can set the Settings Lock and Firmware Lock in the Security
settings. This role also has the ability to forcefully log off any other role and clear the security event log. This role can
also be disabled, but only through a Supervisor authentication. When this role is disabled its permissions are assigned
to the Administrator role.
5-20
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
•
PRODUCT SETUP
Observer — This role has read-only access to all C60 settings. This role allows unlimited concurrent access but it has
no download access to any files on the device. Observer is the default role if no authentication has been done to the
device. This role displays as "None" on the front panel.
The Factory service role is not available. It is for factory use only.
NOTE
Change local passwords
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
 CHANGE LOCAL
 PASSWORDS

LOGIN:
None
Range: 20 alphanumeric characters

NEW PASSWORD:
Range: 20 alphanumeric characters

CONFIRM PASSWORD:
Range: 20 alphanumeric characters
The Change Local Passwords menu is shown on the front panel and in EnerVista upon successful login of the Administrator
role.
The LOGIN setting in this menu is similar to that described in SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY except for the factory
role.
Passwords are stored in text format. No encryption is applied.
NOTE
5
In Device authentication mode, the Observer role does not have a password associated with it. In Server
authentication mode the Observer role requires a password.
If you are locked out of the software, contact GE Digital Energy for the default password. When using
CyberSentry, the default password is "ChangeMe1#".
Once the passwords are set, the Administrator with Supervisor approval can change the role-associated
password.
In CyberSentry, password encryption is not supported.
Session settings
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SESSION SETTINGS
 SESSION
 SETTINGS

SESSION LOCKOUT:
3
Range: 0 to 99

SESSION LOCKOUT
PERIOD: 3 min
Range: 0 to 9999 minutes
SESSION LOCKOUT — This setting specifies the number of failed authentications before the device blocks subsequent
authentication attempts for the lockout period. A value of zero means lockout is disabled.
SESSION LOCKOUT PERIOD — This setting specifies the period of time in minutes of a lockout period. A value of 0 means that
there is no lockout period.
Restore defaults
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  RESTORE DEFAULTS
 RESTORE DEFAULTS


LOAD FACTORY
DEFAULTS: No
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Range: Yes, No
5-21
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
LOAD FACTORY DEFAULTS — This setting is used to reset all the settings, communication, and security passwords. An
Administrator role is used to change this setting and a Supervisor role (if not disabled) approves it.
Supervisory
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SUPERVISORY
 SUPERVISORY


DEVICE
AUTHENTICATION: Yes
Range: Yes, No

BYPASS ACCESS:
Disabled
Range: Local, Remote, Local and Remote, Disabled

LOCK RELAY:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

FACTORY SERVICE
MODE: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

 SELF TESTS

See below

SUPERVISOR ROLE:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

SERIAL INACTIVITY
TIMEOUT: 1 min
Range: 1 to 9999 minutes
The Supervisory menu settings are available for Supervisor role only, or if the Supervisor role is disabled then for the
Administrator role only.
5
DEVICE AUTHENTICATION — This setting is enabled by default, meaning "Yes" is selected. When enabled, Device
authentication with roles is enabled. When this setting is disabled, the UR only authenticates to the AAA server (RADIUS).
However, the Administrator and Supervisor (when enabled) remain active even after device authentication is disabled and
their only permission is to re-enable Device authentication. To re-enable Device authentication, the Supervisor unlocks the
device for settings changes, then the Administrator re-enables device authentication.
BYPASS ACCESS — The bypass security feature provides an easier access, with no authentication and encryption for those
special situations when this is considered safe. Only the Supervisor, or the Administrator when the Supervisor role is
disabled, can enable this feature.
Mode
Front panel or serial (RS232, RS485)
Ethernet
Normal mode
Authentication — Role Based Access Control (RBAC)
and passwords in clear
Authentication — RBAC and passwords encrypted
SSH tunneling
Bypass access mode
No passwords for allowed RBAC levels
No passwords for allowed RBAC levels
No SSH tunneling
The bypass options are as follows:
•
Local — Bypasses authentication for push buttons, keypad, RS232, and RS485
•
Remote — Bypasses authentication for Ethernet
•
Local and Remote — Bypasses authentication for push buttons, keypad, RS232, RS485, and Ethernet
LOCK RELAY — This setting uses a Boolean value (Enabled/Disabled) to indicate if the device accepts settings changes and
whether the device can receive a firmware upgrade. This setting can be changed by the Supervisor role, if it is enabled, or
by the Administrator if the Supervisor role is disabled. The Supervisor role disables this setting for the relay to start
accepting settings changes, command changes, or firmware upgrade. After all the setting changes are applied or
commands executed, the Supervisor enables to lock settings changes.
Example: If this setting is enabled and an attempt is made to change settings or upgrade the firmware, the UR device
denies the settings changes or denies upgrading the firmware. If this setting is disabled, the UR device accepts settings
changes and firmware upgrade.
This role is disabled by default.
5-22
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
FACTORY SERVICE MODE — When Enabled, the device can go into factory service mode. For this setting to become enabled a
Supervisor authentication is necessary. The default value is Disabled.
SUPERVISOR ROLE — When Enabled, the Supervisor role is active. To Disable this setting a Supervisor authentication is
necessary. If disabled, the Supervisor role is not allowed to log in. In this case, the Administrator can change the settings
under the Supervisory menu.
If enabled, Supervisor authentication is required to change the settings in the Supervisory menu. If the Supervisor disables
their role after authentication, the Supervisor session remains valid until they switch to another role using MMI or until they
end the current Supervisor session if using communications.
This role is disabled by default.
SERIAL INACTIVITY TIMEOUT — The role logged via a serial port is auto logged off after the Serial Inactivity timer times out. A
separate timer is maintained for RS232 and RS485 connections. The default value is 1 minute.
Self-tests
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SUPERVISORY  SELF TESTS
 SELF TESTS


 FAILED
 AUTHENTICATE
See below

FIRMWARE LOCK:
Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

SETTINGS LOCK:
Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
FAILED AUTHENTICATE — If this setting is Enabled then the number of failed authentications is compared with the Session
Lockout threshold. When the Session Lockout threshold is exceeded, this minor alarm indication comes up.
FIRMWARE LOCK — If this setting is Enabled, then any firmware upgrade operation attempt when the Lock Relay setting is
enabled brings up this self test alarm.
SETTINGS LOCK — If this setting is Enabled then an unauthorized write attempt to a setting for a given role activates this self
test.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SUPERVISORY  SELF TESTS  FAILED AUTHENTICATE
 FAILED
 AUTHENTICATE

FAILED AUTHENTICATE:
Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
CyberSentry setup
When first using CyberSentry security, use the following procedure for setup.
1.
Log in to the relay as Administrator by using the VALUE keys on the front panel to enter the default password
"ChangeMe1#". Note that the Lock Relay setting needs to be disabled in the Security > Supervisory menu. When this
setting is disabled, configuration and firmware upgrade are possible. By default, this setting is disabled.
2.
Enable the Supervisor role if you have a need for it.
3.
Make any required changes in configuration, such as setting a valid IP address for communication over Ethernet.
4.
Log out of the Administrator account by choosing None.
5.
Next, Device or Server authentication can be chosen on the login screen, but the choice is available only in EnerVista.
Use Device authentication to log in using the five pre-configured roles (Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator,
Observer). When using a serial connection, only Device authentication is supported. When Server authentication is
required, characteristics for communication with a RADIUS server must be configured. This is possible only in the
EnerVista software. The RADIUS server itself also must be configured. The appendix called RADIUS Server at the end of
this instruction manual gives an example of how to set up a simple RADIUS server. Once both the RADIUS server and
the parameters for connecting the UR to the server have been configured, you can choose Server authentication on
the login screen of EnerVista.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-23
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The use of CyberSentry for devices communicating through an Ethernet-to-RS485 gateway is not
supported. Because these gateways do not support the secure protocols necessary to communicate
with such devices, the connection cannot be established. Use the device as a non-CyberSentry
device.
NOTICE
Users logged in through the front panel are not timed out and cannot be forcefully logged out by a
supervisor. Roles logged in through the front panel that do no allow multiple instances (Administrator,
Supervisor, Engineer, Operator) must switch to None (equivalent to a logout) when they are done in
order to log out.
For all user roles except Observer, only one instance can be logged in at a time, for both login by front
panel and software.
To configure Server authentication:
5
1.
In the EnerVista software, choose Device authentication and log in as Administrator.
2.
Configure the following RADIUS server parameters: IP address, authentication port, shared secret, and vendor ID.
3.
On the RADIUS server, configure the user accounts. Do not use the five pre-defined roles as user names (Administrator,
Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, Observer) in the RADIUS server. If you do, the UR relay automatically provides the
authentication from the device.
4.
In the EnerVista software, choose Server authentication and log in using the user name and password configured on
the RADIUS server for Server authentication login.
5.
After making any required changes, log out.
When changing settings offline, ensure that only settings permitted by the role that performs the
settings download are changed because only those changes are applied.
NOTICE
Pushbuttons (both user-control buttons and user-programmable buttons) located on the front panel can be pressed by an
Administrator or Engineer role. This also applies to the RESET button, which resets targets, where targets are errors
displayed on the front panel or the Targets panel of the EnerVista software. The RESET button has special behavior in that it
allows these two roles to press it even when they are logged in through the RS232 port and not through the front panel.
To reset the security event log and self-test operands:
1.
Log in as Supervisor (if the role is enabled) or Administrator (if the Supervisor role is disabled) and execute a clear
security command under Commands > Security > Clear Security.
Syslog format
System logs are produced with the CyberSentry option. The format is as follows.
Security log
Event Number
Date &
Timestamp
Username
IP address
Role
Activity Value
Event Number — Event identification number (index)
Date & Timestamp — UTC date and time
Username — 255 chars maximum, but in the security log it is truncated to 20 characters
IP address — Device IP address
Role — 16 bit unsigned, of type format F617
Enumeration Role
0
None
1
Administrator
2
Supervisor
3
Engineer
4
Operator
5
Factory
5-24
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Activity Value — 16 bit unsigned
Enumeration Description
1
Authentication Failed
2
User Lockout
3
FW Upgrade
4
FW Lock
5
Settings Lock
6
Settings Change. Because this can fill the entire event log, it is supported by the
already existing Settings_Change.log file. This event is not required.
7
Clear Oscillography command
8
Clear Data Logger command (not applicable to all UR products)
9
Clear Demand Records command (not applicable to all UR products)
10
Clear Energy command (not applicable to all UR products)
11
Clear Unauthorized Access command
12
Clear Teleprotection Counters command (not applicable to all UR products)
13
Clear All Relay Records command
14
Role Log in
15
Role Log off
5.3.2 Display properties
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES
 DISPLAY
 PROPERTIES

LANGUAGE:
English
Range:
English; English, French; English, Russian; English,
Chinese; English, German (examples; depends on order code)
Visible when language other than English purchased

FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

DEFAULT MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 300 s
Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1

DEFAULT MESSAGE
INTENSITY: 25 %
Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
Visible when a VFD is installed

SCREEN SAVER
FEATURE: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Visible when an LCD is installed

SCREEN SAVER WAIT
TIME: 30 min
Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1
Visible when an LCD is installed

CURRENT CUT-OFF
LEVEL: 0.020 pu
Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001

VOLTAGE CUT-OFF
LEVEL: 1.0 V
Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
5
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
LANGUAGE — This setting selects the language used to display settings, actual values, and targets. This setting displays
when a language other than English was purchased, and the range depends on the order code of the relay.
FLASH MESSAGE TIME — Flash messages are status, warning, error, and information messages displayed in response to
certain key presses during settings programming. These messages override any normal messages. Use this setting to
change the duration of flash messages on the display.
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT — If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default
message. The inactivity time is modified using this setting to ensure that messages remain on the screen long enough
during programming or reading of actual values.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-25
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY — To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be
attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness.
SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME — These settings are only visible if the C60 has a liquid crystal display
(LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is “Enabled,” the LCD backlighting turns off after the
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, provided that no keys have been pressed and no
target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD backlighting turns on.
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL — This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the rated value)
are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others prefer the current to
display even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The C60 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes
and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This applies to
phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies
to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Note that the
cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current
samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL — This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measurements
(at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed as zero,
while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The C60
applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level,
it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical components. The cut-off
operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications
protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
The CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are used to determine the metered power cut-off levels. The
power cut-off level is calculated using the following equations. For Delta connections:
5
3  CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL  VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL  VT primary  CT primary
3-phase power cut-off = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
Eq. 5-3
For Wye connections:
3  CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL  VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL  VT primary  CT primary
3-phase power cut-off = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
Eq. 5-4
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL  VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL  VT primary  CT primary
per-phase power cut-off = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
Eq. 5-5
where VT primary = VT secondary  VT ratio and CT primary = CT secondary  CT ratio.
For example, given the following settings:
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: “0.02 pu”
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: “1.0 V”
PHASE CT PRIMARY: “100 A”
PHASE VT SECONDARY: “66.4 V”
PHASE VT RATIO: “208.00 : 1"
PHASE VT CONNECTION: “Delta”
We have:
CT primary = “100 A”, and
VT primary = PHASE VT SECONDARY x PHASE VT RATIO = 66.4 V x 208 = 13811.2 V
The power cut-off is therefore:
power cut-off= (CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL  VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL  CT primary  VT primary)/VT secondary
= ( 3  0.02 pu  1.0 V  100 A  13811.2 V) / 66.4 V
= 720.5 watts
Any calculated power value below this cut-off does not display. As well, the three-phase energy data do not accumulate if
the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut-off.
5-26
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
NOTE
PRODUCT SETUP
Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals as
valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of “0.02 pu” for
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and “1.0 V” for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.
5.3.3 Clear relay records
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
 CLEAR RELAY
 RECORDS

CLEAR FAULT REPORTS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

CLEAR EVENT RECORDS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY:
No
Range: FlexLogic operand

CLEAR DATA LOGGER:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

CLEAR ARC AMPS 1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

CLEAR ARC AMPS 2:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

CLEAR DEMAND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

CLEAR ENERGY:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

RESET UNAUTH ACCESS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

CLEAR DIR I/O STATS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Visible only for units with Direct I/O module
5
Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic operands. Assigning userprogrammable pushbuttons to clear specific records is a typical application for these commands. Since the C60 responds
to rising edges of the configured FlexLogic operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect.
Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, userprogrammable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the userprogrammable pushbuttons can provide extra security if required.
For example, to assign user-programmable pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, apply the following settings.
1.
Assign the clear demand function to pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP
 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
2.
Set the properties for user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT
SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
CLEAR DEMAND: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.20 s”
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-27
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.3.4 Communications
5.3.4.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS
 COMMUNICATIONS

5

 SERIAL PORTS

See below

 NETWORK

See page 5-29

 ROUTING

See page 5-33

 MODBUS PROTOCOL

See page 5-36

PROTOCOL:
DNP 3.0
Range: DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 60870-5-103
See page 5-37

 DNP PROTOCOL

See page 5-38

 DNP / IEC104
 POINT LISTS
See page 5-41

 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

Access in EnerVista
See page 5-42

 WEB SERVER
 HTTP PROTOCOL
See page 5-73

 TFTP PROTOCOL

See page 5-73

 IEC 60870-5-104
 PROTOCOL
See page 5-74

 EGD PROTOCOL

See page 5-75

 IEC103
 PROTOCOL
See page 5-77
5.3.4.2 Serial ports
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  SERIAL PORTS
 SERIAL PORTS


RS232 BAUD
RATE: 115200
Range: 19200, 115200

RS485 COM2 BAUD RATE:
19200
Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200 bit/s

RS485 COM2 PARITY:
Even
Range: None, Odd, Even

RS485 COM2 RESPONSE
MIN TIME: 0 ms
Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
RS232 BAUD RATE, RS485 COM2 BAUD RATE, and PARITY — The C60 is equipped with two independent serial communication
ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and has two options for baud rate. The rear COM2 port is RS485
and has settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the
computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. Any of these ports can be connected to a computer
running the EnerVista software. This software can download and upload setting files, view measured parameters, and
5-28
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
upgrade the relay firmware. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC, or computer
using the RS485 ports. If IEC 60870-103 is chosen as the protocol, valid baud rates are 9600 and 19200 bit/s, and valid
parity is Even.
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE MIN TIME — This setting specifies the minimum time before the rear RS485 port transmits after
receiving data from a host. This feature allows operation with hosts that hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time
after each transmission.
5.3.4.3 Ethernet network topology
The C60 has three Ethernet ports. Each Ethernet port must belong to a different network or subnetwork. Configure the IP
address and subnet to ensure that each port meets this requirement. Two subnets are different when the bitwise AND
operation performed between their respective IP address and mask produces a different result. Communication becomes
unpredictable when more than one port is configured to the same subnet.
Example 1
IP1/Mask1: 10.1.1.2/255.255.255.0 (where LAN 1 is 10.1.1.x/255.255.255.0)
IP2/Mask2: 10.2.1.2/255.255.255.0 (where LAN2 is 10.2.1.x/255.255.255.0)
IP3/Mask3: 10.3.1.2/255.255.255.0 (where LAN3 is 10.3.1.x/255.255.255.0)
Example 2
IP1/Mask1: 10.1.1.2/255.0.0.0 (where LAN1 is 10.x.x.x/255.0.0.0)
IP2/Mask2: 11.1.1.2/255.0.0.0 (where LAN2 is 11.x.x.x/255.0.0.0)
IP3/Mask3: 12.1.1.2/255.0.0.0 (where LAN3 is 12.x.x.x/255.0.0.0)
5
Example 3 — Incorrect
IP1/Mask1: 10.1.1.2/255.0.0.0
IP2/Mask2: 10.2.1.2/255.0.0.0
IP3/Mask3: 10.3.1.2/255.0.0.0
This example is incorrect because the mask of 255.0.0.0 used for the three IP addresses makes them belong to the same
network of 10.x.x.x.
Single LAN, no redundancy
The topology shown in the following figure allows communications to SCADA, local configuration/monitoring through
EnerVista, and access to the public network shared on the same LAN. No redundancy is provided.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-29
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-5: Network configuration for single LAN
Public Network
SCADA
EnerVista Software
LAN1
ML3000
P1
IP1/
MAC1
5
P2
P3
UR
859708A2.vsd
Multiple LANS, with redundancy
The following topology provides local configuration/monitoring through EnerVista software and access to the public
network shared on LAN1, to which port 1 (P1) is connected. There is no redundancy provided on LAN1. Communications to
SCADA is provided through LAN2. P2 and P3 are connected to LAN2, where P2 is the primary channel and P3 is the
redundant channel. In this configuration, P3 uses the IP and MAC addresses of P2.
Figure 5-6: Multiple LANs, with redundancy
Public Network
SCADA
EnerVista Software
LAN1
LAN2
LAN2
ML3000
ML3000
P1
IP1/
MAC1
ML3000
P2
P3
IP2/
MAC2
IP2/
MAC2
Redundancy mode
UR
859709A4.vsd
5-30
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Multiple LANS, no redundancy
The following topology provides local configuration/monitoring through EnerVista software on LAN1, to which port 1 (P1) is
connected, access to the public network on LAN2, to which port 2 (P2) is connected, and communications with SCADA on
LAN3, to which port 3 (P3) is connected. There is no redundancy.
Figure 5-7: Multiple LANS, no redundancy
Public Network
SCADA
EnerVista Software
LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
ML3000
ML3000
P1
IP1/
MAC1
ML3000
P2
P3
IP2/
MAC2
IP3/
MAC3
UR
5
859710A2.vsd
5.3.4.4 Network
As outlined in the previous section, when using more than one Ethernet port, configure each to belong to a different
network or subnet using the IP addresses and mask. Configure the network IP and subnet settings before configuring the
routing settings.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK 1(3)
 NETWORK PORT 1

 NETWORK PORT 2

 NETWORK PORT 3


PRT1 IP ADDRESS:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IPV4 address format

PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK:
255.0.0.0
Range: standard IPV4 address format

PRT2 IP ADDRESS:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IPV4 address format

PRT2 SUBNET IP MASK:
255.0.0.0
Range: standard IPV4 address format

PRT2 REDUNDANCY:
None
Range: None, Failover, PRP
Range if no PRP license: None, Failover

PRT2 PRP MCST ADDR:
01-15-4E-00-01-00
Range: 01-15-4E-00-01-00 to 01-15-4E-00-01-FF

PRT3 IP ADDRESS:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IPV4 address format

PRT3 SUBNET IP MASK:
255.0.0.0
Range: standard IPV4 address format
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-31
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, IEC 61580, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, HTTP, and PRP protocols. PRP is
explained in its own section later.
PRT1 (2 or 3) IP ADDRESS — This setting sets the port’s IPv4 address in standard IPV4 format. This setting is valid on port 3 if
port 2 REDUNDANCY is set to None.
PRT1 (2 or 3) SUBNET MASK — This setting sets the port’s IPv4 subnet mask in standard IPV4 format. This setting is valid on
port 3 if port 2 REDUNDANCY is set to None.
PRT2 REDUNDANCY — Determines if ports 2 and 3 operate in redundant or independent mode. If a license for PRP was
purchased, the options are None, Failover, and PRP. If a license for PRP was not purchased, the options are None and
Failover. In non-redundant mode (REDUNDANCY set to None), ports 2 and 3 operate independently with their own MAC, IP,
and mask addresses. If REDUNDANCY is set to Failover, the operation of ports 2 and 3 is as follows:
•
Ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask
•
The configuration fields for IP address and mask on port 3 are hidden
•
Port 3 is in standby mode and does not actively communicate on the Ethernet network but monitors its link to the
Multilink switch. If port 2 detects a problem with the link, communications is switched to Port 3. Port 3 is, in effect,
acting as a redundant or backup link to the network for port 2. Once port 2 detects that the link between itself and the
switch is good and that communication is healthy for five minutes, then switching back to port 2 is performed. The
delay in switching back ensures that rebooted switching devices connected to the C60, which signal their ports as
active prior to being completely functional, have time to completely initialize themselves and become active. Once
port 2 is active again, port 3 returns to standby mode.
If REDUNDANCY is set to PRP, the operation of ports 2 and 3 is as follows:
5
•
Ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask
•
The configuration fields for IP address and mask on port 3 are overwritten with those from port 2. This is visible on the
front panel but not displayed in the EnerVista software.
•
Port 2 MCST ADDRESS field is visible
•
The port 2 PTP function still uses only port 2 and the port 3 PTP function still uses only port 3. The relay still
synchronizes to whichever port has the best master. When ports 2 and 3 see the same master, as is typically the case
for PRP networks, the port with the better connectivity is used.
The two ports must be connected to completely independent LANs with no single point of failure, such as
common power supplies that feed switches on both LANs.
NOTE
For any changes to this setting to take effect, restart the unit.
PRT2 PRP MCST ADDR — This setting allows the user to change the multicast address used by the PRP supervision frames.
This setting is available if REDUNDANCY is set to PRP. All devices in the same PRP network need to have the same multicast
address. Choose an address that does not conflict with another multicast protocol.
5.3.4.5 Far-End Fault Indication (FEFI)
Since 100BASE-FX does not support Auto-Negotiation, a Far-End Fault Indication (FEFI) feature is included since UR 7 that
allows for detection of link failures.
The purpose of the Far-End Fault feature is to allow the stations on both ends of a pair of fibers to be informed when there
is a problem with one of the fibers. Without the Far-End Fault feature, it is impossible for a fiber interface to detect a
problem that affects only its transmit fiber.
When the Far-End Fault feature is supported, a loss of receive signal (link) causes the transmitter to generate a Far-End
Fault pattern in order to inform the device at the far end of the fiber pair that a fault has occurred.
When the local receiver again detects a signal, the local transmitter automatically returns to normal operation.
If a Far-End Fault pattern is received by a fiber interface that supports the Far-End Fault feature and it is enabled, it reacts
by dropping the link as if there were no signal at all.
If the receiving interface does not support the Far-End Fault feature or has it disabled, an incoming Far-End Fault pattern is
ignored.
5-32
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
It is strongly recommended to have switches used for substation automation that support the Far-End Fault feature,
especially when UR 7 redundancy Failover is selected for redundancy.
5.3.4.6 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
The Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) defines a redundancy protocol for high availability in substation automation
networks. It applies to networks based on Ethernet technology (ISO/IEC 8802-3) and is based on the second edition (July
2012) of IEC 62439-3, clause 4.
PRP is designed to provide seamless recovery in case of a single failure in the network, by using a combination of LAN
duplication and frame duplication. Identical frames are sent on two completely independent networks that connect source
and destination. Under normal circumstances both frames reach the destination and one of them is sent up the OSI stack
to the destination application, while the second one is discarded. If an error occurs in one of the networks and traffic is
prevented from flowing on that path, connectivity is provided through the other network to ensure continuous
communication. Take care when designing the two LANs, so that no single point of failure (such as a common power
supply) is encountered, as such scenarios can bring down both LANs simultaneously.
Figure 5-8: Example of parallel redundant network
5
PRP uses specialized nodes called doubly attached nodes (DANPs) for handling the duplicated frames. DANP devices have
an additional module, called a Link Redundancy Entity (LRE). LRE is responsible for duplicating frames and adding the
specific PRP trailer when sending the frames out on the LAN, as well as making decisions on received frames as to which
one is sent up the OSI stack to the application layer and which one is discarded. LRE is responsible for making PRP
transparent to the higher layers of the stack.
In addition, there is a second type of specialized device used in PRP networks, called RedBox, with the role of connecting
Single Attached Nodes (SANs) to a redundant network.
UR relays implement the DANP functionality. The RedBox functionality is not implemented.
The original standard IEC 62439-3 (2010) was amended to align PRP with the High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR)
protocol. To achieve this, the original PRP was modified at the cost of losing compatibility with the PRP 2010 version. The
revised standard IEC 62439-3 (2012) is commonly referred to as PRP-1, while the original standard is PRP-0. The UR relays
support PRP-1.
The relay implements PRP on two of its Ethernet ports, specifically Ports 2 and 3 of the CPU module. Use the previous
section (network port configuration) to configure PRP.
PRP is purchased as a separate option. If purchased (valid order code), PRP can be enabled in configuration through a
setting available on the network configuration menu, REDUNDANCY, which already has the capability of enabling failover
redundancy. The options on this setting must be changed to accommodate two types of redundancy: failover and PRP.
When REDUNDANCY is set to either failover or PRP, the ports dedicated for PRP (Ports 2 and 3) operate in redundant mode.
In this mode, Port 3 uses the MAC, IP address, and mask of Port 2.
5.3.4.7 Routing
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IPv4 ROUTE TABLE 1(6)
 IPv4 ROUTE TABLE


DEFAULT IPv4 ROUTE
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-33
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

IPv4 NETWORK
ROUTE 1


IPv4 NETWORK
ROUTE 6
A default route and up to six static routes can be configured.
The default route is used as the last choice when no other route towards a given destination is found.
 DEFAULT IPv4 ROUTE


GATEWAY ADDRESS:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IPV4 unicast address format
 IPv4 NETWORK
 ROUTE 1

RT1 DESTINATION:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IPV4 address format

RT1 NET MASK:
255.0.0.0
Range: standard IPV4 subnet mask format

RT1 GATEWAY:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IPV4 unicast address format
Configure the network IP and subnet settings before configuring the routing settings.
Add and delete static routes
5
Host routes are not supported at present.
The routing table configuration is available on the serial port and front panel. This is a deliberate decision, to avoid loss of
connectivity when remotely configuring the C60.
By default, the value of the destination field is 127.0.0.1 for all static routes (1 to 6). This is equivalent to saying that the
static routes are not configured. When the destination address is 127.0.0.1, the mask and gateway also must be kept on
default values.
By default, the value of the route gateway address is 127.0.0.1. This means that the default route is not configured.
To add a route:
1.
Use any of the static network route entries numbered 1 to 6 to configure a static network route. Once a route
destination is configured for any of the entries 1 to 6, that entry becomes a static route and it must meet all the rules
listed in the next section, General Conditions to be Satisfied by Static Routes.
2.
To configure the default route, enter a default gateway address. Once a default gateway address is configured, it
must be validated against condition 2 of the General Conditions to be Satisfied by Static Routes, where the route
gateway must be on a connected network.
To delete a route:
1.
Replace the route destination with the default loopback address of 127.0.0.1. When deleting a route, the mask and
gateway also must be brought back to default values.
2.
Delete the default route by replacing the default gateway with the default value of 127.0.0.1.
General conditions to be satisfied by static routes
The following rules are validated internally:
•
The route mask has IP mask format. In binary this needs to be a set of contiguous bits of 1 from left to right, followed
by one or more contiguous bits of 0.
•
The route destination and mask must match. This can be verified by checking that
RtDestination and RtMask = RtDestination
Example of good configuration: RtDestination = 10.1.1.0; Rt Mask = 255.255.255.0
Example of bad configuration: RtDestination = 10.1.1.1; Rt Mask = 255.255.255.0
5-34
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The following rules must be observed when you configure static routes:
•
The route destination must not be a connected network
•
The route gateway must be on a connected network. This rule applies to the gateway address of the default route as
well. This can be verified by checking that:
(RtGwy & Prt1Mask) == (Prt1IP & Prt1Mask) || (RtGwy & Prt2Mask) == (Prt2IP & Prt2Mask) || (RtGwy & Prt3Mask) == (Prt3IP
& Prt3Mask)
where
& is the bitwise-AND operator
== is the equality operator
|| is the logical OR operator
Routing behavior compared to previous releases
Prior to release 7.10, UR devices did not have an explicit manner of configuring routes. The only available route was the
default route configured as part of the network settings (port gateway IP address). This limited the ability to route to
specific destinations, particularly if these destinations were reachable through a different interface than the one on which
the default gateway was.
Starting with UR 7.10, up to six static network routes can be configured in addition to a default route. The default route
configuration was also moved from the network settings into the routing section.
The figure shows an example of topology that benefits from the addition of static routes.
Figure 5-9: Using static routes
Router1
5
Public network
.1
Router2
10.1.2.0/24
10.1.1.0/24
ML3000
.2
IP1/
MAC1
.1
ML3000
P1
.2
10.1.3.0/24
P2
P3
IP2/
MAC2
IP3/
MAC3
EnerVista Software
UR
859714A1.vsd
In the figure, the UR connects through the following two Ethernet ports:
•
Port 1 (IP address 10.1.1.2) connects the UR to LAN 10.1.1.0/24 and to the Internet through Router1. Router1 has an
interface on 10.1.1.0/24 and the IP address of this interface is 10.1.1.1.
•
Port 2 (IP address 10.1.2.2) connects the UR to LAN 10.1.2.0/24 and to the EnerVista software through Router2. Router2
has an interface on 10.1.2.0/24 and the IP address of this interface is 10.1.2.1.
The configuration before release 7.10 was as follows:
•
PRT1 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.1.2
PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK = 255.255.255.0
PRT1 GWY IP ADDRESS = 10.1.1.1
PRT2 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.2.2
PRT2 SUBNET IP MASK = 255.255.255.0
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-35
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The behavior before release 7.10 was as follows. When sending packets to EnerVista, the UR noticed that the destination
was not on a connected network and it tried to find a route to destination. Since the default route was the only route it
knew, it used it. Yet EnerVista was on a private network, which was not reachable through Router1. Hence a destination
unreachable message was received from the router.
The configuration starting with release 7.10 is as follows:
•
PRT1 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.1.2
PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK = 255.255.255.0
PRT2 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.2.2
PRT2 SUBNET IP MASK = 255.255.255.0
IPV4 DEFAULT ROUTE: GATEWAY ADDRESS = 10.1.1.1
STATIC NETWORK ROUTE 1: RT1 DESTINATION = 10.1.3.0/24; RT1 NET MASK = 255.255.255.0; and RT1 GATEWAY =
10.1.2.1
The behavior since release 7.10 is as follows. There is one added static network route to the destination 10.1.3.0/24, where
a computer running EnerVista is located. This static route uses a different gateway (10.1.2.1) than the default route. This
gateway is the address of Router2, which has knowledge about 10.1.3.0 and is able to route packets coming from the UR
and destined to EnerVista.
Show routes and ARP tables
This feature is available on the Web interface, where the main menu contains an additional Communications menu and
two submenus:
5
•
Routing Table
•
ARP Table
The tables outline the information displayed when the two submenus are selected.
Table 5-6: Routing table information
Field
Description
Destination
The IP address of the remote network to which this route points
Mask
The network mask for the destination
Gateway
The IP address of the next router to the remote network
Interface
Interface through which the specified network can be reached
Table 5-7: IP ARP information
Field
Description
IP Address
The network address that corresponds to Hardware Address
Age (min)
Age, in minutes, of the cache entry. A hyphen (-) means the address is local.
Hardware Address
LAN hardware address, a MAC address that corresponds to network address
Type
Dynamic or Static
Interface
Interface to which this address mapping has been assigned
5.3.4.8 Modbus protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  MODBUS PROTOCOL
 MODBUS PROTOCOL


MODBUS SLAVE
ADDRESS: 254
Range: 0 to 254 in steps of 1

MODBUS TCP PORT
NUMBER: 502
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless the port is configured for DNP or IEC 60870-5-103
operation. This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used on the port. UR devices operate as Modbus slave
devices only.
For more information on the protocol, including the memory map table, see the UR Series Communications Guide.
5-36
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS — When using the Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the C60 responds regardless of the
MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS programmed. For the RS485 port, each device on the serial bus must have a unique slave address
from 1 to 254. Address 0 and addresses from 248 and up are reserved by the Modbus protocol specification, and so their
use here is not recommended. Address 0 is the broadcast address that all Modbus slave devices listen to. When MODBUS
SLAVE ADDRESS is set to 0, the C60 accepts broadcast messages, but in compliance with protocol specifications for
broadcast messages, never replies. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same
address or conflicts resulting in errors occur. Generally, each device added to the link gets set to use the next higher
address starting at 1. When using Modbus TCP/IP, the client must use the programmed MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS value in the
Unit Identifier field.
MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER — Modbus over TCP/IP can also be used on any of the Ethernet ports. The listening TCP port 502
is reserved for Modbus communications, and only in exceptional cases when MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER is set to any other
port. The MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting sets the TCP port used by Modbus on Ethernet. A MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER of
0 disables Modbus over TCP/IP, meaning closes the Modbus TCP port. When the port number is changed to 0, the change
takes effect when the C60 is restarted. When it is set to 0, use the front panel or serial port to communicate with the relay.
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
NOTE
5.3.4.9 Protocol selection
The PROTOCOL menu setting allows selection of one of the following protocols: DNP 3.0, IEC60870-104, or IEC60870-103.
For any change to take effect, restart the unit.
The table shows which of DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 60870-5-103, and IEC 61850 protocols are operational on the
RS232, RS485, and Ethernet ports. It shows all possible combinations of the PROTOCOL and DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT settings.
Table 5-8: Port and protocol combinations
PROTOCOL
setting
DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT
settings
RS232
RS485
Ethernet
DNP
Channel 1: Eth TCP
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Modbus
Modbus
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: Eth TCP
Channel 2: none
Modbus
Modbus
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: none
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Modbus
Modbus
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: Eth UDP
Channel 2: none
Modbus
Modbus
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: Eth TCP
Channel 2: RS485
Modbus
DNP
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: Eth TCP
Channel 2: RS232
DNP
Modbus
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: Eth UDP
Channel 2: RS485
Modbus
DNP
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: Eth UDP
Channel 2: RS232
DNP
Modbus
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: RS485
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Modbus
DNP
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: RS232
Channel 2: Eth TCP
DNP
Modbus
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: RS485
Channel 2: RS232
DNP
DNP
Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: RS232
Channel 2: RS485
DNP
DNP
Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: RS485
Channel 2: none
Modbus
DNP
Modbus, IEC 61850
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-37
5
PRODUCT SETUP
PROTOCOL
setting
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT
settings
RS232
RS485
Ethernet
IEC 104
Modbus
Modbus
IEC 104, Modbus, IEC 61850
IEC 103
Modbus
IEC 103
Modbus, IEC 61850
5.3.4.10 DNP protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL
 DNP PROTOCOL

5
5-38

 DNP CHANNELS

See below

DNP ADDRESS:
1
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 DNP NETWORK
 CLIENT ADDRESSES
See below

DNP TCP/UDP PORT
NUMBER: 20000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
TIMEOUT: 5 s
Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
MAX RETRIES: 10
Range: 1 to 255 in steps of 1

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
DEST ADDRESS: 1
Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1

DNP CURRENT SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000

DNP VOLTAGE SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000

DNP POWER SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000

DNP ENERGY SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000

DNP PF SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000

DNP OTHER SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

DNP CURRENT DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

DNP POWER DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

DNP ENERGY DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

DNP PF DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

DNP OTHER DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP

DNP TIME SYNC IIN
PERIOD: 1440 min
Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1

DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT
SIZE: 240
Range: 30 to 2048 in steps of 1

DNP OBJECT 1
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
Range: 1, 2

DNP OBJECT 2
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
Range: 1, 2, 3

DNP OBJECT 20
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

DNP OBJECT 21
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
Range: 1, 2, 9, 10

DNP OBJECT 22
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

DNP OBJECT 23
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

DNP OBJECT 30
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

DNP OBJECT 32
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7

DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED
CONTROL POINTS: 0
Range: 0 to 32 in steps of 1

DNP TCP CONNECTION
TIMEOUT: 120 s
Range: 10 to 7200 s in steps of 1
5
The C60 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. DNP is enabled when the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP
 COMMUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL setting is set to DNP 3.0. The C60 can be used as a DNP slave device connected to
multiple DNP masters (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the C60 maintains two sets of DNP data change
buffers and connection information, two DNP masters can actively communicate with the C60 at one time.
See the UR Series Communications Guide for more information on DNP.
The DNP Channels sub-menu is shown.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL  DNP CHANNELS
 DNP CHANNELS


DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT:
NONE
Range: NONE, COM2 - RS485, FRONT PANEL - RS232,
NETWORK - TCP, NETWORK - UDP

DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT:
NONE
Range: NONE, COM2 - RS485, FRONT PANEL - RS232,
NETWORK - TCP
The DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol
for each channel. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, DNP is the only protocol running on that port; Modbus or IEC
60870-5-103 are disabled. If DNP is assigned to RS485, the protocol must be set to DNP on the serial port configuration as
well, for the change to take effect. When the DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT setting is set to “Network - TCP,” the channel 1(2) DNP
protocol can be used over TCP/IP on the Ethernet ports. When this value is set to “Network - UDP,” the DNP protocol can be
used over UDP/IP on channel 1 only.
Changes to these port settings take effect when power has been cycled to the relay.
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
NOTE
The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the C60 on a DNP communications link. Assign a
unique address to each DNP slave.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-39
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The C60 can specify a maximum of five clients for its DNP connections. These are IP addresses for the controllers to which
the C60 can connect. The settings follow.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL  DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
 DNP NETWORK
 CLIENT ADDRESSES

CLIENT ADDRESS 1:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address


CLIENT ADDRESS 5:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address
The DNP TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER setting is for normal DNP operation. To close the port, set the port number to 0. The change
takes effect when the C60 is restarted.
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION is set to “Disabled” for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance
mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the C60 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited
response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the C60 retransmits an
unsolicited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of “255” allows infinite re-tries. The DNP
UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which
solicited responses are sent is determined by the C60 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message.
5
The DNP scale factor settings are numbers used to scale analog input point values. These settings group the C60 analog
input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other. Each setting represents the
scale factor for all analog input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to “1000,”
all DNP analog input points that are voltages are returned with values 1000 times smaller (for example, a value of 72000 V
on the C60 is returned as 72). These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within certain
ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (that is, the value is 10 times larger).
The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input data. These
settings group the C60 analog input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other.
Each setting represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type. For example, to trigger
unsolicited responses from the C60 when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting
is set to “15.” Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP object 34 points can be used to change
deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP analog input point. Whenever power is removed and reapplied to the C60, the default deadbands are in effect.
The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the C60.
Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.
The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to
be necessary, which provides more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.
NOTE
Check the “DNP Points Lists” C60 web page to view the analog inputs and/or binary inputs points lists. This
page can be viewed with a web browser by entering the IP address of the C60 Ethernet port employed to
access the C60 Main Menu, then by clicking the Device Information Menu item, then the DNP Points Lists
item.
The DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION to DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION settings select the DNP default variation
number for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32. The default variation refers to the variation response when variation
0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. See the DNP Implementation section in the UR Series Communications
Guide.
The DNP binary outputs typically map one-to-one to IED data points. That is, each DNP binary output controls a single
physical or virtual control point in an IED. In the C60 relay, DNP binary outputs are mapped to virtual inputs. However, some
legacy DNP implementations use a mapping of one DNP binary output to two physical or virtual control points to support
the concept of trip/close (for circuit breakers) or raise/lower (for tap changers) using a single control point. That is, the DNP
master can operate a single point for both trip and close, or raise and lower, operations. The C60 can be configured to
5-40
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
support paired control points, with each paired control point operating two virtual inputs. The DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED
CONTROL POINTS setting allows configuration of from 0 to 32 binary output paired controls. Points not configured as paired
operate on a one-to-one basis.
The DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections. If
there is no data traffic on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection is
aborted by the C60. This frees up the connection to be re-used by a client. Any change takes effect after cycling power to
the relay.
5.3.4.11 DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS
 DNP / IEC104
 POINT LISTS

 BINARY INPUT / MSP
 POINTS
See below

 ANALOG INPUT / MME
 POINTS
See below
Up to 256 binary and up to 256 analog input points for the DNP protocol, or the MSP and MME points for IEC 60870-5-104
protocol, can be configured. The value for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by assigning FlexLogic
operands for binary inputs / MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs / MME points.
The menu for the binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104) follows.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS  BINARY INPUT /
MSP POINTS
 BINARY INPUT / MSP
 POINTS

Point: 0
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

Point: 1
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
5


Point: 255
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Up to 256 binary input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The points are configured by
assigning an appropriate FlexLogic operand. See the Introduction to FlexLogic section in this chapter for the range of
assignable operands.
Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists take effect when the C60 is restarted.
The menu for the analog input points (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104) follows.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS  ANALOG INPUT
/ MME POINTS
 ANALOG INPUT / MME
 POINTS

Point: 0
Off
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter

Point: 1
Off
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter


Point: 255
Off
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
Up to 256 analog input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The analog point list is
configured by assigning an appropriate FlexAnalog parameter to each point. See the FlexAnalog Parameters section in
Appendix A for the range of assignable parameters.
Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists take effect when the C60 is restarted.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-41
PRODUCT SETUP
NOTE
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first “Off” value. Since DNP / IEC
60870-5-104 point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first “Off” point are
ignored.
5.3.4.12 IEC 61850 protocol
The C60 is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications capability. This feature is specified as a
software option at the time of ordering. See the Order Codes section in chapter 2 for details.
The IEC 61850 settings are accessible in EnerVista software or a substation configuration language (SCL) generating tool.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850. The settings are not accessible from the front panel
of the device.
NOTE
IEC 61850 messaging can form part of protection schemes. Consider IEC 61850 settings with the same
criticality as protection element settings. To ensure reliable performance of protection schemes utilizing IEC
61850 messaging, route IEC 61850 traffic on a separate port from SCADA communications, or use redundant,
independent ports, and a high speed network recovery method, such as PRP.
Overview
5
IEC 61850 is a series of international standards and technical reports applicable to power utility automation systems. It
includes semantics, abstract communication services, specific communication services, performance specifications,
network engineering guidelines, configuration description methodologies, and engineering processes. The standard
enables interoperability among intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) from different suppliers and interoperability among
software configuration tools from different suppliers. Interoperability in this case is the ability for IEDs to operate on the
same network or communication path sharing information and commands, and for configuration tools to understand
each other's configuration files.
The UR series supports a large subset of IEC 61850 features. These are detailed in the UR Series Communications Guide
and include the information model, GOOSE publish, GOOSE subscribe, buffered report server, unbuffered report server, and
Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) query, read, write, and control services. In addition, the UR and EnerVista UR
Setup software support IEC 61850 Substation Configuration Language (SCL) file import/export.
Whereas prior UR releases used edition 1.0 of IEC 61850, this release uses edition 2.0, with certain modifications according
to IEC/TR 61850-90-5. Only edition 2.0 61850 configuration tools can interoperate with edition 2.0 devices such as the UR
7.3x release. The UR release uses edition 2.0 SCL, which differs from edition 1.0 SCL. GSSE, fixed GOOSE, and fixed report
services of previous releases are no longer supported, and thus UR devices of previous releases using these features have
to be converted to configurable GOOSE to communicate with a 7.3x device.
Many settings of UR protection, control, and monitoring elements, that is to say elements that are not concerned with the
IEC 61850 protocol, can nevertheless be accessed via IEC 61850. These settings are documented elsewhere in this Settings
chapter. This section of the Settings chapter deals solely with the settings that configure the IEC 61850 protocol itself.
EnerVista setup for IEC 61850
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides the interface to configure C60 settings for the IEC 61850 protocol. This section
describes this interface. The software also supports import and export of IEC 61850 Substation Configuration Language
(SCL) files as documented in the UR Series Communications Guide.
Unlike other UR settings, IEC 61850 protocol configuration settings cannot be accessed through the UR front panel. These
settings are accessible with the EnerVista software, via MMS query, read, and write services, or via 61850 Substation
Configuration Language (SCL) file transfer. Accordingly, whereas other settings are presented in this manual as they
appear on the front panel, IEC 61850 settings are presented as they appear in the software. See the UR Series
5-42
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Communications Guide for MMS and SCL access. Note that if you update the IEC 61850 settings in the EnerVista software
by writing to them by MMS while the corresponding IEC 61850 panel is open in EnerVista, you need to close then open the
panel in EnerVista for the correct readings to display.
All IEC 61850 protocol configuration settings are accessed through software panels that are selected either in the Online
Window area (see figure) or the Offline Window area in the EnerVista software.
Figure 5-10: IEC 61850 protocol panel in EnerVista software
The IEC 61850 window is divided into a navigation pane on the left and a settings panel on the right. You expand and click
an option on the left to display its panel on the right. The following figure shows an example for Server Configuration. The
setting entry panel contains in the SETTING column the names of the settings, and the settings entry boxes are in the
PARAMETER column. Hovering the mouse over a setting name displays a tool-tip showing the 61850 information model
name of the setting or its location in SCL files.
Figure 5-11: Main IEC 61850 panel
Opening the IEC 61850 window while online causes the UR Setup software to retrieve and import an SCL file from the
connected C60. This SCD file contains all the settings in the UR at the time of the file request, both those that are mapped
into the IEC 61850 information model (that is, the "public" sections) and those that are not in the model (that is, the "private"
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-43
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
section). The UR Setup software imports all of these settings into the current session, not just those in the IEC 61850
window. To avoid loss of any unsaved setting changes made in other panels during the current session, all other panels for
the C60 must be closed before the IEC 61850 panel can be opened; the software prompts for this when applicable. Panels
for other devices can be open concurrently to facilitate parameter coordination.
The Restore button restores all settings in the IEC 61850 window to their last saved values. The Default button causes all
settings in the IEC 61850 window to revert to factory default values. Both buttons affect the current panel being displayed.
Neither button affects settings in other than the IEC 61860 window.
Create CID and settings files
When the Save button in the online IEC 61850 window is clicked, UR Setup software prepares a configured IED description
(CID) file containing all the device’s settings and sends the CID file to the connected C60. On receipt of a CID file, the C60
checks it for correctness, and if no error is found, reboots using the settings in the CID file. UR Setup displays a message
when the C60 is running the new settings, confirming successful transfer. This process can take a minute or so due to the
extensive amount of processing required by the software and the C60.
Certain settings not related to IEC 61850 are indicated in this manual as taking effect only when the device is restarted.
The reboot following CID file transfer described in the previous paragraph does not make these setting changes take
effect, as the C60 does not accept the setting change until after the CID file transfer reboot. For any change in the
indicated settings to take effect, after the automatic restart due to CID file transfer, you must perform a manual restart, for
example by executing the Maintenance > Reboot Relay Command in the software.
When the Save button in the offline IEC 61850 window is clicked, UR Setup software saves to local storage, for example the
hard drive, a .urs file containing all of the device's settings.
5
Server configuration
The Server Configuration panel contains IEC 61850 settings relevant to the server functions of the IED implementation.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Server Configuration.
The following settings are available, where <iedName> is a syntactic variable representing the present value of the IED
NAME setting.
IED NAME
Range: 1 to 64 VisibleString characters
Default: TEMPLATE
The value entered sets the IED name used by IEC 61850 for the C60. An IED name unique within the network must be
entered for proper operation. Valid characters are upper and lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character.
The first character must be a letter.
Master functional ldName
Range: 0 to 64 VisibileString characters
Default:
The Master logical device contains the UR logical nodes modelling communications and setting group control. Valid
characters are upper and lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. If the number of characters entered
is greater than zero, this setting sets the name used in communications for the Master logical device. If an ldName is
entered, a name unique within the network must be entered for proper operation. The standard recommends choosing
this name according to IEC 81346-1. If the number of characters entered is zero, the name used in communications for
the Master logical device is "<iedName>Master", where <iedName> is the value of setting IED NAME described earlier.
NOTE
5-44
Throughout the remainder of this section, <LDName> is a syntactic variable representing the present name of
the master logical device. Depending on its context, <LDName> can be a product-related name or a functionrelated name. In SCL files, <LDName> is always the product-related name. In IEC 61850 messages, <LDName>
is the function-related name if one is set by the Master functional ldName setting, otherwise <LDName> is
again the product-related name. The product-related name of the Master logical device is
"<iedName>Master". The function related name of the Master logical device is the value of the Master
functional ldName setting.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
System functional ldName
Range: 0 to 64 VisibileString characters
Default:
This setting is similar to setting Master functional ldName, but is for the System logical device, which contains the UR
logical nodes modelling power system devices: breakers, switches, CTs, VTs, and so on, including interface to these such
as AC inputs, contact I/O, transducer I/O, and HardFiber I/O.
Prot functional ldName
Range: 0 to 64 VisibileString characters
Default:
This setting is similar to setting Master functional ldName, but is for the Prot logical device instance, which contains the
UR logical nodes modelling protection and protection related functions.
Ctrl functional ldName
Range: 0 to 64 VisibileString characters
Default:
This setting is similar to setting Master functional ldName, but is for the Ctrl logical device instance, which contains the
UR logical nodes modelling control and monitoring functions.
Meter functional ldName
Range: 0 to 64 VisibileString characters
Default:
This setting is similar to setting Master functional ldName, but is for Meter the logical device instance, which contains
the UR logical nodes modelling metering and measurement (other than PMU), including Signal Sources.
Gen functional ldName
Range: 0 to 64 VisibileString characters
Default:
5
This setting is similar to setting Master functional ldName, but is for the Gen logical device instance, which contains the
UR logical nodes modelling FlexLogic, Virtual Outputs, non-volatile latches, FlexElements, recording (for example
oscillography), security, front panel, and clock.
Location
Range: 0 to 255 ASCII characters
Default: Location
The value entered sets the value of the data attribute <LDName>/LPHD1.PhyNam.location. This data attribute is
provided by the protocol to allow the user to declare where the equipment is installed.
Latitude
Range: -90.000 to 90.000 degrees in steps of 0.001 degree
Default: 0.000 deg
The value entered sets the value of the data attribute <LDName>/LPHD1.PhyNam.latitude. This data attribute is provided
by the protocol to allow the user to declare the geographical position of the device in WGS84 coordinates -latitude.
Negative values indicate a southern latitude. WGS refers to the world geodetic system, which is used in global
positioning systems (GPS), and 84 is the current version of the standard.
Longitude
Range: -180.000 to 180.000 degrees in steps of 0.001 degree
Default: 0.000 deg
The value entered sets the value of the data attribute <LDName>/LPHD1.PhyNam.longitude. This data attribute is
provided by the protocol to allow the user to declare the geographical position of the device in WGS84 coordinates longitude. Negative values indicate a western longitude.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-45
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Altitude
Range: 0 to 10,0000 m in steps of 1 m
Default: 0 m
The value entered sets the value of the data attribute <LDName>/LPHD1.PhyNam.altitude. This data attribute is provided
by the protocol to allow the user to declare the geographical position of the device in WGS84 coordinates - altitude.
Prefix for GGIO1
Range: 0 to 7 VisibleString characters
Default:
This setting sets the LN Prefix of the logical node GGIO1 that is described in the GGIO1 section later. Valid characters are
upper and lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. The first character must be a letter.
Prefix for GGIO2
Range: 0 to 7 VisibleString characters
Default:
This setting sets the LN Prefix of logical node GGIO2 that is described in the GGIO2 section later. Valid characters are
upper and lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. The first character must be a letter.
Prefix for GGIO4
Range: 0 to 7 VisibleString characters
Default:
This setting sets the LN Prefix of logical node GGIO4 that is described in the GGIO4 section later. Valid characters are
upper and lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. The first character must be a letter.
5
Master configRev
Range: 0 to 255 ASCII characters
Default:
This data attribute is provided by the protocol to allow the user to declare changes to the semantic of the data model of
the UR. The intent is that the user changes Master configRev each time that the semantic or data model changes, so
that clients can readily detect the change. A semantic change is a logical node getting a new semantic use; for example,
an instance of logical node CSWI is now serving a different physical switch, or an instance of a logical node PDIS is now
used for another zone. A data model change is a change in the presence of logical nodes, data objects, data attributes,
or instance names.
The scope of Maser configRev is the entire relay configuration as the Master logical device is the root logical device.
Similar settings are provided for the other logical nodes; the scope of these other configRev settings is limited to the
corresponding logical device configuration.
paramRev
Range: -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 in steps of 1
Default: 0
This data attribute is provided by the protocol to make changes to the settings of the C60 apparent to clients. The
Substation Configuration Tool and UR Setup software advance the value of paramRev each time any setting changes.
The C60 increments the value of parmRev when a setting change is made other than through CID file download.
LLN0.Mod.ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: sbo-with-normal-security
This setting specifies the control service that clients must use to control the TEST MODE FUNCTION of the C60. An "on"
control to <LDName>/LLN0.Mod changes TEST MODE FUNCTION to Disabled, an "on-blocked" control changes it to
Forcible, and a "test/blocked" changes it to Isolated.
IEC/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Default: 102
This setting allows the user to change the TCP port number for Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) connections.
It is recommended that this setting be left at the default value.
5-46
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
NOTE
Configuration Type
Range: G2, E3-2.0
Default: G2
This setting specifies the method used to describe GOOSE subscription configuration in SCL. See the UR Series
Communications Guide for details. Basically, in the G2 mode, the CID file contains IED elements for IEDs subscribed to by
this IED containing GOOSE subscription information. In the E3 2.0 mode, the CID file has only one IED element and
GOOSE subscription information is coded in data objects in the standard LGOS logical node used to monitor reception of
the subscribed GOOSE. UR 7.30 or later accepts either mode.
GOOSE
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE.
Figure 5-12: IEC 61850 TxGOOSE Access Points panel
5
TxGOOSE
IEC 61850 GOOSE is an efficient method for simultaneous high-speed delivery of a set of generic substation event
information in a publishing physical device to more than one subscribing physical device. A TxGOOSE is a UR element
implementing a single IEC 61850 GOOSE message publishing service. The subscribing function in URs is performed by
RxGOOSE elements, as described in the next section. Each UR with IEC 61850 order code options has eight TxGOOSE
elements. Each TxGOOSE element can publish the values of up to 64 FlexLogic or FlexAnalog operands in the UR.
Published TxGOOSE messages configured in the EnerVista UR Setup software can be subscribed by and the published
operand values understood by other UR devices. In fact, they can be subscribed to and understood by any device of any
manufacturer that implements the IEC 61850 edition 1.0 or 2.0 GOOSE subscription mechanism. The messages are
published with a multicast address so that the network sends the messages to all devices; any number of devices that
want to subscribe can.
The entities whose values are published in GOOSE messages are known as members. The members are itemized in an
ordered list known as a data set. Each TxGOOSE can use any one of the data sets provided. See the DataSets section later
for details.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-47
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Each enabled TxGOOSE transmits its message whenever a value change is detected in one or more of its members. To
guard against the possibility that such a message is lost in the network before it reaches all subscribers, the message is
quickly retransmitted several times. To allow subscribers to verify that their link to the publisher and the publisher itself are
healthy, each message is also periodically retransmitted even while the values are unchanging. These latter messages are
known as heartbeat messages, while the former are known as event messages. Heartbeat messages also provide means
for a subscriber newly online to receive the published values in the absence of an event.
TxGOOSE1 and TxGOOSE2 scan for value changes in its FlexLogic operand members as frequently as such a change can
occur. TxGOOSE1 and TxGOOSE2 are therefore suitable for highly time critical signals, such as tripping and dynamic
blocking. FlexAnalog members are scanned for value changes only every 250 ms. See the Deadband Settings section later
for a description of what is considered a value change in an analog member.
The remaining TxGOOSE, meaning TxGOOSE3 and up, scan both their FlexLogic and FlexAnalog members for value
changes every 250 ms. They are suited for control applications, such as voltage control or power factor regulation.
The details of TxGOOSE message construction are contained in the UR Series Communications Guide. Knowledge of these
details is not required to configure GOOSE.
The UR does not implement the Fixed-Length encoded GOOSE messages option specified in IEC 61850-8-1:2011 clause
A.3; the UR always uses the ASN.1 Basic encoding rules (as specified in ISO/IEC 8825-1) as specified in IEC 61850-8-1:2004
and as optional in IEC 61850-8-1:2011 clause A.3. So do not try to configure the UR for fixed-offset TxGOOSE.
TxGOOSE
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > TxGOOSE > Access Points to access
the settings that are common to all GOOSE messages published.
The following settings are available.
5
PORT1 GOOSE ENABLE
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
When set to Disabled, no GOOSE messages are published on C60 Ethernet port 1, and any GOOSE messages received on
port 1 are ignored. When set to Enabled, all enabled GOOSE messages are published on C60 Ethernet port 1, and any
GOOSE messages received on port 1 are listened to.
C60 Ethernet ports 2 and 3 each have a similar setting.
TxGOOSE UPDATE TIME
Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 60 s
This setting specifies the time interval between heartbeat messages, which are messages that are sent periodically
while no events are detected. The standard suggests that the heartbeat time be less than (actually half) of the
timeAllowedtoLive parameter, which is set by the TxGOOSE TIME TO LIVE settings described later.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > TxGOOSE > TxGOOSE1 to access the
settings for the first TxGOOSE. The settings and functionality for the others are similar.
5-48
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-13: IEC 61850 TxGOOSE panel
TxGOOSE1 FUNCTION
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
When set to Disabled, TxGOOSE1 messages are not published. When set to Enabled, TxGOOSE1 messages are published.
When TxGOOSE1 to 8 are set to Disabled in EnerVista and subsequently Enabled by writing via MMS, the panel continues
to read Disabled until relaunched. There is no polling capability to update automatically the IEC 61860 readings, so the
panel needs to be closed then opened for the correct status to display.
TxGOOSE1 GoID
Range: 0 to 129 VisibleString characters
Default: TxGOOSE1
The entered value sets the goID value published in TxGOOSE1 messages, and can be used by subscribers to discriminate
the TxGOOSE1 messages from other GOOSE messages.
TxGOOSE1 DatSet
Range: None, DataSet01, DataSet02,...
Default: None
This setting selects the published data set using the UR Setup software designator for the data set. The IEC 61850 name
of the data sets are configured in the Datasets panel, as described later.
An ObjectReference to the data set, which consists of the concatenation of the string "<LDName>/LLN0." and the data
set name, is published in the datSet field of TxGOOSE1 messages and can be used by subscribers to discriminate
TxGOOSE1 messages from other GOOSE messages.
TxGOOSE1 DST MAC
Range: any 12 digit hexadecimal number
Default: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00
The value entered sets the Ethernet destination Media Access Control (MAC) address in published TxGOOSE1 messages.
As the standard requires that the address have the multicast bit set TRUE, that is to say the second digit is set to an odd
number, messages transmitted have the multicast bit set TRUE no matter its value in this setting.
The destination MAC address can be used by the network to restrict message delivery to selected devices that need to
receive them, reducing network loading. This address also can be used by hardware in receiving devices to filter out
messages that are of no interest to them, reducing processor burden. Different filtering algorithms are implemented by
different devices. The standard recommends that the algorithm used by hardware of the receiving device be considered
when assigning destination multicast addresses.
Subscribers can use this address to discriminate TxGOOSE1 messages from other GOOSE messages.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-49
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
TxGOOSE1 VLAN PRIORITY
Range: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 5-4, 6-4, 6-5, 7-4, 7-5, 7-6
Default: 4
When the value entered is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7, the User Priority value in the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag included in published
TxGOOSE1 messages is set to that value. When one of the two-digit values is entered, the dynamic priority feature is
selected: the first event message has the User Priority value of the first digit, and User Priority is decremented in each
following message until reaching the value of the second digit. For instance, if the selected value is 7-5, then the User
Priority values in successive messages beginning with the message triggered by an event is 7, 6, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, and so on.
Do not make a dynamic priority selection when standard behavior is required.
Network devices can forward a message with a higher priority value before a message with a lower priority value, which
speeds delivery of high priority messages in heavily loaded networks. The standard recommends that higher priority
messages, such as GOOSE, have priority values in the range of 4 to 7.
TxGOOSE1 VLAN ID
Range: 0 to 4095 in steps of 1
Default: 0
The value entered sets the VID value in the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag included in published TxGOOSE1 messages. VID can be
used by network devices to direct messages to only selected devices, reducing network burden. VID values of 0 and 1
are assigned by IEEE 802.1Q to other functions and are not to be used for GOOSE.
TxGOOSE1 ETYPE APPID
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Default: 0
5
The value entered sets the APPID value in published GOOSE messages and can be used by subscribers to discriminate
TxGOOSE1 messages from other GOOSE messages.
The standard reserves the value range 0 to 16383 for GOOSE Type 1 (Fast messages), and reserves the value range
32768 to 41151 for GOOSE Type 1A (Trip messages). Some subscribers can process messages in the Type 1A range
faster than messages in the Type 1 range. The standard reserves the default value (0) to indicate lack of configuration.
The standard strongly recommends unique, source-orientated APPIDs within a given system.
TxGOOSE1 ConfRev
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 1
The value entered sets the confRev value in published GOOSE messages, and can be used by subscribers to discriminate
TxGOOSE messages of the expected configuration revision from messages of a different revision. The standard requires
that confRef be incremented each time the members or the order of the members published is changed, and each time
the data set name is changed. The standard states that the value of 0 is reserved.
TxGOOSE1 RETRANS TIME
Range: 0 to 100 ms in steps of 1 ms
Default: 4 ms
If the entered time is non-zero, when a member value change is detected, four event transmissions are sent, then
heartbeat transmissions resume. The interval between the first and second event transmissions, and between the
second and third, is the time set here. The interval between the third and the fourth event transmission is double the set
time. If the entered time is zero, only a single event transmission occurs, then heartbeat transmissions resume.
TxGOOSE1 TIME TO LIVE
Range: 1 to 300 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 300 s
The value entered sets the timeAllowedtoLive value in published TxGOOSE1 messages. The standard requires
subscribers to assume a failure has occurred when another TxGOOSE1 message is not received within the published
timeAllowedtoLive time.
5-50
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Base this setting on the TxGOOSE UPDATE TIME and the tolerable number of contiguous message delivery misses. For
example, if the heartbeat time is 10 s, and missing up to three successive messages is tolerable, make the setting 10*3 +
1 = 31 s. The extra second is to ensure that arrival of the third heartbeat transmission beats the timeAllowedtoLive timer.
The standard suggests that the heartbeat time be less than (actually half) of the timeAllowedtoLive parameter.
RxGOOSE
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE Messages.
IEC 61850, GOOSE is an efficient method for simultaneous high-speed delivery of the same generic substation event
information in a publishing physical device to more than one subscribing physical device. An RxGOOSE is a UR element
implementing a single IEC 61850 GOOSE message subscribing service. The publishing function in URs is performed by
TxGOOSE elements, as described in the previous section. Each C60 has 16 RxGOOSE elements. Each RxGOOSE element can
subscribe to GOOSE messages from a specified publisher. Subscribed messages can contain up to 64 of any set of data
attributes with basic types BOOLEAN, FLOAT32, INT32, Dbpos, TimeStamp, or Quality. Messages containing data objects,
that is to say structured data, are not accepted.
With these conditions, GOOSE messages from any device of any manufacturer that implements the IEC 61850 edition 1.0
or 2.0 GOOSE publish service can be subscribed to. The UR accepts both the variable-length encoded GOOSE messages
specified in IEC 61850-8-1:2004 and the Fixed-Length encoded GOOSE messages as specified in IEC 61850-8-1:2011
clause A.3.
Each enabled RxGOOSE monitors for interruption of the GOOSE messages that it subscribes to based on the value in the
timeAllowedtoLive field of the last message received. If a new message is not received within that time interval, the
RxGOOSE assumes that connectivity is lost. FlexLogic operands (for example, RxGOOSE1 On, RxGOOSE1 Off) reflect the
status of each RxGOOSE connectivity. RxGOOSE connectivity of an RxGOOSE with non-zero MAC address is also considered
lost after the C60 finishes restart until a message is received. When RxGOOSE connectivity is lost, a common RxGOOSE Fail
self-test activates.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE Messages >
RxGOOSE1 to access the settings that specify the messages to be accepted by the first RxGOOSE element. Messages that
contain the value true in the ndsCom field are never accepted. Messages that contain the value true in the simulation field
(test field in edition 1.0 messages) are accepted only when the UR test mode is Forcible; see the Testing section at the end
of this chapter for details. The settings and functionality for the other RxGOOSE are similar.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE Messages >
RxGOOSE1. The following settings are available.
Figure 5-14: IEC 61850 RxGOOSE Messages panel
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-51
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
RxGOOSE1 ID
Range: 0 to 129 VisibleString characters
Default:
If the value entered has one or more characters, the goID field of incoming GOOSE messages must exactly match this
value for the message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. If the entered value is the empty string, RxGOOSE1
does not check the value received in the goID field.
RxGOOSE1 Dst MAC
Range: any 12 digit hexadecimal number
Default: 00-00-00-00-00-00
Set this setting to the MAC address of the publisher. Only received GOOSE messages having a Media Access Control
(MAC) address equal to this value are accepted as valid RxGOOSE1 messages. An entered address of zero disables
RxGOOSE1.
If the publisher is a UR Series 7.3x device, the setting needs to match the value of the publisher’s TxGOOSE Dst MAC
setting.
RxGOOSE1 ETYPE APPID
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Default: 0
If the value entered is non-zero, the APPID field of incoming GOOSE messages must exactly match this value for the
message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. If the value entered is zero, RxGOOSE1 does not check the value
received in the APPID field.
If the publisher is a UR Series 7.3x device, the setting needs to match the value of the publisher’s TxGOOSE ETYPE APPID
setting.
5
RxGOOSE1 GoCBRef
Range: 0 to 129 alphanumeric, underscore, slash and period characters, beginning with an alpha character
Default:
The gocbRef field of incoming GOOSE messages must match this value for the message to be accepted as a valid
RxGOOSE1 message. If the entered value is the empty string, RxGOOSE1 is disabled. If not the empty string, the entry
needs to be an ACSI ObjectReference to the publishing control block in the format:
<LDName>/LLN0.<GoCBName>
where <LDName> is the function-related name if any of the logical device containing the publishing control block,
otherwise the product-related name of that logical device, and <GoCBName> is the name of the publishing control
block.
The C60 translates the ACSI format required for this setting to the MMS format used in GOOSE messages:
<LDName>/LLN0$GO$<GoCBName>
If the publisher is a UR 7.3x series device, <LDName> is the value of the publisher's Master functional ldName setting if
that setting is not empty, otherwise it is the value of the publisher's IED NAME suffixed with "Master". If the publisher is a
UR 7.3x series device, <GoCBName> is "GoCB" suffixed with the two digit TxGOOSE instance number, for example
"GoCB01".
RxGOOSE1 datSet
Range: 0 to 32 alphanumeric and underscore characters, beginning with an alpha character
Default:
If the entered value has one or more characters, the datSet field of incoming GOOSE messages must exactly match this
value prefixed by <LDName>/LLN0$ for the message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. <LDName> is as
specified in the RxGOOSE GoCBRef setting above. If the entered value is the empty string, RxGOOSE1 does not check the
value received in the datSet field.
If the publisher is a UR 7.3x series device, set this setting to the value of the publisher's DataSetxx name setting, where xx
is the instance number of the data set selected by the publisher's TxGOOSE datSet setting.
5-52
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
RxGOOSE1 ConfRev
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 1
If the value entered is non-zero, the confRev field of incoming GOOSE messages must exactly match this value for the
message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. If the entered value is zero, RxGOOSE1 does not check the value
received in the confRev field.
If the publisher is a UR 7.3x series device, set this setting to match the value of the publisher's TxGOOSE ConfRev setting.
RxGOOSE1 Member 1
Range: End of List, BOOLEAN, Dbpos, FLOAT32, INT32, Quality, TimeStamp
Default: End of List
This setting specifies the type that the first member of incoming GOOSE messages must be for the message to be
accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. There are similar settings for each of the members that the UR is able to
subscribe to in a given GOOSE message. The member before the first member setting set to "End of List" must be the last
member of the message for the message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message.
If the publisher is a UR 7.3x series device, set these settings to match the basic type of the members of the publisher's
data set selected by the publisher's TxGOOSE datSet setting.
RxGOOSE inputs
The values received by RxGOOSE elements need to be converted to FlexLogic or FlexAnalog operands so that they can be
used by other UR elements. This conversion is done by RxGOOSE Boolean, RxGOOSE DPS, and RxGOOSE Analog elements.
Each RxGOOSE Boolean can convert the value of a specified Boolean member received by a specified RxGOOSE to a
FlexLogic operand. Each RxGOOSE DPS can convert the value of a specified Dbpos (Double bit position) member to four
FlexLogic operands, one for each of the four possible Dbpos states. Each RxGOOSE Analog can convert the value of a
specified FLOAT32 member to a FlexAnalog operand. Each of these operands reverts to its default state when the
RxGOOSE connectivity is lost. INT32, Quality, and TimeStamp members cannot be converted to operands, and thus
although they can be accepted in GOOSE messages, they have no effect on the UR.
RxGOOSE Boolean, RxGOOSE DPS, and RxGOOSE Analog elements are mapped to various data objects in
<iedName>Master/GGIO3. This is to allow reading of their values via MMS and to allow references to them in SCL files.
GGIO3 has no settings, nor is it visible via UR Setup software. See the UR Communications Guide for more information on
GGIO3.
RxGOOSE Boolean inputs
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE Boolean Inputs
> RxGOOSE Boolean1 to access the settings for the first RxGOOSE Boolean. The settings and functionality for the others
are similar.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-53
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-15: RxGOOSE Boolean panel
RxGOOSE Boolean1 ID
Range: 0 to 12 characters
Default: RxG Bool1
5
This setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the name of the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand. The full
operand name is the value of this setting appended with " On". This descriptive text also appears in the SCL files
associated with the UR.
RxGOOSE Boolean1 RxGOOSE
Range: None, RxGOOSE1, RxGOOSE2, and so on
Default: None
This setting selects the RxGOOSE containing the value that drives the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand. If set to
None, the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand assumes its default state.
RxGOOSE Boolean1 Member
Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1
Default: 1
This setting selects the GOOSE message member that drives the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand. A setting of 1
selects the first member, 2 selects the second member, and so on. Entering a number greater than the number of
members in the message and entering the number of a member that is not a BOOLEAN results in the RxGOOSE
Boolean1 FlexLogic operand assuming its default state.
RxGOOSE Boolean1 DEFAULT STATE
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
Default: On
This setting selects the logic state for the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand if the UR has just completed startup and
the selected RxGOOSE has not yet received a message, or the selected RxGOOSE has lost its connectivity with the
publisher. The following choices are available:
5-54
–
"On" value defaults the input to logic 1
–
"Off" value defaults the input to logic 0
–
"Latest/On" freezes the input in case of lost connectivity. If the latest state is unknown, such as after UR power-up
but before the first communication, the input defaults to logic 1. When communication resumes, the input
becomes fully operational.
–
"Latest/Off" freezes the input in case of lost connectivity. If the latest state is unknown, such as after UR power-up
but before the first communication, the input defaults to logic 0. When communication resumes, the input
becomes fully operational.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
RxGOOSE Boolean1 EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting selects whether Off to On transitions of the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand are recorded by the event
recorder. If set to Enabled, Off to On transitions are recorded. On to Off transitions are not recorded, even if events are
enabled.
RxGOOSE DPS inputs
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 618560 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE DPS Inputs >
RxGOOSE DPS1 to access the settings for the first RxGOOSE Boolean. The settings and functionality for the others are
similar.
Figure 5-16: RxGOOSE DPS Inputs panel
5
RxGOOSE DPS1 ID
Range: 0 to 12 characters
Default: RxG DPS1
This setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the names of the four RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operands. The
full operand name is the value of this setting appended with "Intermediate," "On," "Off," or "Bad." This descriptive text
also appears in the SCL files associated with the C60.
RxGOOSE DPS1 RxGOOSE
Range: None, RxGOOSE1, RxGOOSE2, and so on
Default: None
This setting selects the RxGOOSE containing the value that drives the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operand. If set to None,
the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operand assumes its default state.
RxGOOSE DPS1 Member
Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1
Default: 1
This setting selects the GOOSE message member that drives the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operand. A setting of 1 selects
the first member, 2 selects the second member, and so on. Entering a number greater than the number of members in
the message and entering the number of a member that is not a Dbpos results in the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operand
assuming its default state.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-55
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
RxGOOSE DSP1 DEFAULT STATE
Range: intermediate-state, off, on, bad-state, Latest
Default: Latest
This setting selects the logic state for the data attribute @Master/GGIO3.IndPos01.stVal when the UR has just completed
start-up and the selected RxGOOSE has not yet received a message, and when the RxGOOSE has lost its connectivity
with the publisher. When this setting is selected to Latest, the value of @Master/GGIO3.IndPosψψ.stVal is intermediatestate when the UR has just completed start-up and the selected RxGOOSE has not yet received a message, and the
latest received value when the RxGOOSE loses its connectivity with the publisher.
RxGOOSE DPS1 EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting selects whether Off to On transitions of the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operands are recorded by the event
recorder. If set to Enabled, Off to On transitions are recorded. On to Off transitions are not recorded, even if events are
enabled.
RxGOOSE analog inputs
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE Analog Inputs >
RxGOOSE Analog Input1 to access the settings for the first RxGOOSE Boolean. The settings and functionality for the others
are similar.
Figure 5-17: RxGOOSE Analog Inputs panel
5
RxGOOSE Analog1 ID
Range: 0 to 12 characters
Default: RxG Analog1
This setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to RxGOOSE Analog1. This descriptive text also appears in the SCL
files associated with the C60. Unlike RxGOOSE Booleans and RxGOOSE DPS, the RxGOOSE Analog operands have fixed
names, for example RxGOOSE Analog1.
5-56
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
RxGOOSE Analog1 RxGOOSE
Range: None, RxGOOSE1, RxGOOSE2, and so on
Default: None
This setting selects the RxGOOSE containing the value that drives the RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexAnalog operand. If set to
None, the RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexAnalog operand assumes its default state.
RxGOOSE Analog1 Member
Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1
Default: 1
This setting selects the GOOSE message member that drives the RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexAnalog operand. A setting of 1
selects the first member, 2 selects the second member, and so on. Entering a number greater than the number of
members in the message and entering the number of a member that is not a FLOAT32 results in the RxGOOSE Analog1
FlexAnalog operand assuming its default state.
RxGOOSE Analog1 DEFAULT
Range: -1000000.000 to 1000000.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 1000.000
This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE analog input when the selected RxGOOSE has lost its connectivity with the
publisher and the RxGOOSE Analog1 DEFAULT MODE is set to "Default Value." Otherwise this setting has no effect. This
setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point number. Because of the large range of this setting, not all
possible values can be stored. Some values can be rounded to the closest possible floating point number.
RxGOOSE Analog1 DEFAULT MODE
Range: Default Value, Last Known
Default: Default Value
When the selected RxGOOSE has lost its connectivity with the publisher and this setting is "Last Known," the value of the
RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexLogic operand remains at the last received value. When the selected RxGOOSE has lost its
connectivity with the publisher and this setting value is "Default Value," then the RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexLogic operand is
defined by the RxGOOSE Analog1 DEFAULT setting. After restart, until a message is received, the operand value is the
default value.
RxGOOSE Analog1 UNITS
Range: up to 4 characters
Default:
This setting specifies a four-character string that can is used in the actual values display of RxGOOSE Analog1.
RxGOOSE Analogs are floating-point values, with no units. The RxGOOSE UNIT and PU base settings allow the user to
configure RxGOOSE Analog, so that it can be used in a FlexElement.
RxGOOSE Analogs that represent current, voltage, power, frequency, angles, or power factor can be used in a
FlexElement. The following text must be used in the UNITS setting, to represent these types of analogs: A, V, W, var, VA,
Hz, deg, and no text (blank setting) for power factor.
RxGOOSE Analogs can be compared to other RxGOOSE Analogs with any character string or no string.
RxGOOSE Analog1 PU
Range: 0.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 1.000
This setting specifies the per-unit base value for other C60 features to use with the RxGOOSE Analog1 operand. A
FlexElement for instance subtracts two quantities after converting their values to integers rescaled to a common base,
the common base being the largest of the base values of the two quantities. If one of quantities is RxGOOSE Analog1 and
its per-unit base value is not appropriate, the rescaling operation can result in unnecessary loss of precision or overflow
in the integer result. The FlexElement Base Units table in the Settings > FlexLogic > FlexElements section later, which
tabulates the per-unit base value used by its pickup setting and implies the per-unit base used by other FlexAnalogs, can
be of use in selecting a value for the RxGOOSE Analog1 PU setting.
Some UR elements have requirements for the type of input operands, for instance current type or voltage type. These
elements assume that RxGOOSE Analog operands are of whatever type is necessary to meet these requirements.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-57
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The per-unit base setting represents thousands, not single units. For example, a PU base of 1.000 is actually 1000 and a
PU base of 0.001 is 1.
When using RxGOOSE Analogs and PU base in FlexElements, the largest value that can be displayed in the FlexElement
actual values is 2,140,000.000.
Reports
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Reports.
Figure 5-18: IEC 61850 buffered report panel
5
An IEC 61850 Report server is an efficient method for delivery of generic substation event information in a single server to
a single client, such as a supervisory control IED. A Configurable Report is a UR element implementing an IEC 61850 Report
server, either of the buffered or unbuffered kind. The following table lists the number of Configurable Report elements.
Each Configurable Report element can report the values of up to 64 FlexLogic or FlexAnalog operands. Buffered report
elements queue value changes that occur while the client is offline and delivered when the client re-connects. Up to 512
events can be queued. Unbuffered control blocks purge all value change events when the connection to the client is lost;
any events that occur while the client is not connected are lost.
Table 5-9: Number of report elements
Number
Buffered reports
20
Unbuffered reports
14
Configurable Reports interoperate with any client device of any manufacturer that conforms to the IEC 61850 edition 1.0
or 2.0 report client requirements.
The entities whose values are reported by a Configurable Report are known as members. The members are itemized in an
ordered list known as a data set. Each Configurable Report can use any one of the data sets provided that no more than
four data sets are used for reports. This restriction is to limit the amount of processing power that can be allocated to
reporting.
Each enabled Configurable Report transmits an update to its client whenever a value change is detected in one or more of
its members. Also, the control block can be configured to send integrity reports containing the present value of all
members either on demand from the client or periodically. A TCP handshaking mechanism causes messages that are not
read and acknowledged by the client to be retransmitted.
For a Configurable Report to operate, its members must be selected (that is, its data set configured) and a client must open
a connection to, configure, and enable its report control block. Control blocks and data sets can be pre-configured by
sending the C60 a CID file. See the UR Series Communications Guide for details. EnerVista UR Setup also can be used to
select the data set members and to pre-configure the control blocks.
Each buffered report has the following settings.
5-58
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Buffered Report1 RptID
Range: 0 to 129 VisibleString characters
Default: empty string
The entered value sets the RptID value in Buffered Report1 messages, and it can be used by the client to discriminate
Buffered Report1 messages from other messages. If the number of characters entered is zero, the value used for RptID
in messages is an ObjectReference to the report's control block, that is, "<LDName>/LLN0$BR$"BRCB01".
Buffered Report1 DatSet
Range: None, DataSet01, DataSet02, …
Default: None
This setting selects the data set whose members' status is reported in Buffered Report1 messages using the UR Setup
software designator for the data set. The IEC 61850 name of the data sets are configured in the Datasets panel, as
described later.
An ObjectReference to the data set, which consists of the concatenation of the string "<LDName>/LLN0$" and the data
set name, is used in the datSet field of report messages, and it can be used by the client to discriminate Buffered Report1
messages from other messages.
Buffered Report1 ConfRev
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 1
The entered value sets the confRev value in Buffered Report1 messages, and it can be used by clients to discriminate
report messages of the expected configuration revision from messages of a different revision. The standard requires
that confRef be incremented each time the members or the order of the members is changed, and each time the data
set name is changed. The standard states that the value of 0 is reserved.
5
Buffered Report1 OptFlds
Range: The check box for each individual bit can be enabled or not (see figure)
Default: All bits true
The OptFlds setting is bitstring that controls which of the optional fields are included in report messages. The figure
shows the available option bits.
Figure 5-19: Options for buffered report messages
Buffered Report1 BufTm
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 0
The entered value sets the time interval in milliseconds for the buffering of events for inclusion in a single report.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-59
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Buffered Report1 TrgOps
Range: The check box for an individual bit can be enabled or not
Default: All bits true
The TrgOps setting is bitstring that controls which trigger conditions are monitored in this report. The options are as
follows:
–
data-change
–
quality-change
–
integrity
–
general interrogation
Buffered Report1 IntgPd
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 0
The entered value sets the period in milliseconds for generating Buffered Report1 integrity reports. An integrity report
includes the values of all members of the referenced data set, whether a change has occurred or not.
Each unbuffered report has the following settings.
Unbuffered Report1 RptID
Range: 0 to 129 VisibleString characters
Default:
5
The entered value sets the RptID value in Unbuffered Report1 messages, and it can be used by the client to discriminate
Unbuffered Report1 messages from other messages. If the number of characters entered is zero, the value used for
RptID in messages is an ObjectReference to the report's control block, that is, "<LDName>/LLN0$RP$"URCB01".
Unbuffered Report1 DatSet
Range: None, DataSet01, DataSet02, …
Default: None
This setting selects the data set whose members' status is reported in Unbuffered Report1 messages using the UR Setup
software designator for the data set. The IEC 61850 name of the data sets are configured in the Datasets panel, as
described later.
An ObjectReference to the data set, which consists of the concatenation of the string "<LDName>/LLN0$" and the data
set name, is used in the datSet field of report messages, and it can be used by the client to discriminate Unbuffered
Report1 messages from other messages.
Unbuffered Report1 ConfRev
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 0
The entered value sets the confRev value in Unbuffered Report1 messages, and it can be used by clients to discriminate
report messages of the expected configuration revision from messages of a different revision. The standard requires
that confRef be incremented each time the members or the order of the members is changed, and each time the data
set name is changed.
Unbuffered Report1 OptFlds
Range: The check box for an individual bit can be enabled or not
Default: All bits true
The OptFlds setting is bitstring that controls which of the optional fields are included in report messages. The options are
as follows:
5-60
–
sequence-number
–
report-time-stamp
–
reason-for-inclusion
–
data-set-name
–
data-reference
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
–
PRODUCT SETUP
conf-revision
Notice that OptFlds bits buffer-overflow and entryID are not applicable to unbuffered reports even though the bits exist
in the protocol. They are therefore labelled N/A (not applicable) on the display.
Unbuffered Report1 BufTm
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 0
The entered value sets the time interval in milliseconds for the buffering of events for inclusion into a single report.
Unbuffered Report1 TrgOps
Range: The check box for an individual bit can be enabled or not
Default: All bits true
The TrgOps setting is bitstring that controls which trigger conditions are monitored in this report. The options are as
follows:
–
data-change
–
quality-change
–
integrity
–
general interrogation
Unbuffered Report1 IntgPd
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1.
Default: 0
The entered value sets the period in milliseconds for generating Unbuffered Report1 integrity reports. An integrity report
includes the values of all members of the referenced data set, whether a change has occurred or not.
DataSets
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > DataSets.
As mentioned in the preceding GOOSE and Reports sections, the members whose values are communicated by these
services are itemized in an ordered list known as a data set. Each UR with the IEC 61850 option has 12 data sets. Each data
set can contain as many as 64 members. Any data set can be used simultaneously by any number of TxGOOSE elements
and/or by any number of Configurable Report elements. UR Setup software can configure any FlexLogic operands and any
FlexAnalog operands as members.
Figure 5-20: IEC 61850 DataSets
UR Setup requires data set members to be IEC 61850 data attributes. Certain FlexLogic and FlexAnalog operands have
factory assigned data attributes as tabulated in the UR Series Communications Guide. All FlexLogic and FlexAnalog
operands can be user-assigned to GGIO1 or GGIO4 data attributes, so that operands without factory assigned data
attributes can still have their values published. See the GGIO1 and GGIO4 sections later for details.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-61
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > DataSets > DataSet01 to access the settings for
the first data set. The settings and functionality for the others are similar.
DataSet01 name
Range: 0 to 32 VisibleString characters
Default: DataSet01
The value entered sets the name of the data set, which is required to be unique within the UR for proper operation. An
ObjectReference to the data set consists of a string that is the concatenation of "<LDName>/LLN0$" and the DataSet01
name setting value. An ObjectReference to the data set is published in the datSet field of TxGOOSE messages, and it can
be used by subscribers to discriminate the messages of that TxGOOSE from other GOOSE messages. An ObjectReference
to the data set is optionally published in the DatSet field of Report messages. Valid characters are upper and lowercase
letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. The first character must be a letter.
DataSet01 Member1
Range: End of List or any instantiated 61850 data object or data attribute with Functional Constraint ST or MX
Default: End of List
This setting specifies the first member in TxGOOSE1 messages. There is a similar setting for each of the up to 64
members that the UR allows in a Dataset. Only values of members before the first set to End of List are published.
Deadband settings
The IEC 61850 panels contain hundreds of deadband settings, such as in the following panels: System Setup > Signal
Sources, FlexLogic, Grouped Elements, Control Elements, and GGIO4. Each panel is not outlined here.
5
Deadband setting names all end either with "DEADBAND" or .db. As they all work the same way, but each on a different
analog value, a single description applicable to all deadband settings is given here. The analog value that each deadband
setting applies to is usually obvious from the name of the setting. However, a tabulation of the analog values and their
associated deadband setting can be found in the UR Series Communications Guide.
Figure 5-21: Deadband settings with .db suffix
GOOSE, buffered report, and unbuffered report messages are for the most part transmitted only when there is a value
change in one or more of their members. Most analog values continuously dither by an amount that is not significant.
Were a report to be sent each time an insignificant analog value change occurred, then the communications network
floods with GOOSE and report messages, degrading response time for all users.
To control this, a deadband setting is provided for each analog value. Also, in addition to the present actual value of each
analog ("instMag" in the following figure), there is a deadbanded value ("mag" in the figure), which is updated with the
present value only when the difference between the two exceeds the deadband setting (db in the figure). Changes to this
deadbanded value trigger transmissions when included in GOOSE and report data sets.
5-62
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-22: Deadband settings
Deadband settings are entered in UR Setup in units of percent of the difference between the "max." and "min." of the
associated analog value. A zero deadband setting suppresses transmission triggering. The range of deadband settings is
0.000 to 100.000% in steps of 0.001. The default value is 10.000%.
GGIO4 elements have individual settings for "min." and "max." The min. and max. for FlxEIGAPC#.OpSig.db (FLEXELEMENT #
OpSig) are -50 pu and +50 pu respectively. The min. value for all other quantities is 0. The max. values are as follows:
•
Phase current — 46 x phase CT primary setting
•
Neutral current — 46 x ground CT primary setting
•
Phase and phase-to-phase voltage — 275 x VT ratio setting
•
Power (real, reactive, apparent, 3-phase, and 1-phase) — 46 x phase CT primary setting x 275 x VT ratio setting
•
Energy (real or imaginary) — 46 x phase CT primary setting x 275 x VT ratio setting x 1 hour
•
Frequency — 90 Hz
•
Frequency rate of change — 90 Hz/s
•
Power factor — 2
•
Angle — 360 degrees
5
Select the deadband settings from knowledge of the characteristics of the power system quantity measured and
knowledge of the demands of the applications receiving the measurement via GOOSE or report such that changes of
significance to the application are promptly reported, yet the network is not overly burdened with event messages.
Breaker 1
The UR breaker control and status monitoring elements have certain settings that configure how the IEC 61850 protocol
interacts with these elements. These settings are described in this section. See the Breakers section in the System Setup
section of this chapter for details on the operation of breaker control elements.
Navigate to Settings > Communications > IEC 61850 > System Setup > Breakers > Breaker 1 to access the settings that
configure the IEC 61850 protocol interface with the first breaker control and status monitoring element. The settings and
functionality for the others are similar.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-63
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-23: IEC 61850 Breaker panel
XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND
Range: any FlexLogic operand
Default: OFF
5
This setting is used to select a FlexLogic operand that declares to IEC 61850 services that breaker 1 is selected for local
control. While the selected operand is asserted, Bkr0XCBR1.Loc.stVal is true and IEC 61850 commands to BkrCSWI1.Pos
and Bkr0XCBR1.Pos are not accepted, and a Negative Response (-Rsp) is issued with the REASON CODE of Blocked-byswitching-hierarchy.
XCBR1 SYNCCHECK CLS
Range: any FlexLogic operand
Default: ON
This setting is used to select a FlexLogic operand that declares to IEC 61850 services that synchrocheck conditions are
acceptable for closing breaker 1. If a SelectWithValue or Operate service with ctlVal true and with Check.SynchroCheck
true is requested of either BkrCSWI1.Pos or Bkr0XCBR1.Pos and the selected operand is not asserted, a Negative
Response (-Rsp) is issued with the REASON CODE of Blocked-by-synchrocheck.
XCBR1 INTERLOCK OPN
Range: any FlexLogic operand
Default: ON
This setting is used to select a FlexLogic operand that declares to IEC 61850 services that interlocking conditions are not
acceptable for opening breaker 1. While the selected operand is asserted, the value of BkrCILO.EnaOpn.stVal is false. If a
SelectWithValue or Operate service with ctlVal false and with Check.Interlock-check true is requested of either
BkrCSWI1.Pos or Bkr0XCBR1.Pos, and the selected operand is not activated, a Negative Response (-Rsp) is issued with
the REASON CODE of Blocked-by-interlocking.
XCBR1 INTERLOCK CLS
Range: any FlexLogic operand
Default: ON
This setting is used to select a FlexLogic operand that declares to IEC 61850 services that interlocking conditions are not
acceptable for closing breaker 1. While the selected operand is asserted, the value of BkrCILO.EnaCls.stVal is false. If a
SelectWithValue or Operate service with ctlVal true and with Check.Interlock-check true is requested of either
BkrCSWI1.Pos or Bkr0XCBR1.Pos and the selected operand is not activated, a Negative Response (-Rsp) is issued with the
REASON CODE of Blocked-by-interlocking.
5-64
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
XCBR1 Pos ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security, direct-with-enhanced-security, sbo-withenhanced-security
Default: sbo-with-enhanced-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the breaker 1 signals marked
Bkr0XCBR1.PosOpn.ctlVal and Bkr0XCBR1.PosCls.ctlVal on the Breaker Control Logic (Sheet 1 of 2) diagram in the
Settings > System Setup section later in this chapter. These signals force a breaker 1 three-phase trip or close control
while the operand selected by setting XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND is not active.
"sbo" here is select-before-operate. Enhanced security means that the UR reports to the client the breaker 1 position at
the end of the command sequence.
XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout
Range: 2.000 to 60.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Default: 30.000 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between a select and an operate command to breaker 1 signals marked
Bkr0XCBR1.PosOpn.ctlVal and Bkr0XCBR1.PosCls.ctlVal in order for the operand to be successful. This setting is only
relevant when XCBR1 Pos ctlModel is sbo-with-normal-security or sbo-with-enhanced-security.
XCBR1 BlkOpn ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the breaker 1 signal marked
Bkr0XCBR1.BlkOpn.ctlVal signal on the Breaker Control Logic (Sheet 1 of 2) diagram in the Settings > System Setup
section later. This signal when true blocks breaker 1 trip control while the operand selected by setting XCBR1 ST.LOC
OPERAND is not active.
5
XCBR1 BlkCls ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the breaker 1 signal marked
Bkr0XCBR1.BlkCls.ctlVal signal on the Breaker Control Logic (Sheet 1 of 2) diagram in the Settings > System Setup section
later. This signal when true blocks breaker 1 close control while the operand selected by setting XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND
is not active.
CSWI1 Pos ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security, direct-with-enhanced-security, sbo-withenhanced-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the breaker 1 signals marked
BkrCSWI1.PosOpn.ctlVal and BkrCSWI1.PosCls.ctlVal on the Breaker Control Logic (Sheet 1 of 2) diagram in the Settings >
System Setup section earlier. These signals force a breaker 1 three-phase trip or close control while the operand selected
by setting XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND is not active.
CSWI1 Pos sboTimeout
Range: 2.000 to 60.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Default: 30.000 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between a select and an operate command to breaker 1 via BkrCSWI1.Pos in
order for the operand to be successful. This setting is only relevant when CSWI1 Pos ctlModel is sbo-with-normalsecurity or sbo-with-enhanced-security.
CSWI1 Pos operTimeout
Range: 0.000 to 2.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Default: 0.100 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between an operate command to breaker 1 via BkrCSWI1.Pos until
BkrCSWI1.Pos.stVal enters the commanded state. The command terminates if the commanded state is not reached in
the set time.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-65
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Switch 1
The UR disconnect switch control and status monitoring elements have certain settings that configure how the IEC 61850
protocol interacts with these elements. These settings are described in this section. See the Settings > System Setup >
Disconnect Switches section later in this chapter for details on the operation of the disconnect switch control elements.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > System Setup > Switches > Switch 1 to access
the settings that configure the IEC 61850 protocol interface with the first disconnect switch control and status monitoring
element. The settings and functionality for the others are similar.
Figure 5-24: Switches panel
5
XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND
Range: any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting is used to select a FlexLogic operand that declares to IEC 61850 services that disconnect switch 1 is selected
for local control. While the selected operand is asserted, Disc0XSWI1.Loc.stVal is true and IEC 61850 commands to
DiscCSWI1.Pos and Disc0XSWI1.Pos are not accepted, and a Negative Response (-Rsp) is issued with the REASON CODE
of Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy.
XSWI1 INTERLOCK OPN
Range: any FlexLogic operand
Default: On
This setting is used to select a FlexLogic operand that declares to IEC 61850 services that interlocking conditions are not
acceptable for opening disconnect switch 1. While the selected operand is asserted, the value of DiscCILO.EnaOpn.stVal
is false. If a SelectWithValue or Operate service with ctlVal false and with Check.Interlock-check true is requested of
DiscCSWI1.Pos or Disc0XSWI1.Pos and the selected operand is not activated, a Negative Response (-Rsp) is issued with
the REASON CODE of Blocked-by-interlocking.
5-66
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
XSWI1 INTERLOCK CLS
Range: any FlexLogic operand
Default: On
This setting is used to select a FlexLogic operand that declares to IEC 61850 services that interlocking conditions are not
acceptable for closing disconnect switch 1. While the selected operand is asserted, the value of DiscCILO.EnaCls.stVal is
false. If a SelectWithValue or Operate service with ctlVal true and with Check.Interlock-check true is requested of
DiscCSWI1.Pos or Disc0XSWI1.Pos and the selected operand is not activated, a Negative Response (-Rsp) is issued with
the REASON CODE of Blocked-by-interlocking.
XSWI1 Pos ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security, direct-with-enhanced-security, sbo-withenhanced-security
Default: sbo-with-enhanced-security
This setting selects the control model that clients must use to successfully control the disconnect switch 1 signals
marked Disc0XCBR1.PosOpn.ctlVal and Disc0XCBR1.PosCls.ctlVal on the Disconnect Switch Logic diagram in the Settings
> System Setup section later. These signals force a disconnect switch trip or close control while the operand selected by
setting XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND is not active.
"sbo" here is select-before-operate. Enhanced security means that the C60 reports to the client the disconnect switch 1
position the end of the command sequence.
XSWI1 Pos sboTimeout
Range: 2.000 to 60.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Default: 30.000 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between a select and an operate command to disconnect switch 1 signals
marked Disc0XCBR1.PosOpn.ctlVal and Disc0XCBR1.PosCls.ctlVal in order for the operand to be successful. This setting is
only relevant when XSWI1 Pos ctlModel is sbo-with-normal-security or sbo-with-enhanced-security.
XSWI1 BlkOpn ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: sbo-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the disconnect switch 1 signal marked
DiscCSWI1.BlkOpn.ctlVal signal on the Disconnect Switch Logic diagram in the Settings > System Setup section later. This
signal when true blocks disconnect switch 1 trip control while the operand selected by setting XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND is
not active.
XSWI1 BlkCls ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: sbo-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the disconnect switch 1 signal marked
DiscCSWI1.BlkCls.ctlVal signal on the Disconnect Switch Logic diagram in the Settings > System Setup section later. This
signal when true blocks disconnect switch 1 close control while the operand selected by setting XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND
is not active.
CSWI1 Pos ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security, direct-with-enhanced-security, sbo-withenhanced-security
Default: sbo-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the disconnect switch 1 signals marked
DiscCSWI1.PosOpn.ctlVal and DiscCSWI1.PosCls.ctlVal on the Disconnect Switch Logic diagram in the Settings > System
Setup section later. These signals force a disconnect switch trip or close control while the operand selected by setting
XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND is not active.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-67
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CSWI1 Pos sboTimeout
Range: 2.000 to 60.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Default: 30.000 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between a select and an operate command to disconnect switch 1 via
BkrCSWI1.Pos in order for the operand to be successful. This setting is only relevant when CSWI1 Pos ctlModel is sbowith-normal-security or sbo-with-enhanced-security.
CSWI1 Pos operTimeout
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001s
Default: 5.000 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between an operate command to disconnect switch 1 via BkrCSWI1.Pos until
BkrCSWI1.Pos.stVal enters the commanded state. The command terminates if the commanded state is not reached in
the set time.
Setting Groups
The UR implements a setting groups element as detailed in the Control Elements > Setting Groups section of this chapter.
The active setting group and the setting group open for edits can be selected via MMS commands SelectActiveSG and
SelectEditSG. The setting related to these IEC 61850 commands are described here.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Control Elements > Setting Groups to access
the setting that configures the IEC 61850 setting group commands.
Figure 5-25: Setting Groups panel
5
Initial Setting Group
Range: 1 to 6 in steps of 1
Default: 1
The entered value sets the initial value of the non-volatile register normally controlled by the service SelectActiveSG. This
initialization occurs only on the UR reboot immediately following the receipt of a valid CID file.
This setting is not mapped into the IEC 61850 information model, but sets the value of SettingControl element attribute
actSG in SCL files.
5-68
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Commands
The UR implements a number of clear records commands as detailed in the Commands and Targets chapter of this
manual. Several of these commands also can be issued via IEC 61850. The settings related to these IEC 61850 commands
are described here.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Commands to access the settings that configure
the IEC 61850 protocol interface for record clear commands.
Figure 5-26: Commands panel
5
FltRptRFLO1.RsStat.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR FAULT REPORTS. "sbo"
here is select-before-operate. Enhanced security means that the C60 reports to the client the breaker 1 position at the
end of the command sequence.
LLN0.EvtRcdClr.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR EVENT RECORDS.
LPHD1.RsStat.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR ALL RELAY RECORDS.
OscRDRE1.RcdTrg.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command FORCE TRIGGER.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-69
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
OscRDRE1.MemClr.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY.
DatLogRDRE1.MemClr.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR DATA LOGGER.
EnrMtrMMTR.RsStat.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR ENERGY.
GGIO1
GGIO1 is a UR feature that allows up to 128 UR FlexLogic operands to be user-mapped to IEC 61850 information model
data attributes.
For the value of a FlexLogic operand to be read via MMS, included in TxGOOSE messages, or included in buffered/
unbuffered reports, the value must be assigned to a data attribute. GGIO1 allows those FlexLogic operands that have not
yet been factory-assigned to a data attribute to be user-assigned to a generic data attribute, and thus have their values
included in IEC 61850 communications.
5
GGIO1 also provides a chatter suppression service. Oscillation in a value, also known as chatter, can be caused by errors in
logic programming, inadequate hysteresis (deadband) on a threshold, or a failed station component. Chatter can flood a
communications network with GOOSE messages, degrading response time for all users. If chatter is detected in a GGIO1
data attribute, TxGOOSE suspends GOOSE event message triggering from that data attribute for as long as the condition
exists, and for a minimum period of one second. While sending is suspended, a self-test message identifying the specific
data item detected as oscillating is activated.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO > GGIO1 to access the settings for GGIO1.
Figure 5-27: IEC 61850 GGIO1 panel
5-70
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
GGIO1 INDICATION 1
Range: any FlexLogic operand
Default: OFF
This setting selects the FlexLogic operand whose value is mapped into the IEC 61850 data attribute
<LDName>/GGIO1.Ind001.stVal. See the FlexLogic section in this chapter for a list of FlexLogic operands.
GGIO1 INDICATION 2
Range: any FlexLogic operand
Default: OFF
Selects the FlexLogic operand mapped to <LDName>/GGIO1.Ind002.stVal, and so on.
GGIO2
Virtual Inputs are controllable FlexLogic operands that can be controlled via IEC 61850 commands to GGIO2, by DNP, by
Modbus, and by the UR front panel. The settings related to these IEC 61850 commands are described here.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO > GGIO2 to access the settings that
configure the IEC 61850 protocol interface for Virtual Input commands.
Figure 5-28: GGIO2 panel
5
GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1 ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control Virtual Input 1. "sbo" here is select-beforeoperate.
GGIO2 CF SPCSO 2 ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
Selects the control model for Virtual Input 2, and so on.
GGIO4
GGIO4 is a UR feature that allows any of up to 32 UR FlexAnalog operands to be user-mapped to an IEC 61850 information
model data attribute.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-71
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
For the value of a FlexAnalog operand to be read via MMS, included in TxGOOSE messages, or included in buffered/
unbuffered reports, the value must be assigned to a data attribute. GGIO4 allows those FlexAnalog operands that have not
yet been factory assigned to a data attribute to be user-assigned to a generic data attribute, and thus have their values
included in IEC 61850 communications.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO > GGIO4 > GGIO4.AnIn1 to access the
settings for the first GGIO4 value. The settings and functionality for the others are similar.
Figure 5-29: GGIO4 panel
5
ANALOG IN 1 VALUE
Range: any FlexAnalog operand
Default: OFF
This setting selects the FlexAnalog operand whose value is mapped into the IEC 61850 data attribute
<LDName>/GGIO4.AnIn01.instMag.f. The value of the FlexAnalog operand is converted automatically to the format and
scaling required by the standard, that is to say primary amperes, primary volts, and so on. See Appendix A for a list of
FlexAnalog operands.
ANALOG IN 1 DB
Range: 0.000 to 100.000% in steps of 0.001
Default: 10.000%
This setting specifies the deadband for the ANALOG IN 1 VALUE. The deadband is used to determine when to update the
deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude. The deadband is a percentage of the difference between
the "max." and "min." values. Here, the "max." and "min." are as specified by the settings ANALOG IN 1 MAX and ANALOG IN
1 MIN.
See the Deadband Settings section earlier for a description of deadbanded values.
ANALOG IN 1 MIN
Range: -1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 1000.000
This setting specifies the "min." value used in deadband calculations. The scaling of this setting is the same as used by
<LDName>/GGIO4.AnIn01.instMag.f. This setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point number. Because of
the large range of this setting, not all possible values can be stored. Some values are rounded to the closest possible
floating point number.
5-72
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
ANALOG IN 1 MAX
Range: -1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.000
This setting specifies the "max." value used in deadband calculations. The scaling of this setting is the same as used by
<LDName>/GGIO4.AnIn01.instMag.f. This setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point number. Because of
the large range of this setting, not all possible values can be stored. Some values are rounded to the closest possible
floating point number.
5.3.4.13 Web server HTTP protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
 WEB SERVER
 HTTP PROTOCOL

HTTP TCP PORT
NUMBER: 80
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
The C60 contains an embedded web server and can display pages in a web browser. The web pages are organized as a
series of menus that can be accessed starting at the C60 “Main Menu.” Web pages are available showing DNP and IEC
60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, event records, fault reports, and so on. First connect the C60 and a computer
to an Ethernet network, then enter the IP address of the C60 Ethernet port in a web browser.
To close the port, set the port number to 0. The change takes effect when the C60 is restarted.
Figure 5-30: Example of UR web page showing event records
5
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
NOTE
5.3.4.14 TFTP protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  TFTP PROTOCOL
 TFTP PROTOCOL


TFTP MAIN UDP PORT
NUMBER: 69
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1
NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2
NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-73
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the C60 over a network. The C60 operates as a
TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file obtained
from the C60 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, and so on).
While TFTP is supported, the put function is not for security reasons. For example, you can enter a "get" command but not
a "put" command.
TFTP MAIN UDP PORT NUMBER — To close the port, set the port number to 0. The change takes effect when the C60 is
restarted.
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
NOTE
5.3.4.15 IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
 IEC 60870-5-104
 PROTOCOL
5

IEC TCP PORT
NUMBER: 2404
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 IEC NETWORK
 CLIENT ADDRESSES
See below

IEC COMMON ADDRESS
OF ASDU: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

IEC CYCLIC DATA
PERIOD: 60 s
Range: 1 to 65535 s in steps of 1

IEC CURRENT DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

IEC POWER DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

IEC ENERGY DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

IEC PF DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 1.00
Range: 0.00 to 1.00

IEC OTHER DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

IEC REDUNDANCY
ENABLED: No
Range: No, Yes
IEC 60870-5-104 is a transmission protocol for network access, specifically for communication between a control station
and substation over a TCP/IP network.
The C60 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. This protocol is enabled when the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP 
COMMUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL setting is set to IEC 60870-5-104. The C60 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device
connected to a maximum of two masters (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the C60 maintains two
sets of IEC 60870-5-104 data change buffers, ideally no more than two masters actively communicate with the C60 at one
time.
The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing
M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the C60 analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other.
Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For example, to trigger
spontaneous responses from the C60 when any current values change by 15 A, the IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD
5-74
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
setting is set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (parameter of measured
value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual
M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the C60, the default thresholds are in effect.
The IEC REDUNDANCY setting decides whether multiple client connections are accepted or not. If redundancy is set to Yes,
two simultaneous connections can be active at any given time.
IEC TCP PORT NUMBER — To close the port, set the port number to 0. The change takes effect when the C60 is restarted.
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
NOTE
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL  IEC NETWORK CLIENT
ADDRESSES
 IEC NETWORK
 CLIENT ADDRESSES

CLIENT ADDRESS 1:
0.0.0.0

CLIENT ADDRESS 5:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IPV4 address format

Range: standard IPV4 address format
The C60 can specify a maximum of five clients for its IEC 104 connections. These are IP addresses for the controllers to
which the C60 can connect. A maximum of two simultaneous connections are supported at any given time.
5.3.4.16 EGD protocol
5
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL
 EGD PROTOCOL


 FAST PROD EXCH 1
 CONFIGURATION
See below

 SLOW PROD EXCH 1
 CONFIGURATION
See below

 SLOW PROD EXCH 2
 CONFIGURATION
See below
The C60 is provided with optional Ethernet Global Data (EGD) communications capability. This feature is
specified as a software option at the time of ordering. See the Order Codes section in chapter 2 for
details.
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) is a suite of protocols used for the real-time transfer of data for display and control purposes.
The relay can be configured to ‘produce’ EGD data exchanges, and other devices can be configured to ‘consume’ EGD data
exchanges. The number of produced exchanges (up to three), the data items in each exchange (up to 50), and the
exchange production rate can be configured.
The relay supports one fast EGD exchange and two slow EGD exchanges. There are 20 data items in the fast-produced
EGD exchange and 50 data items in each slow-produced exchange.
EGD cannot be used to transfer data between UR series relays. The relay supports EGD production only. An EGD exchange
is not be transmitted unless the destination address is non-zero, and at least the first data item address is set to a valid
Modbus register address. The default setting value of “0” is considered invalid.
Fast exchanges (50 to 1000 ms) are generally used in control schemes. The C60 has one fast exchange (exchange 1) and
two slow exchanges (exchange 2 and 3).
The settings menu for the fast EGD exchange follows.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-75
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION
 FAST PROD EXCH 1
 CONFIGURATION

EXCH 1 FUNCTION:
Disable
Range: Disable, Enable

EXCH 1 DESTINATION:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address

EXCH 1 DATA RATE:
1000 ms
Range: 50 to 1000 ms in steps of 1

EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 (Modbus register
address range)


EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 20:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 (Modbus register
address range)
The settings menu for the slow EGD exchanges follows.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL SLOW PROD EXCH 1(2) CONFIGURATION
 SLOW PROD EXCH 1
 CONFIGURATION
5

EXCH 1 FUNCTION:
Disable
Range: Disable, Enable

EXCH 1 DESTINATION:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address

EXCH 1 DATA RATE:
1000 ms
Range: 50 to 1000 ms in steps of 1

EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 (Modbus register
address range)


EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 50:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 (Modbus register
address range)
Slow EGD exchanges (500 to 1000 ms) are generally used for the transfer and display of data items. The settings for the
fast and slow exchanges are as follows.
EXCH 1 DESTINATION — This setting specifies the destination IP address of the produced EGD exchange. This is usually
unicast or broadcast.
EXCH 1 DATA RATE — This setting specifies the rate at which this EGD exchange is transmitted. If the setting is 50 ms, the
exchange data is updated and sent once every 50 ms. If the setting is 1000 ms, the exchange data is updated and sent
once per second. EGD exchange 1 has a setting range of 50 to 1000 ms. Exchanges 2 and 3 have a setting range of 500 to
1000 ms.
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1 to 20/50 — These settings specify the data items that are part of this EGD exchange. Almost any data
from the C60 memory map can be configured to be included in an EGD exchange. The settings are the starting Modbus
register address for the data item in decimal format. See the Modbus memory map in the UR Series Communications
Guide for details. The Modbus memory map display shows addresses in hexadecimal format. Convert these hex values to
decimal format before entering them as values for these setpoints.
To select a data item to be part of an exchange, it is only necessary to choose the starting Modbus address of the item.
That is, for items occupying more than one Modbus register (for example, 32 bit integers and floating point values), only the
first Modbus address is required. The EGD exchange configured with these settings contains the data items up to the first
setting that contains a Modbus address with no data, or 0. That is, if the first three settings contain valid Modbus addresses
and the fourth is 0, the produced EGD exchange contains three data items.
5-76
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
5.3.4.17 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-103
 IEC103
 PROTOCOL

IEC103 COMMON
ADDRESS OF ASDU: 0
Range: 0 to 254 in steps of 1

IEC103 SYNC TIMEOUT:
1
Range: 1 to 1440 min in steps of 1

 IEC103 INPUTS
 BINARY
See below

 IEC103 INPUTS
 MEASURANDS
See below

 IEC103 COMMANDS

See below
The C60 is provided with optional IEC 60870-5-103 communications capability. This feature is specified as
a software option at the time of ordering. See the Order Codes section in chapter 2 for details.
IEC 60870-5-103 is a companion standard to the IEC 60870-5 suite of standards for transmission protocols. It defines
messages and procedures for interoperability between protection equipment and devices of a control system in a
substation for communicating on a serial line.
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is enabled when the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL setting
is set to IEC 60870-5-103.
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication, exchanging
information with a control system. In the context of this protocol, the protection equipment is the slave and the control
system is the master. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must be able to interpret the
IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
The UR implementation of IEC 60870-5-103 consists of the following functions:
•
Report binary inputs
•
Report analog values (measurands)
•
Commands
•
Time synchronization
The RS485 port supports IEC 60870-5-103.
The UR Series Communications Guide contains more information on the protocol.
IEC103 COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU — This setting uniquely defines this C60 on the serial line. Select an ID between 0 and
254. This ID does not need to be in sequential order for all stations that communicate with a controller, but it is
recommended. Note that RS485 only allows a maximum of 32 slave stations on a communication line, so the entire range
of 254 addresses is never exhausted.
IEC103 SYNC TIMEOUT — This setting defines the time that the C60 waits for a synchronization message. The C60
synchronizes its clock using all available sources, with the source synching more frequently overwriting the time of the
other sources. Since the synchronization message received from the IEC 60870-5-103 master is less frequent than IRIG-B,
PTP, or SNTP, its time is overwritten by these three sources, if any of them is active. If the synchronization timeout occurs
and none of IRIG-B, PTP, or SNTP is active, the C60 sets the invalid bit in the time stamp of a time-tagged message.
The settings for the remaining menus are outlined as follows.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-103  IEC103 INPUTS BINARY
 IEC103 INPUTS
 BINARY

 POINT 0

C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
See below
5-77
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

 POINT 1

See below

 POINT 0


 POINT 95

See below

POINT 0 FUN
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

POINT 0 INF
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

POINT 0 Input
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

 POINT 95

5

POINT 95 FUN
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

POINT 95 INF
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

POINT 95 Input
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
The binary input points are mapped using elements from a list of possible FlexLogic operands. A maximum of 96 binary
inputs (points) can be mapped this way.
The IEC 60870-5-103 point list always starts with point 0 and ends at the first "Off" value. Since the IEC 60870-5-103 point
list must be in a continuous block, any points assigned after the first "Off" point are ignored.
For each defined point, set appropriate values for the Function Type (FUN) and Information Number (INF), which form the
Information Object Identifier field of the ASDU, as defined in IEC 60870-5-103.
The binary input points are sent as Class 1 data. They are sent either as a response to a general interrogation received
from the controller or reported spontaneously. Spontaneous transmission occurs as a response to cyclic Class 2 requests.
If the C60 wants to transmit Class 1 data at that time, it demands access for Class 1 data transmission (ACD=1 in the
control field of the response).
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-103  IEC103 INPUTS MEASURANDS
 IEC103 INPUTS
 MEASURANDS

 ASDU 1

See below

 ASDU 4


ASDU 1 TYP:
9
Range: 3 or 9

ASDU 1 FUN:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

ASDU 1 INF:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

ASDU 1 SCAN TOUT:
0
Range: 0 to 1000 s in steps of 1

 ASDU 1

5-78
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP

ASDU 1 ANALOG 1
Off
Range: FlexAnalog parameter

ASDU 1 ANALOG 1
FACTOR: 1.000
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 in steps of 0.001

ASDU 1 ANALOG 1
OFFSET: 0
Range: -32768 to 32767 in steps of 1


ASDU 1 ANALOG 9
Off
Range: FlexAnalog parameter

ASDU 1 ANALOG 9
FACTOR: 1.000
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 in steps of 0.001

ASDU 1 ANALOG 9
OFFSET: 0
Range: -32768 to 32767 in steps of 1

ASDU 4 TYP:
9
Range: 3 or 9

ASDU 4 FUN:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

ASDU 4 INF:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

ASDU 4 SCAN TOUT:
0
Range: 0 to 1000 s in steps of 1

ASDU 4 ANALOG 1
Off
Range: FlexAnalog parameter

ASDU 4 ANALOG 1
FACTOR: 1.000
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 in steps of 0.001

ASDU 4 ANALOG 1
OFFSET: 0
Range: -32768 to 32767 in steps of 1

ASDU 4 ANALOG 9
Off
Range: FlexAnalog parameter

ASDU 4 ANALOG 9
FACTOR: 1.000
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 in steps of 0.001

ASDU 4 ANALOG 9
OFFSET: 0
Range: -32768 to 32767 in steps of 1

 ASDU 4

5

The configuration menu allows a maximum of four ASDUs containing measurands.
Measurands are sent as a response to Class 2 requests, which are cyclic requests coming from the master.
TYPE IDENTIFICATION (TYP) — The configuration field TYP indicates how many measurands are present in the corresponding
ASDU. Each ASDU can take either 4 or 9 measurands maximum, depending on the type identification (3 respectively 9).
FUNCTION TYPE (FUN) and INFORMATION NUMBER (INF) — These two fields form the Information Object Identifier of the ASDU
as defined in IEC 60870-103.
SCAN TIMEOUT (SCAN TOUT) — This is the cyclic period used by the C60 to decide when a measurand ASDU is included in a
response. The measurand is sent as response to a Class 2 request when the corresponding timeout expires. The default
value 0 means 500 ms.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-79
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
ANALOG # — This field contains the actual measurand to be sent in the response to the master. The measurands can be
mapped using elements from a list of FlexAnalog operands. The measurands sent are voltage, current, power, power
factor, and frequency. If any other FlexAnalog is chosen, the C60 sends 0 instead of its value. Note that the power is
transmitted in KW, not W. Measurands are transmitted as ASDU 3 or ASDU 9 (type identification value set to measurands I,
respectively measurands II).
Each IEC 60870-5-103 measurands list ends at the first unconfigured ("Off") value. Any measurand assigned after the first
"Off" value is ignored.
At least one measurand per ASDU must be configured in order to configure the following ASDU. For example, the user can
configure only one measurand for each ASDU, but the user is not allowed to skip ASDU 2 and configure measurands in
ASDU 3.
ANALOG # FACTOR and OFFSET — For each measurand included in the ASDU, a factor and offset also can be configured. The
factor and offset allow for scaling to be performed on measurands. The final measurement sent to the IEC 60870-103
master is then "a*x + b," where x is the measurand, a is the multiplying factor and b is the offset. The master has to perform
the reversed operation in order to retrieve the actual value if such scaling is done. By default a = 1 and b = 0, so no scaling
is done if these values are left at their defaults. Examples of when scaling is appropriate are as follows:
•
If the measured value contains decimals and it is important to preserve the resolution. Since the format for
transmitting the measurand does not permit decimals, a factor a>1 can be applied before transmission. For example,
a frequency F=59.9Hz can be transmitted as Ft = 10 * F = 10 * 59.9 = 599. In this case a = 10, b = 0. The master receives
599 and has to divide by 10 to retrieve the real value 59.9.
•
If the measured value is larger than what fits in the format defined in IEC 103. The format defined in the standard
allows for signed integers up to 4095. By offsetting, unsigned integers up to 4096 + 4095 = 8191 are supported.
Scaling using factors <1 can be required in such cases. The calculation is outlined in the IEC 60870-5-103 chapter of
the UR Series Communications Guide. Two examples follow, where you decide factors a and b.
5
Example 1: Nominal power Pn = 100 MW = 100000 KW (power is transmitted in KW)
Since P can be both positive and negative:
Transmitted power Pt = (4095/(Pn*2.4)) * P = (4095/(100000 * 2.4) ) * P
= 0.017 * P
a = 0.017
b=0
Pt = 0.017 * P
For a max power 100000 KW * 2.4 = 240000 KW, we transmit
Pt = 0.017 * 240000 = 4080
A value above 240 MW is indicated by overflow.
Example 2: Nominal voltage Vn = 500000 V
Since RMS voltage V can be only positive:
Transmitted voltage Vt = (8191/(Vn*2.4)) * V - 4096 =
= (8191/(500000 * 2.4) ) * V - 4096 = 0.0068 * V - 4096
a = 0.0068
Since the step is in increments of 0.001, we round it at:
a = 0.006
b = -4096
Vt = 0.006 * V - 4096
For max voltage 500000 V * 2.4 = 1200000 V, we transmit
Vt = 0.006 * 1200000 - 4096 = 7200 - 4096 = 3104
5-80
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-103  IEC103 COMMANDS
 IEC103 COMMANDS


 COMMAND 0

See below

 COMMAND 1


 COMMAND 31


COMMAND 0 FUN:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

COMMAND 0 INF:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

COMMAND 0 ON:
Off
Range: Virtual input

COMMAND 0 OFF:
Off
Range: Virtual input

 COMMAND 0


 COMMAND 31


COMMAND 31 FUN:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

COMMAND 31 INF:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

COMMAND 31 ON:
Off
Range: Virtual input

COMMAND 31 OFF:
Off
Range: Virtual input
5
Commands are received as General Command (Type Identification 20). The user can configure the action to perform when
an ASDU command comes.
A list of available mappings is provided on the C60. This includes 64 virtual inputs (see the following table). The ON and OFF
for the same ASDU command can be mapped to different virtual inputs.
Each command is identified by the unique combination made by the function type (FUN) and information number (INF). If
the master sends an ASDU command that does not have the FUN and INF of any configured command, the relay rejects it.
Table 5-10: Commands mapping table
Description
Value
Off
0
Virtual Input 1
1
Virtual Input 2
2
...
...
Virtual Input 64
64
5.3.5 Modbus user map
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  MODBUS USER MAP
 MODBUS USER MAP


ADDRESS 1:
VALUE: 0
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-81
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

ADDRESS 256:
VALUE: 0
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
The Modbus user map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the address
in the ADDRESS line (converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value displays in the VALUE line. A value of
“0” in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically returns values for the previous ADDRESS lines incremented by “1.”
An address value of “0” in the initial register means “none” and values of “0” display for all registers. Different ADDRESS
values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
The UR Series Communications Guide outlines the Modbus memory map. The map is also viewable in a web browser; enter
the IP address of the C60 in the web browser and click the option.
5.3.6 Real time clock
5.3.6.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK
 REAL TIME
 CLOCK
5

SYNCRONIZING SOURCE:
None
Range: None, PP/IRIG-B/PTP/SNTP, IRIG-B/PP/PTP/
SNTP, PP/PTP/IRIG-B/SNTP

REAL TIME CLOCK
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:
None
Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated

 PRECISION TIME
 PROTOCOL (1588)
See below

 SNTP PROTOCOL

See below

 LOCAL TIME

See below
The relay contains a real time clock (RTC) to create timestamps for communications protocols as well as for historical data,
such as event records and oscillography. When the relay restarts, the RTC initializes from an onboard battery-backed
clock, which has the same accuracy as an electronic watch, approximately ±1 minute per month (~23 ppm). Once the RTC
is synchronized with the Precision Time Protocol (PTP), IRIG-B, or SNTP, its accuracy approaches that of the synchronizing
time delivered to the relay.
The SYNCHRONIZING SOURCE setting configures the priority sequence of the time synchronization source, to determine
which of the available external time sources to use for time synchronization. A setting of None causes the RTC and the
synchrophasor clock to free-run. A setting of PP/IRIG-B/PTP/SNTP, IRIG-B/PP/PTP/SNTP, or PP/PTP/IRIG-B/SNTP causes the
relay to track the first source named that is enabled and operational, or free-run if none of these are available. Here, PP
means a time source that is strictly compliant with PP, and PTP means a time source that is not strictly compliant with PP.
When a time source fails or recovers, the relay automatically transfers synchronization as required by this setting.
Setup for IRIG-B is illustrated in the Installation chapter.
The clock is updated by all sources active in the device. This means that whenever a time synchronization message is
received through any of the active protocols, the C60 clock updates. However, given that IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5104, Modbus, and DNP are low-accuracy time synchronization methods, avoid their use for synchronization when better
accuracy time protocols, such as IRIG-B, PTP, and SNTP, are active in the system.
See the COMMANDS  SET DATE AND TIME menu section of this manual to manually set the RTC.
The REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS setting allows changes to the date and/or time to be captured in the event record. The event
records the RTC time before the adjustment.
To enable IRIG-B synchronization, the input IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE must be set to DC Shift or Amplitude Modulated. IRIG-B
synchronization can be disabled by making this setting None.
5-82
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
To configure and enable PTP and/or SNTP, or to set local time parameters (for example time zone, daylight savings), use the
following sections.
5.3.6.2 Precision time protocol (1588)
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (1588)
 PRECISION TIME
 PROTOCOL (1588)

STRICT POWER PROFILE:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

PTP DOMAIN NUMBER
0
Range: 0 to 255

PTP VLAN PRIORITY
4
Range: 0 to 7

PTP VLAN ID
0
Range: 0 to 4095

 PTP PORT 1

See below
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (1588)  PTP PORT 1(3)
 PTP PORT 1


PORT 1 PTP FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

PORT 1 PATH DELAY
ADDER: 00000 ns
Range: 0 to 60 000 ns in steps of 1

PORT 1 PATH DELAY
ASYMMETRY: 0000 ns
Range: –1 000 to +1 000 ns in steps of 1
5
The C60 is provided with optional Precision Time Protocol capability. This feature is specified as the IEEE
1588 software option at the time of ordering. See the Order Codes section in chapter 2 for details.
The C60 supports the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) specified in IEEE Std 1588 2008 using the Power Profile (PP) specified in
IEEE Std C37.238 2011. This enables the relay to synchronize to the international time standard over an Ethernet network
that implements PP.
The relay can be configured to operate on some PTP networks that are not strictly PP. Time accuracy can be less than
specified for a PP network. Tolerated deviations from strict PP include 1) missing declaration of PP compliance in the
messages, 2) connection to a network device that does not support the PTP peer delay mechanism, 3) jitter substantially
greater than 1 µs in received event messages, and 4) certain non-compliant announce and sync message update rates.
The relay implements PTP according to IEEE Std 1588 2008 and the equivalent IEC 61588:2009(E), sometimes referred to as
version 2 PTP. It does not support the previous version of the standard (version 1).
PTP is a protocol that allows multiple clocks in a network to synchronize with one another. It permits synchronization
accuracies better than 1 ns, but this requires that each and every component in the network achieve very high levels of
accuracy and a very high baud rate, faster than normally used for relay communications. When operating over a generic
Ethernet network, time error can amount to 1 ms or more. PP is a profile of PTP which specifies a limited subset of PTP
suitable for use in power system protection, control, automation, and data communication applications, and thereby
facilitates interoperability between different vendor’s clocks and switches. PP specifies a worst-case delivered time error of
less than 1 µs over a 16-hop network.
In a PTP system and in a PP system, the clocks automatically organize themselves into a master-slave synchronization
hierarchy with the “best” clock available making itself the "grandmaster" at the top of the hierarchy; all others make
themselves “slaves” and track the grandmaster. Typically the grandmaster clock receives its time from GPS satellites or
some other link to the international time standard. If the grandmaster fails, the next “best” clock available in the domain
assumes the grandmaster role. When a clock on start-up discovers that it is “better” than the present grandmaster, it
assumes the grandmaster role and the previous grandmaster reverts to slave.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-83
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Time messages issued by the grandmaster are delayed as they pass through the network both due to the finite speed of
the signal in the interconnecting fiber or wire, and due to processing delays in the Ethernet switches. Each clock and switch
implementing PP measures the propagation delay to each of its PP neighbors, and compensates for these delays in the
time received. Each network device implementing PP measures the processing delay it introduces in each time message
and compensates for this delay in the time it transmits. As a result, the time delivered to end-devices such as the UR are
virtually identical to the grandmaster time. If one of the network devices in the hierarchy does not fully implement PP, the
associated propagation delay and/or latency may not be compensated for, and the time received at the end-device can be
in error by more than 100 µs.
See the preceding Real Time Clock section for a description of when time values received via PTP are used to update the
relay’s real time clock.
The following settings are available for configuring the relay for PTP. The PTP menu displays only when the option was
purchased.
STRICT POWER PROFILE — Power profile (IEEE Std C37.238 2011) requires that the relay only select a power profile compliant
clock as a grandmaster, that the delivered time have worst-case error of ±1 µs, and that the peer delay mechanism be
implemented. With the strict power profile setting enabled, the relay only selects as master the clocks displaying the
IEEE_C37_238 identification codes. It uses a port only when the peer delay mechanism is operational. With the strict power
profile setting disabled, the relay uses clocks without the power profile identification when no power profile clocks are
present, and uses ports even if the peer delay mechanism is non-operational. This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP
capable ports.
PTP DOMAIN NUMBER — Set this setting to the domain number of the grandmaster-capable clock(s) to be synchronized to. A
network can support multiple time distribution domains, each distinguished with a unique domain number. More
commonly, there is a single domain using the default domain number zero.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.
5
PTP VLAN PRIORITY — This setting selects the value of the priority field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued
by the relay’s peer delay mechanism. In compliance with PP the default VLAN priority is 4, but it is recommended that it be
set to 7 in accordance with PTP. Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is linked directly, VLAN
Priority can have no effect.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.
PTP VLAN ID — This setting selects the value of the ID field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s
peer delay mechanism. It is provided in compliance with PP. As these messages have a destination address that indicates
they are not to be bridged, their VLAN ID serves no function, and so can be left at its default value. Depending on the
characteristics of the device to which the relay is linked directly, VLAN ID can have no effect. This setting applies to all of
the relay’s PTP capable ports.
PORT 1 ... 3 FUNCTION — While this port setting is selected to disabled, PTP is disabled on this port. The relay does not
generate or listen to PTP messages on this port.
PORT 1 ... 3 PATH DELAY ADDER — The time delivered by PTP is advanced by the time value in this setting prior to the time
being used to synchronize the relay’s real time clock. This is to compensate to the extent practical for time delivery delays
not compensated for in the network. In a fully compliant PP network, the peer delay and the processing delay mechanisms
compensate for all the delays between the grandmaster and the relay. In such networks, make this setting zero.
In networks containing one or more switches and/or clocks that do not implement both of these mechanisms, not all
delays are compensated, so the time of message arrival at the relay is later than the time indicated in the message. This
setting can be used to approximately compensate for this delay. However, as the relay is not aware of network switching
that dynamically changes the amount of uncompensated delay, there is no setting that always and completely corrects
for uncompensated delay. A setting can be chosen that reduces the worst-case error to half of the range between
minimum and maximum uncompensated delay, if these values are known.
PORT 1 ... 3 PATH DELAY ASSYMMETRY — This setting corresponds to “delayAsymmetry” in PTP, which is used by the peer delay
mechanism to compensate for any difference in the propagation delay between the two directions of a link. Except in
unusual cases, the two fibers are of essentially identical length and composition, so make this setting zero.
5-84
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
In unusual cases where the length of the link is different in different directions, set this setting to the number of
nanoseconds the Ethernet propagation delay to the relay is longer than the mean of path propagation delays to and from
the relay. For instance, if it is known say from the physical length of the fibers and the propagation speed in the fibers that
the delay from the relay to the Ethernet switch it is connected to is 9000 ns and that the delay from the switch to the relay
is 11000 ns, then the mean delay is 10000 ns, and the path delay asymmetry is 11000 - 10000 = +1000 ns.
5.3.6.3 SNTP protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  SNTP PROTOCOL
 SNTP PROTOCOL


SNTP FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

SNTP SERVER IP ADDR:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address format

SNTP UDP PORT
NUMBER: 123
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
The C60 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the C60 can obtain clock time over
an Ethernet network. The C60 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a dedicated
product using a GPS receiver. Unicast SNTP is supported. The UR series relays do not support the broadcast, multicast, or
anycast SNTP functionality.
The SNTP FUNCTION setting enables or disables the SNTP feature on the C60.
To use SNTP, set SNTP SERVER IP ADDR to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is set and SNTP FUNCTION is
“Enabled,” the C60 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time values are obtained and
averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the C60 clock is closely synchronized with the SNTP/NTP server. It
takes up to two minutes for the C60 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline.
The SNTP UDP PORT NUMBER is 123 for normal SNTP operation. If SNTP is not required, close the port by setting the port
number to 0, after which the change takes effect when the C60 is restarted.
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
NOTE
5.3.6.4 Local time
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  LOCAL TIME
 LOCAL TIME


LOCAL TIME OFFSET
FROM UTC: 0.0 hr
Range: –24.0 to 24.0 hr in steps of 0.5

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
TIME: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

DST START MONTH:
January
Range: January to December (all months)

DST START DAY:
Sunday
Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)

DST START DAY
INSTANCE: First
Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last

DST START HOUR:
2:00
Range: 0:00 to 23:00

DST STOP MONTH:
January
Range: January to December (all months)

DST STOP DAY:
Sunday
Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-85
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

DST STOP DAY
INSTANCE: First
Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last

DST STOP HOUR:
2:00
Range: 0:00 to 23:00
The C60 maintains two times: local time and Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Local time can be provided by IRIG-B
signals. UTC time is provided by SNTP servers.
The real-time clock (RTC) and timestamps reported in historical records and communication protocols can be incorrect if
the Local Time settings are not configured properly.
LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC — Used to specify the local time zone offset from UTC (Greenwich Mean Time) in hours. Time
zones in the eastern hemisphere have positive values; time zones in the western hemisphere have negative values. A value
of zero causes the relay to use UTC for local time. This setting has two uses. When the system RTC is synchronized with a
communications protocol providing only local time or it is free-running, the offset setting is used to calculate UTC from the
local time these provide. When the RTC is synchronized with a communications protocol providing only UTC (such as PTP or
SNTP), the time offset setting is used to determine local time from the UTC provided. PTP
ALTERNATE_TIME_OFFSET_INDICATOR TLVs are not used to calculate local time. When a communications protocol other
than PTP provides UTC to local time offset (meaning IRIG-B), that offset is used instead of the local time and daylight time
settings.
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME and DST — Can be used to allow the relay to follow the DST rules of the local time zone. Note that
when IRIG-B time synchronization is active, the local time in the IRIG-B signal contains any daylight savings time offset and
so the DST settings are ignored.
5
5.3.7 Fault reports
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  FAULT REPORTS  FAULT REPORT 1
 FAULT REPORT 1


FAULT REPORT 1
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range:
SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

FAULT REPORT 1 TRIG:
Off
Range:
FlexLogic operand

FAULT REPORT 1 Z1
MAG: 3.00 
Range:
0.01 to 250.00 ohms in steps of 0.01

FAULT REPORT 1 Z1
ANGLE: 75°
Range:
25 to 90° in steps of 1

FAULT REPORT 1 Z0
MAG: 9.00 
Range:
0.01 to 650.00 ohms in steps of 0.01

FAULT REPORT 1 Z0
ANGLE: 75°
Range:
25 to 90° in steps of 1

FAULT REPORT 1 LINE
LENGTH UNITS: km
Range:
km, miles

FAULT REP 1 LENGTH
(km ): 100.0
Range:
0.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1

FAULT REPORT 1 VT
SUBSTITUTION: None
Range:
None, I0, V0

FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM
Z0 MAG: 2.00 
Range:
0.01 to 650.00 ohms in steps of 0.01

FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM
Z0 ANGLE: 75°
Range:
25 to 90° in steps of 1
The C60 relay supports one fault report and an associated fault locator. The signal source and trigger condition, as well as
the characteristics of the line or feeder, are entered in this menu.
5-86
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The fault report stores data, in non-volatile memory, pertinent to an event when triggered. The captured data contained in
the FaultReport.txt file includes:
•
Fault report number
•
Name of the relay, programmed by the user
•
Firmware revision of the relay
•
Date and time of trigger
•
Name of trigger (specific operand)
•
Line or feeder ID via the name of a configured signal source
•
Active setting group at the time of trigger
•
Pre-fault current and voltage phasors (two cycles before either a 50DD disturbance associated with fault report
source or the trigger operate). Once a disturbance is detected, pre-fault phasors hold for three seconds waiting for the
fault report trigger. If trigger does not occur within this time, the values are cleared to prepare for the next disturbance.
•
Fault current and voltage phasors (one cycle after the trigger)
•
Elements operated at the time of triggering
•
Events — Nine before trigger and seven after trigger (only available via the relay web page)
•
Fault duration times for each breaker (created by the breaker arcing current feature)
The captured data also includes the fault type and the distance to the fault location, as well as the reclose shot number
(when applicable). To include fault duration times in the fault report, enable and configure the breaker arcing current
feature for each of the breakers. Fault duration is reported on a per-phase basis.
The relay allows locating faults, including ground faults, from delta-connected VTs. In this case, the missing zero-sequence
voltage is substituted either by the externally provided neutral voltage (broken delta VT) connected to the auxiliary voltage
channel of a VT bank, or by the zero-sequence voltage approximated as a voltage drop developed by the zero-sequence
current, and user-provided zero-sequence equivalent impedance of the system behind the relay.
The trigger can be any FlexLogic operand, but in most applications it is expected to be the same operand, usually a virtual
output, that is used to drive an output relay to trip a breaker. To prevent the overwriting of fault events, do not use the
disturbance detector to trigger a fault report. A FAULT RPT TRIG event is automatically created when the report is triggered.
If a number of protection elements are ORed to create a fault report trigger, the first operation of any element causing the
OR gate output to become high triggers a fault report. However, If other elements operate during the fault and the first
operated element has not been reset (the OR gate output is still high), the fault report is not triggered again. Considering
the reset time of protection elements, there is very little chance that a fault report can be triggered twice in this manner. As
the fault report must capture a usable amount of pre and post-fault data, it cannot be triggered faster than every 20 ms.
Each fault report is stored as a file; the relay capacity is 15 files. A 16th trigger overwrites the oldest file.
The EnerVista software is required to view all captured data. The relay faceplate display can be used to view the date and
time of trigger, the fault type, the distance location of the fault, and the reclose shot number.
The FAULT REPORT 1 SOURCE setting selects the source for input currents and voltages and disturbance detection.
The FAULT 1 REPORT TRIG setting assigns the FlexLogic operand representing the protection element/elements requiring
operational fault location calculations. The distance to fault calculations are initiated by this signal. The FAULT REPORT 1 Z1
MAG and FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 MAG impedances are entered in secondary ohms.
The FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION setting is set to “None” if the relay is fed from wye-connected VTs. If delta-connected
VTs are used, and the relay is supplied with the neutral (3V0) voltage, this setting is set to “V0”. The method is still exact, as
the fault locator combines the line-to-line voltage measurements with the neutral voltage measurement to re-create the
line-to-ground voltages. See the ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  FAULT REPORTS menu for details. It is required to configure
the delta and neutral voltages under the source indicated as input for the fault report. Also, the relay checks if the auxiliary
signal configured is marked as “Vn” by the user (under VT setup) and inhibits the fault location if the auxiliary signal is
labeled differently.
If the broken-delta neutral voltage is not available to the relay, an approximation is possible by assuming the missing zerosequence voltage to be an inverted voltage drop produced by the zero-sequence current and the user-specified
equivalent zero-sequence system impedance behind the relay: V0 = –Z0  I0. In order to enable this mode of operation, the
FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION setting is set to “I0”.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-87
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM Z0 MAG and FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM Z0 ANGLE settings are used only when the VT SUBSTITUTION setting
value is “I0”. The magnitude is to be entered in secondary ohms. This impedance is an average system equivalent behind
the relay. It can be calculated as zero-sequence Thevenin impedance at the local bus with the protected line/feeder
disconnected. The method is accurate only if this setting matches perfectly the actual system impedance during the fault.
If the system exhibits too much variability, this approach is questionable and the fault location results for single-line-toground faults is trusted accordingly. Keep in mind that grounding points in the vicinity of the installation impact the system
zero-sequence impedance (grounded loads, reactors, zig-zag transformers, shunt capacitor banks, and so on).
5.3.8 Oscillography
5.3.8.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY
 OSCILLOGRAPHY

5

NUMBER OF RECORDS:
5
Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1

TRIGGER MODE:
Automatic Overwrite
Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected

TRIGGER POSITION:
50%
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1

TRIGGER SOURCE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AC INPUT WAVEFORMS:
16 samples/cycle
Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle

 DIGITAL CHANNELS

See below

 ANALOG CHANNELS

See below
Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic operand. Multiple oscillography records can be captured
simultaneously.
When EnerVista UR Setup creates a new settings file, a Smart defaults feature automatically enters a basic oscillography
configuration. The basic configuration changes the factory default values to make the number of samples per cycle 32,
adds a selection of digital and analog channels that are often of interest, and adds a FlexLogic equation to trigger
oscillography. Review and update this basic configuration as required for the application at hand.
The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on
other factors, such as sample rate and the number of operational modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage for
oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES 
RECORDS  OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sample
configurations with corresponding cycles/record. The minimum number of oscillographic records is three.
5-88
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Table 5-11: Oscillography cycles/record example
Records
CT/VTs
Sample rate
Digital
Analogs
Cycles/
record
3
1
8
0
0
14663
3
1
16
16
0
6945
8
1
16
16
0
3472
8
1
16
16
4
2868
8
2
16
16
4
1691
8
2
16
63
16
1221
8
2
32
63
16
749
8
2
64
63
16
422
32
2
64
63
16
124
TRIGGER MODE — A new record automatically overwrites an older record when TRIGGER MODE is set to “Automatic
Overwrite.”
TRIGGER POSITION — Set this to a percentage of the total buffer size (for example, 10%, 50%, 75%, and so on). A trigger
position of 25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data.
TRIGGER SOURCE — Always captured in oscillography and can be any FlexLogic parameter (element state, contact input,
virtual output, and so on). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle.
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS — Determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (that is, current and voltage) are stored.
Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling rate of
the relay, which is always 64 samples per cycle. That is, it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
5
When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records are cleared.
NOTE
5.3.8.2 Digital channels
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY  DIGITAL CHANNELS
 DIGITAL CHANNELS


DIGITAL CHANNEL 1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand


DIGITAL CHANNEL 63:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
DIGITAL 1(63) CHANNEL — This setting selects the FlexLogic operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of
each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored.
5.3.8.3 Analog channels
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY  ANALOG CHANNELS
 ANALOG CHANNELS


ANALOG CHANNEL 1:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter
See Appendix A for list


ANALOG CHANNEL 16:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter
See Appendix A for list
These settings select the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace
depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored. The parameters available
in a given relay depend on
•
the type of relay,
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-89
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
•
the type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and
•
the type and number of analog input hardware modules installed
A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The
parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display.
It can be time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad and display — entering this number
via the relay keypad causes the corresponding parameter to display.
All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number>—<I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB
designates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F.
If there are no CT/VT modules and analog input modules, no analog traces appear in the file; only the digital traces appear.
5.3.9 Data logger
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DATA LOGGER
 DATA LOGGER

5

DATA LOGGER MODE:
Continuous
Range: Continuous, Trigger

DATA LOGGER TRIGGER:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

DATA LOGGER RATE:
60000 ms
Range: 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1

DATA LOGGER CHNL 1:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter
See Appendix A for list

DATA LOGGER CHNL 16:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter
See Appendix A for list

DATA LOGGER CONFIG:
0 CHNL x 0.0 DAYS
Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only

The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data can
be downloaded to EnerVista UR Setup and displayed with parameters on the vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis.
All data is stored in non-volatile memory, so the information is retained when power to the relay is lost.
For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of
channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use. The
following table outlines examples of storage capacities for a system frequency of 60 Hz.
5-90
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Table 5-12: Data logger storage capacity example
Sampling rate
Channels
Days
Storage capacity
15 ms
1
0.1
954 s
8
0.1
120 s
1000 ms
60000 ms
3600000 ms
9
0.1
107 s
16
0.1
60 s
1
0.7
65457 s
8
0.1
8182 s
9
0.1
7273 s
16
0.1
4091 s
1
45.4
3927420 s
8
5.6
490920 s
9
5
436380 s
16
2.8
254460 s
1
2727.5
235645200 s
8
340.9
29455200 s
9
303
26182800 s
Changing any setting affecting data logger operation clears data in the log.
NOTE
DATA LOGGER MODE — This setting configures the mode in which the data logger operates. When set to “Continuous,” the
data logger actively records any configured channels at the rate as defined by the DATA LOGGER RATE. The data logger is
idle in this mode when no channels are configured. When set to “Trigger,” the data logger records any configured channels
at the instance of the rising edge of the DATA LOGGER TRIGGER source FlexLogic operand. The data logger ignores all
subsequent triggers and continues to record data until the active record is full. Once the data logger is full, a CLEAR DATA
LOGGER command is required to clear the data logger record before a new record can be started. Performing the CLEAR
DATA LOGGER command also stops the current record and resets the data logger to be ready for the next trigger.
DATA LOGGER TRIGGER — This setting selects the signal used to trigger the start of a new data logger record. Any FlexLogic
operand can be used as the trigger source. This setting only applies when the mode is set to “Trigger.”
DATA LOGGER RATE — This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data is recorded.
DATA LOGGER CHNL 1(16) — This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of the data
log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/VT hardware
modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay
automatically prepares the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is shown in
Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the
selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the
relay keypad/display—entering this number via the relay keypad causes the corresponding parameter to display.
DATA LOGGER CONFIG — This display presents the total amount of time that the Data Logger can record the channels not
selected to “Off” without overwriting old data.
5.3.10 Demand
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUTP  DEMAND
 DEMAND


CRNT DEMAND METHOD:
Thermal Exponential
Range: Thermal Exponential, Block Interval, Rolling
Demand

POWER DEMAND METHOD:
Thermal Exponential
Range: Thermal Exponential, Block Interval, Rolling
Demand
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-91
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

DEMAND INTERVAL:
15 MIN
Range: 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes

DEMAND TRIGGER:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Note: for calculation using method 2a
The relay measures current demand on each phase, and three-phase demand for real, reactive, and apparent power.
Current and Power methods can be chosen separately for the convenience of the user. Settings are provided to allow the
user to emulate common electrical utility demand measuring techniques, for statistical or control purposes. If the CRNT
DEMAND METHOD is set to "Block Interval" and the DEMAND TRIGGER is set to “Off,” Method 2 is used as follows. If DEMAND
TRIGGER is assigned to any other FlexLogic operand, Method 2a is used as follows.
The relay can be set to calculate demand by any of the following three methods.
5.3.10.1 Calculation method 1: Thermal exponential
This method emulates the action of an analog peak-recording thermal demand meter. The relay measures the quantity
(RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) on each phase every second and assumes that the circuit
quantity remains at this value until updated by the next measurement. It calculates the 'thermal demand equivalent'
based on the following equation:
dt  = D 1 – e
– kt

Eq. 5-6
where
d = demand value after applying input quantity for time t (in minutes)
D = input quantity (constant)
k = 2.3 / thermal 90% response time
The figure shows the 90% thermal response time characteristic of 15 minutes. A setpoint establishes the time to reach
90% of a steady-state value, just as the response time of an analog instrument. A steady state value applied for twice the
response time indicates 99% of the value.
Figure 5-31: Thermal demand characteristic
Demand (%)
5
Time (minutes)
842787A1.CDR
5.3.10.2 Calculation method 2: Block interval
This method calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) over
the programmed demand time interval, starting daily at 00:00:00 (that is, 12:00 am). The 1440 minutes per day is divided
into the number of blocks as set by the programmed time interval. Each new value of demand becomes available at the
end of each time interval.
5.3.10.3 Calculation method 2a: Block interval (with start demand interval logic trigger)
This method calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) over
the interval between successive Start Demand Interval logic input pulses. Each new value of demand becomes available at
the end of each pulse. Assign a FlexLogic operand to the DEMAND TRIGGER setting to program the input for the new
demand interval pulses.
5-92
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
NOTE
PRODUCT SETUP
If no trigger is assigned in the DEMAND TRIGGER setting and the CRNT DEMAND METHOD is "Block Interval," use
calculation method 2. If a trigger is assigned, the maximum allowed time between two trigger signals is 60
minutes. If no trigger signal appears within 60 minutes, demand calculations are performed and available, and
the algorithm resets and starts the new cycle of calculations. The minimum required time for trigger contact
closure is 20 ms.
5.3.10.4 Calculation method 3: Rolling demand
This method calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) over
the programmed demand time interval, in the same way as Block Interval. The value is updated every minute and
indicates the demand over the time interval just preceding the time of update.
5.3.11 User-programmable LEDs
5.3.11.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 LEDS

 LED TEST

See below

 TRIP & ALARM LEDS

See page 5-95

 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 LED 1
See page 5-95
5


 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 LED 48
The 48 amber LEDs on relay panels 2 and 3 can be customized to illuminate when a selected FlexLogic operand is in the
logic 1 state. The trip and alarm LEDs on panel 1 can also be customized in a similar manner. To ensure correct
functionality of all LEDs, an LED test feature is also provided.
5.3.11.2 LED test
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  LED TEST
 LED TEST


LED TEST FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

LED TEST CONTROL:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
When enabled, the LED test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition, such as a userprogrammable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all
LEDs, including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons.
The test consists of the following three stages:
1.
All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is “burned.” This stage lasts as
long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test ends.
2.
All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine starts at
the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures that lead
to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
3.
All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at the top left
panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more
than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-93
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and
monitoring features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay
and stores the actual LED states (on or off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting
from relay response during testing. The reset pushbutton does not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress.
A dedicated FlexLogic operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is initiated,
the LED TEST INITIATED event is stored in the event recorder.
The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and stages 2 and 3 can be
interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL
setting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is
executed.
Figure 5-32: LED test sequence
READY TO TEST
rising edge of the
control input
Start the software image of
the LEDs
Reset the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
Restore the LED states
from the software image
Set the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
control input is on
5
STAGE 1
(all LEDs on)
time-out
(1 minute)
dropping edge of the
control input
Wait 1 second
STAGE 2
(one LED on at a time)
Wait 1 second
STAGE 3
(one LED off at a time)
rising edge of the
control input
rising edge of the
control input
rising edge of the
control input
rising edge
of the control
input
842011A1.CDR
Application example 1
Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is “burned” through user-programmable pushbutton 1. Apply the following
settings.
Configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USERPROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu. (The option does not display when not purchased.)
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”
Configure the LED test to recognize user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: “Enabled”
LED TEST CONTROL: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
5-94
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The test is initiated when the user-programmable pushbutton 1 is pressed. Keep the pushbutton pressed for as long as the
LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, release the pushbutton. The relay then automatically starts stage 2. At
this point, test can be cancelled by pressing the pushbutton.
Application example 2
Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are “burned” as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This
is to be performed via user-programmable pushbutton 1.
After applying the settings in application example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. When
finished, release the pushbutton so that the relay then automatically starts stage 2. When stage 2 is completed, stage 3
starts automatically. The test can be cancelled at any time by pressing the pushbutton.
5.3.11.3 Trip and alarm LEDs
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  TRIP & ALARMS LEDS
 TRIP & ALARM LEDS


TRIP LED INPUT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

ALARM LED INPUT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED column (enhanced faceplate) and on LED panel 1 (standard faceplate). Each
indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.
5.3.11.4 User-programmable LED 1(48)
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 LED 1

LED 1 OPERAND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

LED 1 TYPE:
Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
5
There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illuminate
when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.
For the standard faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows:
•
LED Panel 2 — User-programmable LEDs 1 through 24
•
LED Panel 3 — User programmable LEDs 25 through 48
For the enhanced faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows:
•
LED column 2 — User-programmable LEDs 1 through 12
•
LED column 3 — User-programmable LEDs 13 through 24
•
LED column 4 — User-programmable LEDs 25 through 36
•
LED column 5 — User-programmable LEDs 37 through 48
See the LED Indicators section in chapter 4 for information on the location of these indexed LEDs.
The user-programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is “SelfReset” (the default setting), the LED illumination tracks the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is
“Latched,” the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a
communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-95
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Table 5-13: Recommended settings for user-programmable LEDs
Setting
Parameter
Setting
Parameter
LED 1 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 1
LED 13 operand
Off
LED 2 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 2
LED 14 operand
BREAKER 2 OPEN
LED 3 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 3
LED 15 operand
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
LED 4 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 4
LED 16 operand
BREAKER 2 TROUBLE
LED 5 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 5
LED 17 operand
SYNC 1 SYNC OP
LED 6 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 6
LED 18 operand
SYNC 2 SYNC OP
LED 7 operand
Off
LED 19 operand
Off
LED 8 operand
Off
LED 20 operand
Off
LED 9 operand
BREAKER 1 OPEN
LED 21 operand
AR ENABLED
LED 10 operand
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
LED 22 operand
AR DISABLED
LED 11 operand
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
LED 23 operand
AR RIP
LED 12 operand
Off
LED 24 operand
AR LO
See the figure in the Setting Groups section of the Control Elements section later in this chapter for an example of group
activation.
5.3.12 User-programmable self tests
For user-programmable self-tests for CyberSentry, use the Setup > Security > Supervisory menu instead.
5
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMALBE SELF TESTS
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 SELF TESTS

DIRECT RING BREAK
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped
with Direct Input/Output module.

DIRECT DEVICE OFF
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped
with Direct Input/Output module.

REMOTE DEVICE OFF
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

FIRST ETHERNET FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SEC. ETHERNET FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

THIRD ETHERNET FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

BATTERY FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SNTP FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

IRIG-B FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

PTP FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SFP MODULE FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic operands, events, and targets.
Most of the minor alarms can be disabled if so wanted.
5-96
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
When in the Disabled mode, minor alarms do not assert a FlexLogic operand, write to the event recorder, or display target
messages. Moreover, they do not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in Enabled mode,
minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. See the Relay Self-tests section in chapter 7
for information on major and minor self-test alarms.
5.3.13 Control pushbuttons
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS  CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7)
 CONTROL
 PUSHBUTTON 1

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
There are three standard control pushbuttons, labeled USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3, on the standard and enhanced front
panels. These are user-programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test, switching
setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays.
Firmware revisions 3.2x and older use these three pushbuttons for manual breaker control. This functionality has been
retained—if the breaker control feature is configured to use the three pushbuttons, they cannot be used as userprogrammable control pushbuttons.
The location of the control pushbuttons are shown in the following figures.
Figure 5-33: Control pushbuttons (enhanced faceplate)
5
Control pushbuttons
842813A1.CDR
An additional four control pushbuttons are included on the standard faceplate when the C60 is ordered with the 12 userprogrammable pushbutton option.
Figure 5-34: Control pushbuttons (standard faceplate)
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE
IN SERVICE
VOLTAGE
TROUBLE
CURRENT
TEST MODE
FREQUENCY
TRIP
OTHER
ALARM
PHASE A
PICKUP
PHASE B
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
USER 3
THREE
STANDARD
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
USER 4
USER 5
USER 6
USER 7
FOUR EXTRA
OPTIONAL
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
842733A2.CDR
Control pushbuttons are not typically used for critical operations and are not protected by the control password. However,
by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable control pushbuttons for security reasons.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-97
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic operand. Each operand need to be configured appropriately to perform
the required function. Each operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the
pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation is recognized
by various features that can use control pushbuttons as inputs.
An event is logged in the event record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed. No event is logged when
the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously—a given key
must be released before the next one can be pressed.
The control pushbuttons become user-programmable only if the breaker control feature is not configured for manual
control via the USER 1 through 3 pushbuttons as shown. If configured for manual control, breaker control typically uses the
larger, optional user-programmable pushbuttons, making the control pushbuttons available for other user applications.
Figure 5-35: Control pushbutton logic
When applicable
SETTING
5
{
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON
1 FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/
BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL:
Enabled=1
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/
BREAKER 2 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL:
AND
RUN
OFF
ON
TIMER
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
100 msec
CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON
842010A2.CDR
Enabled=1
5.3.14 User-programmable pushbuttons
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1(16)
 USER PUSHBUTTON 1

5-98

PUSHBUTTON 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT:
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT:
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT:
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

PUSHBTN 1 HOLD:
0.0 s
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

PUSHBTN 1 SET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PUSHBTN 1 RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST
DELAY: 1.0 s
Range: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1

PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT
TIME: 0.00 s
Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05

PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Normal, High Priority

PUSHBUTTON 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The C60 is provided with this optional feature, specified as an option at the time of ordering. Using the
order code for your device, see the order codes in chapter 2 for details.
User-programmable pushbuttons provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off) information. The
number of available pushbuttons is dependent on the faceplate module ordered with the relay.
•
Type P faceplate: standard horizontal faceplate with 12 user-programmable pushbuttons
•
Type Q faceplate: enhanced horizontal faceplate with 16 user-programmable pushbuttons
The digital state can be entered locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton) or remotely (via FlexLogic
operands) into FlexLogic equations, protection elements, and control elements. Typical applications include breaker
control, autorecloser blocking, and setting groups changes. The user-programmable pushbuttons are under the control
level of password protection.
The figure shows user-configurable pushbuttons for the enhanced faceplate.
5
Figure 5-36: User-programmable pushbuttons (enhanced faceplate)
USER
LABEL 1
USER
LABEL 2
USER
LABEL 3
USER
LABEL 4
USER
LABEL 5
USER
LABEL 6
USER
LABEL 7
USER
LABEL 8
USER
LABEL 9
USER
LABEL 10
USER
LABEL 11
USER
LABEL 12
USER
LABEL 13
USER
LABEL 14
USER
LABEL 15
USER
LABEL 16
842814A1.CDR
The following figure shows user-configurable pushbuttons for the standard faceplate.
Figure 5-37: User-programmable pushbuttons (standard faceplate)
1
3
5
7
9
11
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
2
4
6
8
10
12
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
842779A1.CDR
Both the standard and enhanced faceplate pushbuttons can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template,
available online at http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin. The EnerVista software can also be used to create labels for
the enhanced faceplate.
Each pushbutton asserts its own “On” and “Off” FlexLogic operands (for example, PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF).
These operands are available for each pushbutton and are used to program specific actions. If any pushbutton is active,
the ANY PB ON operand is asserted.
Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator. By default, this indicator displays the present status of the
corresponding pushbutton (on or off). However, each LED indicator can be assigned to any FlexLogic operand through the
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL setting.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-99
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The pushbuttons can be automatically controlled by activating the operands assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET (for latched
and self-reset mode) and PUSHBTN 1 RESET (for latched mode only) settings. The pushbutton reset status is declared when
the PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand is asserted. The activation and deactivation of user-programmable pushbuttons is dependent
on whether latched or self-reset mode is programmed.
•
Latched mode — In latched mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the operand assigned to the
PUSHBTN 1 SET setting or by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton. The pushbutton maintains the set
state until deactivated by the reset command or after a user-specified time delay. The state of each pushbutton is
stored in non-volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control power.
The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET
setting or by directly pressing the associated active front panel pushbutton.
It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST and PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY
settings. These settings enable the autoreset timer and specify the associated time delay. The autoreset timer can be
used in select-before-operate (SBO) breaker control applications, where the command type (close/open) or breaker
location (feeder number) must be selected prior to command execution. The selection must reset automatically if
control is not executed within a specified time period.
•
Self-reset mode — In self-reset mode, a pushbutton remains active for the time it is pressed (the pulse duration) plus
the dropout time specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME setting. If the pushbutton is activated via FlexLogic, the
pulse duration is specified by the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME only. The time the operand remains assigned to the
PUSHBTN 1 SET setting has no effect on the pulse duration.
The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in self-reset mode when the dropout delay specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT
TIME setting expires.
5
NOTE
The pulse duration of the remote set, remote reset, or local pushbutton must be at least 50 ms to operate the
pushbutton. This allows the user-programmable pushbuttons to properly operate during power cycling events
and various system disturbances that can cause transient assertion of the operating signals.
The local and remote operation of each user-programmable pushbutton can be inhibited through the PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL
and PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE settings, respectively. If local locking is applied, the pushbutton ignores set and reset commands
executed through the front panel pushbuttons. If remote locking is applied, the pushbutton ignores set and reset
commands executed through FlexLogic operands.
The locking functions are not applied to the autorestart feature. In this case, the inhibit function can be used in SBO control
operations to prevent the pushbutton function from being activated and ensuring “one-at-a-time” select operation.
The locking functions can also be used to prevent the accidental pressing of the front panel pushbuttons. The separate
inhibit of the local and remote operation simplifies the implementation of local/remote control supervision.
Pushbutton states can be logged by the event recorder and displayed as target messages. In latched mode, user-defined
messages can also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is on or changing to off.
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION — This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to “Disabled,” the pushbutton is
not active and the corresponding FlexLogic operands (both “On” and “Off”) are de-asserted. If set to “Self-Reset,” the
control logic is activated by the pulse (longer than 100 ms) issued when the pushbutton is being physically pressed or
virtually pressed via a FlexLogic operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting.
When in “Self-Reset” mode and activated locally, the pushbutton control logic asserts the “On” corresponding FlexLogic
operand as long as the pushbutton is being physically pressed, and after being released the deactivation of the operand is
delayed by the drop out timer. The “Off” operand is asserted when the pushbutton element is deactivated. If the
pushbutton is activated remotely, the control logic of the pushbutton asserts the corresponding “On” FlexLogic operand
only for the time period specified by the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME setting.
If set to “Latched,” the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic operand between “On” and “Off” on
each button press or by virtually activating the pushbutton (assigning set and reset operands). When in the “Latched”
mode, the states of the FlexLogic operands are stored in a non-volatile memory. If power supply is lost, the correct state of
the pushbutton is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay.
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT — This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is intended to
provide ID information of the pushbutton. See the User-definable Displays section for instructions on how to enter
alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
5-100
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT — This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is in the “on” position. See the User-definable Displays section for instructions on entering
alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT — This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is activated from the on to the off position and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is “Latched.”
This message is not displayed when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is “Self-reset” as the pushbutton operand status is
implied to be “Off” upon its release. The length of the “Off” message is configured with the PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY
PROPERTIES  FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
PUSHBTN 1 HOLD — This setting specifies the time required for a pushbutton to be pressed before it is deemed active. This
timer is reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that any pushbutton operation requires the pushbutton to be pressed a
minimum of 50 ms. This minimum time is required prior to activating the pushbutton hold timer.
PUSHBTN 1 SET — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to operate the pushbutton element and to assert
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand. The duration of the incoming set signal must be at least 100 ms.
PUSHBTN 1 RESET — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to reset pushbutton element and to assert
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand. This setting is applicable only if pushbutton is in latched mode. The duration of the incoming
reset signal must be at least 50 ms.
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST — This setting enables the user-programmable pushbutton autoreset feature. This setting is applicable
only if the pushbutton is in the “Latched” mode.
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY — This setting specifies the time delay for automatic reset of the pushbutton when in the
latched mode.
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the operand
assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET or PUSHBTN 1 RESET settings.
PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the front panel
pushbuttons. This locking functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset.
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME — This setting applies only to “Self-Reset” mode and specifies the duration of the pushbutton
active status after the pushbutton has been released. When activated remotely, this setting specifies the entire activation
time of the pushbutton status; the length of time the operand remains on has no effect on the pulse duration. This setting
is required to set the duration of the pushbutton operating pulse.
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to drive pushbutton LED. If this setting is “Off,” then
LED operation is directly linked to the PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand.
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE — If pushbutton message is set to “High Priority,” the message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings are displayed undisturbed as long as PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is asserted. The high priority
option is not applicable to the PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting.
This message can be temporary removed if any front panel keypad button is pressed. However, 10 seconds of keypad
inactivity restores the message if the PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is still active.
If the PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE is set to “Normal,” the message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings
are displayed as long as PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is asserted, but not longer than time period specified by FLASH MESSAGE
TIME setting. After the flash time is expired, the default message or other active target message is displayed. The
instantaneous reset of the flash message is executed if any relay front panel button is pressed or any new target or
message becomes active.
The PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting is linked to PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand and displays in conjunction with PUSHBTN 1 ID only if
pushbutton element is in the “Latched” mode. The PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT message displays as “Normal” if the PUSHBTN 1
MESSAGE setting is “High Priority” or “Normal.”
PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS — If this setting is enabled, each pushbutton state change is logged as an event into the event
recorder.
The figures show the user-programmable pushbutton logic.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-101
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-38: User-programmable pushbutton logic (Sheet 1 of 2)
TIMER
200 ms
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
0
SETTING
Function
LATCHED
= Enabled
= Latched
LATCHED/SELF-RESET
OR
= Self-Reset
To user-programmable
pushbuttons logic
sheet 2, 842024A2
SETTING
Local Lock
Off = 0
Non-volatile latch
AND
S
TIMER
50 ms
SETTING
Remote Lock
Latch
R
AND
Off = 0
0
SETTING
OR
TIMER
50 ms
Hold
TPKP
0
0
OR
SETTING
Set
AND
Off = 0
OR
OR
SETTING
Reset
To user-programmable
pushbuttons logic
sheet 2, 842024A2
AND
Off = 0
5
PUSHBUTTON ON
AND
SETTING
Autoreset Function
= Enabled
= Disabled
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
SETTING
Autoreset Delay
AND
TPKP
0
AND
SETTING
Drop-Out Timer
0
TIMER
200 ms
OR
0
TRST
842021A3.CDR
AND
5-102
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-39: User-programmable pushbutton logic (Sheet 2 of 2)
LCD MESSAGE
ENGAGE MESSAGE
SETTING
Flash Message Time
LATCHED
OR
SETTINGS
Top Text
0
AND
= XXXXXXXXXX
TRST
On Text
= XXXXXXXXXX
Instantaneous
reset *
From user-programmable
pushbuttons logic
sheet 1, 842021A3
LATCHED/SELF-RESET
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON ON
The message is temporarily removed if
any keypad button is pressed. Ten (10)
seconds of keypad inactivity restores
the message.
SETTING
Message Priority
LCD MESSAGE
ENGAGE MESSAGE
AND
= Disabled
= High Priority
SETTINGS
Top Text
= Normal
= XXXXXXXXXX
OR
On Text
SETTING
Flash Message Time
= XXXXXXXXXX
0
AND
TRST
Instantaneous
reset *
Instantaneous reset will be executed if any
front panel button is pressed or any new
target or message becomes active.
5
PUSHBUTTON 1 LED LOGIC
1. If pushbutton 1 LED control is set to off.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON 2 ON
PUSHBUTTON 3 ON
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
ANY PB ON
PUSHBUTTON 16 ON
2. If pushbutton 1 LED control is not set to off.
SETTING
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL
= any FlexLogic operand
The enhanced front panel has 16 operands;
the standard front panel has 12
NOTE
Pushbutton 1
LED
Pushbutton 1
LED
842024A2.CDR
User-programmable pushbuttons require a type HP or HQ faceplate. If an HP or HQ type faceplate was ordered
separately, the relay order code must be changed to indicate the correct faceplate option. This can be done in
the EnerVista software with the Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton command.
5.3.15 Flex state parameters
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
 FLEX STATE
 PARAMETERS

PARAMETER 1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand


PARAMETER 256:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states can be used for efficient
monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits are
packed so that 16 states are readable in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all states of
interest are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-103
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The state bits can be read out in the “Flex States” register array beginning at Modbus address 0900h. Sixteen states are
packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. Sixteen registers accommodate the 256
state bits.
5.3.16 User-definable displays
5.3.16.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
 USER-DEFINABLE
 DISPLAYS

INVOKE AND SCROLL:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

 USER DISPLAY 1

See below


 USER DISPLAY 16

This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient
viewing sequence in the USER DISPLAY menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus
facilitate text entry and Modbus register data pointer options for defining the user display content.
Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways.
•
Keypad — Use the MENU key to select the USER DISPLAY menu item to access the first user-definable display (note that
only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the up and down arrow keys. The
display disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES
 DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting.
•
User-programmable control input — The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL setting. Any
FlexLogic operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navigate the
programmed displays.
5
On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by
showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand
acts exactly as the down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the
first one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the down arrow key operate concurrently.
When the default timer expires (set by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting), the relay starts to cycle through the user
displays. The next activity of the INVOKE AND SCROLL input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user display, not
at the first user-defined display. The INVOKE AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect.
5.3.16.2 User display 1(16)
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS  USER DISPLAY 1(16)
 USER DISPLAY 1


DISP 1 TOP LINE:
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

DISP 1 ITEM 1
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1


5-104
DISP 1 ITEM 5:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available user display by selecting the existing display and
pressing the ENTER key. The display then prompts with ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST? After selecting “Yes,” a message
indicates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus
are automatically configured with the proper content—this content can be edited subsequently.
This menu is used to enter user-defined text and user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular user
display. Each user display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The tilde (~) character is used to mark the
start of a data field – the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to five separate data fields can be entered
in a user display – the nth tilde (~) refers to the nth item.
A user display can be entered from the faceplate keypad or the EnerVista interface (preferred for convenience). The
following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the faceplate keypad:
1.
Select the line to be edited.
2.
Press the decimal key to enter text edit mode.
3.
Use either VALUE key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.
4.
Press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
5.
Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.
6.
The HELP key can be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information.
7.
Press the ENTER key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the five items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the faceplate
keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of “0” for any items not being used. Use the HELP key at any selected
system display (setting, actual value, or command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the
Modbus address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (EnerVista usage conveniently facilitates this
conversion).
Use the MENU key to go to the user displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays show in
sequence, changing every four seconds. While viewing a user display, press the ENTER key and then select the ‘Yes” option
to remove the display from the user display list. Use the MENU key again to exit the user displays menu.
An example of user display setup and result is shown as follows.
 USER DISPLAY 1

USER DISPLAYS

DISP 1 TOP LINE:
Current X ~ A
Shows user-defined text with first tilde marker

DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:
Current Y ~ A
Shows user-defined text with second tilde marker

DISP 1 ITEM 1:
6016
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus register
address, corresponding to first tilde marker

DISP 1 ITEM 2:
6357
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus register
address, corresponding to second tilde marker

DISP 1 ITEM 3:
0
This item is not being used. There is no corresponding
tilde marker in top or bottom lines.

DISP 1 ITEM 4:
0
This item is not being used. There is no corresponding
tilde marker in top or bottom lines.

DISP 1 ITEM 5:
0
This item is not being used. There is no corresponding
tilde marker in top or bottom lines.

Current X 0.850
Current Y 0.327 A
Shows the resultant display content
If the parameters for the top line and the bottom line items have the same units, then the unit is displayed on the bottom
line only. The units are only displayed on both lines if the units specified both the top and bottom line items are different.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-105
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.3.17 Direct inputs and outputs
5.3.17.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O
 DIRECT I/O

5

DIRECT OUTPUT
DEVICE ID: 1
Range: 1 to 16 in steps of 1

DIRECT I/O CH1 RING
CONFIGURATION: Yes
Range: Yes, No

DIRECT I/O CH2 RING
CONFIGURATION: Yes
Range: Yes, No

DIRECT I/O DATA
RATE: 64 kbps
Range: 64 kbps, 128 kbps

DIRECT I/O CHANNEL
CROSSOVER: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

 CRC ALARM CH1

See page 5-112

 CRC ALARM CH2


 UNRETURNED
 MESSAGES ALARM CH1

 UNRETURNED
 MESSAGES ALARM CH2
See page 5-112
This option is available when an Inter-Relay Communications card is specified at the time of ordering (see
the Order Code tables). With the option, direct inputs/outputs display by default. When you enable the
teleprotection feature, direct I/O is not visible.
Direct inputs and outputs exchange status information (inputs and outputs) between UR-series relays connected directly
via type 7 digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to IEC 61850 GOOSE, except that communications
takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On type 7 cards that support two channels,
direct output messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively sends direct output messages both
ways around a ring configuration. On type 7 cards that support one channel, direct output messages are sent only in one
direction. Messages are resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message did not originate at the receiver.
NOTE
Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive. As such, they cannot be used
simultaneously. Once teleprotection inputs and outputs are enabled, direct inputs and outputs are blocked,
and vice versa.
Direct output message timing is similar to GOOSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are sent at
least every 1000 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and asserting the
outputs unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two self-tests are performed and signaled by
the following FlexLogic operands:
•
DIRECT RING BREAK (direct input/output ring break). This FlexLogic operand indicates that direct output messages sent
from a UR-series relay are not being received back by the relay.
•
DIRECT DEVICE 1 OFF to DIRECT DEVICE 16 OFF (direct device offline). These FlexLogic operands indicate that direct output
messages from at least one direct device are not being received.
5-106
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Direct input and output settings are similar to remote input and output settings. The equivalent of the remote device name
strings for direct inputs and outputs is the DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID setting, which identifies the relay in all direct output
messages. All UR-series IEDs in a ring need to have unique numbers assigned. The IED ID is used to identify the sender of
the direct input and output message.
If the direct input and output scheme is configured to operate in a ring (DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION or DIRECT I/O
CH2 RING CONFIGURATION is “Yes”), all direct output messages are received back. If not, the direct input/output ring break
self-test is triggered. The self-test error is signaled by the DIRECT RING BREAK FlexLogic operand.
Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the data capabilities of the communications channel. All IEDs communicating
over direct inputs and outputs must be set to the same data rate. UR-series IEDs equipped with dual-channel
communications cards apply the same data rate to both channels. Delivery time for direct input and output messages is
approximately 0.2 of a power system cycle at 128 kbps and 0.4 of a power system cycle at 64 kbps, per each "bridge."
Table 5-14: Direct input and output data rates
Module
Channel
74
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
7L
7M
7P
Supported data rates
Channel 1
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 1
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 1
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps, 128 kbps
7T
Channel 1
64 kbps, 128 kbps
7W
Channel 1
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 1
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps, 128 kbps
7V
2A
Channel 1
64 kbps
2B
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
2G
Channel 1
128 kbps
2H
Channel 1
128 kbps
2I
Channel 1
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps, 128 kbps
2J
Channel 1
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps, 128 kbps
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5
5-107
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Module
Channel
Supported data rates
76
Channel 1
64 kbps
77
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
75
7E
7F
7G
7Q
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
7R
Channel 1
64 kbps
7S
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
The G.703 modules are fixed at 64 kbps. The DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to these modules.
NOTE
5
The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to C60s with dual-channel communication cards and allows crossing
over messages from channel 1 to channel 2. This places all UR-series IEDs into one direct input and output network
regardless of the physical media of the two communication channels.
The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for direct input and output configuration. See the Inputs
and Outputs section in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged.
Example 1: Extending the input/output capabilities of a UR-series relay
Consider an application that requires additional quantities of contact inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable
logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED,
such as the C30, to satisfy the additional input and output and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are
connected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure.
Figure 5-40: Input and output extension via direct inputs and outputs
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR
In this application, apply the following settings. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: “128 kbps”
For UR-series IED 2:
5-108
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: “128 kbps”
The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); that is, from device 1 to device 2, and
from device 2 to device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection
(for example: fiber, G.703, or RS422).
Example 2: Interlocking busbar protection
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown.
Figure 5-41: Sample interlocking busbar protection scheme
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
BLOCK
UR IED 4
UR IED 3
842712A1.CDR
For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown as follows) is recommended for this application.
5
Figure 5-42: Interlocking bus protection scheme via direct inputs/outputs
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX2
RX1
TX2
TX2
RX2
UR IED 2
TX1
TX1
UR IED 4
RX2
TX2
TX2
RX1
RX2
UR IED 3
RX1
TX1
842716A1.CDR
In this application, apply the following settings. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series IED 2:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “3”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series IED 4:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “4”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-109
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of ‘bridges’ between the
origin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum ‘communications distance’ by a factor of
two.
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy:
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle
IED 1 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle
IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
If one ring is broken (say TX2-RX2) the delivery times are as follows:
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle
IED 1 to IED 4: 0.6 of power system cycle
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle
IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of a power
system cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time is adaptively increased to 0.6 of a power system cycle.
The complete application requires addressing a number of issues, such as failure of both the communications rings, failure
or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, and so on. Self-monitoring flags of the direct inputs and outputs feature
primarily are used to address these concerns.
5
Example 3: Pilot-aided schemes
Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown.
Figure 5-43: Three-terminal line application
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
A permissive pilot-aided scheme can be implemented in a two-ring configuration, shown as follows (IEDs 1 and 2
constitute a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring).
Figure 5-44: Single-channel open loop configuration
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX2
UR IED 2
RX1
TX1
TX2
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
5-110
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
In this application, apply the following settings. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series IED 2:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “3”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps):
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 1 to IED 3: 0.5 of power system cycle
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
In this scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as explained
in the Inputs and Outputs section. Implement a blocking pilot-aided scheme with more security and, ideally, faster
message delivery time. This is accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown here.
Figure 5-45: Dual-channel closed loop (dual-ring) configuration
TX2
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX1
RX2
UR IED 2
RX2
TX2
TX1
5
TX1
RX1
UR IED 3
RX2
TX2
842715A1.CDR
In this application, apply the following settings. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series IED 2:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “3”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy:
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 1 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
The two communications configurations can be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Take speed, reliability,
and cost into account when selecting the required architecture.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-111
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.3.17.2 CRC alarm CH1(2)
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O  CRC ALARM CH1(2)
 CRC ALARM CH1


CRC ALARM CH1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

CRC ALARM CH1
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1

CRC ALARM CH1
THRESHOLD: 10
Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1

CRC ALARM CH1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
The C60 checks integrity of the incoming direct input and output messages using a 32-bit CRC. The CRC alarm function is
available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check. The
monitoring function counts all incoming messages, including messages that failed the CRC check. A separate counter
adds up messages that failed the CRC check. When the failed CRC counter reaches the user-defined level specified by the
CRC ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting within the user-defined message count CRC ALARM 1 CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM
FlexLogic operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT
setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
Configure the operand to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based output.
Latching and acknowledging conditions—if required—are programmed accordingly.
5
The CRC alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of direct input and output messages that
failed the CRC check is available as the ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT INPUTS  CRC FAIL COUNT CH1 actual value.
•
Message count and length of the monitoring window — To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 1
message per second (at 64 kbps) or 2 messages per second (128 kbps) even if there is no change in the direct outputs.
For example, setting the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT to “10000,” corresponds a time window of about 160 minutes
at 64 kbps and 80 minutes at 128 kbps. If the messages are sent faster as a result of direct outputs activity, the
monitoring time interval shortens. Take this into account when determining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT
setting. For example, if the requirement is a maximum monitoring time interval of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC
ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT is set to 10  60  1 = 600.
•
Correlation of failed CRC and bit error rate (BER) — The CRC check can fail if one or more bits in a packet are
corrupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the CRC fail rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain
assumptions an approximation can be made as follows. A direct input and output packet containing 20 bytes results
in 160 bits of data being sent and therefore, a transmission of 63 packets is equivalent to 10,000 bits. A BER of 10–4
implies 1 bit error for every 10000 bits sent or received. Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet,
having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 10–4.
5.3.17.3 Unreturned messages alarm CH1(2)
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O  UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)
 UNRETURNED
 MESSAGES ALARM CH1

UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1

UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
THRESHOLD: 10
Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1

UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
The C60 checks integrity of the direct input and output communication ring by counting unreturned messages. In the ring
configuration, all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time. The unreturned
messages alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by tracking the rate of
5-112
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
unreturned messages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter adds the messages have
failed to return. When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level specified by the UNRET MSGS
ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting and within the user-defined message count UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1
UNRET ALM FlexLogic operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE
COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
Configure the operand to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based output.
Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, are programmed accordingly.
The unreturned messages alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring configuration.
The total number of unreturned input and output messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT INPUTS
 UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1 actual value.
5.3.18 Teleprotection
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  TELEPROTECTION
 TELEPROTECTION


TELEPROTECTION
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

NUMBER OF TERMINALS:
2
Range: 2, 3

NUMBER OF COMM
CHANNELS: 1
Range: 1, 2

LOCAL RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
5
This option is available when an Inter-Relay Communications card is specified at the time of ordering (see
the Order Code tables). With the option, direct inputs/outputs display by default. When you enable the
teleprotection feature, direct I/O is not visible.
Digital teleprotection transfers protection commands between two or three relays in a secure, fast, dependable, and
deterministic way. Possible applications are permissive or blocking pilot schemes and direct transfer trip (DTT).
Teleprotection can be applied over any analog or digital channels and any communications media, such as direct fiber,
copper wires, optical networks, or microwave radio links. A mixture of communication media is possible.
Once teleprotection is enabled and the teleprotection input/outputs are configured, data packets are transmitted
continuously every 1/4 cycle (3/8 cycle if using C37.94 modules) from peer-to-peer. Security of communication channel
data is achieved by using CRC-32 on the data packet.
NOTE
Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive. As such, they cannot be used
simultaneously. Once teleprotection inputs and outputs are enabled, direct inputs and outputs are blocked,
and vice versa.
NUMBER OF TERMINALS — Specifies whether the teleprotection system operates between two peers or three peers.
NUMBER OF CHANNELS — Specifies how many channels are used. If the NUMBER OF TERMINALS is “3” (three-terminal system),
set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS to “2.” For a two-terminal system, the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to “1” or “2” (redundant
channels).
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-113
REMOTE RESOURCES
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER , TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER , and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER — In installations that use
multiplexers or modems, it is desirable to ensure that the data used by the relays protecting a given line is from the correct
relays. The teleprotection function performs this check by reading the message ID sent by transmitting relays and
comparing it to the programmed ID in the receiving relay. This check is also used to block inputs if inadvertently set to
loopback mode or data is being received from a wrong relay by checking the ID on a received channel. If an incorrect ID is
found on a channel during normal operation, the TELEPROT CH1 ID FAIL or TELEPROT CH2 ID FAIL FlexLogic operand is set, driving the
event with the same name and blocking the teleprotection inputs. For commissioning purposes, the result of channel
identification is also shown in the STATUS  CHANNEL TESTS  VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION actual value. The
default value of “0” for the LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER indicates that relay ID is not to be checked. On two- terminals twochannel systems, the same LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER is transmitted over both channels; as such, only the TERMINAL 1 ID
NUMBER has to be programmed on the receiving end.
5.3.19 Installation
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  INSTALLATION
 INSTALLATION


RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
Range: Not Programmed, Programmed

RELAY NAME:
Relay-1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit does not allow signaling of any
output relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed." This setting is "Not Programmed" by default. The UNIT NOT
PROGRAMMED self-test error message displays until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state.
5
The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name appears on generated reports.
5.4 Remote resources
5.4.1 Remote resources configuration
When the C60 is ordered with a process card module as a part of HardFiber system, an additional Remote Resources
menu tree is available in the EnerVista software to allow configuration of the HardFiber system.
Figure 5-46: Remote Resources configuration menu
5-114
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
The remote resources settings configure a C60 with a process bus module to work with HardFiber Bricks. Remote
resources configuration is only available through the EnerVista software, and is not available through the C60 front panel.
A Brick provides eight AC measurements, along with contact inputs, DC analog inputs, and contact outputs, to be the
remote interface to field equipment such as circuit breakers and transformers. The C60 with a process bus module has
access to all of the capabilities of up to eight Bricks. Remote resources settings configure the point-to-point connection
between specific fiber optic ports on the C60 process card and specific Brick. The relay is then configured to measure
specific currents, voltages and contact inputs from those Bricks, and to control specific outputs.
The configuration process for remote resources is straightforward and consists of the following steps.
•
Configure the field units. This establishes the point-to-point connection between a specific port on the relay process
bus module, and a specific digital core on a specific Brick. This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus
relay.
•
Configure the AC banks. This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages. AC
bank configuration also provides a provision for redundant measurements for currents and voltages, a powerful
reliability improvement possible with process bus.
•
Configure signal sources. This functionality of the C60 has not changed other than the requirement to use currents
and voltages established by AC bank configuration under the remote resources menu.
•
Configure field contact inputs, field contact outputs, RTDs, and transducers as required for the application's
functionality. These inputs and outputs are the physical interface to circuit breakers, transformers, and other
equipment. They replace the traditional contact inputs and outputs located at the relay to virtually eliminate copper
wiring.
•
Configure shared inputs and outputs as required for the application's functionality. Shared inputs and outputs are
distinct binary channels that provide high-speed protection quality signaling between relays through a Brick.
For additional information on how to configure a relay with a process bus module, see the HardFiber Process Bus System
Instruction Manual.
5.5 System setup
5.5.1 AC inputs
5.5.1.1 Current banks
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  CURRENT BANK F1(M5)
 CURRENT BANK F1


PHASE CT F1
PRIMARY: 1 A
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

PHASE CT F1
SECONDARY: 1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A

GROUND CT F1
PRIMARY: 1 A
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

GROUND CT F1
SECONDARY: 1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A
Because energy parameters are accumulated, record these values and then reset immediately prior to changing CT
characteristics.
Four banks of phase and ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents
the module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {1, 5}
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for details.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-115
5
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is
ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected
in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = neutral current = 3Io) is used as the input
for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the
circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor can also be used. For this configuration, the ground
CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input can be used. In this
case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. See chapter 3 for more details on CT connections.
Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct operation,
the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).
The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given the
following current banks:
•
F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio
•
F5: CT bank with 1000:1 ratio
•
M1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio
The following rule applies:
Eq. 5-7
SRC 1 = F1 + F5 + M1
1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 ratio CT is
adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then
a pickup level of 1 pu operates on 1000 A primary.
The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).
5
5.5.1.2 Voltage banks
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  VOLTAGE BANK F5(M5)
 VOLTAGE BANK F5


PHASE VT F5
CONNECTION: Wye
Range: Wye, Delta

PHASE VT F5
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1

PHASE VT F5
RATIO: 1.00 :1
Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01

AUXILIARY VT F5
CONNECTION: Vag
Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca

AUXILIARY VT F5
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1

AUXILIARY VT F5
RATIO: 1.00 :1
Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to
changing VT characteristics.
Two banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the
module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {5}
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE VT F5
CONNECTION made to the system as “Wye” or “Delta.” An open-delta source VT connection is entered as “Delta.”
5-116
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
NOTE
SYSTEM SETUP
The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when
nominal voltage is applied to the VT primary.
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a delta
connection, the secondary voltage is 115; that is, (13800 / 14400) × 120. For a wye connection, the voltage
value entered must be the phase to neutral voltage, which is 115  3 = 66.4.
On a 14.4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the
voltage value entered is 120; that is, 14400 / 120.
5.5.2 Power system
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM
 POWER SYSTEM


NOMINAL FREQUENCY:
60 Hz
Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1

PHASE ROTATION:
ABC
Range: ABC, ACB

FREQUENCY AND PHASE
REFERENCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

FREQUENCYTRACKING:
Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency
cannot be measured from available signals. This can happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before
reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a
safe period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.
The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters.
The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the
actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be connected
to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.
The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for
phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source:
phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current.
For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( V ANGLE REF = V A ), while Clarke transformation of the
phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking ( V FREQUENCY =  2V A – V B – V C   3 ) for better performance during
fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.
The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of
whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay.
Phase angle of the reference signal always displays zero degrees and all other phase angles are relative to this signal. If the
pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced.
The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they
have the same AC signal reference. This results in very precise correlation of phase angle indications between different URseries relays.
FREQUENCY TRACKING is set to “Disabled” only in unusual circumstances; consult the factory for special variable-frequency
applications.
The frequency tracking feature functions only when the C60 is in the “Programmed” mode. If the C60 is “Not
Programmed,” then metering values are available but can exhibit significant errors.
NOTE
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-117
5
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.5.3 Signal sources
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES  SOURCE 1(4)
 SOURCE 1


SOURCE 1 NAME:
SRC 1
Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

SOURCE 1 PHASE CT:
None
Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of
any 6 CTs. Only Phase CT inputs are displayed.

SOURCE 1 GROUND CT:
None
Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of
any 6 CTs. Only Ground CT inputs are displayed.

SOURCE 1 PHASE VT:
None
Range: None, F5, M5
Only phase voltage inputs are displayed

SOURCE 1 AUX VT:
None
Range: None, F5, M5
Only auxiliary voltage inputs are displayed
Identical menus are available for each source. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate
for the associated source.
The first letter in the source identifier represents the module slot position. The number directly following this letter
represents either the first bank of four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called “1” or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called
“5” in a particular CT/VT module. See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for details.
It is possible to select the sum of all CT combinations. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others are referred.
For example, the selection “F1+F5” indicates the sum of each phase from channels “F1” and “F5,” scaled to whichever CT
has the higher ratio. Selecting “None” hides the associated actual values.
5
The approach used to configure the AC sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each
CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type, ratio
and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each source is entered,
including specifying which CTs are summed together.
5.5.3.1 User selection of AC parameters for comparator elements
CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the
specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the
element specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection. In elements where the
parameter can be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One
setting specifies the source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS.
5.5.3.2 AC input actual values
The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and
voltage sections of actual values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels display
here. All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of the actual values.
5.5.3.3 Disturbance detectors (internal)
The disturbance detector (ANSI 50DD) element is a sensitive current disturbance detector that detects any disturbance on
the protected system. The 50DD function is used directly in some elements in the relay, for example VT Fuse Failure
detector or Fault Report. It can also be used to supervise current-based elements to prevent maloperation as a result of
the wrong settings or external CT wiring problem. A disturbance detector is provided for each source.
The 50DD function responds to the changes in magnitude of the sequence currents. The disturbance detector logic is as
follows.
5-118
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Figure 5-47: Disturbance detector logic
SETTING
ACTUAL
SOURCE 1
CURRENT PHASOR
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I_1
I_1 - I_1’ >2*CUT-OFF
I_2
I_2 - I_2’ >2*CUT-OFF
I_0
I_0 - I_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SRC 1 50DD OP
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SRC 2 50DD OP
Where I’ is 2 cycles old
SETTING
ACTUAL
SOURCE 2
CURRENT PHASOR
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I_1
I_1 - I_1’ >2*CUT-OFF
I_2
I_2 - I_2’ >2*CUT-OFF
I_0 - I_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
I_0
Where I’ is 2 cycles old
SETTING
ACTUAL
SOURCE 6
CURRENT PHASOR
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I_1
I_1 - I_1’ >2*CUT-OFF
I_2
I_2 - I_2’ >2*CUT-OFF
I_0
I_0 - I_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
Where I’ is 2 cycles old
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SRC 6 50DD OP
5
827092A3.CDR
The disturbance detector responds to the change in currents of twice the current cut-off level. The default cut-off threshold
is 0.02 pu; thus by default the disturbance detector responds to a change of 0.04 pu. The metering sensitivity setting
(PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES  CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL) controls the sensitivity of the disturbance detector
accordingly.
5.5.3.4 Example for use of sources
An example of the use of sources is shown in the following figure. A relay can have the following hardware configuration:
Increasing slot position letter -->
CT/VT module 1
CT/VT module 2
CT/VT module 3
CTs
VTs
not applicable
This configuration can be used on a two-winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half
system. The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application,
and the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-119
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-48: Example of use of sources
F1
DSP Bank
F5
Source 1
Source 2
Amps
Amps
51BF-1
51BF-2
Source 3
U1
Volts
Amps
A
W
Var
87T
A
W
Var
51P
V
V
Volts
Amps
M1
Source 4
M1
UR Relay
M5
827794A1.CDR
5
Y LV
D HV
AUX
SRC 1
SRC 2
SRC 3
Phase CT
M1
F1+F5
None
Ground CT
M1
None
None
Phase VT
M5
None
None
Aux VT
None
None
U1
5.5.4 Breakers
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1(4)
 BREAKER 1

5-120

BREAKER 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON
CONTROL: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

BREAKER 1 NAME:
Bkr 1
Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

BREAKER 1 MODE:
3-Pole
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole

BREAKER 1 OPEN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 CLOSE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP

BREAKER 1 A/3P CLSD:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 A/3P OPND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 B CLOSED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 B OPENED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 C CLOSED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 C OPENED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 Toperate:
0.070 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 ALARM
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1
TIME: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
5
A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features is provided in chapter 4. Information to
program the settings is covered here. These features are provided for two or more breakers; a user can use only those
portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.
The number of breaker control elements depends on the number of CT/VT modules specified with the C60. The following
settings are available for each breaker control element.
BREAKER 1 FUNCTION — This setting enables and disables the operation of the breaker control feature.
BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON CONTROL — Set to “Enable” to allow faceplate pushbutton operations.
BREAKER 1 NAME — Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the breaker. This name is used in flash messages
related to breaker 1.
BREAKER 1 MODE — Selects “3-Pole” mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or “1-Pole” mode where all
breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
BREAKER 1 OPEN — Selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to open breaker 1.
BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN — Selects an operand that prevents opening of the breaker. This setting can be used for select-before-
operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
BREAKER 1 CLOSE — Selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to close breaker 1.
BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE — Selects an operand that prevents closing of the breaker. This setting can be used for select-beforeoperate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
BREAKER 1 A/3P CLOSED — Selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxiliary position tracking
mechanism. This input is a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when the breaker is closed. If the BREAKER 1
MODE setting is selected as “3-Pole,” this setting selects a single input as the operand used to track the breaker open or
closed position. If the mode is selected as “1-Pole,” the input mentioned is used to track phase A and the BREAKER 1 B and
BREAKER 1 C settings select operands to track phases B and C, respectively.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-121
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
BREAKER 1 A/3P OPND — Selects an operand, usually a contact input, that is a normally-closed 52/b status input to create
a logic 1 when the breaker is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the inverted BREAKER 1 CLOSED status
signal can be used.
BREAKER 1 B CLOSED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B closed position as outlined for phase A.
BREAKER 1 B OPENED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B opened position as outlined for phase A.
BREAKER 1 C CLOSED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as singlepole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C closed position as outlined for phase A.
BREAKER 1 C OPENED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C opened position as outlined for phase A.
BREAKER 1 Toperate — This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 52/a
and 52/b auxiliary contacts during breaker operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has expired, the
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes.
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM — This setting selects an operand, usually an external contact input, connected to a breaker alarm
reporting contact.
BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY — This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the threepole position tracking operands does not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the
poles.
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME — This setting specifies the interval required to maintain setting changes in effect after an
operator has initiated a manual close command to operate a circuit breaker.
5
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV — Selects an operand indicating that breaker 1 is out-of-service.
5-122
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Figure 5-49: Dual breaker control logic (Sheet 1 of 2)
SETTING
BREAKER 1 FUNCTION
= Enabled
61850 model
Brk0XCBR1.BlkOpn.ctlVal
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 BLOCK OPEN
Off = 0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BREAKER 1 OFF CMD
BREAKER 1 TRIP A
OR
AND
BREAKER 1 TRIP B
BREAKER 1 TRIP C
OR
AND
OR
AND
OR
D60, L60, and L90 devices from trip output
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
TRIP PHASE A
TRIP PHASE B
TRIP PHASE C
TRIP 3-POLE
61850 model
BrkCSWI1.PosOpn.ctVal
Brk0XCBR1.PosOpn.ctVal
61850 model
Brk0XCBR1.BlkOpn.stVal
OR
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 OPEN
OR
Off = 0
USER 3 OFF/ON
To open BRK1-(Name)
SETTING
BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL
= Enabled
AND
OR
USER 2 OFF/ON
To open BRK1-(Name)
61850 model
BrkCSWI1.PosCls.ctVal
Brk0XCBR1.PosCls.ctVal
AND
AND
OR
OR
SETTING
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME
SETTING
BREAKER 1 CLOSE
Off = 0
C60, D60, L60, and L90 relays from recloser
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR CLOSE BKR 1
SETTING
BREAKER 1 BLOCK CLOSE
Off = 0
5
20 ms
OR
61850 XCBR config setting
SETTING
XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND:
Off = 0
61850 model
Brk0XCBR1.BlkCls.ctVal
0
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
AND
BREAKER 1 ON CMD
AND
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
AND
OR
61850 model
OR
Brk0XCBR1.BlkCls.stVal
To breaker control logic sheet 2
859719A1.CDR
IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the C60 is in “Programmed” mode and not in local control mode.
NOTE
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-123
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-50: Dual breaker control logic (Sheet 2 of 2)
From breaker
control logic
sheet 1
BKR ENABLED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
AND
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 OPEN
AND
BREAKER 1 DISCREP
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
BREAKER 1
CLOSED
(DEFAULT)
OR
SETTING
BREAKER 1 MODE
= 3-Pole
= 1-Pole
AND
BKR1 A CLOSED
BKR1 B CLOSED
BKR1 C CLOSED
OR
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY
AND
BREAKER 1
OPEN
(DEFAULT)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
0
BKR1 A OPENED
BKR1 B OPENED
BKR1 C OPENED
AND
OR
SETTING
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM
Note: the BREAKER 1 TROUBLE LED
can be latched using FlexLogic
= Off
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ΦA/3P CLSD
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
OR
SETTING
BREAKER 1 Toperate
OR
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
AND
0
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ΦA/3P OPND
= Off
BREAKER 1
TROUBLE
(DEFAULT)
BKR1 A CLOSED
AND
BKR1 A OPENED
AND
AND
BREAKER 1 ΦA BAD ST
BREAKER 1 ΦA CLSD
BREAKER 1 ΦA OPEN
BREAKER 1 ΦA INTERM
AND
AND
5
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ΦB CLSD
SETTING
BREAKER 1 Toperate
AND
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
OR
AND
AND
0
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ΦB OPENED
= Off
BKR1 B CLOSED
AND
BKR1 B OPENED
AND
AND
BREAKER 1 ΦB BAD ST
BREAKER 1 ΦB CLSD
BREAKER 1 ΦB OPEN
BREAKER 1 ΦB INTERM
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ΦC CLSD
SETTING
BREAKER 1 Toperate
AND
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
OR
AND
AND
0
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ΦC OPENED
= Off
BKR1 C CLOSED
AND
BKR1 C OPENED
AND
AND
BREAKER 1 ΦC BAD ST
BREAKER 1 ΦC CLSD
BREAKER 1 ΦC OPEN
BREAKER 1 ΦC INTERM
AND
AND
BKR1 A CLOSED
BKR1 B CLOSED
BKR1 C CLOSED
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
AND
XOR
SETTING
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN
BREAKER 1 1P OPEN
BREAKER 1 OOS
AND
AND
= Off
859712A1.cdr
The breaker element has direct hard-coded connections to the IEC 61850 model as shown in the logic diagram. This allows
remote open/close operation of each breaker, using either CSWI or XCBR IEC 61850 logical nodes. IEC 61850 select-beforeoperate functionality, local/remote switch functionality, along with blocking of open/close commands are provided. Note
that the dwell time for the IEC 61850 trip and close commands shown is one protection pass only. To maintain the close/
open command for a certain time, do so on the contact outputs using the "Seal-in" setting, in the Trip Output element, or in
FlexLogic.
5-124
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
5.5.5 Disconnect switches
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SWITCHES  SWITCH 1(16)
 SWITCH 1


SWITCH 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SWITCH 1 NAME:
SW 1
Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

SWITCH 1 MODE:
3-Pole
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole

SWITCH 1 OPEN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 CLOSE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWTCH 1 A/3P CLSD:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWTCH 1 A/3P OPND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 B CLOSED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 B OPENED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 C CLOSED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 C OPENED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 Toperate:
0.070 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

SWITCH 1 ALARM
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

SWITCH 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
5
The disconnect switch element contains the auxiliary logic for status and serves as the interface for opening and closing of
disconnect switches from SCADA or through the front panel interface. The disconnect switch element can be used to
create interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the switch pole position, both the 89/a and 89/b
auxiliary contacts are used with reporting of the discrepancy between them. The number of available disconnect switches
depends on the number of the CT/VT modules ordered with the C60.
SWITCH 1 FUNCTION — This setting enables and disables operation of the disconnect switch element.
SWITCH 1 NAME — Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the disconnect switch. This name is used in flash
messages related to disconnect switch 1.
SWITCH 1 MODE — This setting selects “3-Pole” mode, where disconnect switch poles have a single common auxiliary
switch, or “1-Pole” mode where each disconnect switch pole has its own auxiliary switch.
SWITCH 1 OPEN — This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate a contact output to open
disconnect switch 1.
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN — This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the disconnect switch. This setting can be
used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-125
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SWITCH 1 CLOSE — This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate a contact output to close
disconnect switch 1.
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE — This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the disconnect switch. This setting can be
used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
SWTCH 1A/3P CLSD — This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a disconnect switch auxiliary
position tracking mechanism. This input is a normally-open 89/a status input to create a logic 1 when the disconnect
switch is closed. If the SWITCH 1 MODE setting is selected as “3-Pole,” this setting selects a single input as the operand used
to track the disconnect switch open or closed position. If the mode is selected as “1-Pole,” the input mentioned is used to
track phase A and the SWITCH 1 B and SWITCH 1 C settings select operands to track phases B and C, respectively.
SWTCH 1 A/3P OPND — This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that is a normally-closed 89/b status input
to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open. If a separate 89/b contact input is not available, then an inverted
89/a status signal can be used.
SWITCH 1 B CLOSED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as outlined for phase A.
SWITCH 1 B OPENED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as singlepole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B opened position as outlined for phase A.
SWITCH 1 C CLOSED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C closed position as outlined for phase A.
SWITCH 1 C OPENED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C opened position as outlined for phase A.
SWITCH 1 Toperate — This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 89/a and
5
89/b auxiliary contacts during disconnect switch operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has expired,
the SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes.
SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY — This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the threepole position tracking operands do not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the
poles.
IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the C60 is in “Programmed” mode and not in local control mode.
NOTE
5-126
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Figure 5-51: Disconnect switch logic
SETTING
SWITCH 1 OPEN
= Off
61850 model
OR
Disc0CSWI1.PosOpn.ctVal
Disc0XSWI1.PosOpn.ctVal
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
61850 model
Disc0XSWI1.BlkOpn.ctlVal
SWITCH 1 OFF CMD
AND
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN
OR
61850 model
Disc0XSWI1.BlkOpn.stVal
= Off
SETTING
SWITCH 1 CLOSE
= Off
61850 model
Disc0CSWI1.PosCls.ctVal
Disc0XSWI1.PosCls.ctVal
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
61850 XSWI configuration setting
SETTING
SWITCH 1 ON CMD
AND
OR
AND
XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND:
61850 model
Disc0XSWI1.BlkCls.stVal
Off = 0
61850 model
AND
Disc0XSWI1.BlkCls.ctlVal
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE
= Off
AND
OR
AND
OR
AND
SWITCH 1 CLOSED
AND
SWITCH 1 OPEN
AND
SWITCH 1 DISCREP
AND
SWITCH 1 TROUBLE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 MODE
= 3-Pole
= 1-Pole
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY
SW1 A CLOSED
SW1 B CLOSED
SW1 C CLOSED
5
AND
AND
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SW1 A OPENED
SW1 B OPENED
SW1 C OPENED
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
SWTCH1 ΦA/3P CLSD
OR
SETTING
SWITCH 1 Toperate
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
= Off
AND
OR
AND
SETTING
SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P OPND
0
SW1 A CLOSED
= Off
SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS
AND
AND
SW1 A OPENED
SWITCH 1 ΦA BAD ST
SWITCH 1 ΦA CLSD
SWITCH 1 ΦA OPEN
SWITCH 1 ΦA INTERM
AND
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 ΦB CLOSED
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 Toperate
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
= Off
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 ΦB OPENED
AND
OR
0
SW1 B CLOSED
= Off
AND
AND
SW1 B OPENED
SWITCH 1 ΦB BAD ST
SWITCH 1 ΦB CLSD
SWITCH 1 ΦB OPEN
SWITCH 1 ΦB INTERM
AND
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 ΦC CLOSED
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 Toperate
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
= Off
OR
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 ΦC OPENED
SW1 C CLOSED
= Off
SETTING
SWITCH 1 FUNCTION
= Disabled
= Enabled
AND
0
AND
AND
SW1 C OPENED
AND
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SWITCH 1 ΦC BAD ST
SWITCH 1 ΦC CLSD
SWITCH 1 ΦC OPEN
SWITCH 1 ΦC INTERM
AND
AND
859720A1.CDR
5-127
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The switch element has direct hard-coded connections to the IEC 61850 model as shown in the logic diagram. This allows
remote open/close operation of each switch, using either CSWI or XSWI IEC 61850 logical nodes. IEC 61850 select-beforeoperate functionality, local/remote switch functionality, along with blocking open/close commands are provided. Note that
the dwell time for the IEC 61850 trip and close commands shown is one protection pass only. To maintain close/open
command for a certain time, do so either on the contact outputs using the "Seal-in" setting or in FlexLogic.
5.5.6 FlexCurves
5.5.6.1 Settings
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  FLEXCURVES  FLEXCURE A(D)
 FLEXCURVE A


FLEXCURVE A TIME AT
0.00 xPKP: 0 ms
Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
FlexCurves A through D have settings for entering times to reset and operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98
and 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter
a custom FlexCurve, enter the reset and operate times (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the
MESSAGE up/down keys) for the required protection curve (A, B, C, or D).
Table 5-15: FlexCurve table
Reset
5
Time
ms
Reset
Time
ms
Operate
Time
ms
Operate
Time
ms
Operate
Time
ms
Operate
0.00
0.68
1.03
2.9
4.9
10.5
0.05
0.70
1.05
3.0
5.0
11.0
0.10
0.72
1.1
3.1
5.1
11.5
0.15
0.74
1.2
3.2
5.2
12.0
0.20
0.76
1.3
3.3
5.3
12.5
0.25
0.78
1.4
3.4
5.4
13.0
0.30
0.80
1.5
3.5
5.5
13.5
0.35
0.82
1.6
3.6
5.6
14.0
0.40
0.84
1.7
3.7
5.7
14.5
0.45
0.86
1.8
3.8
5.8
15.0
0.48
0.88
1.9
3.9
5.9
15.5
0.50
0.90
2.0
4.0
6.0
16.0
0.52
0.91
2.1
4.1
6.5
16.5
0.54
0.92
2.2
4.2
7.0
17.0
0.56
0.93
2.3
4.3
7.5
17.5
0.58
0.94
2.4
4.4
8.0
18.0
0.60
0.95
2.5
4.5
8.5
18.5
0.62
0.96
2.6
4.6
9.0
19.0
0.64
0.97
2.7
4.7
9.5
19.5
0.66
0.98
2.8
4.8
10.0
20.0
NOTE
5-128
Time
ms
The relay using a given FlexCurve applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered points. Take
care when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of 1; that is, 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is
recommended to set the two times to a similar value, otherwise the linear approximation can result in
undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
5.5.6.2 FlexCurve configuration with EnerVista software
The EnerVista software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated data points.
Prospective FlexCurves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit, then
specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file (.csv format) by
selecting the EnerVista Import Data From setting (Settings > System Setup > FlexCurves > FlexCurve).
Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves are customized by
editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at zero
(implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup.
5.5.6.3 Recloser curve editing
Recloser curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response
time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite
operating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and
downstream protective devices have different operating characteristics. The recloser curve configuration window shown
here appears when the Initialize From setting in the EnerVista software is set to “Recloser Curve” and the Initialize
FlexCurve button is clicked.
Figure 5-52: Recloser curve initialization
Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times
Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each
curve operating time value.
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting
defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests
a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating
characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower
than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time;
otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears
when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum
curve time.
High Current Time: Allows the user to set a pickup multiple
from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is
normally only required at higher current levels. The HCT Ratio
defines the high current pickup multiple; the HCT defines the
operating time.
842721A1.CDR
The Multiplier and Adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT
settings. The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT ratio.
NOTE
5.5.6.4 Example
A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then
enabled at eight times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately four times pickup, the curve operating
time is equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-129
5
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-53: Composite recloser curve with HCT disabled
842719A1.CDR
With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding eight times pickup.
Figure 5-54: Composite recloser curve with HCT enabled
5
842720A1.CDR
Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed.
If this is attempted, the EnerVista software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
NOTE
5.5.6.5 Standard recloser curves
The following graphs display standard recloser curves available for the C60.
5-130
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Figure 5-55: Recloser curves GE101 to GE106
2
1
GE106
TIME (sec)
0.5
0.2
GE103
GE104
0.1
GE105
0.05
GE102
GE101
0.02
0.01
1
1.2
1.5
2
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
5
842723A1.CDR
Figure 5-56: Recloser curves GE113, GE120, GE138, and GE142
50
GE142
20
10
TIME (sec)
5
GE138
2
GE120
1
GE113
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
1
1.2
1.5
2
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
15
20
842725A1.CDR
5-131
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-57: Recloser curves GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151, and GE201
50
20
TIME (sec)
10
GE201
5
GE151
2
GE140
GE134
1
GE137
0.5
1
1.2
1.5
2
5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842730A1.CDR
Figure 5-58: Recloser curves GE131, GE141, GE152, and GE200
50
GE152
TIME (sec)
20
GE141
10
GE131
5
GE200
2
1
5-132
1.2
1.5
2
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842728A1.CDR
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Figure 5-59: Recloser curves GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164, and GE165
50
20
GE164
10
TIME (sec)
5
2
GE162
1
0.5
GE133
0.2
GE165
0.1
0.05
GE161
GE163
0.02
0.01
1
1.2
1.5
2
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842729A1.CDR
5
Figure 5-60: Recloser curves GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, and GE139
20
GE132
10
5
TIME (sec)
2
1
0.5
GE139
0.2
GE136
0.1
GE116
0.05
GE117
GE118
0.02
0.01
1
1.2
1.5
2
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
15
20
842726A1.CDR
5-133
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-61: Recloser curves GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, and GE122
20
10
5
GE122
2
TIME (sec)
1
0.5
GE114
0.2
0.1
GE111
GE121
0.05
GE107
GE115
GE112
0.02
0.01
1
1.2
1.5
2
5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842724A1.CDR
Figure 5-62: Recloser curves GE119, GE135, and GE202
50
20
GE202
TIME (sec)
10
5
2
GE135
GE119
1
0.5
0.2
1
5-134
1.2
1.5
2
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842727A1.CDR
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
5.5.7 Phasor Measurement Unit
5.5.7.1 Menu
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
 PHASOR MEASUREMENT
 UNIT

 PHASOR MEASUREMENT
 UNIT 1
See below

 AGGREGATOR
 UNIT 1
See page 5-151

 IEC 90-5 MSVCB
 CONFIGURATION
See page 5-154
The C60 is provided with an optional Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) feature. This feature is specified as
a software option at the time of ordering. The number of PMUs available also depends on this option.
Using the order code for your device, see the order codes in chapter 2 for details.
5.5.7.2 UR synchrophasor implementation
Phasors are used in protection relays. When these phasors are referenced to a common time base, they are referred to as
synchrophasors. A vastly improved method for tracking power system dynamic phenomena for power system monitoring,
protection, operation, and control can be realized when synchrophasors from different locations within the power system
are networked to a central location.
The C60 offers PMU features over two communication standards, IEC 61850-90-5 and IEEE C37.118. The figure shows
complete synchrophasor implementation.
Figure 5-63: Synchrophasor implementation
5.5.7.3 UR implementation of IEC 61850-90-5
Synchrophasor data as measured and calculated by PMUs is used to assess the condition of the electrical power network.
The IEEE C37.118 standards define synchrophasors and related message formats to transmit synchrophasor data.
Synchrophasor streaming via IEEE C37.118 has proven to work but the need to have a communication mechanism that is
compliant with the concept of IEC 61850 has led to the development of IEC 61850-90-5. The IEC 61850-90-5 technical
report defines the packet structure for multicast routing of streamed Sampled Value (SV) known as R-SV.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-135
5
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
UR firmware versions 7.0 and above have a 90-5 based R-SV implementation equivalent in structure and configuration to
that of the existing IEEE C37.118 implementation of firmware version 6.0, that is, synchrophasor data at rates up to 60 Hz
for metering and 120 Hz for protection class synchrophasors. The following two figures depict the general data flow for the
generation of synchrophasor data for IEC 61850-90-5. In the first figure, when IEC 61850-90-5 is selected all real and
virtual sources are available for the IEC 61850-90-5 PMUs.
The number of PMUs and aggregators vary by product, as outlined in the table.
Table 5-16: PMU implementation by UR device
UR device
Number of
PMUS
Number of
aggregators
Number of
analog inputs
Comment
N60
6
C60
2
4
16
1, 2, 4, or 6 PMUs can be used
2
16
D60, F60, G60, L30, L90, T60
1
1
16
The figure shows an example of an N60 using four Logical Device PMUs (Logical Device 2 through 5) and four aggregators.
The control blocks for the aggregators are located in LD1. A 64 character LDName setting is provided.
Figure 5-64: N60 example for four logical device PMUs
5
NOTE
Precise time input to the relay from the international time standard, via either IRIG-B or PTP, is vital for correct
synchrophasor measurement and reporting. For IRIG-B, a DC level shift IRIG-B receiver must be used for the
PMU to output proper synchrophasor values.
Depending on the applied filter, the synchrophasors that are produced by PMUs are classified as either P (protection) or M
(Measurement) class synchrophasors. Synchrophasors available within the UR that have no filtering applied are classified
as NONE, which within the standard is classified as PRES OR UNKNOWN under the Calculation Method - ClcMth. Each
Logical Device PMU supports one MxxMMXU, MxxMSQI, PxxxMMXU , PxxxMSQI, NxxMMXU, and one NxxMSQI logical node.
5-136
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Figure 5-65: Logical nodes supported in each logical device
The following is a summary of LNs that are in each Logical Device (LD2 through LD7):
•
PxxxMMXU1 ClcMth = P-Class (Note Vaux is mapped to Vneut of MMXU)
•
PxxxMSQI1 ClcMth = P-CLASS
•
MxxMMXU1 ClcMth = M-Class (Note Vaux is mapped to Vneut of MMXU)
•
MxxMSQI1 ClcMth = M-CLASS
•
NxxMMXU1 ClcMth = M-Class (Note Vaux is mapped to Vneut of MMXU)
•
NxxMSQI1 ClcMth = M-CLASS
•
GGIO1, which contains 16 digital status indication points and 16 analog points. The Analog GGIO values are selectable
from any FlexAnalog value in the UR.
NOTE
The Synchro Logical Nodes in an LD report at the same rate as set in the PMUn Basic Configuration setting. This
is reflected in the instantiation of the Data Object – SmpRate in the msvcb## of LLN0 in the LD1. SmpRate is a
Read Only Integer Status (INS).
When the first PMU from any LD is mapped into an aggregator, the aggregator inherits the Sample Rate (SmpRate) and
IEEE C37.118 Class (P or M) of that PMU. The value of the SmpRate DO in the Report Control Block is set based on the value
of the Sample Rate in the PMU. The Class of the Dataset are mapped into the MSVID of the Dataset (see text that follows for
the overall name of the MSVID). If other PMUs are mapped into the same aggregator with different Sample Rates or from
different classes, then a Self-Test error (DatSetErr) is set and dataset transmission is blocked.
A setting value — MSVID — is created with a maximum input range of 56 characters (=64 less 6 for the IDCode less 2 for the
Class).
The value of MSVID in the dataset is a concatenation of the aggregator IDCode and the MSVID setting value in the format:
MSVID-AggregatorIDCode-CLASS where CLASS is P, M, or N (for None) – depending on the Class of the first PMU included in
the Aggregator.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-137
5
SYSTEM SETUP
NOTE
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Synchrophasor Rectangular Format and Integer data types are NOT supported in IEC 61850-90-5 (only
supported with IEEE C37.118) and not to set — GGIO1 that contains 16 digital status indication points —
aggregated as a 16 bit bitstring and 16 analog points. The Analog GGIO values are selectable from any
FlexAnalog value in the UR. For firmware versions 7.0 and later, the description fields for the phasors, analog,
and digital channels are populated with the 16 character name field provided within the Basic Configuration
menu. Additionally, the names of the 16 binary points are implemented as numbered descriptions — d1, d2, d3,
and so on. The number of descriptions are equal to the number of bits configured in the 16 bit digital status
word.
All bitstrings less than or equal to 32 bits in length map into a 32 bit bitstring in an IEC 61850-90-5 dataset.
The Value of the Nominal Frequency of the chassis is instantiated as a DO in LPHD of LD1. The value is named
HzNom and is an Integer Status (INS).
The UR also supports the option to apply no filtering to the synchrophasors. If no filtering is applied (PMU Class = None),
according to the standard, the ClcMth attribute is PRES. The semantic of the ClcMth used is not carried in the individual DO
and so it is recommended that one of letters of the prefix on the instantiated LNs be set to “P” or “M” accordingly in order
to differentiate. For firmware versions 7.0 and later, only FCDA data is supported. The PMU Implementation by UR Device
table earlier indicates the maximum size of each PMU data set for version 7.2 and later using FCDA data (non-structured
data).
5.5.7.4 Example: Protection synchrophasors data set with reporting rate 60 frames/second
5
This example gives the protection synchrophasors data set with a reporting rate of 60 frames per second (P60MMXU1). See
the figure earlier, Logical Nodes Supported in Each Logical Device. This data or list of items, as shown in the following
figure, is not available to the UR setup program but is available to be mapped by the user into a selected aggregator or
aggregators dataset. The logical device name (LDName) of each PMU LD is a 64 character user setting. The IEEE C37.118
STN and IDCode is to be mapped as a concatenated value in the (d)escription field of LPL CDC of the NamPlt DO in LLN0.
The mapping is implemented as STN-IDCode (text string).
From each PMU, the user selects the phasor information of interest that is mapped into the selected aggregator datset(s).
For version 7.0 and later, only FCDA data is supported.
Figure 5-66: Data set created from user-selected internal items
5-138
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
5.5.7.5 Example: Creation of different data sets
The aggregators allow the aggregation of phasors from multiple PMUs (with the same reporting rate) into a single custom
data set to optimize bandwidth when streaming.
Figure 5-67: Example of aggregator data sets
5.5.7.6 Configuration example: CFG-2 based configuration (using IEC 61850-90-5)
The C60 is expected to send the CFG-2 file (IEEE C37.118 config. file) upon request from the upstream synchrophasor
devices (for example, P30) without stopping R-SV multicasting, as shown in the following figure. The primary domain
controller (PDC) does not need to use a stop/start data stream command if the UR protocol is set to IEC 61850-90-5 prior to
requesting the configuration via CFG-2 (IEEE C37.118 config. file). The CFG-2 request from the P30 can be on TCP/IP or
UDP/IP, however, R-SV data streaming is only UDP multicasts (not TCP).
Figure 5-68: CFG-2 based configuration solution
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-139
5
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.5.7.7 Modification of SYNC word in CFG-2 for TR 90-5 data sets
In the CFG-2 file, all relevant information about the data being streamed is included. However, this file does not include the
fact that it describes a 90-5 dataset or the number of Application Service Data Units (datasets). In order to communicate
this information via the CFG-2 file for a given aggregator, when the aggregator is set to 90-5, the version number of the
CFG-2 file (found in bits 0-3 of the frame SYNC word, which is set presently to 2) is set as follows:
Value (decimal)
Number of ASDUs
11
1
12
2
13
3
14
4
5.5.7.8 Settings
The PMU settings are organized as follows.
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(2)
 PHASOR MEASUREMENT
 UNIT 1
5

 PMU 1 BASIC
 CONFIGURATION
See below

 PMU 1
 CALIBRATION
See page 5-144

 PMU 1
 TRIGGERING
See page 5-145

 PMU 1
 RECORDING
See page 5-151
5.5.7.9 Basic configuration
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  BASIC CONFIGURATION  PMU 1(2)
 PMU 1 BASIC
 CONFIGURATION
5-140

PMU 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range:
Enabled, Disabled

PMU 1 IDCODE:
1
Range:
1 to 65534 in steps of 1

PMU 1 STN:
GE-UR-PMU
Range: 32-character ASCII string truncated to 16
characters if mapped into C37.118 Default: GE-UR-PMU

PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE:
SRC 1
Range:
available signal sources

PMU 1 CLASS:
CLASS M
Range:
None, CLASS M, CLASS P

PMU 1 FORMAT:
Integer
Range:
Integer, Floating-point

PMU 1 STYLE:
Polar
Range:
Polar, Rectangular

PMU 1 RATE:
10
Range: 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 12, 15,20, 25, 30,50, 60, 100, 120
/sec

PMU 1 f & df/dt
FILTER: None
Range: None, 10Hz/s <10Hz, 10Hz/s <20Hz, 20Hz/s
<10Hz, 20Hz/s <20Hz

PMU 1 PHS-1:
Off
Range:
available synchrophasor values
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP

PMU 1 PHS-1:
NAME: GE-UR-PMU-PHS-1
Range:
16-character ASCII string


PMU 1 PHS-14:
Off
Range:
available synchrophasor values

PMU 1 PHS-14:
NAME: GE-UR-PMU-PHS-14
Range:
16-character ASCII string

PMU 1 A-CH-1:
Off
Range:
available FlexAnalog values

PMU 1 A-CH-1:
NAME: AnalogChannel1
Range:
16-character ASCII string


PMU 1 A-CH-16 (16):
Off
Range:
available FlexAnalog values

PMU 1 A-CH-16 (16):
NM: AnalogChannel16
Range:
16-character ASCII string

PMU 1 D-CH-1:
Off
Range:
available FlexLogic operands

PMU 1 D-CH-1
NAME: DigChannel1
Range:
16-character ASCII string

PMU 1 D-CH-1
NORMAL STATE: Off
Range:
Off, On

PMU 1 D-CH-16:
Off
Range:
FlexLogic operand

PMU 1 REC D-CH-16:
NM: DigChannel16
Range:
16-character ASCII string

PMU 1 REC D-CH-16:
NORMAL STATE: Off
Range:
Off, On

 37.118 PMU 1
 CONFIGURATION
See below

 90-5 PMU 1
 CONFIGURATION
See below
5

This section contains basic Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) data, such as functions, source settings, and names.
PMU 1 FUNCTION — This setting enables the LOGICAL Device PMU 1 functionality. Use this setting to permanently enable or
disable the feature.
PMU 1 IDCODE — This setting assigns a numerical ID to the PMU. It corresponds to the IDCODE field of the data,
configuration, header, and command frames of the IEEE C37.118 protocol. The PMU uses this value when sending data,
configuration, and header frames; and it responds to this value when receiving the command frame. This is used when
only data from one PMU is present.
PMU 1 STN — This setting assigns an alphanumeric ID to the PMU station. It corresponds to the STN field of the
configuration frame of the IEEE C37.118 protocol. This value is a 16-character ASCII string as per the IEEE C37.118
standard.
PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE — This setting specifies one of the available C60 signal sources for processing in the PMU. Any
combination of voltages and currents can be configured as a source. The current channels can be configured as sums of
physically connected currents. This facilitates PMU applications in breaker-and-a-half, ring-bus, and similar arrangements.
The PMU feature calculates voltage phasors for actual voltage (A, B, C, and auxiliary) and current (A, B, C, and ground)
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-141
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
channels of the source, as well as symmetrical components (0, 1, and 2) of both voltages and currents. When configuring
communication and recording features of the PMU, the user can select, from the above superset, the content to be sent
out or recorded. When one source is selected by one PMU, it cannot be selected by another PMU.
PMU 1 CLASS (Range P, M, None) — This setting selects the synchrophasor class. A reporting rate of 100 or 120 can only be
selected for class P synchrophasors and if the system frequency is 50 or 60 Hz, respectively.
PMU 1 NETWORK REPORTING FORMAT — This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors as 16-bit integer or 32-bit
IEEE floating point numbers. This setting complies with bit-1 of the FORMAT field of the C37.118 configuration frame. Note
that this setting applies to synchrophasors only; the user-selectable FlexAnalog channels are always transmitted as 16-bit
integer values.
PMU 1 NETWORK REPORTING STYLE — This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors in rectangular (real and
imaginary) or in polar (magnitude and angle) coordinates. This setting complies with bit-0 of the FORMAT field of the
C37.118 configuration frame.
PMU 1 RATE — This setting specifies the reporting rate for the network (Ethernet) port. This value applies to all PMU streams
of the device that are assigned to transmit over this aggregator. For a system frequency of 60 Hz (50 Hz), the C60
generates a reporting mismatch message if the selected rate is not set as 10 Hz, 12 Hz, 15 Hz, 20 Hz, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, or 120
Hz (or 10 Hz, 25 Hz, 50 Hz, or 100 Hz when the system frequency is 50 Hz) when entered via the keypad or software; and
the C60 stops the transmission of reports. Note that 4 Hz is not allowed for an M-class 50 Hz system.
PMU 1 f & df/dt FILTER — This setting is not supported currently and will be available in a future release.
5
This setting allows applying post-filtering to the frequency and rate-of-change of-frequency to avoid reporting erroneous
values, which can possibly happen during fault, switching, and other system disturbances. For example, choosing 20Hz/s
<10Hz setting ensures that if rate-of-change of-frequency between current reporting instance and previous one exceeds
20Hz/s or frequency deviation from the nominal frequency exceeds 10Hz, then new frequency and rate-of-change offrequency value are invalidated. If this happens, the previous valid value of the frequency is maintained and rate-ofchange of-frequency value is forced to 0 at this reporting instance.
PMU 1 PHS-1 to PMU 1 PHS-14 — These settings specify synchrophasors to be transmitted from the superset of all
synchronized measurements. The table outlines available synchrophasor values.
Table 5-17: Synchrophaser settings
Selection
Meaning
Va
First voltage channel, either Va or Vab
Vb
Second voltage channel, either Vb or Vbc
Vc
Third voltage channel, either Vc or Vca
Vx
Fourth voltage channel
Ia
Phase A current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Ib
Phase B current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Ic
Phase C current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Ig
Fourth current channel, physical or summation as per the source settings
V1
Positive-sequence voltage, referenced to Va
V2
Negative-sequence voltage, referenced to Va
V0
Zero-sequence voltage
I1
Positive-sequence current, referenced to Ia
I2
Negative-sequence current, referenced to Ia
I0
Zero-sequence current
These settings allow for optimizing the frame size and maximizing transmission channel usage, depending on a given
application. Select “Off” to suppress transmission of a given value.
PMU 1 PHS-1 NM to PMU 1 PHS-14 NM — These settings allow for custom naming of the synchrophasor channels. Sixteencharacter ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. These names are typically based on
station, bus, or breaker names.
5-142
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
PMU 1 A-CH-1 to PMU 1 A-CH-16 — These settings specify any analog data measured by the relay to be included as a userselectable analog channel of the data frame. Up to 16 analog channels can be configured to send any FlexAnalog value
from the relay. Examples include frequency, rate of frequency change, active and reactive power, per phase or three-phase
power, power factor, temperature via RTD inputs, and THD. The configured analog values are sampled concurrently with
the synchrophasor instant and sent as 32-bit floating-point values scaled to Engineering units.
PMU 1 A-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 A-CH-16 NM — These settings allow for custom naming of the analog channels. Sixteen-character
ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.
PMU 1 D-CH-1 to PMU 1 D-CH-16 — These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user-
selectable digital channel of the data frame. Up to 16 digital channels can be configured to send any FlexLogic operand
from the relay. The configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant. These values are
mapped into a two-byte integer number, with byte 1 LSB corresponding to the digital channel 1 and byte 2 MSB
corresponding to digital channel 16.
PMU 1 D-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 D-CH-16 NM — These settings allow for custom naming of the digital channels. Sixteen-character
ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.
PMU 1 D-CH-1 NORMAL STATE to PMU 1 D-CH-16 NORMAL STATE — These settings allow for specifying a normal state for each
digital channel. These states are transmitted in configuration frames to the data concentrator.
C37.118 PMU 1 configuration
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  BASIC CONFIGURATION  PMU 1  PMU 1 BASIC
CONFIGURATION  37.118 PMU 1 CONFIGURATION
 37.118 PMU 1
 CONFIGURATION

PMU 1 FORMAT:
Integer
Range:
Integer, Floating-point

PMU 1 STYLE:
Polar
Range:
Polar, Rectangular
5
PMU 1 FORMAT — This setting selects whether synchrophasors are reported as 16-bit integers or 32-bit IEEE floating point
numbers. This setting complies with bit-1 of the FORMAT field of the IEEE C37.118 configuration frame. This setting applies
to synchrophasors only; user-selectable FlexAnalog channels are always transmitted as 16-bit integer values.
PMU 1 STYLE — This setting selects whether synchrophasors are reported in rectangular (real and imaginary) coordinates or
in polar (magnitude and angle) coordinates. This setting complies with bit-0 of the FORMAT field of the IEEE C37.118
configuration frame.
With 90-5 PMU, the FORMAT and STYLE are Floating-point and Polar respectively, as specified in the IEC 6185090-5 technical report.
NOTE
IEC 61850–90–5 PMU 1 configuration
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  BASIC CONFIGURATION  PMU 1  PMU 1 BASIC
CONFIGURATION  90-5 PMU 1 CONFIGURATION
 90-5 PMU 1
 CONFIGURATION

PMU 1 LDINST:
PMU1
Range:
64 char ASCII text
PMU1 LDINST — A user-defined visible string (maximum 64 char ASCII test) to assign Logical Device (LD) Inst for a PMU
logical device.
As per IEC 61850-6 standard specification, the PMU LD Name is the concatenated combination (to total 64
characters) of IED Name (specified in IEC 61850 Server Settings) appended with PMU X LDINST string.
NOTE
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-143
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.5.7.10 PMU calibration
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1  PMU 1(2)
CALIBRATION
 PMU 1
 CALIBRATION
5

PMU 1 VA CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range:
–5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05

PMU 1 VA CALIBRATION
MAG: 100.0%
Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%

PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05

PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION
MAG: 100.0%
Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%

PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05

PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION
MAG: 100.0%
Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%

PMU 1 VX CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05

PMU 1 VX CALIBRATION
MAG: 100.0%
Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%

PMU 1 IA CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05

PMU 1 IA CALIBRATION
MAG: 100.0%
Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%

PMU 1 IB CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05

PMU 1 IB CALIBRATION
MAG: 100.0%
Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%

PMU 1 IC CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05

PMU 1 IC CALIBRATION
MAG: 100.0%
Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%

PMU 1 IG CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00°
Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05

PMU 1 IG CALIBRATION
MAG: 100.0%
Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%

PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT
ANGLE: 0°
Range: –180 to 180° in steps of 30

PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT
ANGLE: 0°
Range: –180 to 180° in steps of 30
This menu contains user angle and magnitude calibration data for the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU). This data is
combined with the factory adjustments to shift the phasors for better accuracy.
PMU 1 VA... IG CALIBRATION ANGLE — These settings recognize applications with protection class voltage and current
sources, and they allow the user to calibrate each channel (four voltages and four currents) individually to offset errors
introduced by VTs, CTs, and cabling. The setting values are effectively added to the measured angles. Therefore, enter a
positive correction when the secondary signal lags the true signal and a negative value when the secondary signal leads
the true signal.
5-144
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
PMU 1 VA... IG CALIBRATION MAGNITUDE — These settings recognize applications with protection class voltage and current
sources, and they allow the user to calibrate each channel (four voltages and four currents) individually to offset errors
introduced by VTs, CTs. The setting values are effectively a multiplier of the measured magnitudes. Therefore, entering a
multiplier greater than 100% of the secondary signal increases the true signal, and a multiplier less than 100% value of the
secondary signal reduces the true signal.
PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE — This setting allows correcting positive- and negative-sequence voltages for vector groups of
power transformers located between the PMU voltage point and the reference node. This angle is effectively added to the
positive-sequence voltage angle and subtracted from the negative-sequence voltage angle. Note that:
•
When this setting is not “0°”, the phase and sequence voltages do not agree. Unlike sequence voltages, the phase
voltages cannot be corrected in a general case and therefore are reported as measured.
•
When receiving synchrophasor data at multiple locations, with possibly different reference nodes, it can be more
beneficial to allow the central locations to perform the compensation of sequence voltages.
•
This setting applies to PMU data only. The C60 calculates symmetrical voltages independently for protection and
control purposes without applying this correction.
•
When connected to line-to-line voltages, the PMU calculates symmetrical voltages with the reference to the AG
voltage and not to the physically connected AB voltage (see the Metering Conventions section in Chapter 6).
PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT ANGLE — This setting allows correcting positive and negative-sequence currents for vector groups of
power transformers located between the PMU current point and the reference node. The setting has the same meaning for
currents as the PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE setting has for voltages. Normally, the two correcting angles are set identically,
except rare applications when the voltage and current measuring points are located at different windings of a power
transformer.
5.5.7.11 PMU triggering overview
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(2)  PMU 1(2)
TRIGGERING
 PMU 1
 TRIGGERING

 PMU 1 USER
 TRIGGER
See page 5-146

 PMU 1 FREQUENCY
 TRIGGER
See page 5-146

 PMU 1 VOLTAGE
 TRIGGER
See page 5-147

 PMU 1 CURRENT
 TRIGGER
See page 5-148

 PMU 1 POWER
 TRIGGER
See page 5-149

 PMU 1 df/dt
 TRIGGER
See page 5-150
Each Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) contains five triggering mechanisms to facilitate triggering of the associated PMU
recorder, or cross-triggering of other PMUs in the system. They are:
•
Overfrequency and underfrequency
•
Overvoltage and undervoltage
•
Overcurrent
•
Overpower
•
High rate of change of frequency
The pre-configured triggers can be augmented with a user-specified condition built freely using programmable logic of the
relay. The entire triggering logic is refreshed once every two power system cycles.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-145
5
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
All five triggering functions and the user-definable condition are consolidated (ORed) and connected to the PMU recorder.
Each trigger can be programmed to log its operation into the event recorder and to signal its operation via targets. The five
triggers drive the STAT bits of the data frame to inform the destination of the synchrophasor data regarding the cause of
trigger. The following convention is adopted to drive bits 11, 3, 2, 1, and 0 of the STAT word.
Figure 5-69: STAT bits logic
SETTING
User Trigger
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
OR
bit 0
OR
bit 1
OR
bit 3, bit 11
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU 1 recorder
bit 2
8470004A2.CDR
The trigger reset (drop-off) timer is available for all five triggering functions (FREQ, ROCOF, VOLT, CURR, POWER) in individual
trigger settings under the TRIGGER DPO TIME setting. This asserts individual trigger operand and overall PMU x TRIGGERED
operand with stat bits 3 and 11 for a fixed interval defined by this setting. If it is required that PMU x TRIGGERED operand with
stat bits 3 and 11 stay longer than the individual reset timer, then use the PMU x USER TRIGGER setting assigned with
appropriate elements and FlexLogic. In short, in case of USER TRIGGER , the drop-off time needs to be implemented using
FlexLogic.
User triggering
5
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(2)  PMU 1(2)
TRIGGERING  PMU 1(2) USER TRIGGER
 PMU 1 USER
 TRIGGER

PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
The user trigger allows customized triggering logic to be constructed from FlexLogic. The entire triggering logic is refreshed
every two power system cycles.
Frequency triggering
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(2)  PMU 1(2)
TRIGGERING  PMU 1(2) FREQUENCY TRIGGER
 PMU 1 FREQUENCY
 TRIGGER
5-146

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
LOW-FREQ: 49.00 Hz
Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
HIGH-FREQ: 61.00 Hz
Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PMU 1 FREQ TRIG BLK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
TARGET: Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
The trigger responds to the frequency signal of the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) source. The frequency is calculated
from among phase voltages, auxiliary voltage, phase currents, and ground current, in this hierarchy, depending on the
source configuration as per C60 standards. This element requires that the frequency be above the minimum measurable
value. If the frequency is below this value, such as when the circuit is de-energized, the trigger drops out.
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ — Specifies the low threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The comparator applies a
0.02 Hz hysteresis.
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ — Specifies the high threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The comparator applies
a 0.02 Hz hysteresis.
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME — Use to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME — Use to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is of importance
when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
Figure 5-70: Frequency trigger logic
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
FUNCTION:
SETTING
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
Enabled = 1
Off = 0
AND
PMU 1 FREQ TRIG BLK:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SETTINGS
Off = 0
SETTING
PMU 1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
FREQUENCY, f
SETTINGS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ:
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ:
RUN
0< f < LOW-FREQ
OR
f > HIGH-FREQ
to STAT bits of
the data frame
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME:
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME:
tPKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0
0
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
tDPO
847008A1.CDR
Voltage triggering
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(2)  PMU 1(2)
TRIGGERING  PMU 1(2) VOLTAGE TRIGGER
 PMU 1 VOLTAGE
 TRIGGER

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
LOW-VOLT: 0.800 pu
Range: 0.250 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
HIGH-VOLT: 1.200 pu
Range: 0.750 to 1.750 pu in steps of 0.001

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PMU 1 VOLT TRIG BLK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
TARGET: Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
This element responds to abnormal voltage. Separate thresholds are provided for low and high voltage. In terms of
signaling its operation, the element does not differentiate between the undervoltage and overvoltage events. The trigger
responds to the phase voltage signal of the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) source. All voltage channels (A, B, and C or AB,
BC, and CA) are processed independently and can trigger the recorder. A minimum voltage supervision of 0.1 pu is
implemented to prevent pickup on a de-energized circuit, similarly to the undervoltage protection element.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-147
5
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW-VOLT — Specifies the low threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger, in per-unit of the PMU
source. 1 pu is a nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio. The comparator applies a
1% hysteresis.
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH-VOLT — Specifies the high threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger, in per-unit of the PMU
source. 1 pu is a nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio. The comparator applies a
1% hysteresis.
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME — Use to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME — Use to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is of importance
when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
Figure 5-71: Voltage trigger logic
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTINGS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
FUNCTION:
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
Enabled = 1
SETTINGS
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
SETTINGS
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW-VOLT:
Off = 0
PMU 1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH-VOLT:
VAB
VB
VBC
VCA
(0.1pu < V < LOW-VOLT) OR
(V > HIGH-VOLT)
(0.1pu < V < LOW-VOLT) OR
(V > HIGH-VOLT)
OR
DELTA
VA
VC
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
RUN
VT CONNECTION:
5
OR
SETTING
Off = 0
WYE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
AND
PMU 1 VOLT TRIG BLK:
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME:
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME:
tPKP
(0.1pu < V < LOW-VOLT) OR
(V > HIGH-VOLT)
to STAT bits of
the data frame
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
tDPO
0
847009A1.CDR
Current triggering
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(2)  PMU 1(2)
TRIGGERING  PMU 1(2) CURRENT TRIGGER
 PMU 1 CURRENT
 TRIGGER

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PICKUP: 1.800 pu
Range: 0.100 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PMU 1 CURR TRIG BLK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
TARGET: Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
This element responds to elevated current. The trigger responds to the phase current signal of the Phasor Measurement
Unit (PMU) source. All current channel (A, B, and C) are processed independently and can trigger the recorder.
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP — Specifies the pickup threshold for the overcurrent trigger, in per unit of the PMU source. A
value of 1 pu is a nominal primary current. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME — Use to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME — Use to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is of
importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
5-148
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Figure 5-72: Current trigger logic
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
SETTINGS
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
SETTING
PMU 1 CURR TRIG BLK:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
Enabled = 1
AND
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
FUNCTION:
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
Off = 0
Off = 0
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP:
RUN
IA
I > PICKUP
IB
I > PICKUP
IC
I > PICKUP
OR
PMU 1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME:
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME:
tPKP
to STAT bits of
the data frame
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
tDPO
0
847010A1.CDR
Power triggering
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(2)  PMU 1(2)
TRIGGERING  PMU 1(2) POWER TRIGGER
 PMU 1 POWER
 TRIGGER

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ACTIVE: 1.250 pu
Range: 0.250 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
REACTIVE: 1.250 pu
Range: 0.250 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
APPARENT: 1.250 pu
Range: 0.250 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PMU 1 PWR TRIG BLK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
TARGET: Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
5
This element responds to abnormal power. Separate thresholds are provided for active, reactive, and apparent powers. In
terms of signaling its operation, the element does not differentiate among the three types of power. The trigger responds
to the single-phase and three-phase power signals of the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) source.
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE — Specifies the pickup threshold for the active power of the source. For single-phase power,
1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the
nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator
applies a 3% hysteresis.
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE — Specifies the pickup threshold for the reactive power of the source. For single-phase
power, 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and
the nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator
applies a 3% hysteresis.
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER APPARENT — Specifies the pickup threshold for the apparent power of the source. For single-phase
power, 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and
the nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator
applies a 3% hysteresis.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-149
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME — Use to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME — Use to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is of
particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is
asserted).
Figure 5-73: Power trigger logic
SETTINGS
PMU 1 POWER
TRIGGER FUNCTION:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Enabled = 1
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
Off = 0
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
SETTINGS
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE:
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE:
PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE:
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER APPARENT:
SETTING
RUN
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
ACTIVE POWER, PA
abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP
ACTIVE POWER, PB
abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP
ACTIVE POWER, PC
abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP
3P ACTIVE POWER, P
abs(P) > 3*(ACTIVE PICKUP)
REACTIVE POWER, QA
abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP
REACTIVE POWER, QB
abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP
REACTIVE POWER, QC
abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP
3P REACTIVE POWER, Q
abs(Q) > 3*(REACTIVE PICKUP)
APPARENT POWER, SA
S > APPARENT PICKUP
APPARENT POWER, SB
S > APPARENT PICKUP
APPARENT POWER, SC
3P APPARENT POWER, S
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
Off = 0
OR
SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
AND
PMU 1 PWR TRIG BLK:
to STAT bits of
the data frame
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME:
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0
tPKP
0
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
tDPO
S > APPARENT PICKUP
S > 3*(APPARENT PICKUP)
847011A1.CDR
df/dt triggering
5
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(2)  PMU 1(2)
TRIGGERING  PMU 1(2) df/dt TRIGGER
 PMU 1 df/dt
 TRIGGER

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
RAISE: 0.25 Hz/s
Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
FALL: 0.25 Hz/s
Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PMU 1 df/dt TRG BLK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
TARGET: Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
This element responds to frequency rate of change. Separate thresholds are provided for rising and dropping frequency.
The trigger responds to the rate of change of frequency (df/dt) of the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) source.
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE — Specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the raising direction
(positive df/dt). The comparator applies a 4% hysteresis.
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL — Specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the falling direction
(negative df/dt). The comparator applies a 4% hysteresis.
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME — Use to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME — Use to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is of importance
when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
5-150
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Figure 5-74: Rate of change of frequency trigger logic
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
FUNCTION:
SETTING
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
Enabled = 1
Off = 0
AND
PMU 1 df/dt TRG BLK:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SETTINGS
Off = 0
SETTING
PMU 1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE:
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME:
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL:
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME:
RUN
ROCOF, df/dt
df/dt > RAISE
OR
–df/dt > FALL
to STAT bits of
the data frame
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
tPKP
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
tDPO
847000A1.CDR
5.5.7.12 PMU recording
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(2) 
RECORDING PMU 1(2)
 PMU 1
 RECORDING

PMU 1 FUNCTION
DISABLE
Range: Enabled, Disabled

PMU 1 NO OF TIMED
RECORDS: 10
Range: 2 to 128 in steps of 1

PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE:
AUTOMATIC OVERWRITE
Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected

PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER
POSITION: 10%
Range: 1 to 50% in steps of 1
5
PMU 1 FUNCTION — This setting enables or disables the recorder for PMU 1. The rate is fixed at the reporting rate set within
the aggregator (that is, Aggregator 1).
PMU 1 NO OF TIMED RECORDS — Specifies the number of timed records that are available for a given logical PMU 1. The
length of each record is equal to the available memory divided by the content size and number of records. As the number
of records is increased, the available storage for each record is reduced. The relay supports a maximum of 128 records in
either timed or forced mode.
PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE — Specifies what happens when the recorder uses its entire available memory storage. With
“Automatic Overwrite,” the last record is erased to facilitate new recording, when triggered. Under the “Protected”
selection, the recorder stops creating new records when the entire memory is used up by the old uncleared records.
PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER POSITION — Specifies the amount of pre-trigger data as a percent of the entire record. This setting
applies only to the timed mode of recording.
5.5.7.13 Aggregator
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  PMU AGGREGATOR 1(2)
 PMU AGGREGATOR 1


PMU AGGREGATOR 1
PROTOCOL: NONE
Range: NONE, 37.118, 90-5

PMU AGGREGATOR 1:
IDCODE: 1
Range: 1 to 65534 in steps of 1

PMU AGGREGATOR 1
INCLUDE PMU1: No
Range: No, Yes
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-151
SYSTEM SETUP
NOTE
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

PMU AGGREGATOR 1
INCLUDE PMU2: No
Range: No, Yes

 37.118 AGGR 1
 CONFIGURATION
See below

 90-5 AGGR 1
 CONFIGURATION
See below
When the protocol selection is set via the software or keypad, all aggregators whose protocol is not set to None
are set to the last protocol saved (that is, IEEE C37.118 or IEC 61850-90-5) to any aggregators, as both IEEE
C37.118 and IEC 61850-90-5 simultaneous streaming is not possible.
PMU AGGREGATOR1 PROTOCOL — Selects if the IEEE C37.118 or IEC 61850-90-5 technical report is used. Because one
protocol is supported at a time in a device, this setting applies to all PMU aggregators.
PMU AGGREGATOR1 IDCODE — Numeric identifier of the Aggregator / PDC function. In an IEEE C37.118 output stream, this
identifies the ID of the aggregator, which is only used if there is more than 1 PMU mapped into an aggregator.
PMU AGGREGATOR1 PMU1 — If set to “Yes,” aggregator 1 includes the PMU1 data set in the reporting data stream.
AGGREGATOR1 does not include PMU1 data set in the report if set to “No.”
Only PMUs with same reporting rate can be assigned to the same PMU AGGREGATOR.
NOTE
5
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  PMU AGGREGATOR 1  37.118 AGGR 1
CONFIGURATION
 37.118 AGGR 1
 CONFIGURATION

PMU AGGREGATOR 1
TCP PORT: 4712
Range: 1 to 65534

PMU AGGREGATOR 1:
UDP PORT: 4713
Range: 1 to 65534

PMU AGGREGATOR 1:
PDC CONTROL: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
PMU AGGREGATOR 1 TCP PORT — Selects the TCP port number to be used by this aggregator for network reporting. All ports,
even those of unused aggregators, must be valid and unique to avoid port number collisions.
PMU AGGREGATOR 1 UDP PORT — Selects the UDP port number to be used by this aggregator for network reporting. All ports,
even those of unused aggregators, must be valid and unique to avoid port number collisions.
PMU AGGREGATOR 1 PDC CONTROL — The synchrophasor standard allows for user-defined controls originating at the PDC, to
be executed on the PMU. The control is accomplished via an extended command frame. The relay decodes the first word
of the extended field, EXTFRAME, to drive 16 dedicated FlexLogic operands. Each aggregator supports 16 FlexLogic
operands, as shown in the table. The operands are asserted for five seconds following reception of the command frame. If
the new command frame arrives within the five-second period, the FlexLogic operands are updated, and the five-second
timer restarts. This setting enables or disables the control. When enabled, all 16 operands for each aggregator are active;
when disabled, all 16 operands for each aggregator remain reset.
5-152
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Table 5-18: FlexLogic operands supported by aggregator
Operand type
Operand syntax
Operand description
ELEMENT:
Synchrophasor, phasor data,
concentrator
AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 1
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 1, as
received via the network
as above
AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 2
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 2 as
received via the network
as above
AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 3
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 3 as
received via the network

as above
AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 16
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 16, as
received via the network
as above
AGTR2 PDC CNTRL 1
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 1 as
received via the network
as above
AGTR2 PDC CNTRL 2
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 2 as
received via the network
as above
AGTR2 PDC CNTRL 3
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 3 as
received via the network

as above
AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 16
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 16, as
received via the network
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  PMU AGGREGATOR 1  90-5 AGGR 1
CONFIGURATION
 90-5 AGGR 1
 CONFIGURATION

PMU AGGREGATOR 1
NAME:
Range: 56-character ASCII text (blank by default)

PMU AGGREGATOR 1:
PORT: 1
Range: 1, 2, 3

PMU AGGREGATOR 1:
UDP PORT: 102
Range: 1 to 65534 in steps of 1

PMU AGGREGATOR 1:
NUMBER OF ASDUs: 1
Range: 1 to 4
PMU AGGREGATOR 1 NAME — A user-defined visible string of characters (max. 56) to identify the source of the stream. This
value, concatenated with the Aggregator IDCode and Aggregator Class of Service, is mapped into the IEC 61850 MSVID
filed in the output stream.
AGGREGATOR 1: PHYSICAL PORT — This setting determines the physical ports through which the synchrophasor traffic is
transmitted. The range is 1, 2, 3.
PMU AGGREGATOR 1: UDP PORT — This setting selects the UDP port number that is used by this dataset for network reporting.
Default setting values for IEEE C37.118 and IEC 6150-90-5 are provided.
PMU AGGREGATOR 1: NUMBER OF ASDUs — This setting sets the number of Application Service Data Units (ASDUs) from 1
through to 4.
Table 5-19: Number of ASDUs
Settings for Transmission
ASDU
1
ASDU at T0 (current values)
2
ASDU at T-1 (previous values) + ASDU at T0 (current values)
3
ASDU at T-2 (previous values) + ASDU at T-1 (previous values) + ASDU at T0 (current values)
4
ASDU at T-3 (previous values) + ASDU at T-2 (previous values) + ASDU at T-1 (previous values) + ASDU at T0 (current values)
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-153
5
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.5.7.14 Control blocks
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT  IEC 90 – 5 MSVCB01 CONFIGURATION
 IEC 90-5 MSVCB
 CONFIGURATION
5

MSVCB 1 SVENA:
OFF
Range: FlexLogic operand

MSVCB 1 CLIENT CTRL:
OFF
Range: FlexLogic operand

MSVCB 1 SVENA DEFLT:
OFF
Range: FlexLogic operand

MSVCB 1 CONFREV:
1
Range: 1 to 4294967295

MSVCB 1 PRIORITY:
4
Range: 0 to 7

MSVCB 1 IP CLASS:
46
Range: 0 to 252

MSVCB 1 VID:
0
Range: 0 to 4095

MSVCB 1 APPID:
0
Range: 0 to 16383

MSVCB 1 DEST. IP:
224.0.0.0
Range: 0 to 255.255.255.255

MSVCB 1 SECURITY:
0
Range: 0 to 2
MSVCB 1 SVENA — The SV Stream Control is set by either toggling an assigned FlexLogic operand or a remote client write, to
start and stop the streaming of R-SV frames. If remote client control is disabled, a negative response is provided to the
client in response to a write attempt. A FlexLogic operand (SvEna) is provided for each Aggregator that reflects the state of
the SvEna control where “1”= Enabled and “0”=Disabled. The figure shows the logic for setting the SvEna control bit.
Figure 5-75: Logic for setting SvEna control bit
MSVCB 1 CLIENT CONTRL — This setting determines if a client can write to the reserve bit. When the assigned FlexLogic
operand is a logic 1 state, remote clients can write to both the reserve bit and the SvEna bit. When the FlexLogic operand
is a logic 0 state, the remote client writes to the reserve bit, the SvEna is rejected by the UR, and a negative response with
the appropriate Service Error is returned to the client.
MSVCB 1 SVENA DEFLT — This setting sets the default state of the stream (On or Off) on power-up or restart.
5-154
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
MSVCB 1 CONFREV — The relay increments the Configuration revision every time the configuration is changed. This setting
allows the user to reset the configuration back to 1 or a value from 1 to 4294967295.
MSVCB 1 PRIORITY — A value from 0 through 7. The default value is 4.
MSVCB 1 IP CLASS — The value represents the IPv4 Differentiated Services (formerly called TypeOfService) value. The default
value is set for Expedited Forwarding (101110B (46 or 2EH). This value provides priority routing, when supported in the
routers.
MSVCB 1 VID — A range of values limited from 0 to 4095.
MSVCB 1 APPID — This setting allows the selection of a specific application ID for each sending device.
MSVCB 1 DEST. IP — This is the destination multicast IP address that is entered in Standard IPV4 address format. The valid
range for IPv4 is from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The UR does not test the address entered.
MSVCB 1 SECURITY — This setting selects the level of security and authentication used, as outlined in the following table, and
is in the form of an enumeration as per standard. The range is 0 to 2.
Shaded settings in the table are not supported in firmware 7.0.
NOTE
Table 5-20: Security
Enumeration
Authentication
Encryption
0
No
No
1
Yes
No
2
Yes
Yes
5
5.6 FlexLogic
5.6.1 FlexLogic operands
For flexibility, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed parameters. Logic upon
which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from contact input signals through elements or
combinations of elements to contact outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic through
FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs that it uses to produce analog and digital outputs. The
figure shows major subsystems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-155
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-76: UR architecture overview
CTs
VTs
DCmA
or
RTD
inputs
DSP
(A/D)
Calculate
parameters
Measuring
and
decision
elements
Analog
input
(A/D)
FlexLogic™
equations
Virtual
outputs
Digital
elements
Flags
V
Contact
inputs
Keypad
Virtual
inputs
OR
Remote
inputs
(GOOSE)
fiber
G.703
RS422
FlexLogic™
counters
Block
operation
(each
element)
Contact
outputs
Remote
outputs
(FlexLogic operands)
Display
and LEDs
Display
Control
and
monitoring
features
Analog
output (D/A)
(dcmA)
Direct
inputs
5
(Status)
(Actual values)
I
Form-A and
SCR only
Fiber
G.703
RS422
Direct
outputs
(Status)
EnerVista UR Setup and LAN communications
827022A7.cdr
The states of all digital signals used in the C60 are represented by flags (or FlexLogic operands, which are described later in
this section). A digital “1” is represented by a set flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an
element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate a contact output. The state
of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple
scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is wanted, this selection is made when programming the
element. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes,
and human operators.
If more complex logic than shown in the figure is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic. For example, to have the closed
state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the phase
time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic equation. This equation ANDs the
two control inputs to produce a virtual output that is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to be
used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or
supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the requirement for
auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes, and outputs is field-programmable through the use
of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is
available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic).
FlexLogic allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The
operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes, and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers, and latches (with
set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of operands to be assigned as inputs to
5-156
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual output.
Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a
seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0.
Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of
parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, or flag set) or 0
(=OFF, or flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least four times every power system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances, for example contact and remote inputs. These types
of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The table lists characteristics
of the different types of operands.
Table 5-21: C60 FlexLogic operand types
Operand type
State
Example of format
Characteristics
[Input Is ‘1’ (= ON) if...]
Contact Input
On
Cont Ip On
Voltage is applied presently to the input (external contact
closed)
Off
Cont Ip Off
Voltage is not applied presently to the input (external
contact open)
Contact Output
(type Form-A contact
only)
Current On
Cont Op 1 Ion
Current is flowing through the contact
Voltage On
Cont Op 1 VOn
Voltage exists across the contact
Voltage Off
Cont Op 1 VOff
Voltage does not exist across the contact
Direct Input
On
DIRECT INPUT 1 On
The direct input is presently in the ON state
Element
(Analog)
Pickup
PHASE TOC1 PKP
The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting
of an element that responds to rising values or below the
pickup setting of an element that responds to falling values
Dropout
PHASE TOC1 DPO
This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand
Operate
PHASE TOC1 OP
The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup
setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or
has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer
has not finished timing
Element
(Digital)
Block
PHASE TOC1 BLK
The output of the comparator is set to the block function
Pickup
Dig Element 1 PKP
The input operand is at logic 1
Dropout
Dig Element 1 DPO
This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand
Operate
Dig Element 1 OP
The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed
pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and
is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing
Element
(Digital Counter)
Higher than
Counter 1 HI
The number of pulses counted is above the set number
Equal to
Counter 1 EQL
The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number
Lower than
Counter 1 LO
The number of pulses counted is below the set number
Fixed
On
On
Logic 1
Off
Off
Logic 0
RxGOOSE Boolean
On
RxGOOSE Boolean 1 On
The RxGOOSE Boolean is presently in the ON state
Virtual Input
On
Virt Ip 1 On
The virtual input is presently in the ON state
Virtual Output
On
Virt Op 1 On
The virtual output is presently in the set state (that is,
evaluation of the equation that produces this virtual output
results in a "1")
The following table lists alphabetically the operands available for the relay.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-157
5
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Table 5-22: C60 FlexLogic operands
Operand type
Operand syntax
Operand description
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 2 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 3 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 4 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 5 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 6 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 7 ON
Control pushbutton 1 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 2 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 3 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 4 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 5 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 6 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 7 is being pressed
DIRECT DEVICES
DIRECT DEVICE 1On

DIRECT DEVICE 16On
DIRECT DEVICE 1Off

DIRECT DEVICE 16Off
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
DIRECT INPUT/
OUTPUT CHANNEL
MONITORING
DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM
The rate of direct input messages received on channel 1 and failing the CRC
exceeded the user-specified level.
The rate of direct input messages received on channel 2 and failing the CRC
exceeded the user-specified level.
The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 1 exceeded
the user-specified level (ring configurations only).
The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 2 exceeded
the user-specified level (ring configurations only).
DIR IO CH2 CRC ALARM
DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM
DIR IO CH2 UNRET ALM
ELEMENT:
Autoreclose
(1P/3P)
5
AR ENABLED
AR DISABLED
AR RIP
AR 1-P RIP
AR 3-P/1 RIP
AR 3-P/2 RIP
AR 3-P/3 RIP
AR 3-P/4 RIP
AR LO
AR BKR1 BLK
AR BKR2 BLK
AR CLOSE BKR1
AR CLOSE BKR2
AR FORCE 3-P TRIP
AR SHOT CNT > 0
AR SHOT CNT = 1
AR SHOT CNT = 2
AR SHOT CNT = 3
AR SHOT CNT = 4
AR MODE = 1
AR MODE = 2
AR MODE = 3
AR MODE = 4
AR MODE SWITCH FAIL
AR ZONE 1 EXTENT
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ
AR RESET
ELEMENT:
AUX OV1 PKP
Auxiliary overvoltage AUX OV1 DPO
AUX OV1 OP
ELEMENT:
Auxiliary
undervoltage
5-158
Autoreclosure is enabled and ready to perform
Autoreclosure is disabled
Autoreclosure is in “reclose-in-progress” state
A single-pole reclosure is in progress
A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via dead time 1
A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via dead time 2
A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via dead time 3
A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via dead time 4
Autoreclosure is in lockout state
Reclosure of breaker 1 is blocked
Reclosure of breaker 2 is blocked
Reclose breaker 1 signal
Reclose breaker 2 signal
Force any trip to a three-phase trip
The first ‘CLOSE BKR X’ signal has been issued
Shot count is equal to 1
Shot count is equal to 2
Shot count is equal to 3
Shot count is equal to 4
Autoreclose mode equal to 1 (1 and 3 pole mode)
Autoreclose mode equal to 2 (1 pole mode)
Autoreclose mode equal to 3 (3 pole-A mode)
Autoreclose mode equal to 4 (3 pole-B mode)
Autoreclose mode switching is attempted, but failed
The zone 1 distance function must be set to the extended overreach value
The incomplete sequence timer timed out
Autoreclose has been reset either manually or by the reset timer
Auxiliary overvoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary overvoltage element has dropped out
Auxiliary overvoltage element has operated
AUX OV2 to AUX OV3
Same set of operands as shown for AUX OV1
AUX UV1 PKP
AUX UV1 DPO
AUX UV1 OP
Auxiliary undervoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary undervoltage element has dropped out
Auxiliary undervoltage element has operated
AUX UV2 to AUX UV3
Same set of operands as shown for AUX UV1
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
Operand type
Operand syntax
Operand description
ELEMENT
Breaker flashover
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP A
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP B
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP C
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP A
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP B
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP C
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO A
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO B
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO C
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO
Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has picked up
Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has picked up
Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has picked up
Breaker 1 flashover element has picked up
Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has operated
Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has operated
Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has operated
Breaker 1 flashover element has operated
Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has dropped out
Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has dropped out
Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has dropped out
Breaker 1 flashover element has dropped out
BKR 2 FLSHOVR...
Same set of operands as shown for BKR 1 FLSHOVR
ELEMENT:
Breaker arcing
BKR ARC 1 OP
BKR ARC 2 OP
Breaker arcing current 1 has operated
Breaker arcing current 2 has operated
ELEMENT
Breaker failure
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP
BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP
BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP
BKR FAIL 1 T3 OP
BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP
Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase A (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase B (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase C (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker failure 1 re-trip 3-phase
Breaker failure 1 timer 1 is operated
Breaker failure 1 timer 2 is operated
Breaker failure 1 timer 3 is operated
Breaker failure 1 trip is operated
BKR FAIL 2...
Same set of operands as shown for BKR FAIL 1
ELEMENT
Breaker restrike
BRK RESTRIKE 1 OP
BRK RESTRIKE 1 OP A
BRK RESTRIKE 1 OP B
BRK RESTRIKE 1 OP C
Breaker restrike detected in any phase of the breaker control 1 element
Breaker restrike detected in phase A of the breaker control 1 element
Breaker restrike detected in phase B of the breaker control 1 element
Breaker restrike detected in phase C of the breaker control 1 element
BKR RESTRIKE 2...
Same set of operands as shown for BKR RESTRIKE 1
ELEMENT:
Breaker control
BREAKER 1 OFF CMD
BREAKER 1 ON CMD
BREAKER 1 A BAD ST
BREAKER 1 C CLSD
BREAKER 1 C OPEN
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
BREAKER 1 OPEN
BREAKER 1 DISCREP
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
BREAKER 1 TRIP A
BREAKER 1 TRIP B
BREAKER 1 TRIP C
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN
BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN
BREAKER 1 OOS
Breaker 1 open command initiated
Breaker 1 close command initiated
Breaker 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one
position to another)
Breaker 1 phase A is closed
Breaker 1 phase A is open
Breaker 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase B intermediate status is detected (transition from one
position to another)
Breaker 1 phase B is closed
Breaker 1 phase B is open
Breaker 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase C intermediate status is detected (transition from one
position to another)
Breaker 1 phase C is closed
Breaker 1 phase C is open
Breaker 1 bad status is detected on any pole
Breaker 1 is closed
Breaker 1 is open
Breaker 1 has discrepancy
Breaker 1 trouble alarm
Breaker 1 manual close
Breaker 1 trip phase A command
Breaker 1 trip phase B command
Breaker 1 trip phase C command
At least one pole of breaker 1 is open
Only one pole of breaker 1 is open
Breaker 1 is out of service
BREAKER 2...
Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1
BREAKER 1 A INTERM
BREAKER 1 A CLSD
BREAKER 1 A OPEN
BREAKER 1 B BAD ST
BREAKER 1 B INTERM
BREAKER 1 B CLSD
BREAKER 1 B OPEN
BREAKER 1 C BAD ST
BREAKER 1 C INTERM
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5
5-159
FLEXLOGIC
Operand type
Operand syntax
Operand description
ELEMENT:
Digital counters
Counter 1 HI
Counter 1 EQL
Counter 1 LO
Digital counter 1 output is ‘more than’ comparison value
Digital counter 1 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value
Digital counter 1 output is ‘less than’ comparison value
ELEMENT:
Digital elements
ELEMENT:
Sensitive directional
power
Counter 2 to Counter 8
Same set of operands as shown for Counter 1
Dig Element 1 PKP
Dig Element 1 OP
Dig Element 1 DPO
Digital Element 1 is picked up
Digital Element 1 is operated
Digital Element 1 is dropped out
Dig Element 2 to Dig Element 48
Same set of operands as shown for Dig Element 1
DIR POWER 1 STG1 PKP
DIR POWER 1 STG2 PKP
DIR POWER 1 STG1 DPO
DIR POWER 1 STG2 DPO
DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP
DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP
DIR POWER 1 PKP
DIR POWER 1 DPO
DIR POWER 1 OP
Stage 1 of the directional power element 1 has picked up
Stage 2 of the directional power element 1 has picked up
Stage 1 of the directional power element 1 has dropped out
Stage 2 of the directional power element 1 has dropped out
Stage 1 of the directional power element 1 has operated
Stage 2 of the directional power element 1 has operated
The directional power element has picked up
The directional power element has dropped out
The directional power element has operated
DIR POWER 2
Same set of operands as DIR POWER 1
FxE 1 PKP
FxE 1 OP
FxE 1 DPO
FlexElement 1 has picked up
FlexElement 1 has operated
FlexElement 1 has dropped out
FxE 2 to FxE 8
Same set of operands as shown for FxE 1
ELEMENT:
Ground
instantaneous
overcurrent
GROUND IOC1 PKP
GROUND IOC1 OP
GROUND IOC1 DPO
Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
GROUND IOC2
Same set of operands as shown for GROUND IOC 1
ELEMENT:
Ground time
overcurrent
GROUND TOC1 PKP
GROUND TOC1 OP
GROUND TOC1 DPO
Ground time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground time overcurrent 1 has operated
Ground time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
GROUND TOC2
Same set of operands as shown for GROUND TOC1
LATCH 1 ON
LATCH 1 OFF
Non-volatile latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1)
Non-volatile latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0)
ELEMENT:
FlexElements
5
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
ELEMENT
Non-volatile latches
LATCH 2 to LATCH 16
Same set of operands as shown for LATCH 1
ELEMENT:
Neutral
instantaneous
overcurrent
NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
NEUTRAL IOC2
Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL IOC1
ELEMENT:
Neutral overvoltage
NEUTRAL OV1 PKP
NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
NEUTRAL OV1 OP
Neutral overvoltage element 1 has picked up
Neutral overvoltage element 1 has dropped out
Neutral overvoltage element 1 has operated
ELEMENT:
Neutral time
overcurrent
NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO
Neutral time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Neutral time overcurrent 1 has operated
Neutral time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
NEUTRAL TOC2
Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1
5-160
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
Operand type
Operand syntax
Operand description
ELEMENT:
Open pole detector
OPEN POLE OP A
OPEN POLE OP B
OPEN POLE OP C
OPEN POLE BKR A OP
Open pole condition is detected in phase A
Open pole condition is detected in phase B
Open pole condition is detected in phase C
Based on the breaker(s) auxiliary contacts, an open pole condition is detected
on phase A
Based on the breaker(s) auxiliary contacts, an open pole condition is detected
on phase B
Based on the breaker(s) auxiliary contacts, an open pole condition is detected
on phase C
Blocking signal for neutral, ground, and negative-sequence overcurrent
element is established
Blocking signal for the AB phase distance elements is established
Blocking signal for the BC phase distance elements is established
Blocking signal for the CA phase distance elements is established
Remote open pole condition detected in phase A
Remote open pole condition detected in phase B
Remote open pole condition detected in phase C
Open pole detector is operated
Open pole undercurrent condition is detected in phase A
Open pole undercurrent condition is detected in phase B
Open pole undercurrent condition is detected in phase C
OPEN POLE BKR B OP
OPEN POLE BKR C OP
OPEN POLE BLK N
OPEN POLE BLK AB
OPEN POLE BLK BC
OPEN POLE BLK CA
OPEN POLE REM OP A
OPEN POLE REM OP B
OPEN POLE REM OP C
OPEN POLE OP
OPEN POLE I< A
OPEN POLE I< B
OPEN POLE I< C
PHASE IOC1 PKP
ELEMENT:
Phase instantaneous PHASE IOC1 OP
PHASE IOC1 DPO
overcurrent
PHASE IOC1 PKP A
PHASE IOC1 PKP B
PHASE IOC1 PKP C
PHASE IOC1 OP A
PHASE IOC1 OP B
PHASE IOC1 OP C
PHASE IOC1 DPO A
PHASE IOC1 DPO B
PHASE IOC1 DPO C
ELEMENT:
Phase overvoltage
ELEMENT:
Phase time
overcurrent
At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
All phases of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 have dropped out
Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC2 and higher
Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1
PHASE OV1 PKP
PHASE OV1 OP
PHASE OV1 DPO
PHASE OV1 PKP A
PHASE OV1 PKP B
PHASE OV1 PKP C
PHASE OV1 OP A
PHASE OV1 OP B
PHASE OV1 OP C
PHASE OV1 DPO A
PHASE OV1 DPO B
PHASE OV1 DPO C
At least one phase of overvoltage 1 has picked up
At least one phase of overvoltage 1 has operated
All phases of overvoltage 1 have dropped out
Phase A of overvoltage 1 has picked up
Phase B of overvoltage 1 has picked up
Phase C of overvoltage 1 has picked up
Phase A of overvoltage 1 has operated
Phase B of overvoltage 1 has operated
Phase C of overvoltage 1 has operated
Phase A of overvoltage 1 has dropped out
Phase B of overvoltage 1 has dropped out
Phase C of overvoltage 1 has dropped out
PHASE OV2 to OV3
Same set of operands as shown for PHASE OV1
PHASE TOC1 PKP
PHASE TOC1 OP
PHASE TOC1 DPO
PHASE TOC1 PKP A
PHASE TOC1 PKP B
PHASE TOC1 PKP C
PHASE TOC1 OP A
PHASE TOC1 OP B
PHASE TOC1 OP C
PHASE TOC1 DPO A
PHASE TOC1 DPO B
PHASE TOC1 DPO C
At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
All phases of phase time overcurrent 1 have dropped out
Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC2 to TOC6
Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5
5-161
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Operand type
Operand syntax
Operand description
ELEMENT:
Phase undervoltage
PHASE UV1 PKP
PHASE UV1 OP
PHASE UV1 DPO
PHASE UV1 PKP A
PHASE UV1 PKP B
PHASE UV1 PKP C
PHASE UV1 OP A
PHASE UV1 OP B
PHASE UV1 OP C
PHASE UV1 DPO A
PHASE UV1 DPO B
PHASE UV1 DPO C
At least one phase of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
At least one phase of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
All phases of phase undervoltage 1 have dropped out
Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
PHASE UV2 to UV3
Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1
PMU Agg 1 SvEng On
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
SvEng data item in associated control block is on
Overcurrent trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated
Abnormal frequency trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated
Overpower trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated
Rate of change of frequency trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has
operated
Abnormal voltage trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated
Phasor measurement unit 1 triggered; no events or targets are generated by
this operand
ELEMENT:
Synchrophasor
Phasor Measurement
Unit (PMU)
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU 2
PMU ONE-SHOT EXPIRED
ELEMENT:
Synchrophasor oneshot
PMU ONE-SHOT OP
5
PMU ONE-SHOT PENDING
ELEMENT:
Selector switch
SELECTOR 1 POS Y
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
ELEMENT:
Setting group
Selector switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands)
First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control
input but not acknowledged
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but
not acknowledged
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged
Position of selector switch 1 is undetermined or restored from memory when
the relay powers up and synchronizes to the three-bit input
SELECTOR 2
Same set of operands as shown for SELECTOR 1
SETTING GROUP ACT 1
SETTING GROUP ACT 2
SETTING GROUP ACT 3
SETTING GROUP ACT 4
SETTING GROUP ACT 5
SETTING GROUP ACT 6
Setting group 1 is active
Setting group 2 is active
Setting group 3 is active
Setting group 4 is active
Setting group 5 is active
Setting group 6 is active
SH STAT GND STG1 PKP
ELEMENT:
Sub-harmonic stator SH STAT GND STG1 DPO
ground fault detector SH STAT GND STG1 OP
SH STAT GND STG2 PKP
SH STAT GND STG2 DPO
SH STAT GND STG2 OP
SH STAT GND OC PKP
SH STAT GND OC DPO
SH STAT GND OC OP
SH STAT GND TRB PKP
SH STAT GND TRB DPO
SH STAT GND TRB OP
5-162
Same set of operands as shown for PMU 1
Indicates the one-shot operation has been executed, and the present time is
at least 30 seconds past the scheduled one-shot time
Indicates the one-shot operation and remains asserted for 30 seconds
afterwards
Indicates the one-shot operation is pending; that is, the present time is before
the scheduled one-shot time
Stage 1 of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection has picked up
Stage 1 of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection has dropped out
Stage 1 of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection has operated
Stage 2 of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection has picked up
Stage 2 of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection has dropped out
Stage 2 of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection has operated
Ground over current element of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection
has picked up
Ground over current element of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection
has dropped out
Ground over current element of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection
has operated
Sub-harmonic stator ground module trouble has picked up
Sub-harmonic stator ground module trouble has dropped out
Sub-harmonic stator ground module trouble has operated
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Operand type
FLEXLOGIC
Operand syntax
ELEMENT:
SRC1 50DD OP
Disturbance detector SRC2 50DD OP
SRC3 50DD OP
SRC4 50DD OP
ELEMENT:
VTFF (Voltage
transformer fuse
failure)
ELEMENT:
Disconnect switch
Source 1 disturbance detector has operated
Source 2 disturbance detector has operated
Source 3 disturbance detector has operated
Source 4 disturbance detector has operated
SRC1 VT FF OP
SRC1 VT FF DPO
SRC1 VT FF VOL LOSS
Source 1 VT fuse failure detector has operated
Source 1 VT fuse failure detector has dropped out
Source 1 has lost voltage signals (V2 below 10% and V1 below 5% of nominal)
SRC1 VT NEU WIRE OPEN
Source 1 VT neutral wire open detected. When the VT is connected in Delta,
do not enable this function because there is no neutral wire for Delta
connected VT.
SRC2 VT FF to SRC4 VT FF
Same set of operands as shown for SRC1 VT FF
SWITCH 1 OFF CMD
SWITCH 1 ON CMD
SWITCH 1 CLOSED
SWITCH 1 OPEN
SWITCH 1 DISCREP
SWITCH 1 TROUBLE
SWITCH 1 A CLSD
SWITCH 1 A OPEN
SWITCH 1 A BAD ST
Disconnect switch 1 open command initiated
Disconnect switch 1 close command initiated
Disconnect switch 1 is closed
Disconnect switch 1 is open
Disconnect switch 1 has discrepancy
Disconnect switch 1 trouble alarm
Disconnect switch 1 phase A is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase A is open
Disconnect switch 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between
the 52/a and 52/b contacts)
Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from
one position to another)
Disconnect switch 1 phase B is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase B is open
Disconnect switch 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between
the 52/a and 52/b contacts)
Disconnect switch 1 phase B intermediate status is detected (transition from
one position to another)
Disconnect switch 1 phase C is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase C is open
Disconnect switch 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between
the 52/a and 52/b contacts)
Disconnect switch 1 phase C intermediate status is detected (transition from
one position to another)
Disconnect switch 1 bad status is detected on any pole
SWITCH 1 A INTERM
SWITCH 1 B CLSD
SWITCH 1 B OPEN
SWITCH 1 B BAD ST
SWITCH 1 B INTERM
SWITCH 1 C CLSD
SWITCH 1 C OPEN
SWITCH 1 C BAD ST
SWITCH 1 C INTERM
SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS
ELEMENT:
Synchrocheck
Operand description
SWITCH 2...
Same set of operands as shown for SWITCH 1
SYNC 1 DEAD S OP
SYNC 1 DEAD S DPO
SYNC 1 SYNC OP
SYNC 1 SYNC DPO
SYNC 1 CLS OP
SYNC 1 CLS DPO
SYNC 1 V1 ABOVE MIN
SYNC 1 V1 BELOW MAX
SYNC 1 V2 ABOVE MIN
SYNC 1 V2 BELOW MAX
Synchrocheck 1 dead source has operated
Synchrocheck 1 dead source has dropped out
Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has operated
Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has dropped out
Synchrocheck 1 close has operated
Synchrocheck 1 close has dropped out
Synchrocheck 1 V1 is above the minimum live voltage
Synchrocheck 1 V1 is below the maximum dead voltage
Synchrocheck 1 V2 is above the minimum live voltage
Synchrocheck 1 V2 is below the maximum dead voltage
SYNC 2
Same set of operands as shown for SYNC 1
ELEMENT:
Teleprotection
channel tests
TELEPRO CH1 FAIL
TELEPRO CH2 FAIL
TELEPRO CH1 ID FAIL
TELEPRO CH2 ID FAIL
TELEPRO CH1 CRC FAIL
TELEPRO CH2 CRC FAIL
TELEPRO CH1 PKT LOST
TELEPRO CH2 PKT LOST
Channel 1 failed
Channel 2 failed
The ID check for a peer relay on channel 1 has failed
The ID check for a peer relay on channel 2 has failed
CRC detected packet corruption on channel 1
CRC detected packet corruption on channel 2
CRC detected lost packet on channel 1
CRC detected lost packet on channel 2
ELEMENT:
Teleprotection
inputs/outputs
TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On

TELEPRO INPUT 1-16 On
TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On

TELEPRO INPUT 2-16 On
Flag is set, Logic =1

Flag is set, Logic =1
Flag is set, Logic =1

Flag is set, Logic =1
ELEMENT:
Thermal overload
protection
THERMAL PROT 1 PKP
THERMAL PROT 1 OP
Thermal overload protection 1 picked up
Thermal overload protection 1 operated
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-163
5
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Operand type
Operand syntax
Operand description
ELEMENT:
Trip bus
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
TRIP BUS 1 OP
Asserted when the trip bus 1 element picks up
Asserted when the trip bus 1 element operates
TRIP BUS 2...
Same set of operands as shown for TRIP BUS 1
FIXED OPERANDS
Off
Logic = 0. Does nothing and can be used as a delimiter in an equation list;
used as ‘Disable’ by other features.
On
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact inputs
5
Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
Cont Ip 1
Cont Ip 2

Cont Ip 1
Cont Ip 2

On
On
Off
Off
IOn
IOn
(does not appear unless ordered)
(does not appear unless ordered)

(does not appear unless ordered)
(does not appear unless ordered)

(does not appear unless ordered)
(does not appear unless ordered)

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact outputs,
current
(from detector on
form-A output only)
Cont Op 1
Cont Op 2

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact outputs,
voltage
(from detector on
form-A output only)
Cont Op 1 VOn
Cont Op 2 VOn

(does not appear unless ordered)
(does not appear unless ordered)

Cont Op 1
Cont Op 2

(does not appear unless ordered)
(does not appear unless ordered)

VOff
VOff
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Direct inputs
DIRECT INPUT 1 On

DIRECT INPUT 32 On
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
RxGOOSE DPS
RxG DPS 1 BAD
RxG DPS 1 INTERM
Asserted while the RxGOOSE double-point status input is in the bad state
Asserted while the RxGOOSE double-point status input is in the intermediate
state
Asserted while the RxGOOSE double-point status input is off
Asserted while the RxGOOSE double-point status input is on
RxG DPS 1 OFF
RxG DPS 1 ON
RxG DPS 2...
Same set of operands as per RxG DPS 1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
RxGOOSE Booleans
RxG Bool 1 On
RxG Bool 2 On
RxG Bool 3 On

RxG Bool 32 On
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Virtual inputs
Virt Ip 1
Virt Ip 2
Virt Ip 3

Virt Ip 64
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Virtual outputs
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Op 3 On

Virt Op 96 On
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
LED INDICATORS:
Fixed front panel
LEDs
LED IN SERVICE
LED TROUBLE
LED TEST MODE
LED TRIP
LED ALARM
LED PICKUP
LED VOLTAGE
LED CURRENT
LED FREQUENCY
LED OTHER
LED PHASE A
LED PHASE B
LED PHASE C
LED NEUTRAL/GROUND
Asserted when the front panel IN SERVICE LED is on
Asserted when the front panel TROUBLE LED is on
Asserted when the front panel TEST MODE LED is on
Asserted when the front panel TRIP LED is on
Asserted when the front panel ALARM LED is on
Asserted when the front panel PICKUP LED is on
Asserted when the front panel VOLTAGE LED is on
Asserted when the front panel CURRENT LED is on
Asserted when the front panel FREQUENCY LED is on
Asserted when the front panel OTHER LED is on
Asserted when the front panel PHASE A LED is on
Asserted when the front panel PHASE B LED is on
Asserted when the front panel PHASE C LED is on
Asserted when the front panel NEUTRAL/GROUND LED is on
5-164
On
On
On
On
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
Operand type
Operand syntax
Operand description
LED INDICATORS:
LED test
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
An LED test has been initiated and has not finished
LED USER 1
LED INDICATORS:
User-programmable
LED USER 2 to 48
LEDs
Asserted when user-programmable LED 1 is on
The operand above is available for user-programmable LEDs 2 through 48
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LOC SETG OFF
ACCESS LOC SETG ON
ACCESS LOC CMND OFF
ACCESS LOC CMND ON
ACCESS REM SETG OFF
ACCESS REM SETG ON
ACCESS REM CMND OFF
ACCESS REM CMND ON
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
Asserted when local setting access is disabled
Asserted when local setting access is enabled
Asserted when local command access is disabled
Asserted when local command access is enabled
Asserted when remote setting access is disabled
Asserted when remote setting access is enabled
Asserted when remote command access is disabled
Asserted when remote command access is enabled
Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password protected
level of the C60
RxGOOSE
RxGOOSE 1 On
RxGOOSE 2 On
RxGOOSE 3 On

RxGOOSE 16 On
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
RxGOOSE 1 Off
RxGOOSE 2 Off
RxGOOSE 3 Off

RxGOOSE 16 Off
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
RESET OP
RESET OP (COMMS)
RESET OP (OPERAND)
Reset command is operated (set by all three operands below)
Communications source of the reset command
Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu) source of
the reset command
Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command
RESETTING
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON)
Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)
Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)
Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)
The battery is not functioning. Replace as outlined in the Maintenance
chapter.
Relay is not synchronized to the international time standard
A direct device is configured but not connected
The Direct I/O settings is for a connection that is not in a ring
The configuration of modules does not match the stored order code
A FlexLogic equation is incorrect
A difference is detected between the desired and actual latch contact state
A subset of the minor self-test errors generated, see Chapter 7
Link failure detected. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
"Bad PTP Signal" self-test as described in Chapter 7
One or more GOOSE messages are not being received
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets
SNTP server is not responding
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets
Monitors ambient temperature and maximum operating temperature
The product SETUP > INSTALLATION > RELAYS SETTINGS setting is not
programmed
SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
(See Relay Self-tests
descriptions in
Chapter 7:
Commands and
Targets)
ANY MAJOR ERROR
ANY MINOR ERROR
ANY SELF-TESTS
BATTERY FAIL
TEMPERATURE
MONITOR
TEMP MONITOR
Asserted while the ambient temperature is greater than the maximum
operating temperature (80°C)
USERPROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
ANY PB ON
Pushbutton number 1 is in the “On” position
Pushbutton number 1 is in the “Off” position
Any of 12 pushbuttons is in the “On” position
PUSHBUTTON 2 to 12
Same set of operands as PUSHBUTTON 1
CLOCK UNSYNCHRONIZED
DIRECT DEVICE OFF
DIRECT RING BREAK
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN
LATCHING OUT ERROR
MAINTENANCE ALERT
FIRST ETHERNET FAIL
PROCESS BUS FAILURE
PTP FAILURE
RxGOOSE OFF
RRTD COMM FAIL
SECOND ETHERNET FAIL
THIRD ETHERNET FAIL
SNTP FAILURE
SYSTEM EXCEPTION
TEMP MONITOR
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-165
5
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Some operands can be re-named. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID (identification)
of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name or ID of any of
these operands, the assigned name appears in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in the FlexLogic
operands table.
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated in the following table, and the operators available in FlexLogic are
listed in the FlexLogic operators table.
Table 5-23: FlexLogic gate characteristics
Gates
Number of inputs
Output is ‘1’ (= ON) if...
NOT
1
input is ‘0’
OR
2 to 16
any input is ‘1’
AND
2 to 16
all inputs are ‘1’
NOR
2 to 16
all inputs are ‘0’
NAND
2 to 16
any input is ‘0’
XOR
2
only one input is ‘1’
Table 5-24: FlexLogic operators
5
Type
Syntax
Description
Editor
INSERT
Insert a parameter in an equation list
Notes
DELETE
Delete a parameter from an equation list
End
END
The first END encountered signifies the last entry in
the list of processed FlexLogic parameters
One-shot
POSITIVE ONE SHOT
One shot that responds to a positive going edge
A ‘one shot’ refers to a single input gate that
generates a pulse in response to an edge on
the input. The output from a ‘one shot’ is
True (positive) for only one pass through the
FlexLogic equation. There is a maximum of
64 ‘one shots.’
NEGATIVE ONE SHOT
One shot that responds to a negative going edge
DUAL ONE SHOT
One shot that responds to both the positive and
negative going edges
NOT
Logical NOT
Operates on the previous parameter
OR(2)

OR(16)
2 input OR gate

16 input OR gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters

Operates on the 16 previous parameters
AND(2)

AND(16)
2 input AND gate

16 input AND gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters

Operates on the 16 previous parameters
NOR(2)

NOR(16)
2 input NOR gate

16 input NOR gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters

Operates on the 16 previous parameters
NAND(2)

NAND(16)
2 input NAND gate

16 input NAND gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters

Operates on the 16 previous parameters
XOR(2)
2 input Exclusive OR gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters
LATCH (S,R)
Latch (set, reset): reset-dominant
The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is the
reset input. The parameter preceding the
reset input is the set input.
Timer
TIMER 1

TIMER 32
Timer set with FlexLogic timer 1 settings

Timer set with FlexLogic timer 32 settings
The timer is started by the preceding
parameter. The output of the timer is
TIMER #.
Assign
virtual
output
= Virt Op 1

= Virt Op 96
Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual
output 1

Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual
output 96
The virtual output is set by the preceding
parameter
Logic
gate
5-166
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
5.6.2 FlexLogic rules
When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
1.
Operands must precede the operator that uses the operands as inputs.
2.
Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as
an input to two or more operators.
3.
Assigning the output of an operator to a virtual output terminates the equation.
4.
A timer operator (for example, "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (for example, " = Virt Op 1") can be used once
only. If this rule is broken, a syntax error is declared.
5.6.3 FlexLogic evaluation
Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered.
NOTE
FlexLogic provides latches that by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the set
input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; that is, they reset on the re-application of control power.
When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting value is
entered, so that all latches are reset automatically. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic during testing, for
example, power down the unit and then back up.
5.6.4 FlexLogic example
This section provides an example of logic implementation for a typical application. The sequence of steps is important to
minimize the work to develop the relay settings. Note that the example in the following figure demonstrates the procedure,
not to solve a specific application situation.
In the example, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce virtual outputs 1 and 2, and is only a
part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic, it is important to make a note of each virtual output used; a
virtual output designation (1 to 96) can be assigned only once.
Figure 5-77: Logic example
Virtual output 1
state = On
Virtual output 2
state = On
Set
Latch
Reset
OR #1
Virtual input 1
state = On
XOR
Timer 2
Digital element 1
state = Pickup
OR #2
Timer 1
Digital element 2
state = Operated
AND
Time Delay
on dropout
Operate output
relay H1
(200 ms)
Time delay
on pickup
(800 ms)
Contact input H1c
state = Closed
1.
827025A2.CDR
Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic
operators. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once done, count the inputs
to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic limits, which is unlikely but possible. If
the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25
inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs
from these two gates to AND(2).
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-167
5
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the
operator is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a
virtual output.
For the example shown, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must therefore
be made a virtual output and assigned the next available number (that is, Virtual Output 3). The final output must also
be assigned to a virtual output as virtual output 4, which is programmed in the contact output section to operate relay
H1 (that is, contact output H1).
Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic equations with outputs of virtual output 3 and
virtual output 4, shown as follows.
Figure 5-78: Logic example with virtual outputs
Virtual output 1
state = On
Virtual output 2
state = On
Set
Latch
OR #1
Virtual input 1
state = On
Reset
Timer 2
XOR
OR #2
Digital element 1
state = Pickup
Time delay
on dropout
Virtual output 4
(200 ms)
Timer 1
Digital element 1
state = Operated
Time delay
on pickup
AND
(800 ms)
Contact input H1c
state = Closed
5
Virtual output 3
827026A2.CDR
2.
Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce virtual output 3, as this output is used as an operand in the virtual
output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that is used as an operand first, so that when these operands
are required they already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific virtual output). The logic for virtual output 3
is shown as follows with the final output assigned.
Figure 5-79: Logic for virtual output 3
Digital element 2
state= Operated
AND(2)
Virtual output 3
Contact input H1c
state = Closed
827027A2.CDR
3.
Prepare a logic diagram for virtual output 4, replacing the logic ahead of virtual output 3 with a symbol identified as
virtual output 3, shown as follows.
5-168
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
Figure 5-80: Logic for virtual output 4
Virtual output 1
state = On
Virtual output 2
state = On
Set
Latch
OR #1
Virtual input 1
state = On
Reset
Timer 2
XOR
OR #2
Digital element 1
state = Pickup
Time delay
on dropout
Virtual output 4
(200 ms)
Timer 1
Virtual output 3
state = On
Time delay
on pickup
(800 ms)
Contact input H1c
state = Closed
4.
827028A2.CDR
Program the FlexLogic equation for virtual output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic parameters. The
equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the
output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended
to list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final outputs are arbitrarily identified as parameter
99, and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic, it is suggested
that a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared shown as follows.
Figure 5-81: FlexLogic worksheet
5
01
02
03
04
05
.....
97
98
99
827029A1.VSD
5.
Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:
–
99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This
parameter is therefore "= Virt Op 3".
–
98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a
2-input AND so the parameter is “AND(2)”. Note that FlexLogic rules require that the number of inputs to most
types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND operates on the
two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.
–
97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next
parameter is “NOT”. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter
input next.
–
96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to
be set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example that the state is to be ON for a closed
contact. The operand is therefore “Cont Ip H1c On”.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-169
FLEXLOGIC
–
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital
element 2. This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".
Writing the parameters in numerical order forms the equation for virtual output 3:
[95]
[96]
[97]
[98]
[99]
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
= Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters produces the required logic by converting the set of
parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown in the figure, which is compared to the logic for
virtual output 3 diagram as a check.
Figure 5-82: FlexLogic equation for virtual output 3
95
96
97
98
99
6.
5
FlexLogic entry:
Dig Element 2 (DE2) OP
FlexLogic entry:
Cont Ip 2 On (H1c)
FlexLogic entry:
NOT
FlexLogic entry:
AND (2)
FlexLogic entry:
= Virt Op 3 (VO3)
AND
Virtual output 3
827030A2.CDR
Repeating the process described for virtual output 3, select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4.
–
99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 4, which is parameter “= Virt Op 4".
–
98: The operator preceding the output is timer 2, which is operand “TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for
the timer are established in the timer programming section.
–
97: The operator preceding timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter “OR(3)”.
–
96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand “Cont Ip H1c On”.
–
95: The center input to OR #2 is operand “TIMER 1".
–
94: The input to timer 1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
–
93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand “LATCH (S,R)”.
–
92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR,
which is parameter “OR(4)”.
–
91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
–
90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand “XOR(2)”.
–
89: The lower input to the XOR is operand “DIG ELEM 1 PKP”.
–
88: The upper input to the XOR is operand “Virt Ip 1 On".
–
87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 2 On".
–
86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 1 On".
–
85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand “Virt Op 4 On".
The equation for virtual output 4 is:
[85]
[86]
[87]
[88]
[89]
[90]
[91]
[92]
[93]
[94]
[95]
5-170
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
[96]
[97]
[98]
[99]
FLEXLOGIC
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)
TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
Now check that the selection of parameters produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a
logic diagram. The result is shown in the figure, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 4 diagram as a check.
Figure 5-83: FlexLogic equation for virtual output 4
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
7.
FlexLogic entry:
Virt Op 4 On (VO4)
FlexLogic entry:
Virt Op 1 On (VO1)
FlexLogic entry:
Virt Op 2 On (VO2)
FlexLogic entry:
Virt Ip 1 On (VI1)
FlexLogic entry:
Dig Element 1 (DE1) PKP
FlexLogic entry:
XOR (2 Input)
FlexLogic entry:
Virt Op 3 On (VO3)
FlexLogic entry:
OR (4 Input)
FlexLogic entry:
Latch (Set, Reset)
FlexLogic entry:
Virt Op 3 On (VO3)
FlexLogic entry:
Timer 1
FlexLogic entry:
Cont Ip 2 On (H1c)
FlexLogic entry:
OR (3 Input)
FlexLogic entry:
Timer 2
FlexLogic entry:
=Virt Op 4 (VO4)
Set
XOR
Latch
Reset
OR
OR
T2
Virtual output 4
T1
5
827031A2.CDR
Now write the complete FlexLogic expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the
equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that are used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases
where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this can be difficult to achieve, but in most cases does not cause
problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by
sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service.
In the following equation, virtual output 3 is used as an input to both latch 1 and timer 1 as arranged in the following
order:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
= Virt Op 3
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-171
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
END
In this expression, the virtual output 4 input to the four-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a form of
feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.
8.
Always test the logic after it is loaded into the relay, in the same way as has been used in the past. Testing can be
simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic equations. The equations are evaluated up
to the first "END" operator.
The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and
the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.
5.6.5 FlexLogic equation editor
SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
 FLEXLOGIC
 EQUATION EDITOR

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 1:
END
Range: FlexLogic operands


FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512:
END
Range: FlexLogic operands
There are 512 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default END entry settings. If a "Disabled" element
is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated state flag is never set to ‘1’. Press the +/– key when editing FlexLogic
equations to quickly scan through the major parameter types.
5
5.6.6 FlexLogic timers
SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXLOGIC TIMERS  FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)
 FLEXLOGIC
 TIMER 1

TIMER 1
TYPE: millisecond
Range: millisecond, second, minute

TIMER 1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0
Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1

TIMER 1 DROPOUT
DELAY: 0
Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
There are 32 identical FlexLogic timers available. These timers are used as operators for FlexLogic equations.
TIMER 1 TYPE — Selects the time measurement unit.
TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY — Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0."
TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY — Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0."
5.6.7 FlexElements
SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXELEMENTS  FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
 FLEXELEMENT 1

5-172

FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME:
FxE 1
Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:
Off
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter

FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:
Off
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC

FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE: SIGNED
Range: SIGNED, ABSOLUTE

FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE: LEVEL
Range: LEVEL, DELTA

FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION: OVER
Range: OVER, UNDER

FLEXELEMENT 1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001

FLEXELEMENT 1
HYSTERESIS: 3.0%
Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1

FLEXELEMENT 1 dt
UNIT: Milliseconds
Range: Milliseconds, Seconds, Minutes

FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:
20
Range: 20 to 86400 in steps of 1

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

FLEXELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Disabled, Latched

FLEXELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
5
A FlexElement is a universal comparator used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a net
difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal can be treated as a signed
number or its absolute value can be used.
The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period
of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold, as
per your choice.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-173
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-84: FlexElement logic
SETTING
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION:
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE:
Enabled = 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE:
FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION:
SETTING
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP:
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
AND
Off = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
HYSTERESIS:
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT:
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
DELAY:
RUN
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
DELAY:
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:
Actual Value
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:
Actual Value
tPKP
+
-
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FxE 1 OP
tRST
FxE 1 DPO
FxE 1 PKP
ACTUAL VALUE
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842004A4.CDR
5
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN — This setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to “Off.” For proper operation of the element, at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
does not assert its output operands.
FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN — Specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is
set to “Off.” For proper operation of the element, at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element does not
assert its output operands. This input is used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the element
respond to a differential signal, such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element does not operate
if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build the
effective operating signal.
The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to “Signed” The
element responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to “Absolute.” Sample applications for
the “Absolute” setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in
both directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal
increases of decreases.
The element responds directly to its operating signal—as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN and
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings—if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Level.” The element responds to the
rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Delta.” In this case, the
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived.
FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION — Enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The following
figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP, and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS
settings.
5-174
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
Figure 5-85: FlexElement direction, pickup, and hysteresis
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over
PICKUP
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under
PICKUP
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842705A1.CDR
In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting, the element can be programmed to provide two extra
characteristics, as shown in the following figure.
5
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-175
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-86: FlexElement input mode setting
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
5
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842706A2.CDR
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP — This setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If
set to “Over,” the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to “Under,” the
element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value.
FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS — This setting controls the element dropout. Notice that both the operating signal and the
pickup threshold can be negative, facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexElement can be
programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting is entered in
per-unit values using the following definitions of the base units.
Table 5-25: FlexElement base units
Unit
Description
BREAKER ARCING AMPS
(Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C)
BASE = 2000 kA2  cycle
DCmA
BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs
DELTA TIME
BASE = 1 µs
FREQUENCY
fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE
BASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
5-176
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
Unit
Description
POWER FACTOR
PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs
BASE = 100°C
SOURCE CURRENT
IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE ENERGY
(Positive and Negative Watthours,
Positive and Negative Varhours)
EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
SOURCE POWER
PBASE = maximum value of VBASE  IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE
VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SYNCHROCHECK
(Max Delta Volts)
VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and –IN inputs
FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS — This setting defines the pickup–dropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the
hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement Direction, Pickup, and Hysteresis diagram.
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT — Specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt . This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta.”
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt — Specifies duration of the time interval for the rate of change mode of operation. This setting is
applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta.”
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY — Specifies the pickup delay of the element.
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY — Specifies the reset delay of the element.
5.6.8 Non-volatile latches
5
SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  NON-VOLATILE LATCHES  LATCH 1(16)
 LATCH 1


LATCH 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

LATCH 1 TYPE:
Reset Dominant
Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant

LATCH 1 SET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

LATCH 1 RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

LATCH 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

LATCH 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and do not reset upon restart after the relay
is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently blocking relay functions,
such as Autorecloser, until a deliberate interface action resets the latch.
LATCH 1 TYPE — This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant.
LATCH 1 SET — If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operands 'sets' Latch 1.
LATCH 1 RESET — If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operand 'resets' Latch 1.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-177
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-87: Non-volatile latch operation table (N = 1 to 16) and logic
Latch n
type
Latch n
set
Latch n
reset
Latch n
on
Latch n
off
SETTING
SETTING
Reset
Dominant
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
LATCH 1 FUNCTION:
LATCH 1 TYPE:
OFF
OFF
Previous
State
Previous
State
Enabled=1
RUN
ON
ON
OFF
ON
SETTING
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
LATCH 1 SET:
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Off=0
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Previous
State
Previous
State
LATCH 1 RESET:
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Off=0
Set
Dominant
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SET
LATCH 1 ON
LATCH 1 OFF
SETTING
RESET
842005A3.CDR
5.7 Grouped elements
5.7.1 Overview
5
Each protection element can be assigned up to six sets of settings with designations 1 to 6. The performance of these
elements is defined by the active setting group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the user to conveniently
change protection settings for different operating situations (for example, altered power system configuration, season of
the year, and so on). The active setting group can be preset or selected in the SETTING GROUPS menu (see the Control
Elements section later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chapter.
5.7.2 Setting group 1
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)
 SETTING GROUP 1


 PHASE CURRENT

See page 5-179

 NEUTRAL CURRENT

See page 5-187

 GROUND CURRENT

See page 5-190

 BREAKER FAILURE

See page 5-193

 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

See page 5-203

 SUPERVISING
 ELEMENTS
See page 5-209

 POWER

See page 5-211
Each of the six setting group menus is identical. Setting group 1 (the default active group) is active automatically when no
other group is active.
5-178
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.7.3 Phase current
5.7.3.1 Menu
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  PHASE CURRENT
 PHASE CURRENT


 PHASE TOC1

See page 5-185

 PHASE TOC2


 PHASE TOC3


 PHASE TOC4


 PHASE TOC5

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed

 PHASE TOC6

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed

 PHASE IOC1

See page 5-186

 PHASE IOC2


 PHASE IOC3


 PHASE IOC4


 PHASE IOC5

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed

 PHASE IOC6

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed

 PHASE IOC7

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed

 PHASE IOC8

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed
5
The C60 contains protection elements for phase time overcurrent (ANSI device 51P) and phase instantaneous overcurrent
(ANSI device 50P). A maximum of six phase time overcurrent and eight phase instantaneous overcurrent elements are
available, dependent on the CT/VT modules ordered with the relay. The following table has details.
CT/VT modules
Phase current elements
Slot f
Slot m
Time overcurrent
Instantaneous
overcurrent
8F/8G
8F/8G
4
4
8H/8J
6
6
8F/8G
6
6
8H/8J
6
6
8H/8J
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-179
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.7.3.2 Inverse TOC curve characteristics
The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the time overcurrent elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC, and I2t standard
curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices.
If none of these curve shapes is adequate, FlexCurves can be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics. The
definite time curve is also an option that can be appropriate if only simple protection is required.
Table 5-26: Overcurrent curve types
IEEE
IEC
GE type IAC
Other
IEEE Extremely Inverse
IEC Curve A (BS142)
IAC Extremely Inverse
I 2t
IEEE Very Inverse
IEC Curve B (BS142)
IAC Very Inverse
FlexCurves A, B, C, and D
IEEE Moderately Inverse
IEC Curve C (BS142)
IAC Inverse
Recloser Curves
IEC Short Inverse
IAC Short Inverse
Definite Time
A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with
the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional
to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1
or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.
5
Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable
indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element operates. If less than 100% energy
capacity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value,
the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: “Instantaneous” and “Timed.” The
“Instantaneous” selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy
capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The “Timed” selection can be used where the
relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays.
IEEE curves
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications for
extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae:
A
------------------------------- + B
I p
T = TDM   ------------- –1
 I pickup
, T RESET = TDM 
tr
------------------------------I 2

------------1–
 I pickup 
Eq. 5-8
where
T = operate time (in seconds)
TDM = Multiplier setting
I = input current
Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
A, B, p = constants
TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is “Timed”)
tr = characteristic constant
Table 5-27: IEEE inverse time curve constants
IEEE curve shape
A
B
p
tr
IEEE Extremely Inverse
28.2
0.1217
2.0000
29.1
IEEE Very Inverse
19.61
0.491
2.0000
21.6
IEEE Moderately Inverse
0.0515
0.1140
0.02000
4.85
5-180
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Table 5-28: IEEE curve trip times (in seconds)
Multiplier
(TDM)
Current ( I / Ipickup)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
IEEE Extremely Inverse
0.5
11.341
4.761
1.823
1.001
0.648
0.464
0.355
0.285
0.237
0.203
1.0
22.682
9.522
3.647
2.002
1.297
0.927
0.709
0.569
0.474
0.407
2.0
45.363
19.043
7.293
4.003
2.593
1.855
1.418
1.139
0.948
0.813
4.0
90.727
38.087
14.587
8.007
5.187
3.710
2.837
2.277
1.897
1.626
6.0
136.090
57.130
21.880
12.010
7.780
5.564
4.255
3.416
2.845
2.439
8.0
181.454
76.174
29.174
16.014
10.374
7.419
5.674
4.555
3.794
3.252
10.0
226.817
95.217
36.467
20.017
12.967
9.274
7.092
5.693
4.742
4.065
IEEE Very Inverse
0.5
8.090
3.514
1.471
0.899
0.654
0.526
0.450
0.401
0.368
0.345
1.0
16.179
7.028
2.942
1.798
1.308
1.051
0.900
0.802
0.736
0.689
2.0
32.358
14.055
5.885
3.597
2.616
2.103
1.799
1.605
1.472
1.378
4.0
64.716
28.111
11.769
7.193
5.232
4.205
3.598
3.209
2.945
2.756
6.0
97.074
42.166
17.654
10.790
7.849
6.308
5.397
4.814
4.417
4.134
8.0
129.432
56.221
23.538
14.387
10.465
8.410
7.196
6.418
5.889
5.513
10.0
161.790
70.277
29.423
17.983
13.081
10.513
8.995
8.023
7.361
6.891
IEEE Moderately Inverse
0.5
3.220
1.902
1.216
0.973
0.844
0.763
0.706
0.663
0.630
0.603
1.0
6.439
3.803
2.432
1.946
1.688
1.526
1.412
1.327
1.260
1.207
2.0
12.878
7.606
4.864
3.892
3.377
3.051
2.823
2.653
2.521
2.414
4.0
25.756
15.213
9.729
7.783
6.753
6.102
5.647
5.307
5.041
4.827
6.0
38.634
22.819
14.593
11.675
10.130
9.153
8.470
7.960
7.562
7.241
8.0
51.512
30.426
19.458
15.567
13.507
12.204
11.294
10.614
10.083
9.654
10.0
64.390
38.032
24.322
19.458
16.883
15.255
14.117
13.267
12.604
12.068
5
IEC curves
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These
are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:
K
----------------------------------T = TDM   I  Ipickup  E – 1
tr
----------------------------------
2
, T RESET = TDM  1 –  I  I
pickup 
Eq. 5-9
where
T = operate time (in seconds)
TDM = Multiplier setting
I = input current
Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
K, E = constants
tr = characteristic constant
TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is “Timed”)
Table 5-29: IEC (BS) inverse time curve constants
IEC (BS) curve shape
K
E
tr
IEC Curve A (BS142)
0.140
0.020
9.7
IEC Curve B (BS142)
13.500
1.000
43.2
IEC Curve C (BS142)
80.000
2.000
58.2
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-181
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
IEC (BS) curve shape
K
E
tr
IEC Short Inverse
0.050
0.040
0.500
Table 5-30: IEC curve trip times (in seconds)
Multiplier
(TDM)
Current ( I / Ipickup)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
0.05
0.860
0.501
0.315
0.249
0.214
0.192
0.176
0.165
0.156
0.149
0.10
1.719
1.003
0.630
0.498
0.428
0.384
0.353
0.330
0.312
0.297
0.20
3.439
2.006
1.260
0.996
0.856
0.767
0.706
0.659
0.623
0.594
0.40
6.878
4.012
2.521
1.992
1.712
1.535
1.411
1.319
1.247
1.188
0.60
10.317
6.017
3.781
2.988
2.568
2.302
2.117
1.978
1.870
1.782
0.80
13.755
8.023
5.042
3.984
3.424
3.070
2.822
2.637
2.493
2.376
1.00
17.194
10.029
6.302
4.980
4.280
3.837
3.528
3.297
3.116
2.971
0.05
1.350
0.675
0.338
0.225
0.169
0.135
0.113
0.096
0.084
0.075
0.10
2.700
1.350
0.675
0.450
0.338
0.270
0.225
0.193
0.169
0.150
0.20
5.400
2.700
1.350
0.900
0.675
0.540
0.450
0.386
0.338
0.300
0.40
10.800
5.400
2.700
1.800
1.350
1.080
0.900
0.771
0.675
0.600
0.60
16.200
8.100
4.050
2.700
2.025
1.620
1.350
1.157
1.013
0.900
0.80
21.600
10.800
5.400
3.600
2.700
2.160
1.800
1.543
1.350
1.200
1.00
27.000
13.500
6.750
4.500
3.375
2.700
2.250
1.929
1.688
1.500
0.05
3.200
1.333
0.500
0.267
0.167
0.114
0.083
0.063
0.050
0.040
0.10
6.400
2.667
1.000
0.533
0.333
0.229
0.167
0.127
0.100
0.081
0.20
12.800
5.333
2.000
1.067
0.667
0.457
0.333
0.254
0.200
0.162
0.40
25.600
10.667
4.000
2.133
1.333
0.914
0.667
0.508
0.400
0.323
0.60
38.400
16.000
6.000
3.200
2.000
1.371
1.000
0.762
0.600
0.485
0.80
51.200
21.333
8.000
4.267
2.667
1.829
1.333
1.016
0.800
0.646
1.00
64.000
26.667
10.000
5.333
3.333
2.286
1.667
1.270
1.000
0.808
IEC Curve A
IEC Curve B
5
IEC Curve C
IEC Short Inverse
0.05
0.153
0.089
0.056
0.044
0.038
0.034
0.031
0.029
0.027
0.026
0.10
0.306
0.178
0.111
0.088
0.075
0.067
0.062
0.058
0.054
0.052
0.20
0.612
0.356
0.223
0.175
0.150
0.135
0.124
0.115
0.109
0.104
0.40
1.223
0.711
0.445
0.351
0.301
0.269
0.247
0.231
0.218
0.207
0.60
1.835
1.067
0.668
0.526
0.451
0.404
0.371
0.346
0.327
0.311
0.80
2.446
1.423
0.890
0.702
0.602
0.538
0.494
0.461
0.435
0.415
1.00
3.058
1.778
1.113
0.877
0.752
0.673
0.618
0.576
0.544
0.518
IAC curves
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
D
E
B


T = TDM   A + --------------------------- + ---------------------------------2 + ---------------------------------3



–
C
I
I
I
I




–
C



I

I

–
C



pkp
pkp
pkp
tr
, T RESET = TDM  ---------------------------2
1 –  I  I pkp 
Eq. 5-10
where
5-182
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
T = operate time (in seconds)
TDM = Multiplier setting
I = Input current
Ipkp = Pickup Current setting
A to E = constants
tr = characteristic constant
TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is “Timed”)
Table 5-31: GE type IAC inverse time curve constants
IAC Curve Shape
A
B
C
D
E
tr
IAC Extreme Inverse
0.0040
0.6379
0.6200
1.7872
0.2461
6.008
IAC Very Inverse
0.0900
0.7955
0.1000
–1.2885
7.9586
4.678
IAC Inverse
0.2078
0.8630
0.8000
–0.4180
0.1947
0.990
IAC Short Inverse
0.0428
0.0609
0.6200
–0.0010
0.0221
0.222
Table 5-32: IAC curve trip times
Multiplier
(TDM)
Current ( I / Ipickup)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
IAC Extremely Inverse
0.5
1.699
0.749
0.303
0.178
0.123
0.093
0.074
0.062
0.053
0.046
1.0
3.398
1.498
0.606
0.356
0.246
0.186
0.149
0.124
0.106
0.093
2.0
6.796
2.997
1.212
0.711
0.491
0.372
0.298
0.248
0.212
0.185
4.0
13.591
5.993
2.423
1.422
0.983
0.744
0.595
0.495
0.424
0.370
6.0
20.387
8.990
3.635
2.133
1.474
1.115
0.893
0.743
0.636
0.556
8.0
27.183
11.987
4.846
2.844
1.966
1.487
1.191
0.991
0.848
0.741
10.0
33.979
14.983
6.058
3.555
2.457
1.859
1.488
1.239
1.060
0.926
5
IAC Very Inverse
0.5
1.451
0.656
0.269
0.172
0.133
0.113
0.101
0.093
0.087
0.083
1.0
2.901
1.312
0.537
0.343
0.266
0.227
0.202
0.186
0.174
0.165
2.0
5.802
2.624
1.075
0.687
0.533
0.453
0.405
0.372
0.349
0.331
4.0
11.605
5.248
2.150
1.374
1.065
0.906
0.810
0.745
0.698
0.662
6.0
17.407
7.872
3.225
2.061
1.598
1.359
1.215
1.117
1.046
0.992
8.0
23.209
10.497
4.299
2.747
2.131
1.813
1.620
1.490
1.395
1.323
10.0
29.012
13.121
5.374
3.434
2.663
2.266
2.025
1.862
1.744
1.654
0.5
0.578
0.375
0.266
0.221
0.196
0.180
0.168
0.160
0.154
0.148
1.0
1.155
0.749
0.532
0.443
0.392
0.360
0.337
0.320
0.307
0.297
2.0
2.310
1.499
1.064
0.885
0.784
0.719
0.674
0.640
0.614
0.594
4.0
4.621
2.997
2.128
1.770
1.569
1.439
1.348
1.280
1.229
1.188
6.0
6.931
4.496
3.192
2.656
2.353
2.158
2.022
1.921
1.843
1.781
8.0
9.242
5.995
4.256
3.541
3.138
2.878
2.695
2.561
2.457
2.375
10.0
11.552
7.494
5.320
4.426
3.922
3.597
3.369
3.201
3.072
2.969
IAC Inverse
IAC Short Inverse
0.5
0.072
0.047
0.035
0.031
0.028
0.027
0.026
0.026
0.025
0.025
1.0
0.143
0.095
0.070
0.061
0.057
0.054
0.052
0.051
0.050
0.049
2.0
0.286
0.190
0.140
0.123
0.114
0.108
0.105
0.102
0.100
0.099
4.0
0.573
0.379
0.279
0.245
0.228
0.217
0.210
0.204
0.200
0.197
6.0
0.859
0.569
0.419
0.368
0.341
0.325
0.314
0.307
0.301
0.296
8.0
1.145
0.759
0.559
0.490
0.455
0.434
0.419
0.409
0.401
0.394
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-183
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Multiplier
(TDM)
Current ( I / Ipickup)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
1.431
0.948
0.699
0.613
0.569
0.542
0.524
0.511
0.501
0.493
I2t curves
The curves for the I2t are derived from the formulae:
100
100
----------------------------------------------I  2 , T RESET = TDM   I  –2
T = TDM   ------------------------- I pickup 
 I pickup 
Eq. 5-11
where
T = Operate Time (in seconds)
TDM = Multiplier Setting
I = Input Current
Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Table 5-33: I2t curve trip times
5
Multiplier
(TDM)
Current ( I / Ipickup)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
0.01
0.44
0.25
0.11
0.06
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.10
4.44
2.50
1.11
0.63
0.40
0.28
0.20
0.16
0.12
0.10
1.00
44.44
25.00
11.11
6.25
4.00
2.78
2.04
1.56
1.23
1.00
10.00
444.44
250.00
111.11
62.50
40.00
27.78
20.41
15.63
12.35
10.00
100.00
4444.4
2500.0
1111.1
625.00
400.00
277.78
204.08
156.25
123.46
100.00
600.00
26666.7
15000.0
6666.7
3750.0
2400.0
1666.7
1224.5
937.50
740.74
600.00
FlexCurves
The custom FlexCurves are described in detail in the FlexCurves section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the
FlexCurves are derived from the formulae:
I
T = TDM  FlexCurve Time at  --------------
 I pickup
I
when  --------------  1.00
 I pickup
I
when  --------------  0.98
I pickup
I
T RESET = TDM  FlexCurve Time at  --------------
I pickup
Eq. 5-12
Eq. 5-13
where
T = Operate Time (in seconds)
TDM = Multiplier setting
I = Input Current
Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Definite time curve
The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base
definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from
instantaneous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms.
5-184
T = TDM in seconds, when I > I pickup
Eq. 5-14
T RESET = TDM in seconds
Eq. 5-15
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
where
T = Operate Time (in seconds)
TDM = Multiplier setting
I = Input Current
Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Recloser curves
The C60 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves. See the FlexCurve section in this
chapter for details.
5.7.3.3 Phase time overcurrent (ANSI 51P, IEC PTOC)
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  PHASE CURRENT  PHASE TOC1(6)
 PHASE TOC 1


PHASE TOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE TOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

PHASE TOC1
INPUT: Phasor
Range: Phasor, RMS

PHASE TOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

PHASE TOC1
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: see Overcurrent Curve Types table

PHASE TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01

PHASE TOC1
RESET: Instantaneous
Range: Instantaneous, Timed

PHASE TOC1 VOLTAGE
RESTRAINT: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE TOC1 BLOCK A:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PHASE TOC1 BLOCK C:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PHASE TOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

PHASE TOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
5
The phase time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current
or be used as a simple definite time element. The phase current input quantities can be programmed as fundamental
phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (see the Inverse TOC Curve Characteristics
section earlier for details on curve setup, trip times, and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time
accumulator resets according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to
“Instantaneous” and the element is blocked, the time accumulator is cleared immediately.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-185
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting can be dynamically reduced by a voltage restraint feature (when enabled). This is
accomplished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic
curve (see the figure below); the pickup level is calculated as ‘Mvr’ times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting. If the voltage
restraint feature is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the setting value.
Multiplier for Pickup Current
Figure 5-88: Phase time overcurrent voltage restraint characteristic
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Phase-Phase Voltage ÷ VT Nominal Phase-phase Voltage
818784A4.CDR
Figure 5-89: Phase time overcurrent 1 logic
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
5
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-A :
Off=0
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-B:
Off=0
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
INPUT:
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-C:
PHASE TOC1
PICKUP:
Off=0
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
CURVE:
PHASE TOC1
SOURCE:
PHASE TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
IA
PHASE TOC1
RESET:
IB
IC
AND
Seq=ABC Seq=ACB
RUN
VAB
VAC
Set
Calculate Multiplier
RUN
VBC
VBA
VCA
VCB
Set
Calculate Multiplier
RUN
Set
Calculate Multiplier
RUN
MULTIPLY INPUTS
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase A
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase B
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase C
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE TOC1 A PKP
IA PICKUP
PHASE TOC1 A DPO
t
AND
RUN
PHASE TOC1 A OP
PHASE TOC1 B PKP
IB PICKUP
PHASE TOC1 B DPO
t
AND
RUN
IC
PHASE TOC1 B OP
PHASE TOC1 C PKP
PICKUP
PHASE TOC1 C DPO
t
PHASE TOC1 C OP
SETTING
OR
PHASE TOC1 PKP
PHASE TOC1 VOLT
RESTRAINT:
OR
PHASE TOC1 OP
Enabled
AND
PHASE TOC1 DPO
827072A5.CDR
5.7.3.4 Phase instantaneous overcurrent (ANSI 50P, IEC PIOC)
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  PHASE CURRENT  PHASE IOC 1(8)
 PHASE IOC 1

5-186

PHASE IOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS

PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

PHASE IOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

PHASE IOC1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PHASE IOC1 RESET
DELAY: 0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PHASE IOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

PHASE IOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

The phase instantaneous overcurrent element can be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
definite time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude. For timing curves, see the publication
Instantaneous Overcurrent (IOC) Element Response to Saturated Waveforms in UR Series Relays (GET-8400A).
Figure 5-90: Phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 logic
SETTING
Function
Pickup
1 = Enabled
AND
Reset Delay
TPKP
RUN
IA > Pickup
AND
SETTING
Source
= IB
= IC
AND
PHASE IOC1 B PKP
PHASE IOC1 B DPO
PHASE IOC1 C PKP
TRST
TPKP
RUN
IB > Pickup
= IA
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PHASE IOC1 A PKP
PHASE IOC1 A DPO
SETTINGS
Pickup Delay
SETTING
PHASE IOC1 C DPO
TRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PHASE IOC1 A OP
PHASE IOC1 B OP
TPKP
RUN
IC > Pickup
TRST
PHASE IOC1 C OP
SETTINGS
Block A
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE IOC1 PKP
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE IOC1 OP
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE IOC1 DPO
= Off
Block B
= Off
Block C
= Off
827033A8.CDR
5.7.4 Neutral current
5.7.4.1 Menu
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  NEUTRAL CURRENT
 NEUTRAL CURRENT


 NEUTRAL TOC1


 NEUTRAL TOC2


 NEUTRAL TOC3

C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
See below
5-187
5
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

 NEUTRAL TOC4


 NEUTRAL TOC5

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed

 NEUTRAL TOC6

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed

 NEUTRAL IOC1

See page 5-189

 NEUTRAL IOC2


 NEUTRAL IOC3


 NEUTRAL IOC4


 NEUTRAL IOC5

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed

 NEUTRAL IOC6

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed

 NEUTRAL IOC7

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed

 NEUTRAL IOC8

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed
5
The C60 contains protection elements for neutral time overcurrent (ANSI device 51N) and neutral instantaneous
overcurrent (ANSI device 50N). A maximum of six neutral time overcurrent elements and eight neutral instantaneous
overcurrent elements are available, dependent on the CT/VT modules ordered with the relay. See the following table for
details.
CT/VT modules
Slot F
8F/8G
8H/8J
Neutral current elements
Slot M
Time overcurrent
Instantaneous
overcurrent
8F/8G
4
4
8H/8J
6
6
8F/8G
6
6
8H/8J
6
8
5.7.4.2 Neutral time overcurrent (ANSI 51N, IEC PTOC)
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  NEUTRAL CURRENT  NEUTRAL TOC1(6)
 NEUTRAL TOC1

5-188

NEUTRAL TOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

NEUTRAL TOC1
INPUT: Phasor
Range: Phasor, RMS

NEUTRAL TOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

NEUTRAL TOC1
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: see Overcurrent Curve Types table
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS

NEUTRAL TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01

NEUTRAL TOC1
RESET: Instantaneous
Range: Instantaneous, Timed

NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

NEUTRAL TOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

NEUTRAL TOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The neutral time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current
or be used as a simple definite time element. The neutral current input value is a quantity calculated as 3Io from the phase
currents and can be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the
application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (see the Inverse TOC Curve Characteristics
section for details on curve setup, trip times, and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator
resets according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and
the element is blocked, the time accumulator is cleared immediately.
Figure 5-91: Neutral time overcurrent 1 logic
SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
SOURCE:
IN
AND
SETTINGS
NEUTRAL TOC1
INPUT:
NEUTRAL TOC1
PICKUP:
NEUTRAL TOC1
CURVE:
NEUTRAL TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
NEUTRAL TOC 1
RESET:
RUN
IN PICKUP
5
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
t
I
SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0
827034A4.VSD
5.7.4.3 Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (ANSI 50N, IEC PIOC)
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  NEUTRAL CURRENT  NEUTRAL IOC1(8)
 NEUTRAL IOC1


NEUTRAL IOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEUTRAL IOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

NEUTRAL IOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET
DELAY: 0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-189
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

NEUTRAL IOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

NEUTRAL IOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The neutral instantaneous overcurrent element can be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay or as a
definite time function. The element essentially responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental frequency
phasor calculated from the phase currents. A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance. A small portion
(6.25%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when
forming the operating quantity of the element as follows:
I op = 3   I_0 – K  I_1  where K = 1  16
Eq. 5-16
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents
resulting from:
•
System unbalances under heavy load conditions
•
Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults
•
Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of
pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:
I op = 0.9375  I injected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: I op = 3  I injected ).
Figure 5-92: Neutral IOC1 logic
SETTING
5
SETTINGS
NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION:
SETTING
Enabled=1
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP:
SETTING
RUN
3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP
AND
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:
NEUTRAL IOC1
PICKUP DELAY :
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEUTRAL IOC1
RESET DELAY :
NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO
tPKP
tRST
NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
Off=0
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 SOURCE:
I_0
827035A5.CDR
5.7.5 Ground current
5.7.5.1 Menu
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  GROUND CURRENT
 GROUND CURRENT

5-190

 GROUND TOC1


 GROUND TOC2


 GROUND TOC3


 GROUND TOC4


 GROUND TOC5

See below
Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS

 GROUND TOC6

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed

 GROUND IOC1

See page 5-192

 GROUND IOC2


 GROUND IOC3


 GROUND IOC4


 GROUND IOC5

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed

 GROUND IOC6

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed

 GROUND IOC7

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed

 GROUND IOC8

Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
module installed
The C60 contains protection elements for ground time overcurrent (ANSI device 51G) and ground instantaneous
overcurrent (ANSI device 50G). A maximum of six ground time overcurrent and eight ground instantaneous overcurrent
elements are available, dependent on the CT/VT modules ordered with the relay. The following table has details.
CT/VT modules
Slot F
8F/8G
8H/8J
5
Ground current elements
Slot M
Time overcurrent
Instantaneous
overcurrent
8F/8G
4
4
8H/8J
6
6
8F/8G
6
6
8H/8J
6
8
5.7.5.2 Ground time overcurrent (ANSI 51G, IEC PTOC)
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  GROUND CURRENT  GROUND TOC1(6)
 GROUND TOC1


GROUND TOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

GROUND TOC1
INPUT: Phasor
Range: Phasor, RMS

GROUND TOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

GROUND TOC1
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: see the Overcurrent Curve Types table

GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01

GROUND TOC1
RESET: Instantaneous
Range: Instantaneous, Timed

GROUND TOC1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-191
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

GROUND TOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

GROUND TOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
This element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple
definite time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the
fundamental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous”
(see the Inverse TOC Curve Characteristics section for details). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator resets
according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and the
element is blocked, the time accumulator is cleared immediately.
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The
conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.
NOTE
This channel can be also equipped with a sensitive input. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from
0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
NOTE
Figure 5-93: Ground TOC1 logic
5
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
SOURCE:
IG
AND
SETTINGS
GROUND TOC1
INPUT:
GROUND TOC1
PICKUP:
GROUND TOC1
CURVE:
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
GROUND TOC 1
RESET:
RUN
IG
PICKUP
t
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GROUND TOC1 PKP
GROUND TOC1 DPO
GROUND TOC1 OP
I
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0
827036A4.VSD
5.7.5.3 Ground instantaneous overcurrent (ANSI 50G, IEC PIOC)
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  GROUND CURRENT  GROUND IOC1(8)
 GROUND IOC1

5-192

GROUND IOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

GROUND IOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

GROUND IOC1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

GROUND IOC1 RESET
DELAY: 0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

GROUND IOC1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS

GROUND IOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

GROUND IOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The ground instantaneous overcurrent element can be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
definite time element. The ground current input is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental
phasor magnitude.
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The
conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.
NOTE
This channel can be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is
from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
NOTE
Figure 5-94: Ground IOC1 logic
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
SOURCE:
IG
AND
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
PICKUP:
RUN
IG
PICKUP
SETTINGS
GROUND IOC1 PICKUP
DELAY:
GROUND IOC1 RESET
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GROUND IOC1 PKP
GROUND IOIC DPO
GROUND IOC1 OP
5
tPKP
tRST
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0
827037A5.VSD
5.7.6 Breaker failure
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  BREAKER FAILURE  BREAKER FAILURE 1(2)
 BREAKER FAILURE 1


BF1 FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

BF1 MODE:
3-Pole
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole

BF1 SOURCE:
SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

BF1 USE AMP SUPV:
Yes
Range: Yes, No

BF1 USE SEAL-IN:
Yes
Range: Yes, No

BF1 3-POLE INITIATE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BF1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BF1 PH AMP SUPV
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-193
GROUPED ELEMENTS
5
5-194
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

BF1 N AMP SUPV
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

BF1 USE TIMER 1:
Yes
Range: Yes, No

BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

BF1 USE TIMER 2:
Yes
Range: Yes, No

BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

BF1 USE TIMER 3:
Yes
Range: Yes, No

BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

BF1 BKR POS1 A/3P:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BF1 BKR POS2 A/3P:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BF1 BREAKER TEST ON:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BF1 PH AMP HISET
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

BF1 N AMP HISET
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

BF1 PH AMP LOSET
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

BF1 N AMP LOSET
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

BF1 LOSET TIME
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

BF1 TRIP DROPOUT
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

BF1 TARGET
Self-Reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

BF1 EVENTS
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

BF1 PH A INITIATE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes

BF1 PH B INITIATE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes

BF1 PH C INITIATE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes

BF1 BKR POS1 B
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes

BF1 BKR POS1 C
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes

BF1 BKR POS2 B
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS

BF1 BKR POS2 C
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes
In general, a breaker failure scheme determines that a breaker signaled to trip has not cleared a fault within a definite
time, so further tripping action must be performed. Tripping from the breaker failure scheme should trip all breakers, both
local and remote, that can supply current to the faulted zone. Usually operation of a breaker failure element causes
clearing of a larger section of the power system than the initial trip. Because breaker failure can result in tripping a large
number of breakers and this affects system safety and stability, a very high level of security is required.
Two schemes are provided: one for three-pole tripping only (identified by the name “3BF”) and one for three pole plus
single-pole operation (identified by the name “1BF”). The philosophy used in these schemes is identical. The operation of a
breaker failure element includes three stages: initiation, determination of a breaker failure condition, and output.
Initiation stage
A FlexLogic operand representing the protection trip signal initially sent to the breaker must be selected to initiate the
scheme. The initiating signal is sealed-in if primary fault detection can reset before the breaker failure timers have finished
timing. The seal-in is supervised by current level, so it is reset when the fault is cleared. If desired, an incomplete sequence
seal-in reset can be implemented by using the initiating operand to also initiate a FlexLogic timer, set longer than any
breaker failure timer, whose output operand is selected to block the breaker failure scheme.
Schemes can be initiated either directly or with current level supervision. It is particularly important in any application to
decide if a current-supervised initiate is to be used. The use of a current-supervised initiate results in the breaker failure
element not being initiated for a breaker that has very little or no current flowing through it, which can be the case for
transformer faults. For those situations where it is required to maintain breaker fail coverage for fault levels below the BF1
PH AMP SUPV PICKUP or the BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP setting, do not use a current supervised initiate. Utilize this feature for
those situations where coordinating margins can be reduced when high speed reclosing is used. Thus, if this choice is
made, fault levels must always be above the supervision pickup levels for dependable operation of the breaker fail scheme.
This can also occur in breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations where the first breaker closes into a fault; the
protection trips and attempts to initiate breaker failure for the second breaker, which is in the process of closing, but does
not yet have current flowing through it.
When the scheme is initiated, it immediately sends a trip signal to the breaker initially signaled to trip (this feature is usually
described as re-trip). This reduces the possibility of widespread tripping that results from a declaration of a failed breaker.
Determination of a breaker failure condition
The schemes determine a breaker failure condition via three paths. Each of these paths is equipped with a time delay, after
which a failed breaker is declared and trip signals are sent to all breakers required to clear the zone. The delayed paths are
associated with breaker failure timers 1, 2, and 3, which are intended to have delays increasing with increasing timer
numbers. These delayed paths are individually enabled to allow for maximum flexibility.
Timer 1 logic (early path) is supervised by a fast-operating breaker auxiliary contact. If the breaker is still closed (as
indicated by the auxiliary contact) and fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is issued. Operation of
the breaker auxiliary switch indicates that the breaker has mechanically operated. The continued presence of current
indicates that the breaker has failed to interrupt the circuit.
Timer 2 logic (main path) is not supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact. If fault current is detected after the delay
interval, an output is issued. This path is intended to detect a breaker that opens mechanically but fails to interrupt fault
current; the logic therefore does not use a breaker auxiliary contact.
The timer 1 and 2 paths provide two levels of current supervision, high-set and low-set, that allow the supervision level to
change from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faulted circuit to a lower level after
resistor insertion. The high-set detector is enabled after timeout of timer 1 or 2, along with a timer that enables the low-set
detector after its delay interval. The delay interval between high-set and low-set is the expected breaker opening time.
Both current detectors provide a fast operating time for currents at small multiples of the pickup value. The overcurrent
detectors are required to operate after the breaker failure delay interval to eliminate the need for very fast resetting
overcurrent detectors.
Timer 3 logic (slow path) is supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact and a control switch contact used to indicate that the
breaker is in or out-of-service, disabling this path when the breaker is out-of-service for maintenance. There is no current
level check in this logic as it is intended to detect low magnitude faults and it is therefore the slowest to operate.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-195
5
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Output
The outputs from the schemes are:
•
FlexLogic operands that report on the operation of portions of the scheme
•
FlexLogic operand used to re-trip the protected breaker
•
FlexLogic operands that initiate tripping required to clear the faulted zone. The trip output can be sealed-in for an
adjustable period.
•
Target message indicating a failed breaker has been declared
•
Illumination of the faceplate Trip LED (and the Phase A, B, or C LED, if applicable)
Main path sequence
Figure 5-95: Breaker failure main path sequence
ACTUAL CURRENT MAGNITUDE
FAILED INTERRUPTION
0
AMP
CALCULATED CURRENT MAGNITUDE
CORRECT INTERRUPTION
Rampdown
0
PROTECTION OPERATION
BREAKER INTERRUPTING TIME
(ASSUMED 1.5 cycles)
(ASSUMED 3 cycles)
MARGIN
(Assumed 2 Cycles)
BACKUP BREAKER OPERATING TIME
(Assumed 3 Cycles)
BREAKER FAILURE TIMER No. 2 (±1/8 cycle)
INITIATE (1/8 cycle)
BREAKER FAILURE CURRENT DETECTOR PICKUP (1/8 cycle)
BREAKER FAILURE OUTPUT RELAY PICKUP (1/4 cycle)
FAULT
OCCURS
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
827083A6.CDR
The current supervision elements reset in less than 0.7 of a power cycle for any multiple of pickup current as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 5-96: Breaker failure overcurrent supervision reset time
0.8
Margin
Breaker failure reset time (cycles)
5
cycles
1
Maximum
Average
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
fault current
MulWLple of pickup
threshold setting
120
140
836769A4.CDR
Settings
BF1 MODE — This setting is used to select the breaker failure operating mode: single or three pole.
BF1 USE AMP SUPV — If set to "Yes," the element is initiated if current flowing through the breaker is above the supervision
pickup level.
5-196
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
BF1 USE SEAL-IN — If set to "Yes," the element is sealed-in if current flowing through the breaker is above the supervision
pickup level.
BF1 3-POLE INITIATE — This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that initiates three-pole tripping of the breaker.
BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP — This setting is used to set the phase current initiation and seal-in supervision level. Generally this
setting detects the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. It can be set as low as necessary (lower than
breaker resistor current or lower than load current)—high-set and low-set current supervision guarantee correct operation.
BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP — This setting is used to set the neutral current initiate and seal-in supervision level. Generally this
setting detects the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. Neutral current supervision is used only in the
three phase scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid only for three-pole tripping schemes.
BF1 USE TIMER 1 — If set to "Yes," the early path is operational.
BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY — Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status-1 to open, from
the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit, plus a safety margin.
BF1 USE TIMER 2 — If set to "Yes," the main path is operational.
BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY — Timer 2 is set to the expected opening time of the breaker, plus a safety margin. This safety
margin was historically intended to allow for measuring and timing errors in the breaker failure scheme equipment. In
microprocessor relays this time is not significant. In C60 relays, which use a Fourier transform, the calculated current
magnitude ramps-down to zero one power frequency cycle after the current is interrupted, and this lag needs to be
included in the overall margin duration, as it occurs after current interruption. The Breaker Failure Main Path Sequence
figure that follows shows a margin of two cycles; this interval is considered the minimum appropriate for most
applications.
Note that in bulk oil circuit breakers, the interrupting time for currents less than 25% of the interrupting rating can be
significantly longer than the normal interrupting time.
BF1 USE TIMER 3 — If set to "Yes," the Slow Path is operational.
BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY — Timer 3 is set to the same interval as timer 2, plus an increased safety margin. Because this
path is intended to operate only for low level faults, the delay can be in the order of 300 to 500 ms.
BF1 BKR POS1 A/3P — This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the protected breaker early-type auxiliary
switch contact (52/a). When using the single-pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected breaker
early-type auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This is normally a non-multiplied form-A contact. The contact can even be
adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time.
BF1 BKR POS2 A/3P — This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the breaker normal-type auxiliary switch
contact (52/a). When using the single-pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected breaker auxiliary
switch contact on pole A. This can be a multiplied contact.
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON — This setting is used to select the FlexLogic operand that represents the breaker in-service/out-of-
service switch set to the out-of-service position.
BF1 PH AMP HISET PICKUP — This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting is to detect
the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.
BF1 N AMP HISET PICKUP — This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting is to detect
the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted. Neutral current
supervision is used only in the three pole scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid only for three-pole
breaker failure schemes.
BF1 PH AMP LOSET PICKUP — This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting is to detect
the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted (approximately 90%
of the resistor current).
BF1 N AMP LOSET PICKUP — This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting is to detect
the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted (approximately 90%
of the resistor current). This setting is valid only for three-pole breaker failure schemes.
BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY — Sets the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-197
5
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY — This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed-in. This timer
must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker, to which the breaker failure element sends
a cancel reclosure signal. Reclosure of a remote breaker can also be prevented by holding a transfer trip signal on longer
than the reclaim time.
BF1 PH A INITIATE / BF1 PH B INITIATE / BF 1 PH C INITIATE — These settings select the FlexLogic operand to initiate phase A, B,
or C single-pole tripping of the breaker and the phase A, B, or C portion of the scheme, accordingly. This setting is only valid
for single-pole breaker failure schemes.
BF1 BKR POS1 B / BF1 BKR POS 1 C — These settings select the FlexLogic operand to represents the protected breaker
early-type auxiliary switch contact on poles B or C, accordingly. This contact is normally a non-multiplied Form-A contact.
The contact can even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time. This setting is valid only for single-pole
breaker failure schemes.
BF1 BKR POS2 B — Selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type auxiliary switch
contact on pole B (52/a). This can be a multiplied contact. This setting is valid only for single-pole breaker failure schemes.
BF1 BKR POS2 C — This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type auxiliary
switch contact on pole C (52/a). This can be a multiplied contact. For single-pole operation, the scheme has the same
overall general concept except that it provides re-tripping of each single pole of the protected breaker. The approach
shown in the following single pole tripping diagram uses the initiating information to determine which pole is supposed to
trip. The logic is segregated on a per-pole basis. The overcurrent detectors have ganged settings. This setting is valid only
for single-pole breaker failure schemes.
Upon operation of the breaker failure element for a single pole trip command, a three-pole trip command needs to be
given via output operand BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP.
5
5-198
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Figure 5-97: Single-pole breaker failure initiate logic
SETTINGS
Function
OR
Enabled = 1
AND
Block
Off = 0
Initiated
to breaker failure
single-pole logic sheet 2
SETTING
Phase A Initiate
Off = 0
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
AND
Three-Pole Initiate
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP A
OR
Off = 0
AND
SETTING
Initiated phase A
to breaker failure
single-pole logic sheet 2
Use Seal-In
Seal-in path
Yes = 1
OR
AND
SETTING
OR
Use Amp Supervision
Yes = 1
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
Seal-in path
OR
Phase B Initiate
AND
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP B
Off = 0
Initiated phase B
OR
SETTING
to breaker failure
single-pole logic sheet 2
OR
Phase C Initiate
Off = 0
OR
AND
SETTING
Phase Current
Supervision Pickup
5
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Seal-in path
AND
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP C
RUN
SETTING
SETTING
IA
Pickup
IB
Pickup
RUN
Source
IA
IB
IC
Initiated phase C
OR
to breaker failure
single-pole logic sheet 2
RUN
IC
Pickup
IC
IB
to breaker failure
single-pole logic sheet 3
IA
834013A3.CDR
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-199
5-200
Yes = 1
No = 0
No = 0
Yes = 1
Yes = 1
Off = 0
from single-pole breaker failure logic sheet 1
Initiated
Breaker Test On
Breaker Pos 2 Phase C
Off = 0
Breaker Pos 2 Phase B
Off = 0
Breaker Pos 2 Phase A/3P
Off = 0
Use Timer 3
SETTINGS
IA
IB
IC
from single-pole breaker
failure logic sheet 1
Initiated phase C
Off = 0
Breaker Pos 1 Phase B
SETTINGS
Initiated phase B
from single-pole breaker
failure logic sheet 1
Off = 0
Breaker Pos 1 Phase B
SETTINGS
Use Timer 2
SETTING
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer 3 Pickup Delay
SETTING
Timer 2 Pickup Delay
SETTING
Timer 1 Pickup Delay
SETTING
Timer 2 Pickup Delay
SETTING
Timer 1 Pickup Delay
SETTING
Timer 2 Pickup Delay
SETTING
Timer 1 Pickup Delay
0
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
OR
OR
IA
Pickup
0
0
OR
SETTING
IC
Pickup
LoSet Time Delay
SETTING
RUN
0
Phase Current HiSet Pickup
SETTING
IB
Pickup
RUN
IC
Pickup
Phase Current LoSet Pickup
SETTING
RUN
Phase Current LoSet Pickup
0
SETTING
Pickup
LoSet Time Delay
Pickup
IA
Trip Dropout Delay
IB
RUN
Phase Current LoSet Pickup
SETTING
SETTING
RUN
Phase Current HiSet Pickup
SETTING
LoSet Time Delay
SETTING
RUN
Phase Current HiSet Pickup
SETTING
5
Initiated phase A
from single-pole breaker
failure logic sheet 1
Use Timer 1
Off = 0
Breaker Pos 1 Phase A/3P
SETTINGS
OR
827070A5.CDR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR FAIL 1 T3 OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-98: Single-pole breaker failure, timers logic
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Figure 5-99: Three-pole breaker failure, initiate logic
SETTING
BF1 FUNCTION:
Disable=0
Enable=1
SETTING
AND
BF1 BLOCK:
Off=0
SETTING
BF1 INITIATE:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP
Off=0
OR
AND
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
(Initiated)
SETTING
BF1 USE SEAL-IN:
YES=1
NO=0
AND
Seal In Path
AND
OR
SETTING
5
BF1 USE AMP SUPV:
YES=1
NO=0
OR
SETTINGS
BF1 PH AMP SUPV
PICKUP:
SETTING
BF1 SOURCE:
BF1 N AMP SUPV
PICKUP:
RUN
IA ³ PICKUP
IA
RUN
IB ³ PICKUP
IB
OR
RUN
IC ³ PICKUP
IC
RUN
IN
IN ³ PICKUP
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
(827068.cdr)
827067A5.cdr
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-201
5-202
NO=0
YES=1
NO=0
YES=1
Off=0
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON:
SETTING
Off=0
BF1 BKR POS2 ΦA/3P:
SETTING
BF1 USE TIMER 3:
SETTING
IN
IC
IB
IA
NO=0
YES=1
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
DELAY:
BF1 TIMER3 PICKUP
SETTING
DELAY:
BF1 TIMER2 PICKUP
SETTING
DELAY:
BF1 TIMER1 PICKUP
0
0
0
OR
SETTINGS
IN ³ PICKUP
IC ³ PICKUP
IB ³ PICKUP
IA ³ PICKUP
DELAY:
BF1 LOSET TIME
SETTING
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
BF1 N AMP HISET
PICKUP:
BF1 PH AMP HISET
PICKUP:
0
5
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
(Initiated)
BF1 USE TIMER 2:
SETTING
Off=0
BF1 BKR POS1 ΦA/3P:
SETTING
BF1 USE TIMER 1:
SETTING
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
(Initiated)
SETTINGS
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
IN ³ PICKUP
IC ³ PICKUP
IB ³ PICKUP
IA ³ PICKUP
BF1 N AMP LOSET
PICKUP:
BF1 PH AMP LOSET
PICKUP:
OR
SETTING
0
TIME DELAY:
BF1 TRIP DROPOUT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
827068A7.cdr
BKR FAIL 1 T3 OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-100: Three-pole breaker failure, timers logic
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.7.7 Voltage elements
5.7.7.1 Menu
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS


 PHASE
 UNDERVOLTAGE1

 PHASE
 UNDERVOLTAGE3

 PHASE
 OVERVOLTAGE1
See below

See page 5-205


 PHASE
 OVERVOLTAGE3

 NEUTRAL OV1


 NEUTRAL OV3


 AUXILIARY UV1


 AUXILIARY UV2


 AUXILIARY OV1


 AUXILIARY OV2

See page 5-206

See page 5-207
5
See page 5-208
These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications, such as
•
Undervoltage protection — For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage increases the
drawn current, which can cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be
used to either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a
specified time delay.
•
Permissive functions — The undervoltage feature can be used to block the functioning of external devices by
operating an output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting. The undervoltage feature can
also be used to block the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements.
•
Source transfer schemes — In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal can be generated to transfer a load
from its normal source to a standby or emergency power source.
The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a definite time delay characteristic. The definite time curve
operates when the voltage drops below the pickup level for a specified period of time. The time delay is adjustable from 0
to 600.00 seconds in steps of 0.01. The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay
characteristic.
The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown as follows.
D
T = -----------------------------V 
 1 – --------------
V pickup
Eq. 5-17
where
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-203
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
T = operating time
D = undervoltage delay setting (D = 0.00 operates instantaneously)
V = secondary voltage applied to the relay
Vpickup = pickup level
Time (seconds)
Figure 5-101: Inverse time undervoltage curves
% of voltage pickup
842788A1.CDR
5
At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY setting.
5.7.7.2 Phase undervoltage (ANSI 27P, IEC PTUV)
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1(3)
 PHASE
 UNDERVOLTAGE1
5-204

PHASE UV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE UV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

PHASE UV1 MODE:
Phase to Ground
Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase

PHASE UV1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

PHASE UV1
CURVE: Definite Time
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time

PHASE UV1
DELAY: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PHASE UV1 MINIMUM
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

PHASE UV1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PHASE UV1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

PHASE UV1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
This element is used to give a time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied fundamental voltage (phase-toground or phase-to-phase for wye VT connection, or phase-to-phase for delta VT connection) or as a definite time
element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage. The delay setting selects
the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below
which the element is blocked (a setting of “0” allows a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
Figure 5-102: Phase undervoltage1 logic
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE UV1
PICKUP:
PHASE UV1
FUNCTION:
PHASE UV1
CURVE:
Enabled = 1
SETTING
AND
PHASE UV1
BLOCK:
AND
PHASE UV1
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
RUN VAG or VAB < PICKUP
PHASE UV1 A PKP
PHASE UV1 A DPO
t
PHASE UV1 A OP
Off = 0
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE UV1
MINIMUM VOLTAGE:
PHASE UV1 SOURCE:
Source VT = Delta
VAB
VBC
VCA
Source VT = Wye
SETTING
PHASE UV1 MODE:
Phase to Ground Phase to Phase
VAG
VAB
VBG
VBC
VCG
VCA
}
VAG or VAB < Minimum
VBG or VBC < Minimum
VCG or VCA < Minimum
AND
V
RUN VBG or VBC< PICKUP
t
PHASE UV1 B PKP
PHASE UV1 B DPO
PHASE UV1 B OP
AND
V
RUN VCG or VCA< PICKUP
PHASE UV1 C PKP
t
PHASE UV1 C DPO
PHASE UV1 C OP
V
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
PHASE UV1 PKP
OR
PHASE UV1 OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
PHASE UV1 DPO
827039AC.CDR
5.7.7.3 Phase overvoltage (ANSI 59P, IEC PTOV)
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1(3)
 PHASE
 OVERVOLTAGE1

PHASE OV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

PHASE OV1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

PHASE OV1 PICKUP
DELAY: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PHASE OV1 RESET
DELAY: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PHASE OV1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic Operand

PHASE OV1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

PHASE OV1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
There are three phase overvoltage elements available. A phase overvoltage element is used as an instantaneous element
with no intentional time delay or as a definite time element. The input voltage is the phase-to-phase voltage, either
measured directly from delta-connected VTs or as calculated from phase-to-ground (wye) connected VTs. The figure
shows specific voltages to be used for each phase.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-205
5
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-103: Phase overvoltage logic
SETTINGS
SETTING
PHASE OV1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
AND
PHASE OV1
BLOCK:
SETTING
PHASE OV1 PICKUP
DELAY:
PHASE OV1
PICKUP:
PHASE OV1 RESET
DELAY:
RUN
tPKP
RUN
RUN
Off = 0
VAB ≥ PICKUP
VBC ≥ PICKUP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PHASE OV1 A PKP
PHASE OV1 A DPO
PHASE OV1 A OP
tRST
PHASE OV1 B PKP
PHASE OV1 B DPO
tPKP
PHASE OV1 B OP
tRST
VCA ≥ PICKUP
PHASE OV1 C PKP
PHASE OV1 C DPO
tPKP
PHASE OV1 C OP
tRST
SETTING
PHASE OV1
SOURCE:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Source VT = Delta
OR
VAB
VBC
PHASE OV1 OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
VCA
AND
Source VT = Wye
PHASE OV1 DPO
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
PHASE OV1 PKP
827066A7.CDR
NOTE
If the source VT is wye-connected, then the phase overvoltage pickup condition is V > 3  Pickup for VAB, VBC,
and VCA .
5.7.7.4 Neutral overvoltage (ANSI 59N, IEC PTOV)
5
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  NEUTRAL OV1(3)
 NEUTRAL OV1


NEUTRAL OV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP:
0.300 pu
Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE:
Definite time
Range: Definite time, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B,
FlexCurve C

NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP:
DELAY: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

NEUTRAL OV1 RESET:
DELAY: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

NEUTRAL OV1 TARGET:
Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

NEUTRAL OV1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
There are three neutral overvoltage elements available. The neutral overvoltage element can be used to detect
asymmetrical system voltage condition due to a ground fault or to the loss of one or two phases of the source. The
element responds to the system neutral voltage (3V_0), calculated from the phase voltages. The nominal secondary
voltage of the phase voltage channels entered under SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  VOLTAGE BANK  PHASE
VT SECONDARY is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
The neutral overvoltage element can provide a time-delayed operating characteristic versus the applied voltage (initialized
from FlexCurves A, B, or C) or be used as a definite time element. The NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP DELAY setting applies only if the
NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE setting is “Definite time.” The source assigned to this element must be configured for a phase VT.
5-206
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element. This function requires the VTs to
be wye-connected.
Figure 5-104: Neutral overvoltage1 logic
SETTING
NEUTRAL OV1
FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
SETTING
AND
SETTING
SETTING
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP:
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP
DELAY :
RUN
NEUTRAL OV1 RESET
DELAY :
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK:
NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE :
Off=0
3V_0< Pickup
SETTING
t
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
tPKP
tRST
NEUTRAL OV1 OP
NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
NEUTRAL OV1 PKP
ZERO SEQ VOLT (V_0)
827848A3.CDR
5.7.7.5 Auxiliary undervoltage (ANSI 27X, IEC PTUV)
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  AUXILIARY UV1(2)
 AUXILIARY UV1


AUX UV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

AUX UV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

AUX UV1 PICKUP:
0.700 pu
Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

AUX UV1 CURVE:
Definite Time
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time

AUX UV1 DELAY:
1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

AUX UV1 MINIMUM:
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

AUX UV1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AUX UV1 TARGET:
Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

AUX UV1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
5
The C60 contains one auxiliary undervoltage element for each VT bank. This element monitors undervoltage conditions of
the auxiliary voltage.
The AUX UV1 PICKUP selects the voltage level at which the time undervoltage element starts timing. The nominal secondary
voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  VOLTAGE BANK X5 
AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY is the per-unit base used when setting the pickup level.
The AUX UV1 DELAY setting selects the minimum operating time of the auxiliary undervoltage element.
Both AUX UV1 PICKUP and AUX UV1 DELAY settings establish the operating curve of the undervoltage element. The auxiliary
undervoltage element can be programmed to use either definite time delay or inverse time delay characteristics. The
operating characteristics and equations for both definite and inverse time delay are as for the phase undervoltage
element.
The element resets instantaneously. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element
is blocked.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-207
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-105: Auxiliary undervoltage logic
SETTING
SETTING
AUX UV1
FUNCTION:
AUX UV1 PICKUP:
Enabled=1
AUX UV1 CURVE:
SETTING
AUX UV1 DELAY:
AUX UV1 BLOCK:
Off=0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Vx < Pickup
RUN
SETTING
AUX UV1 MINIMUM
VOLTAGE:
AUX UV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
AUX UV1 PKP
AUX UV1 DPO
SETTING
AUX UV1 OP
t
Vx < Minimum
AUX VOLT Vx
V
827849A3.CDR
5.7.7.6 Auxiliary overvoltage (ANSI 59X, IEC PTOV)
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  AUXILIARY OV1(2)
 AUXILIARY OV1

5

AUX OV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

AUX OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

AUX OV1 PICKUP:
0.300 pu
Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

AUX OV1 PICKUP
DELAY: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

AUX OV1 RESET
DELAY: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

AUX OV1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AUX OV1 TARGET:
Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

AUX OV1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The C60 contains one auxiliary overvoltage element for each VT bank. This element is intended for monitoring overvoltage
conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SYSTEM
SETUP  AC INPUTS  VOLTAGE BANK X5  AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY is the per-unit (pu) base used when setting the
pickup level.
A typical application for this element is monitoring the zero-sequence voltage (3V_0) supplied from an open-corner-delta
VT connection.
5-208
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Figure 5-106: Auxiliary overvoltage logic
SETTING
AUX OV1
FUNCTION:
SETTING
Enabled=1
SETTING
AND
AUX OV1 PICKUP:
SETTING
RUN
AUX OV1 PICKUP
DELAY :
AUX OV1 BLOCK:
AUX OV1 RESET
DELAY :
Off=0
Vx < Pickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
tPKP
tRST
SETTING
AUX OV1 OP
AUX OV1 DPO
AUX OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
AUX OV1 PKP
AUXILIARY VOLT (Vx)
827836A3.CDR
5.7.8 Supervising elements
5.7.8.1 Open pole detector
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  SUPERVISING ELEMENTS  OPEN POLE DETECTOR
 OPEN POLE DETECTOR


OPEN POLE FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

OPEN POLE BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

OPEN POLE CURRENT
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

OPEN POLE CURRENT
PKP: 0.20 pu
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 pu in steps of 0.01

OPEN POLE BROKEN
CONDUCTOR: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

OPEN POLE VOLTAGE
INPUT: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

OPEN POLE VOLTAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

OPEN POLE A AUX CO:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

OPEN POLE B AUX CO:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

OPEN POLE C AUX CO:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

OPEN POLE PICKUP
DELAY: 0.060 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

OPEN POLE RESET
DELAY: 0.100 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

OPEN POLE TARGET:
Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

OPEN POLE EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5
5-209
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The open pole detector detects if any pole of the associated circuit breaker is opened or the conductor is broken on the
protected power line and cable. The output FlexLogic operands can be used in three-pole and single-pole tripping
schemes, in reclosing schemes, in blocking some elements (like CT failure), and in signaling or indication schemes. In
single-pole tripping schemes, if OPEN POLE flag is set, any other subsequent fault causes a three-phase trip regardless of
fault type.
The open pole detector logic detects absence of current in one phase during presence of current in other phases. Phases
A, B, and C breaker auxiliary contacts (if available) are used in addition to make a logic decision for single-pole tripping
applications. If voltage input is available, a low voltage function is used to detect absence of the monitoring voltage in the
associated pole of the breaker.
OPEN POLE FUNCTION — Used to enable/disable operation of the element.
OPEN POLE BLOCK — Selects a FlexLogic operand that blocks operation of the element.
OPEN POLE CURRENT SOURCE — Selects the source for the current for the element.
OPEN POLE CURRENT PICKUP — Selects the pickup value of the phase current. The pickup setting is the minimum of the
range and likely to be somewhat above of the charging current of the line.
OPEN POLE BROKEN CONDUCTOR — Enables and disables detection of broken conductor or remote pole open conditions.
OPEN POLE VOLTAGE INPUT — Enables and disables the voltage input in making a logical decision. If the line VT (not bus VT) is
available, the voltage input can be set to “Enable.”
OPEN POLE VOLTAGE SOURCE — Selects the voltage source for the element.
OPEN POLE A(C) AUX CONTACT — These three settings are used to select a FlexLogic operand reflecting the state of the 52b
5
type phase A circuit breaker auxiliary contact (closed when main breaker contact is open) for single-pole tripping
applications. If two breakers per line are used, then both breaker auxiliary contacts feeding into the AND gate
(representing auxiliary contacts connected in series) are to be assigned.
OPEN POLE PICKUP DELAY — Selects the pickup delay of the element.
OPEN POLE RESET DELAY — This setting is used to select the reset delay of the element. The use of this setting depends on
the particular application and whether single-pole or three-pole tripping is used. It comprises the reset time of the
operating elements it used in conjunction with, the breaker opening time, and breaker auxiliary contacts discrepancy with
the main contacts.
5-210
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Figure 5-107: Open pole detector logic
SETTING
OPEN POLE
FUNCTION:
SETTING
Enable=1
OPEN POLE
PICKUP DELAY:
SETTING
OPEN POLE
RESET DELAY:
OPEN POLE BLOCK:
Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
OR
SETTING
OPEN POLE A
AUX CONTACT:
Off=0
AND
ANY PHASE
OR
A
OPEN POLE OP A
B
OPEN POLE OP B
C
OPEN POLE OP C
SETTING
OPEN POLE B
AUX CONTACT:
Off=0
AND
OR
SETTING
OPEN POLE C
AUX CONTACT:
Off=0
AND
OR
SETTING
OR
OPEN POLE BROKEN
CONDUCTOR:
Enable=1
AND
SETTING
SETTING
OPEN POLE
CURRENT SOURCE:
AND
OPEN POLE
CURRENT PICKUP:
IA
RUN
IA > SETTING
IB
IB > SETTING
IC
IC > SETTING
AND
AND
AND
5
AND
AND
SETTING
OPEN POLE
VOLTAGE INPUT:
Enable=1
SETTING
OPEN POLE
VOLTAGE SOURCE:
AND
RUN
WYE
DELTA
VAG or
VAB
VA < 75% Nominal
VBG or
VBC
VB < 75% Nominal
VCG or
VCA
VC < 75% Nominal
827047A7.CDR
5.7.9 Sensitive directional power
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  POWER  SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER 
DIRECTIONAL POWER 1(2)
 DIRECTIONAL
 POWER 1

DIR POWER 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

DIR POWER 1
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

DIR POWER 1
RCA: 0°
Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1

DIR POWER 1
CALIBRATION: 0.00°
Range: 0 to 0.95° in steps of 0.05

DIR POWER 1 STG1
SMIN: 0.100 pu
Range: –1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-211
GROUPED ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

DIR POWER 1 STG1
DELAY: 0.50 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

DIR POWER 1 STG2
SMIN: 0.100 pu
Range: –1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001

DIR POWER 1 STG2
DELAY: 20.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

DIR POWER 1 BLK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

DIR POWER 1
TARGET: Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

DIR POWER 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The sensitive directional power element responds to three-phase directional power and is designed for reverse power and
low forward power applications for synchronous machines or interconnections involving co-generation. The relay
measures the three-phase power from either a full set of wye-connected VTs or a full set of delta-connected VTs. In the
latter case, the two-wattmeter method is used. See the UR-series Metering Conventions section in chapter 6 for details
regarding the active and reactive powers used by the sensitive directional power element.
The element has an adjustable characteristic angle and minimum operating power as shown in the Directional Power
Characteristic diagram that follows. The element responds to the following condition:
P cos  + Q sin  > SMIN
Eq. 5-18
where
P and Q are active and reactive powers as measured per the UR metering convention
 is a sum of the element characteristic (DIR POWER 1 RCA) and calibration (DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION) angles
SMIN is the minimum operating power
The operating quantity is displayed in the ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER 1(2) actual value.
The element has two independent (as to the pickup and delay settings) stages for alarm and trip, respectively.
Figure 5-108: Directional power characteristic
re
c
tio
n
Q
Di
5
OPERATE
RCA+
CALIBRATION
SMIN
P
+
RESTRAIN
-
842701A1.CDR
By making the characteristic angle adjustable and providing for both negative and positive values of the minimum
operating power, a variety of operating characteristics can be achieved as presented in the following figure. For example,
section (a) in the figure shows settings for reverse power, while section (b) shows settings for low forward power
applications.
5-212
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
Figure 5-109: Directional power element sample applications
(a)
(b)
Q
Q
RESTRAIN
OPERATE
RESTRAIN
P
OPERATE
P
RCA = 180o
SMIN > 0
(c)
RCA = 180o
SMIN < 0
(d)
Q
Q
OPERATE
OPERATE
P
RESTRAIN
P
RESTRAIN
RCA = 0o
SMIN < 0
RCA = 0o
SMIN > 0
5
(e)
Q
(f)
OPERATE
Q
RESTRAIN
OPERATE
RESTRAIN
P
RCA = 90o
SMIN > 0
P
RCA = 270o
SMIN < 0
842702A1.CDR
DIR POWER 1 RCA — Specifies the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the sensitive directional power function. Application of
this setting is threefold:
•
It allows the element to respond to active or reactive power in any direction (active overpower/underpower, and so on)
•
Together with a precise calibration angle, it allows compensation for any CT and VT angular errors to permit more
sensitive settings
•
It allows for required direction in situations when the voltage signal is taken from behind a delta-wye connected
power transformer and the phase angle compensation is required
For example, the active overpower characteristic is achieved by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “0°,” reactive overpower by
setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “90°,” active underpower by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “180°,” and reactive underpower by
setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “270°.”
DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION — This setting allows the relay characteristic angle to change in steps of 0.05°. This is useful
when a small difference in VT and CT angular errors is to be compensated to permit more sensitive settings. This setting
virtually enables calibration of the directional power function in terms of the angular error of applied VTs and CTs. The
element responds to the sum of the DIR POWER 1 RCA and DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION settings.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-213
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
DIR POWER 1 STG1 SMIN — This setting specifies the minimum power as defined along the relay characteristic angle (RCA)
for the stage 1 of the element. The positive values imply a shift towards the operate region along the RCA line; the negative
values imply a shift towards the restrain region along the RCA line. See the Directional Power Sample Applications figure
for details. Together with the RCA, this setting enables a wide range of operating characteristics. This setting applies to
three-phase power and is entered in per-unit (pu) values. The base quantity is 3 x VT pu base x CT pu base.
For example, a setting of 2% for a 200 MW machine is 0.02  200 MW = 4 MW. If 13.8kV is line voltage and 10 kA is a
primary CT current, the source pu quantity is 239 MVA, and thus, SMIN needs to be set at 4 MW / 239 MVA = 0.0167 pu 
0.017 pu. If the reverse power application is considered, RCA = 180° and SMIN = 0.017 pu.
The element drops out if the magnitude of the positive-sequence current becomes virtually zero, that is, it drops below the
cutoff level.
DIR POWER 1 STG1 DELAY — This setting specifies a time delay for stage 1. For reverse power or low forward power
applications for a synchronous machine, stage 1 is typically applied for alarming and stage 2 for tripping.
Figure 5-110: Sensitive directional power logic
SETTING
DIR POWER 1
FUNCTION:
Off = 0
5
SETTINGS
SETTING
DIR POWER 1 RCA:
DIR POWER 1 STG1
DELAY:
DIR POWER 1
CALIBRATION:
tPKP
100 ms
DIR POWER 1 STG1
SMIN:
SETTING
DIR POWER 1 SOURCE:
DIR POWER 1 STG2
SMIN:
FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS
RUN
DIR POWER 1 STG1 DPO
DIRECTIONAL POWER
CHARACTERISTICS
Three-phase active power (P)
Three-phase reactive power (Q)
DIR POWER 1 STG1 PKP
DIR POWER 1 STG2 PKP
DIR POWER 1 STG2 DPO
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP
DIR POWER 1 DPO
DIR POWER 1 PKP
OR
DIR POWER 1 BLK:
AND
SETTING
OR
Enabled = 1
DIR POWER 1 OP
DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP
SETTING
DIR POWER 1 STG2
DELAY:
tPKP
100 ms
842003A3.CDR
5.8 Control elements
5.8.1 Overview
Control elements are used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of
this chapter for information.
5.8.2 Trip bus
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  TRIP BUS  TRIP BUS 1(6)
 TRIP BUS 1

5-214

TRIP BUS 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS

TRIP BUS 1 RESET
DELAY: 0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

TRIP BUS 1 RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

TRIP BUS 1 TARGET:
Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

TRIP BUS 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

The trip bus element allows aggregating outputs of protection and control elements without using FlexLogic and assigning
them a simple and effective manner. Each trip bus can be assigned for either trip or alarm actions. Simple trip conditioning
such as latch, delay, and seal-in delay are available.
The easiest way to assign element outputs to a trip bus is through the EnerVista software A protection summary is
displayed by navigating to a specific protection or control protection element and checking the desired bus box. Once the
desired element is selected for a specific bus, a list of element operate-type operands are displayed and can be assigned
to a trip bus. If more than one operate-type operand is required, it can be assigned directly from the trip bus menu.
Figure 5-111: Trip bus fields in the protection summary
The following settings are available.
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK — The trip bus output is blocked when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted.
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY — This setting specifies a time delay to produce an output depending on how output is used.
TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY — This setting specifies a time delay to reset an output command. Set the time delay long enough
to allow the breaker or contactor to perform a required action.
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 to TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 — These settings select a FlexLogic operand to be assigned as an input to the trip
bus.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-215
5
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING — This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output. This is typically used when lockout is
required or user acknowledgement of the relay response is required.
TRIP BUS 1 RESET — The trip bus output is reset when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted. Note that the RESET OP
operand is pre-wired to the reset gate of the latch, As such, a reset command from the front panel interface or via
communications resets the trip bus output.
Figure 5-112: Trip bus logic
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1
SETTINGS
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2
= Off
Non-volatile,
set-dominant
***
OR
AND
S
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP
DELAY
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
DELAY
TPKP
Latch
= Off
TRST
R
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
FUNCTION
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
AND
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
5
= Off
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET OP
842023A1.CDR
5.8.3 Setting groups
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUPS
 SETTING GROUPS


SETTING GROUPS
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SETTING GROUPS BLK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

GROUP 1 NAME:
Range: up to 16 alphanumeric characters



GROUP 6 NAME:
Range: up to 16 alphanumeric characters

SETTING GROUP
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The setting groups menu controls the activation and deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the GROUPED
ELEMENTS settings menu. The active setting group can be indicated on the front display of the UR by configuring UserProgrammable LEDs to display the state of the SETTING GROUP ACT FlexLogic operands.
5-216
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION — When Enabled, allows setting groups other than group 1 (the default active group) to be
activated. The default setting group is forced active while the SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION setting is Disabled.
SETTING GROUPS BLK — Prevents the active setting group from changing when the selected FlexLogic operand is "On." This
can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as during a
control sequence.
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON to GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON — Selects a FlexLogic operand which, when set, makes the particular setting
group active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a given time — the
highest-numbered group that is activated by its ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lower-numbered groups.
There is no activate on setting for group 1 (the default active group), because group 1 automatically becomes active if no
other group is active.
SETTING GROUP 1 NAME to SETTING GROUP 6 NAME — Allows the user to assign a name to each of the six settings groups.
Once programmed, this name appears on the second line of the GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6) menu display.
The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default
settings group. The following FlexLogic equation (see the following figure) illustrates requests via remote communications
(for example, VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ON) or from a local contact input (for example, CONTACT IP 1 ON) to initiate the use of a particular
settings group, and requests from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular
settings group. The assigned VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the “On” state of a particular settings group.
Figure 5-113: Example of FlexLogic control of a setting group
1
VIRT IP 1 ON (VI1)
2
CONT IP 1 ON (H5A)
3
OR (2)
4
PHASE TOC1 PKP
5
NOT
6
PHASE TOC2 PKP
7
NOT
8
AND (3)
9
= VIRT OP 1 (VO1)
10
END
OR (2)
AND (3)
= VIRT OP 1 (VO1)
5
842789A1.CDR
A setting group selection can also be made by the IEC 61850 MMS service SelectActiveSG to the control block @Master/
LLN0.SGCB. The priority scheme mentioned makes active the highest numbered group selected by SelectActiveSG or the
GROUP ACTIVATE ON settings. The SelectActiveSG selection has a default value of 1, so until a higher SelectActiveSG
selection is received, the GROUP ACTIVATE ON settings control the active group.
The most recent SelectActiveSG selection is preserved while the UR is powered down or reset.
If it becomes necessary to cancel the SelectActiveSG selection without using a SelectActiveSG service request, change the
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION setting to Disabled. This resets the SelectActiveSG selection to 1.
5.8.4 Selector switch
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SELECTOR SWITCH  SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2)
 SELECTOR SWITCH 1


SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SELECTOR 1 FULL
RANGE: 7
Range: 1 to 7 in steps of 1
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-217
CONTROL ELEMENTS
5
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:
5.0 s
Range: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1

SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP
MODE: Time-out
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge

SELECTOR 1 ACK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SELECTOR 1 3BIT
MODE: Time-out
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge

SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP
MODE: Restore
Range: Restore, Synchronize, Sync/Restore

SELECTOR 1 TARGETS:
Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

SELECTOR 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The selector switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group
control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic.
The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a
time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The three-bit control input allows
setting the selector to the position defined by a three-bit word.
The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after
time-out or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile
memory. Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current three-bit word
(user setting). Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; for example, the three-bit control input
being out of range.
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE — This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through available
positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (position 1). When using a direct three-bit control
word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word is within the
range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established by setting the
SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic operand for three seconds.
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT — This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in the
following two ways. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is “Time-out,” the setting specifies the required period of inactivity
of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is
“Acknowledge,” the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is re-started by
any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT timer expires;
otherwise, the change does not take place and an alarm is set.
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP — This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new position at
each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE) to
the first (position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every 50 ms. After each rising
edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POS Z CHNG INITIATED target
message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for the time specified by the FLASH
5-218
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out (“Time-out” mode), or when the
acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (“Acknowledge” mode). When the new position is applied, the
relay displays the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE message. Typically, a user-programmable pushbutton is
configured as the stepping up control input.
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE — This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out,” the selector
changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not
require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to “Acknowledge,” the selector
changes its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging
signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change and an alarm is
established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic operand for three seconds.
SELECTOR 1 ACK — This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under “Acknowledge” mode of
operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the last
activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2 — These settings specify a three-bit control input of the selector. The three-bit control word
pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention:
A2
A1
A0
Position
0
0
0
rest
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
2
0
1
1
3
1
0
0
4
1
0
1
5
1
1
0
6
1
1
1
7
5
The “rest” position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the threebit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is “Time-out,” the pre-selected position is applied in
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the three-bit input. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is “Acknowledge,”
the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging input.
The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the three-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 through A2) lock-out
mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the three-bit control input is inactive; once the three-bit control
sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE — This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out,” the selector changes
its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not require
explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to “Acknowledge,” the selector changes its position only
after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined
period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT ALARM FlexLogic operand
for three seconds.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK — This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the three-bit control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic operand. This setting is active only under the
“Acknowledge” mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR TIMEOUT setting after the last activity of the three-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and three-bit
control input have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK , accordingly).
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE — This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay.
When set to “Restore,” the last position of the selector (stored in the non-volatile memory) is restored after powering up the
relay. If the position restored from memory is out of range, position 0 (no output operand selected) is applied and an alarm
is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-219
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
When set to “Synchronize,” the selector switch acts as follows. For two power cycles, the selector applies position 0 to the
switch and activates SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM. After two power cycles expire, the selector synchronizes to the position
dictated by the three-bit control input. This operation does not wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When the
synchronization attempt is unsuccessful (that is, the three-bit input is not available (0,0,0) or out of range), then the selector
switch output is set to position 0 (no output operand selected) and an alarm is established (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
The operation of “Synch/Restore” mode is similar to the “Synchronize” mode. The only difference is that after an
unsuccessful synchronization attempt, the switch attempts to restore the position stored in the relay memory. The “Synch/
Restore” mode is useful for applications where the selector switch is employed to change the setting group in redundant
(two relay) protection schemes.
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS — If enabled, the following events are logged:
Event name
Description
SELECTOR 1 POS Z
Selector 1 changed its position to Z
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been confirmed before the
time out
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
The selector position pre-selected via the three-bit control input has not been confirmed before the time
out
The following figures illustrate the operation of the selector switch. In these diagrams, “T” represents a time-out setting.
5
5-220
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Figure 5-114: Time-out mode
pre-existing
position 2
changed to 4 with
a pushbutton
changed to 1 with
a 3-bit input
changed to 2 with a
pushbutton
changed to 7 with
a 3-bit input
STEP-UP
T
T
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
T
T
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842737A1.CDR
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-221
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-115: Acknowledge mode
pre-existing
position 2
changed to 4 with
a pushbutton
changed to 1 with
a 3-bit input
changed to 2 with
a pushbutton
STEP-UP
ACK
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
3BIT ACK
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842736A1.CDR
Application example
Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control setting groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting
groups are to be controlled from both user-programmable pushbutton 1 and from an external device via contact inputs 1
through 3. The active setting group is to be available as an encoded three-bit word to the external device and SCADA via
output contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group is to be applied automatically after five seconds of inactivity
of the control inputs. When the relay powers up, it is to synchronize the setting group to the three-bit control input.
Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUPS menu:
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: “Enabled”
SETTING GROUPS BLK : “Off”
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 2"
GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 3"
5-222
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 4"
GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON: “Off”
GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: “Off”
Make the following changes to selector switch element in the SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SELECTOR SWITCH 
SELECTOR SWITCH 1 menu to assign control to user programmable pushbutton 1 and contact inputs 1 through 3:
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: “Enabled”
SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: “4”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: “Time-out”
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: “5.0 s”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
SELECTOR 1 ACK : “Off”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: “CONT IP 1 ON”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: “CONT IP 2 ON”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: “CONT IP 3 ON”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: “Time-out”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK : “Off”
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: “Synchronize”
Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the selector switch element by making the following
changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: “SELECTOR 1 BIT 0"
OUTPUT H2 OPERATE: “SELECTOR 1 BIT 1"
OUTPUT H3 OPERATE: “SELECTOR 1 BIT 2"
Finally, assign configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT
SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
5
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”
The figure shows the logic for the selector switch.
Figure 5-116: Selector switch logic
SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE:
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE:
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE:
SETTINGS
ACTUAL VALUE
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE:
Enabled = 1
RUN
SELECTOR 1 POSITION
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS
step up
Off = 0
SELECTOR 1 POS 1
2
1
SELECTOR 1 ACK:
acknowledge
Off = 0
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:
Off = 0
three-bit control input
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1:
SELECTOR 1 POS 3
4
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:
Off = 0
SELECTOR 1 POS 2
3
7
ON
SELECTOR 1 POS 4
SELECTOR 1 POS 5
5
SELECTOR 1 POS 6
6
SELECTOR 1 POS 7
FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
3-bit acknowledge
3-bit position out
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
OR
Off = 0
SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
842012A2.CDR
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-223
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.8.5 Synchrocheck
5.8.5.1 Settings
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SYNCHROCHECK  SYNCHROCHECK 1(4)
 SYNCHROCHECK 1

5

SYNCHK1 FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SYNCHK1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE:
SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE:
SRC 2
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT
DIFF: 10000 V
Range: 0 to 400000 V in steps of 1

SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE
DIFF: 30°
Range: 0 to 100° in steps of 1

SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ
DIFF: 1.00 Hz
Range: 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ
HYSTERESIS: 0.06 Hz
Range: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01

SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE
SELECT: LV1 and DV2
Range: None, LV1 and DV2, DV1 and LV2, DV1 or DV2,
DV1 Xor DV2, DV1 and DV2

SYNCHK1 DEAD V1
MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01

SYNCHK1 DEAD V2
MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01

SYNCHK1 LIVE V1
MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01

SYNCHK1 LIVE V2
MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01

SYNCHK1 TARGET:
Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

SYNCHK1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
There are four identical synchrocheck elements available, numbered 1 to 4.
The synchronism check function supervises the paralleling of two parts of a system that are to be joined by the closure of
a circuit breaker. The synchrocheck elements are typically used at locations where the two parts of the system are
interconnected through at least one other point in the system.
Synchrocheck verifies that the voltages (V1 and V2) on the two sides of the supervised circuit breaker are within set limits
of magnitude, angle, and frequency differences. The time that the two voltages remain within the admissible angle
difference is determined by the setting of the phase angle difference  and the frequency difference F (slip frequency). It
can be defined as the time it takes the voltage phasor V1 or V2 to traverse an angle equal to 2   at a frequency equal
to the frequency difference F. This time is calculated by:
1
T = ----------------------------360
----------------  F
2  
Eq. 5-19
where
5-224
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
is phase angle difference in degrees
F is frequency difference in Hz
If one or both sources are de-energized, the synchrocheck programming can allow for closing of the circuit breaker using
undervoltage control to bypass the synchrocheck measurements (dead source function).
SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE — This setting selects the source for voltage V1 (see the Notes section that follows).
SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE — Selects the source for voltage V2, which must not be the same as used for the V1 (see Notes).
SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF — Selects the maximum primary voltage difference in volts between the two sources. A primary
voltage magnitude difference between the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for
synchronism.
SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF — Selects the maximum angular difference in degrees between the two sources. An angular
difference between the two input voltage phasors below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS — Specifies the required hysteresis for the maximum frequency difference condition. The
condition becomes satisfied when the frequency difference becomes lower than SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF. Once the
Synchrocheck element has operated, the frequency difference must increase above the SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF + SYNCHK1
MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS sum to drop out (assuming the other two conditions, voltage and angle, remain satisfied).
SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT — Selects the combination of dead and live sources that bypass the synchronism check
function and permit the breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages (V1 or/and V2) are below the maximum
voltage threshold. A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level. Six options are available:
None — Dead Source function is disabled
LV1 and DV2 — Live V1 and Dead V2
DV1 and LV2 — Dead V1 and Live V2
DV1 or DV2 — Dead V1 or Dead V2
DV1 Xor DV2 — Dead V1 exclusive-or Dead V2 (one source is Dead and the other is Live)
DV1 and DV2 — Dead V1 and Dead V2
SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT — Establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V1 in 1 ‘pu’. Below this magnitude, the V1
voltage input used for synchrocheck is considered “Dead” or de-energized.
SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT — Establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V2 in ‘pu’. Below this magnitude, the V2
voltage input used for synchrocheck is considered “Dead” or de-energized.
SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT — Establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V1 in ‘pu’. Above this magnitude, the V1 voltage
input used for synchrocheck is considered “Live” or energized.
SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT — This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V2 in ‘pu’. Above this magnitude,
the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck is considered “Live” or energized.
Notes on the synchrocheck function
1.
The selected sources for synchrocheck inputs V1 and V2 (which must not be the same source) can include both a
three-phase and an auxiliary voltage. The relay automatically selects the specific voltages to be used by the
synchrocheck element in accordance with the following table.
Number
V1 or V2 (source Y)
V2 or V1 (source Z)
Auto-selected combination
Source Y
Source Z
Auto-selected
voltage
1
Phase VTs and
Auxiliary VT
Phase VTs and
Auxiliary VT
Phase
Phase
VAB
2
Phase VTs and
Auxiliary VT
Phase VT
Phase
Phase
VAB
3
Phase VT
Phase VT
Phase
Phase
VAB
4
Phase VT and Auxiliary Auxiliary VT
VT
Phase
Auxiliary
V auxiliary
(as set for source Z)
5
Auxiliary VT
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
V auxiliary
(as set for selected
sources)
Auxiliary VT
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-225
5
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The voltages V1 and V2 are matched automatically so that the corresponding voltages from the two sources are used
to measure conditions. A phase to phase voltage is used if available in both sources; if one or both of the Sources have
only an auxiliary voltage, this voltage is used. For example, if an auxiliary voltage is programmed to VAG, the
synchrocheck element automatically selects VAG from the other source. If the comparison is required on a specific
voltage, the user can externally connect that specific voltage to auxiliary voltage terminals and then use this "Auxiliary
Voltage" to check the synchronism conditions.
If using a single CT/VT module with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage, ensure that only the auxiliary
voltage is programmed in one of the sources to be used for synchrocheck. An exception is that synchronism cannot
be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye connected auxiliary voltage.
2.
The relay measures frequency and Volts/Hz from an input on a given source with priorities as established by the
configuration of input channels to the source. The relay uses the phase channel of a three-phase set of voltages if
programmed as part of that source. The relay uses the auxiliary voltage channel only if that channel is programmed
as part of the Source and a three-phase set is not.
5
5-226
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Figure 5-117: Synchrocheck logic
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTINGS
SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX
AND
Function
Enabled = 1
Block
AND
Off = 0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SYNC1 DEAD S OP
SYNC1 DEAD S DPO
AND
AND
SETTING
Dead Source Select
AND
None
LV1 and DV2
DV1 and LV2
DV1 or DV2
DV1 xor DV2
DV1 and DV2
OR
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SYNC1 CLS OP
SYNC1 CLS DPO
AND
AND
SETTING
Dead V1 Max Volt
V1 ≤ Maximum
XOR
SETTING
Dead V2 Max Volt
OR
V2 ≤ Maximum
5
SETTING
Live V1 Min Volt
AND
V1 ≥ Minimum
SETTING
Live V2 Min Volt
AND
V2 ≥ Minimum
SETTING
V1 Source
= SRC 1
CALCULATE
Magnitude V1
Angle Φ1
Frequency F1
SETTING
Max Volt Diff
Calculate
I V1 – V2 I = ΔV
ΔV ≤ Maximum
SETTING
Max Angle Diff
Calculate
I Φ1 – Φ2 I = ΔΦ
SETTING
V2 Source
= SRC 2
CALCULATE
Magnitude V2
Angle Φ2
Frequency F2
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SYNC1 SYNC OP
SYNC1 SYNC DPO
ΔΦ ≤ Maximum
SETTINGS
Max Freq Diff
Freq Hysteresis
Calculate
I F1 – F2 I = ΔF
AND
SYNCHROCHECK 1
ΔF ≤ Maximum
ACTUAL VALUES
Synchrocheck 1 ΔV
Synchrocheck 1 ΔΦ
Synchrocheck 1 ΔF
827076AD.CDR
5.8.5.2 Special application of the synchrocheck element
The synchrocheck element is intended for applications where the potential sources are located on either side of the
breaker to be closed. It can also be used where a power transformer is located between the two potential sources by
compensating for the power transformer phase shift with the auxiliary VT connection to the C60 and the auxiliary VT
connection setting, as shown in the following example.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-227
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-118: Synchrocheck applied across a transformer
a
System nominal
Vpp = 13.8 kV
A
b
52
B
System nominal
Vpp = 230 kV
c
C
14400 : 120
138000 : 69
~5a ~5c ~6a ~6c ~7a ~7c
~8a
Phase VT input
~8c
Auxiliary VT input
UR-series device
843808A2.CDR
5
In this example, the phase voltage VT input is programmed as “Delta” with a secondary setting of 120 volts and a ratio of
13800 V / 120 V = 115. The auxiliary VT connection is selected to be VAB since this vector is in phase with VA on the
transformer primary. The secondary setting is 69 volts and the auxiliary VT ratio is calculated as 13800 V / 69 V = 200. Note
that the metered values for the auxiliary VT now reflect the AB voltage of the secondary side of the transformer.
5.8.6 Digital elements
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL ELEMENT 1(48)
 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

5-228

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
Dig Element 1
Range: 16 alphanumeric characters

DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001

DIG ELEM 1 RESET
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001

DIG ELEMENT 1
PICKUP LED: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
There are 48 identical digital elements available, numbered 1 to 48. A digital element can monitor any FlexLogic operand
and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element
settings include a name to be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic operand,
and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT — Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the digital element.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY — Sets the required time delay from element pickup to element operation. If a pickup delay
is not required, set to "0," To avoid nuisance alarms, set the delay greater than the operating time of the breaker.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY — Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to “0.”
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED — This setting enables or disabled the digital element pickup LED. When set to “Disabled,” the
operation of the pickup LED is blocked.
Figure 5-119: Digital element logic
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
INPUT:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
NAME:
RUN
INPUT = 1
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
BLOCK:
Off = 0
SETTINGS
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
PICKUP DELAY:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
RESET DELAY:
tPKP
tRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DIG ELEM 01 DPO
DIG ELEM 01 PKP
DIG ELEM 01 OP
827042A2.VSD
5
Circuit monitoring applications
Some versions of the digital input modules include an active voltage monitor circuit connected across form-A contacts.
The voltage monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see technical specifications for form-A).
As long as the current through the voltage monitor is above a threshold (see technical specifications for form-A), the Cont
Op 1 VOn FlexLogic operand is set (for contact input 1—corresponding operands exist for each contact output). If the output
circuit has a high resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current drops below the threshold and the Cont Op 1
VOff FlexLogic operand is set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the integrity of the
circuits in which form-A contacts are inserted.
Example 1: Breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring
In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so that problems can be detected before a trip
operation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the trip output
contact detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high
resistance, the trickle current falls below the monitor threshold, and an alarm is declared.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact that is open when the
breaker is open (see figure). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must include the
breaker position.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-229
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-120: Trip circuit example 1
UR-series device
with form-A contacts
H1a
I
H1b
DC–
DC+
V
H1c
I = current monitor
V = voltage monitor
52a
Trip coil
827073A2.CDR
Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output is given an ID name; for
example, “Cont Op 1." Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status.
Using the contact input settings, this input is given an ID name, for example, “Cont Ip 1," and is set “On” when the breaker is
closed. The settings to use digital element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit are indicated (EnerVista example shown).
5
5-230
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Example 2: Breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring
If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to
maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in the
following figure). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure) across the auxiliary contact in the trip
circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position – the BLOCK setting is
selected to “Off.” In this case, the settings are as follows (EnerVista example shown).
Figure 5-121: Trip circuit example 2
UR-series device
with form-A contacts
5
Values for resistor “R”
H1a
I
H1b
DC–
DC+
V
H1c
52a
Trip coil
R
Bypass
resistor
I = current monitor
V = voltage monitor
Power supply
Resistance
24 V DC
1000 O
Power
2W
30 V DC
5000 O
2W
48 V DC
10000 O
2W
110 V DC
25000 O
5W
125 V DC
25000 O
5W
250 V DC
50000 O
5W
827074A3.CDR
The wiring connection for two examples above is applicable to both form-A contacts with voltage monitoring
and solid-state contact with voltage monitoring.
NOTE
5.8.7 Digital counters
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL COUNTERS  COUNTER 1(8)
 COUNTER 1


COUNTER 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

COUNTER 1 NAME:
Counter 1
Range: 12 alphanumeric characters

COUNTER 1 UNITS:
Range: six alphanumeric characters

COUNTER 1 PRESET:
0
Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-231
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

COUNTER 1 COMPARE:
0
Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

COUNTER 1 UP:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

COUNTER 1 DOWN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

CNT1 SET TO PRESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

COUNTER 1 RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
There are eight identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions
from Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of
an external contact (for example, breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter.
COUNTER 1 UNITS — Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted. The
units label appears in the corresponding actual values status.
5
COUNTER 1 PRESET — Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case where a
substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.
COUNTER 1 COMPARE — Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic output
operands are provided to indicate if the present value is ‘more than (HI)’, ‘equal to (EQL)’, or ‘less than (LO)’ the set value.
COUNTER 1 UP — Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received when the
accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter rolls over to –2,147,483,648.
COUNTER 1 DOWN — Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is received
when the accumulated value is at the limit of –2,147,483,648 counts, the counter rolls over to +2,147,483,647.
COUNTER 1 BLOCK — Selects the FlexLogic operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are blocked.
CNT1 SET TO PRESET — Selects the FlexLogic operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter sets to the
preset value in the following situations:
•
When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled and
CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter sets to 0)
•
When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1 SET TO PRESET
changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count)
•
When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1
(when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 0, the
counter sets to 0)
COUNTER 1 RESET — Selects the FlexLogic operand for setting the count to either “0” or the preset value depending on the
state of the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand.
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET — Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a
separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to “0.”
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT — Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a
separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated value and
captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is interrupted,
the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power-down operation.
5-232
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Figure 5-122: Digital counter logic
SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION:
SETTINGS
COUNTER 1 NAME:
COUNTER 1 UNITS:
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
RUN
Enabled = 1
SETTING
AND
COUNTER 1 UP:
Off = 0
SETTING
COUNTER 1 COMPARE:
SETTING
CALCULATE
VALUE
COUNTER 1 DOWN:
Off = 0
Count more than Comp.
Count equal to Comp.
Count less than Comp.
FLEXLOGIC
OPERANDS
COUNTER 1 HI
COUNTER 1 EQL
COUNTER 1 LO
SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off = 0
SET TO PRESET VALUE
SET TO ZERO
SETTING
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET:
ACTUAL VALUE
COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING
AND
ACTUAL VALUES
COUNTER 1 RESET:
Off = 0
COUNTER 1 FROZEN:
OR
STORE DATE & TIME
Date & Time
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off = 0
OR
827065A2.VSD
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
5
Off = 0
5.8.8 Monitoring elements
5.8.8.1 Menu
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS
 MONITORING
 ELEMENTS

 BREAKER 1
 ARCING CURRENT
See below


 BREAKER 4
 ARCING CURRENT

 BREAKER
 FLASHOVER 1

 BREAKER
 FLASHOVER 2

 BREAKER RESTRIKE 1


 BREAKER RESTRIKE 2


 VT FUSE FAILURE 1

See page 5-237
See page 5-242
See page 5-244


 VT FUSE FAILURE 4

C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-233
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

 THERMAL OVERLOAD
 PROTECTION
See page 5-245
5.8.8.2 Breaker arcing current
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  BREAKER 1(4) ARCING CURRENT
 BREAKER 1
 ARCING CURRENT

BKR 1 ARC AMP
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

BKR 1 ARC AMP
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-A:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

5

BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-C:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BKR 1 ARC AMP
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT:
1000 kA2-cyc
Range: 0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1

BKR 1 ARC AMP BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BKR 1 ARC AMP
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

BKR 1 ARC AMP
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
There is one breaker arcing current element available per CT bank, with a minimum of two elements. This element
calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuring and integrating the current squared
passing through the breaker contacts as an arc. These per-phase values are added to accumulated totals for each phase
and compared to a programmed threshold value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase, the relay can set an
output operand to “1.” The accumulated value for each phase can be displayed as an actual value.
The operation of the scheme is shown in the following logic diagram. The same output operand that is selected to operate
the output relay used to trip the breaker, indicating a tripping sequence has begun, is used to initiate this feature. A time
delay is introduced between initiation and the starting of integration to prevent integration of current flow through the
breaker before the contacts have parted. This interval includes the operating time of the output relay, any other auxiliary
relays, and the breaker mechanism. For maximum measurement accuracy, measure the interval between change-of-state
of the operand (from 0 to 1) and contact separation for the specific installation. Integration of the measured current
continues for 100 ms, which is expected to include the total arcing period.
The feature is programmed to perform fault duration calculations. Fault duration is defined as a time between operation of
the disturbance detector occurring before initiation of this feature, and reset of an internal low-set overcurrent function.
Correction is implemented to account for a non-zero reset time of the overcurrent function.
Breaker arcing currents and fault duration values are available under the ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  MAINTENANCE 
BREAKER 1(4) menus.
BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-A(C) — Select the same output operands that are configured to operate the output relays used to trip the
breaker. In three-pole tripping applications, configure the same operand to initiate arcing current calculations for poles A,
B, and C of the breaker. In single-pole tripping applications, configure per-pole tripping operands to initiate the calculations
for the poles that are actually tripped.
BKR 1 ARC AMP DELAY — This setting is used to program the delay interval between the time the tripping sequence is
initiated and the time the breaker contacts are expected to part, starting the integration of the measured current.
BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT — Selects the threshold value above which the output operand is set.
5-234
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Figure 5-123: Arcing current measurement
Breaker
Contacts
Part
Initiate
Arc
Extinguished
Total Area =
Breaker
Arcing
Current
(kA·cycle)
Programmable
Start Delay
Start
Integration
100 ms
Stop
Integration
5
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-235
5-236
OR
ACTUAL VALUE
BKR 1 ARCING AMP FA
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FC
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FB
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FA
BKR 1 ARCING AMP FC
Set All To Zero
Select
Highest
Value
BKR 1 ARCING AMP FB
Integrate
RUN
IC 2-Cycle
IB 2-Cycle
IA -Cycle
YES=1
AND
Integrate
NO=0
CLEAR BREAKER 1
ARCING AMPS:
COMMAND
IC
IB
2
Add to
Accumulator
5
IA
AND
RUN
RUN
0
Integrate
AND
100 ms
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP SOURCE:
0
SETTING
Off=0
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP INIT-C:
Off=0
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP INIT-B:
Off=0
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP INIT-A:
SETTINGS
Off=0
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP BLOCK:
AND
OR
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP DELAY:
SETTING
SETTING
Enabled=1
AND
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP FUNCTION:
SETTING
SETTING
KA * Cycle Limit
2
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP LIMIT:
827071A4.CDR
BKR1 ARC DPO
BKR1 ARC OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-124: Breaker arcing current logic
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.8.8.3 Breaker flashover
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  BREAKER FLASHOVER 1(2)
 BREAKER
 FLASHOVER 1

BKR 1 FLSHOVR
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

BKR 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1
SRC: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

BKR 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2
SRC: None
Range: None, SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

BKR 1 STATUS CLSD A:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand


BKR 1 STATUS CLSD C:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BKR 1 FLSHOVR V PKP:
0.850 pu
Range: 0.000 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001

BKR 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V
PKP: 1000 V
Range: 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1

BKR 1 FLSHOVR AMP
PKP: 0.600 pu
Range: 0.000 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001

BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP
DELAY: 0.100 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

BKR 1 FLSHOVR SPV A:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
5


BKR 1 FLSHOVR SPV C:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BKR 1 FLSHOVR BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BKR 1 FLSHOVR
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

BKR 1 FLSHOVR
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The detection of the breaker flashover is based on the following conditions:
•
Breaker open,
•
Voltage difference drop, and
•
Measured flashover current through the breaker
Furthermore, the scheme is applicable for cases where either one or two sets of three-phase voltages are available across
the breaker.
Three VT breaker flashover application
When only one set of VTs is available across the breaker, set the BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC setting to “None.” To detect an
open breaker condition in this application, the scheme checks if the per-phase voltages were recovered (picked up), the
status of the breaker is open (contact input indicating the breaker status is off), and no flashover current is flowing. A
contact showing the breaker status must be provided to the relay. The voltage difference is not considered as a condition
for open breaker in this part of the logic.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-237
CONTROL ELEMENTS
NOTE
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Voltages must be present prior to flashover conditions. If the three VTs are placed after the breaker on the line
(or feeder), and the downstream breaker is open, the measured voltage is zero and the flashover element is not
initiated.
The flashover detection resets if the current drops back to zero, the breaker closes, or the selected FlexLogic operand for
supervision changes to high. Using supervision through the BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV A , BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV B, and BRK 1 FLSHOVR
SPV c settings is recommended by selecting a trip operand that does not allow the flashover element to pickup prior to the
trip.
The flashover detection can be used for external alarm, re-tripping the breaker, or energizing the lockout relay.
Consider the following configuration:
Bus
CTs
Breaker
Line/Feeder
Bus VTs
842746A1.CDR
The source 1 (SRC1) phase currents are feeder CTs and phase voltages are bus VTs, and Contact Input 1 is set as Breaker
52a contact. The conditions prior to flashover detection are:
5
•
52a status = 0
•
VAg, VBg, or VCg is greater than the pickup setting
•
IA, IB, IC = 0; no current flows through the breaker
•
VA is greater than pickup (not applicable in this scheme)
The conditions at flashover detection are:
•
52a status = 0
•
IA, IB, or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker
•
VA is greater than pickup (not applicable in this scheme)
Six VT breaker flashover application
The per-phase voltage difference approaches zero when the breaker is closed. This is well below any typical minimum
pickup voltage. Select the level of the BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP setting to be less than the voltage difference measured
across the breaker when the close or open breaker resistors are left in service. Prior to flashover, the voltage difference is
larger than BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP. This applies to either the difference between two live voltages per phase or when the
voltage from one side of the breaker has dropped to zero (line de-energized), at least one per-phase voltage is larger than
the BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP setting, and no current flows through the breaker poles. During breaker flashover, the per-phase
voltages from both sides of the breaker drops below the pickup value defined by the BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP setting, the
voltage difference drops below the pickup setting, and flashover current is detected. These flashover conditions initiate
FlexLogic pickup operands and start the BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP DELAY timer.
This application does not require detection of breaker status via a 52a contact, as it uses a voltage difference larger than
the BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP setting. However, monitoring the breaker contact ensures scheme stability.
5-238
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Consider the following configuration:
Bus
CTs
Breaker
Line/Feeder
VTs
VTs
842745A1.CDR
The source 1 (SRC1) phase currents are CTs and phase voltages are bus VTs. The source 2 (SRC2) phase voltages are line
VTs. Contact input 1 is set as the breaker 52a contact (optional).
The conditions prior to flashover detection are:
•
VA is greater than pickup
•
IA, IB, IC = 0; no current flows through the breaker
•
52a status = 0 (optional)
The conditions at flashover detection are:
•
VA is less than pickup
•
VAg, VBg, or VCg is lower than the pickup setting
•
IA, IB, or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker
•
52a status = 0 (optional)
The element operates only when phase-to-ground voltages are connected to relay terminals. The flashover
element does not operate if delta voltages are applied.
NOTE
Settings
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 SRC — This setting specifies a signal source used to provide three-phase voltages and three-phase
currents from one side of the current breaker. The source selected as a setting and must be configured with breaker phase
voltages and currents, even if only three VTs are available across the breaker.
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC — This setting specifies a signal source used to provide another set of three phase voltages
whenever six VTs are available across the breaker.
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD A to BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C — These settings specify FlexLogic operands to indicate the open status of the
breaker. A separate FlexLogic operand can be selected to detect individual breaker pole status and provide flashover
detection. The recommended setting is 52a breaker contact or another operand defining the breaker poles open status.
BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP — This setting specifies a pickup level for the phase voltages from both sides of the breaker. If six VTs
are available, opening the breaker leads to two possible combinations – live voltages from only one side of the breaker, or
live voltages from both sides of the breaker. Either case sets the scheme for flashover detection upon detection of voltage
above the selected value. Set BRK FLSHOVR V PKP to 85 to 90% of the nominal voltage.
BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP — This setting specifies a pickup level for the phase voltage difference when two VTs per phase
are available across the breaker. The pickup voltage difference should be below the monitored voltage difference when
close or open breaker resistors are left in service. The setting is selected as primary volts difference between the sources.
BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP — This setting specifies the normal load current which can flow through the breaker. Depending on
the flashover protection application, the flashover current can vary from levels of the charging current when the line is deenergized (all line breakers open), to well above the maximum line (feeder) load (line/feeder connected to load).
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV A to BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV C — These settings specify FlexLogic operands (per breaker pole) that supervise
the operation of the element per phase. Supervision can be provided by operation of other protection elements, breaker
failure, and close and trip commands. A six-cycle time delay applies after the selected FlexLogic operand resets.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-239
5
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
BRK FLSHOVR PKP DELAY — This setting specifies the time delay to operate after a pickup condition is detected.
5
5-240
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Vc
Vb
Va
SRC 1, SRC 2, … , SRC 6, none
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2
SRC:
SETTINGS
IC
IB
IA
VC
VB
VA
SRC 1, SRC 2, … , SRC 6
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1
SRC:
SETTINGS
Block: OFF=0
Enable=1
BREAKER FLASHOVER
FUNCTION:
SETTING
AND
DVA = | VA - Va |
Va > PKP
VA > PKP
IA > PKP
RUN
DVA > PKP
BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V
PKP:
SETTING
RUN
BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP:
SETTING
FlexLogic operand: On=1
RUN
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C:
FlexLogic operand: On=1
RUN
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD B:
FlexLogic operand: On=1
RUN
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD A:
SETTINGS
RUN
BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP:
SETTING
FlexLogic operand: Off=0
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV C:
FlexLogic operand: Off=0
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV B:
FlexLogic operand: Off=0
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV A:
SETTINGS
Phase C
logic
Phase B
logic
OR
Phase C
logic
Phase B
logic
5 cycle
0
0
0
5 cycle
6 cycle
RESET
SET
dominant
AND
OR
AND
OR
RESET
SET
dominant
Phase C logic
Phase B logic
tPKP
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP
DELAY:
SETTING
Phase B logic
Phase C logic
BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO C
BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO B
BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO A
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP C
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP B
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP A
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
0
BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP C
BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP B
BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP A
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
OR
OR
842018A2.CDR
BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Figure 5-125: Breaker flashover logic
5
5-241
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.8.8.4 Breaker restrike
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  BREAKER RESTRIKE 1(2)
 BREAKER RESTRIKE 1

BREAKER RESTRIKE 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

BKR RSTR 1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER RESTRIKE 1
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

BREAKER RESTRIKE 1
PICKUP: 0.500 pu
Range: 0.10 to 2.00 pu in steps of 0.01

BREAKER RESTRIKE 1
RESET DELAY: 0.100 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

BKR RSTR 1 BKR OPEN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BKR RSTR 1 OPEN CMD:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BKR RSTR 1 CLS CMD:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER RESTRIKE 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

BREAKER RESTRIKE 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
One breaker restrike element is provided for each CT/VT module in the C60.
According to IEEE standard C37.100 entitled IEEE Standard Definitions for Power Switchgear, restrike is defined as “a
resumption of current between the contacts of a switching device during an opening operation after an interval of zero
current of ¼ cycle at normal frequency or longer.”
Figure 5-126: Typical restrike waveform and detection flag
10
8
6
4
current (amps)
5

2
0.01
0
0.03
0.02
–2
0.05
time (ms)
–4
–6
–8
–10
OPERATE
834764A1.CDR
The breaker restrike algorithm responds to a successful interruption of the phase current following a declaration of
capacitor bank offline as per the breaker pole indication. If a high-frequency current with a magnitude greater than the
threshold is resumed at least ¼ of a cycle later than the phase current interruption, then a breaker restrike condition is
declared in the corresponding phase and the BRK RESTRIKE 1 OP operand asserts for a short period of time. The user can add
counters and other logic to facilitate the decision making process as to the appropriate actions upon detecting a single
restrike or a series of consecutive restrikes.
A restrike event (FlexLogic operand) is declared if all of the following hold:
•
The current is initially interrupted
5-242
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
•
The breaker status is open
•
An elevated high frequency current condition occurs and the current subsequently drops out again
The algorithm is illustrated in the following state machine diagram.
Figure 5-127: Algorithm illustration of state machine to detect restrike
Breaker open
command or breaker
open state
Capacitor bank
offline
Breaker
close
Current
interruption
(overcurrent)
High-frequency
elevated current
Breaker
close
Capacitor bank
online
Breaker close
Current
interruption
(overcurrent)
5
Restrike detected:
OP state asserted
834768A1.CDR
In this way, a distinction is made between a self-extinguishing restrike and permanent breaker failure condition. The latter
can be detected by the breaker failure function or a regular instantaneous overcurrent element. Also, a fast succession of
restrikes is picked up by breaker failure or instantaneous overcurrent protection.
The following settings are available for each element.
BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 FUNCTION — Enables and disables operation of the breaker restrike detection element.
BRK RSTR 1 BLOCK — Blocks operation of the breaker restrike detection element.
BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 SOURCE — Selects the source of the current for this element. This source must have a valid CT bank
assigned.
BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 PICKUP — Specifies the pickup level of the overcurrent detector in per-unit values of CT nominal
current.
BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 RESET DELAY — Specifies the reset delay for this element. When set to “0 ms,” then FlexLogic operand is
picked up for only 1/8th of the power cycle.
BRK RSTR 1 BRK OPEN — Assigns a FlexLogic operand indicating the open position of the breaker. It must be logic “1” when
the breaker is open.
BRK RSTR 1 OPEN CMD — Assigns a FlexLogic operand indicating a breaker open command. It must be logic “1” when the
breaker is opened, either manually or from protection logic.
BRK RSTR 1 CLS CMD — Assigns a FlexLogic operand indicating a breaker close command. It must be logic “1” when the
breaker is closed.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-243
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-128: Breaker restrike logic
SETTING
BREAKER RESTRIKE 1
FUNCTION
= Enabled
AND
SETTING
BKR RSTR 1 BLK
= Off
SETTING
SETTING
BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 PICKUP
BREAKER RESTRIKE 1
RESET DELAY
0
RUN
SETTING
BREAKER RESTRIKE 1
SOURCE
RUN
Current interruption
detection logic
= IA
= IB
= IC
ARMED
Restrike detection logic
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BKR RESTRIKE 1 OP A
BKR RESTRIKE 1 OP B
TRST
Imag < 0.05 pu
for t > ¼ cycle
0
RESET
SETTING
BKR RSTR 1 BKR OPEN
TRST
0
BKR RESTRIKE 1 OP C
TRST
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
OR
SETTING
BKR RSTR 1 OPEN CMD
= Off
BKR RESTRIKE 1 OP
AND
SETTING
BKR RSTR 1 CLS CMD
= Off
834012A1.CDR
5.8.8.5 VT fuse failure
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  VT FUSE FAILURE 1(4)
5
 VT FUSE FAILURE 1


VT FUSE FAILURE 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

VT FUSE FAILURE 1
ALARM DELAY: 1.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

NEUTRAL WIRE OPEN 1
DETECTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEUTRAL WIRE OPEN 1
3 HARM PKP: 0.100 pu
Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Every signal source includes a fuse failure scheme.
The VT fuse failure detector is used to raise an alarm and/or block elements that operate incorrectly for a full or partial loss
of AC potential caused by one or more blown fuses. Some elements that can be blocked (via the BLOCK input) are distance,
voltage restrained overcurrent, and directional current.
There are two classes of fuse failure that occur:
•
Class A — Loss of one or two phases
•
Class B — Loss of all three phases
Different means of detection are required for each class. An indication of class A failures is a significant level of negativesequence voltage, whereas an indication of class B failures is when positive sequence current is present and there is an
insignificant amount of positive sequence voltage. Also, a rapid decrease in the phase voltages magnitude from a healthy
voltage level without disturbance in current can indicate VT fuse fail conditions. These noted indications of fuse failure can
also be present when faults are present on the system, so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure
declarations during these events is provided.
Once the fuse failure condition is declared, it is sealed-in until the cause that generated it disappears.
An additional condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circuit is de-energized;
positive-sequence voltage and current are both below threshold levels.
VT FUSE FAILURE 1 FUNCTION — Enables and disables the fuse failure feature for each source.
NEUTRAL WIRE OPEN 1 DETECTION — Enables and disables the VT neutral wire open detection function. When the VT is
connected in Delta, do not enable this function because there is no neutral wire for Delta connected VT.
5-244
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
NEUTRAL WIRE OPEN 1 3 HRAM PKP — Specifies the pickup level of 3rd harmonic of 3V0 signal for the NEUTRAL WIRE OPEN
DETECTION logic to pick up.
Base voltage for this element is PHASE VT SECONDARY setting in the case of WYE VTs and (PHASE VT SECONDARY)/ 3 in case
of DELTA VTs. The setting is found under SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  VOLTAGE BANK  PHASE VT SECONDARY.
Figure 5-129: VT fuse fail logic
SETTING
Function
Enabled = 1
VA’, VB’ and VC’ are the
voltage magnitude of one
cycle before
OR
AND
COMPARATORS
Run
Run
SOURCE 1
Run
VA
VB
VC
V_2
Run
V_1
Run
FAULT
|VA’|-|VA| > 0.2 pu
& |VA’| > 0.8 pu
|VB’|-|VB| > 0.2 pu
& |VB’| > 0.8 pu
OR
|VC’|-|VC| > 0.2 pu
& |VC’| > 0.8 pu
V_2 > 0.1 pu
OR
FUSE
FAIL
V_1 < 0.05 pu
I_1
AND
Run
I_1 > 0.075 pu
OR
TIMER
Run
2 cycles
AND
TIMER
V_1 < 0.80 pu
SET
0
2 cycles
Run
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
I_1 < 0.05 pu
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP
Latch
20 cycles
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SRC1 50DD OP
OPEN POLE OP
The OPEN POLE OP operand applies
to the D60, L60, and L90
AND
TIMER
30 cycles
OR
5
RESET
0
AND
Reset-dominant
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
SETTING
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS
AND
TIMER
5 cycles
3 HARM PKP
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Run
AND
SETTING
OR
3V_0 3rd Harm >setting
TIMER
Neutral Wire Open Detect
SRC1 VT NEU WIRE OPEN
0
Enabled = 1
AND
20 cycles
SOURCE 1
FLEX-ANALOG
3V_0 (3rd Harmonic)
SRC1 3V0 3nd Harmonic
827093AQ.CDR
5.8.8.6 Thermal overload protection
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION 
THERMAL PROTECTION 1(2)
 THERMAL
 PROTECTION 1

THERMAL PROTECTION 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

THERMAL PROTECTION 1
SOURCE: SRC1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

THERMAL PROTECTION 1
BASE CURR: 0.80 pu
Range: 0.20 to 3.00 pu in steps of 0.01

THERMAL PROTECTION 1
k FACTOR: 1.10
Range: 1.00 to 1.20 in steps of 0.05
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-245
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

THERM PROT 1 TRIP
TIME CONST: 45 min.
Range: 0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1

THERM PROT 1 RESET
TIME CONST: 45 min.
Range: 0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1

THERM PROT 1 MINIM
RESET TIME: 20 min.
Range: 0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1

THERM PROT 1 RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

THERM PROT 1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

THERMAL PROTECTION 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

THERMAL PROTECTION 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The thermal overload protection element corresponds to the IEC 255-8 standard and is used to detect thermal overload
conditions in protected power system elements. Choosing an appropriate time constant element can be used to protect
different elements of the power system. The cold curve characteristic is applied when the previous averaged load current
over the last 5 cycles is less than 10% of the base current. If this current is greater or equal than 10% than the base
current, then the hot curve characteristic is applied.
The IEC255-8 cold curve is defined as follows:
5
2


I
-
t op =  op  ln  ---------------------2
2
 I –  kI B  
Eq. 5-20
The IEC255-8 hot curve is defined as follows:
2
2
 I – Ip 
-
t op =  op  ln  --------------------- I 2 –  kI B  2
Eq. 5-21
where
top = time to operate
τop = thermal protection trip time constant
I = measured overload RMS current
Ip = measured load RMS current before overload occurs
k = IEC 255-8 k-factor applied to IB, defining maximum permissible current above nominal current
IB = protected element base (nominal) current
To ensure element accuracy for high overcurrent conditions, the maximum value of I/(k x IB) is limited to 8, even when
realistically it is exceeding this value.
The reset time of the thermal overload protection element is also time delayed using following formula:
2
t rst
  kI B 

- + T min
=  rst  ln  -----------------------2
2
 I –  kI B  
Eq. 5-22
where
τrst = thermal protection trip time constant
Tmin = a minimum reset time setting
5-246
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Figure 5-130: IEC 255-8 sample operate and reset curves
100
Tmin = 10
10
τrst = 30
t (min)
τop = 30
1
5
0.1
0.01
0.1
10
1
I / Ipkp
100
827724A1.CDR
The thermal overload protection element estimates accumulated thermal energy E using the following equations
calculated each power cycle. When current is greater than the pickup level, In > k × IB, element starts increasing the
thermal energy:
t
E n = E n – 1 + -------------t op  In 
Eq. 5-23
When current is less than the dropout level, In > 0.97 × k × IB, the element starts decreasing the thermal energy:
t
E n = E n – 1 – -------------t rst  In 
Eq. 5-24
where
∆t is the power cycle duration
n is the power cycle index
top(In) is the trip time calculated at index n as per the IEC255-8 cold curve or hot curve equations
trst(In) is the reset time calculated at index n as per the reset time equation
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-247
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
In is the measured overload RMS current at index n
En is the accumulated energy at index n
En – 1 is the accumulated energy at index n – 1
The thermal overload protection element removes the THERMAL PROT 1 OP output operand when E < 0.05. In case of
emergency, the thermal memory and THERMAL PROT 1 OP output operand can be reset using THERM PROT 1 RESET setting.
All calculations are performed per phase. If the accumulated energy reaches value 1 in any phase, the thermal overload
protection element operates and only resets when energy is less than 0.05 in all three phases.
Table 5-34: Typical time constants
Protected equipment
Time constant
Minimum reset time
Capacitor bank
10 minutes
30 minutes
Overhead line
10 minutes
20 minutes
Air-core reactor
40 minutes
30 minutes
Busbar
60 minutes
20 minutes
Underground cable
20 to 60 minutes
60 minutes
The figure shows the logic for the thermal overload protection element.
Figure 5-131: Thermal overload protection logic
SETTINGS
Function
Enabled = 1
Block
AND
Off = 0
5
SETTINGS
Base Current
K Factor
SETTING
Source
IA RMS
IB RMS
IC RMS
IA > k × Ib
IB > k × Ib
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
THERMAL PROT 1 PKP
AND
SETTING
OR
Trip Time Constant
RUN
IC > k × Ic
E > 0.1
S
Latch
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
THERMAL PROT 1 OP
R
Reset-dominant
SETTINGS
Reset Time Constant
Minimum Reset Time
RUN
E < 0.1
SETTING
Reset
Off = 0
Reset E to 0
827013A1.CDR
5.8.9 Autoreclose
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  AUTORECLOSE  AUTORECLOSE
 AUTORECLOSE

5-248

AR FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

AR MODE:
Mode 1 (1 & 3 Pole)
Range: Mode 1(1 & 3 Pole), Mode 2 (1 Pole), Mode 3 (3
Pole-A), Mode 4 (3 Pole-B)

Mode 1 Activation:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

Mode 2 Activation:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS

Mode 3 Activation:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

Mode 4 Activation:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AR MAX NUMBER OF
SHOTS: 2
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4

AR INITIATE MODE:
Protection AND CB
Range: Protection AND CB, Protection Only

AR BLOCK BKR1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AR CLOSE TIME BKR 1:
0.10 s
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01

AR BKR MAN CLOSE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AR BLK TIME UPON MAN
CLS: 10.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01

AR 1P INIT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AR 3P INIT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AR 3P TD INIT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AR MULTI-P FAULT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BKR ONE POLE OPEN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BKR 3 POLE OPEN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1:
0.50 s
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01

AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2:
1.20 s
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01

AR 3-P DEAD TIME 3:
2.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01

AR 3-P DEAD TIME 4:
4.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01

AR EXTEND DEAD T 1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AR DEAD TIME 1
EXTENSION: 0.50 s
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01

AR RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AR RESET TIME:
60.00 s
Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01

AR BKR CLOSED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AR BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5
5-249
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5

AR PAUSE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AR INCOMPLETE SEQ
TIME: 5.00 s
Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01

AR BLOCK BKR2:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AR CLOSE TIME BKR2:
0.10 s
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01

AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2:
No
Range: Yes, No

AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1:
No
Range: Yes, No

AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION:
Continue
Range: Continue, Lockout

AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION:
Continue
Range: Continue, Lockout

AR 1-P DEAD TIME:
1.00 s
Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01

AR BKR SEQUENCE:
1-2
Range: 1, 2, 1&2, 1–2, 2–1

AR TRANSFER TIME:
4.00 s
Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01

AR BUS FLT INIT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AR EVENT:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
The autoreclose scheme is intended for use on transmission lines with circuit breakers operated in both the single pole and
three pole modes, in one or two breaker arrangements. The autoreclose scheme provides four programs with different
operating cycles, depending on the fault type. Each of the four programs can be set to trigger up to four reclosing
attempts. The second, third, and fourth attempts always perform three-pole reclosing and have independent dead time
delays.
When used in two breaker applications, the reclosing sequence is selectable. The reclose signal can be sent to one
selected breaker only, to both breakers simultaneously or to both breakers in sequence (one breaker first and then, after a
delay to check that the reclose was successful, to the second breaker). When reclosing in sequence, the first breaker
should reclose with either the single-pole or three-pole dead time according to the fault type and reclose mode; the second
breaker should follow the successful reclosure of the first breaker. When reclosing simultaneously, for the first shot both
breakers should reclose with either the single-pole or three-pole dead time, according to the fault type and the reclose
mode.
The signal used to initiate the autoreclose scheme is the trip output from protection. This signal can be single pole tripping
for single phase faults and three phase tripping for multi-phase faults. The autoreclose scheme has five operating states.
Table 5-35: Autoreclose states
State
Characteristic
Enabled
Scheme is permitted to operate
Disabled
Scheme is not permitted to operate
Reset
Scheme is permitted to operate and shot count is reset to 0
Reclose in progress
Scheme has been initiated but the reclose cycle is not finished (successful or not)
Lockout
Scheme is not permitted to operate until reset received
5-250
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Autoreclose programs
The autorecloser provides four programs that can cause from one to four reclose attempts (shots). After the first shot, all
subsequent recloses are always three-pole. If the maximum number of shots selected is “1” (only one reclose attempt) and
the fault is persistent, after the first reclose the scheme goes to lockout upon another Initiate signal.
For the three-pole reclose programs (modes 3 and 4), an AR FORCE 3-P FlexLogic operand is set. This operand can be used in
connection with the tripping logic to cause a three-pole trip for single-phase faults.
Table 5-36: Autoreclose programs
Mode
Autoreclose
mode
First shot
Second shot
Third shot
Fourth shot
1
1 & 3 Pole
1 Pole
3 Pole
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
2
1 Pole
1 Pole
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
3
3 Pole-A
3 Pole
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
Lockout
4
3 Pole-B
3 Pole
3 Pole
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
3 Pole or
Lockout
SingleMulti-phase SingleMulti-phase SingleMulti-phase SingleMulti-phase
phase fault fault
phase fault fault
phase fault fault
phase fault fault
The four autoreclose modes are described as follows:
•
1 & 3 Pole — In this mode, the autorecloser starts the AR 1-P DEAD TIME timer for the first shot if the autoreclose is
single-phase initiated, the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 timer if the autoreclose is three-pole initiated, and the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2
timer if the autoreclose is three-phase time delay initiated. If two or more shots are enabled, the second, third, and
fourth shots are always three-pole and start the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2(4) timers.
•
1 Pole — In this mode, the autorecloser starts the AR 1-P DEAD TIME for the first shot if the fault is single phase. If the
fault is three-phase or a three-pole trip on the breaker occurred during the single-pole initiation, the scheme goes to
lockout without reclosing. If two or more shots are enabled, the second, third, and fourth shots are always three-pole
and start the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2(4) timers.
•
3 Pole-A — In this mode, the autorecloser is initiated only for single phase faults, although the trip is three pole. The
autorecloser uses the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 for the first shot if the fault is single phase. If the fault is multi phase the
scheme goes to Lockout without reclosing. If two or more shots are enabled, the second, third, and fourth shots are
always three-phase and start the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2(4) timers.
•
3 Pole-B — In this mode, the autorecloser is initiated for any type of fault and starts the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 for the first
shot. If the initiating signal is AR 3P TD INIT the scheme starts AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 for the first shot. If two or more shots
are enabled, the second, third, and fourth shots are always three-phase and start the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2(4) timers.
Basic reclosing operation
Reclosing operation is determined primarily by the AR MODE and AR BKR SEQUENCE settings. The reclosing sequences are
started by the initiate inputs. A reclose initiate signal sends the scheme into the reclose-in-progress (RIP) state, asserting
the AR RIP FlexLogic operand. The scheme is latched into the RIP state and resets only when an AR CLS BKR 1 (autoreclose
breaker 1) or AR CLS BKR 2 (autoreclose breaker 2) operand is generated or the scheme goes to the Lockout state.
The dead time for the initial reclose operation is determined by the AR 1-P DEAD TIME, AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1, or AR 3-P DEAD
TIME 2 setting, depending on the fault type and the mode selected. After the dead time interval the scheme asserts the AR
CLOSE BKR 1 or AR CLOSE BKR 2 operands, as determined by the sequence selected. These operands are latched until the
breaker closes or the scheme goes to Reset or Lockout.
There are three initiate programs: single pole initiate, three pole initiate, and three pole time delay initiate. Any of these
reclose initiate signals start the reclose cycle and set the reclose-in-progress (AR RIP) operand. The reclose-in-progress
operand is sealed-in until the Lockout or Reset signal appears.
The three-pole initiate and three-pole time delay initiate signals are latched until the AR CLOSE BKR1, AR CLOSE BKR2, Lockout,
or Reset signal appears.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-251
5
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Autoreclose pause
The pause input offers the possibility of freezing the autoreclose cycle until the pause signal disappears. This can be done
when a trip occurs and simultaneously or previously, some conditions are detected such as out-of step or loss of guard
frequency, or a remote transfer trip signal is received. The pause signal freezes all four dead timers. When the ‘pause’
signal disappears the autoreclose cycle is resumed by continuing the shot timer it was left at when paused.
This feature can be also used when a transformer is tapped from the protected line and a reclose is not wanted until the
transformer is removed from the line. In this case, the reclose scheme is "paused" until the transformer is disconnected.
The AR PAUSE input forces a three-pole trip through the 3-P DEADTIME 2 path.
Evolving faults
1.25 cycles after the single pole dead time has been initiated, the AR FORCE 3P TRIP operand is set and later resets only when
the scheme is reset or goes to Lockout. This approach ensures that when a fault on one phase evolves to include another
phase during the single pole dead time of the auto-recloser the scheme forces a three-pole trip and reclose.
Reclosing scheme operation for one breaker
•
Permanent Fault — Consider Mode 1, which calls for 1-Pole or 3-Pole Time Delay 1 for the first reclosure and 3-Pole
Time Delay 2 for the second reclosure, and assume a permanent fault on the line. Also assume the scheme is in the
Reset state. For the first single-phase fault the AR 1-P DEAD TIME timer is started, while for the first multi-phase fault
the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 timer is started. If the AR 3P TD INIT signal is high, the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 starts for the first shot.
If AR MAX NO OF SHOTS is set to “1”, upon the first reclose the shot counter is set to 1. Upon reclosing, the fault is again
detected by protection and reclose is initiated. The breaker is tripped three-pole through the AR SHOT COUNT >0 operand
that sets the AR FORCE 3P operand. Because the shot counter has reached the maximum number of shots permitted,
the scheme is sent to the Lockout state.
If AR MAX NO OF SHOTS is set to “2”, upon the first reclose the shot counter is set to 1. Upon reclosing, the fault is again
detected by protection and reclose is initiated. The breaker is tripped three-pole through the AR SHOT COUNT >0 operand
that sets the AR FORCE 3P operand. After the second reclose, the shot counter is set to 2. Upon reclosing, the fault is
again detected by protection, the breaker is tripped three-pole, and reclose is initiated again. Because the shot
counter has reached the maximum number of shots permitted, the scheme is sent to the lockout state.
5
•
Transient Fault — When a reclose output signal is sent to close the breaker, the reset timer is started. If the reclosure
sequence is successful (there is no initiating signal and the breaker is closed), the reset timer times out, returning the
scheme to the reset state with the shot counter set to "0" and making it ready for a new reclose cycle.
Reclosing scheme operation for two breakers
•
Permanent Fault — The general method of operation is the same as that outlined for the one breaker applications
except for the following description, which assumes AR BKR SEQUENCE is “1-2” (reclose Breaker 1 before Breaker 2). The
signal output from the dead time timers passes through the breaker selection logic to initiate reclosing of Breaker 1.
The Close Breaker 1 signal initiates the Transfer Timer. After the reclose of the first breaker, the fault is again detected
by the protection, the breaker is tripped three pole and the autoreclose scheme is initiated. The Initiate signal then
stops the transfer timer. After the 3-P dead time times out, the Close Breaker 1 signal closes the first breaker again
and starts the transfer timer. Since the fault is permanent, the protection trips again initiating the autoreclose scheme
that is sent to Lockout by the SHOT COUNT = MAX signal.
•
Transient Fault — When the first reclose output signal is sent to close Breaker 1, the reset timer starts. The close
Breaker 1 signal initiates the transfer timer that times out and sends the close signal to the second breaker. If the
reclosure sequence is successful (both breakers closed and there is no initiating signal), the reset timer times out,
returning the scheme to the reset state with the shot counter set to 0. The scheme is ready for a new reclose cycle.
AR BKR1(2) reclose fail
If the selected sequence is “1–2” or “2–1” and after the first or second reclose attempt the breaker fails to close, there are
two options. If the AR BKR 1(2) FAIL OPTION is set to “Lockout,” the scheme goes to lockout state. When it is set to “Continue,”
the reclose process continues with Breaker 2. At the same time the shot counter is decreased (since the closing process
was not completed).
5-252
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Scheme reset after reclosure
When a reclose output signal is sent to close either breaker 1 or 2, the reset timer is started. If the reclosure sequence is
successful (there is no initiating signal and the breakers are closed), the reset timer times out, returning the scheme to the
reset state, with the shot counter set to 0, making it ready for a new reclose cycle.
In two breaker schemes, if one breaker is in the out-of-service state and the other is closed at the end of the reset time, the
scheme also resets. If at the end of the reset time at least one breaker, which is not in the out-of-service state, is open the
scheme is sent to Lockout.
The reset timer is stopped if the reclosure sequence is not successful: an initiating signal present or the scheme is in
Lockout state. The reset timer is also stopped if the breaker is manually closed or the scheme is otherwise reset from
lockout.
Lockout
When a reclose sequence starts by an initiate signal, the scheme moves into the reclose-in-progress state and starts the
incomplete sequence timer. The setting of this timer determines the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose
shot. If a close breaker 1 or 2 signal is not present before this time expires, the scheme goes to “Lockout”.
There are four other conditions that can take the scheme to the Lockout state, as follows:
•
Receipt of ‘Block’ input while in the reclose-in-progress state
•
The reclosing program logic — When a 3P Initiate is present and the autoreclose mode is either 1 Pole or 3Pole-A (3
pole autoreclose for single pole faults only)
•
Initiation of the scheme when the count is at the maximum allowed
•
If at the end of the reset time at least one breaker, which is not in the out-of-service state, is open the scheme is sent
to Lockout. The scheme is also sent to Lockout if one breaker fails to reclose and the setting AR BKR FAIL OPTION is set
to “Lockout”.
Once the Lockout state is set, it is latched until one or more of the following occurs:
•
The scheme is intentionally reset from Lockout, employing the Reset setting of the Autorecloser
•
The Breaker(s) is(are) manually closed from panel switch, SCADA, or other remote control through the AR BRK MAN
CLOSE setting;
•
10 seconds after breaker control detects that breaker(s) were closed
Breaker open before fault
A logic circuit is provided that inhibits the close breaker 1 and close breaker 2 outputs if a reclose initiate (RIP) indicator is
not present within 30 ms of the Breaker Any Phase Open input. This feature is intended to prevent reclosing if one of the
breakers was open in advance of a reclose initiate input to the recloser. This logic circuit resets when the breaker is closed.
Transfer reclose when breaker is blocked
•
When the reclosing sequence 1-2 is selected and Breaker 1 is blocked (AR BKR1 BLK operand is set) the reclose signal
can be transferred direct to the Breaker 2 if AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2 is set to “Yes.” If set to “No”, the scheme is sent to
Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
•
When the reclosing sequence 2-1 is selected and Breaker 2 is blocked (AR BKR2 BLK operand is set) the reclose signal
can be transferred direct to the Breaker 1 if AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1 is set to “Yes.” If set to “No” the scheme is sent to
Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
Force three-pole tripping
The reclosing scheme contains logic that is used to signal trip logic that three-pole tripping is required for certain
conditions. This signal is activated by any of the following:
•
Autoreclose scheme is paused after it was initiated
•
Autoreclose scheme is in the lockout state
•
Autoreclose mode is programmed for three-pole operation
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-253
5
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
•
The shot counter is not at 0; that is, the scheme is not in the reset state. This ensures a second trip is three-pole when
reclosing onto a permanent single phase fault.
•
1.25 cycles after the single-pole reclose is initiated by the AR 1P INIT signal
Zone 1 extent
The zone 1 extension philosophy here is to apply an overreaching zone permanently as long as the relay is ready to
reclose, and reduce the reach when reclosing. Another zone 1 extension approach is to operate normally from an
underreaching zone, and use an overreaching distance zone when reclosing the line with the other line end open. This
philosophy can be programmed via the line pickup scheme.
The “Extended Zone 1" is 0 when autoreclose is in lockout or disabled and 1 when autoreclose is in reset.
•
When "Extended Zone 1" is 0, the distance functions are set to normal underreach Zone 1 setting
•
When "Extended Zone 1" is 1, the distance functions can be set to Extended Zone 1 Reach, which is an overreaching
setting
•
During a reclose cycle, "Extended Zone 1" goes to 0 as soon as the first CLOSE BREAKER signal is issued (AR SHOT COUNT
> 0) and remains 0 until the recloser goes back to reset
Settings
The single-phase autoreclose settings are as follows.
5
AR MODE — This setting selects the Autoreclose operating mode from the four available reclose modes (Mode 1: 1 & 3 Pole,
Mode 2: 1 Pole, Mode 3: 3 Pole-A and Mode 4: 3 Pole-B), which functions in conjunction with signals received at the initiation
inputs as described. The autorecloser runs in this mode until a different mode is activated through the AR Mode Activation
inputs explained as follows.
Mode 1 to Mode 4 Activation — This setting selects an operand for activating the corresponding AR mode in runtime. Mode
change via activation input takes place when only one of the four activation inputs is high and the AR RIP operand is low
(that is, reclose is not in progress) and also the mode to be activated is different from the existing mode, otherwise the
activation input is ignored and the existing mode continues to be used. See details in the Mode Control Logic diagram.
AR MAX NUMBER OF SHOTS — This setting specifies the number of reclosures that can be attempted before reclosure goes to
lockout when the fault is permanent.
AR INITIATE MODE — This setting selects the autoreclose initiation mode. When selected as “Protection AND CB,” the
autoreclose element is initiated by protection operation and begins incrementing the autoreclose dead time timer when a
circuit breaker is open. Breaker status is determined from breaker auxiliary contacts which need to be correctly configured
in breaker settings. In “Protection only” initiation mode, the autoreclose element is initiated by protection operation and
begins incrementing the dead time when protection resets, without the need of breaker auxiliary contacts.
AR BLOCK BKR1 — This input selects an operand that blocks the reclose command for breaker 1. This condition can be for
example: breaker low air pressure, reclose in progress on another line (for the central breaker in a breaker and a half
arrangement), or a sum of conditions combined in FlexLogic.
AR CLOSE TIME BKR1 — This setting represents the closing time for the breaker 1 from the moment the “Close” command is
sent to the moment the contacts are closed.
AR BKR MAN CLOSE — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that represents manual close command to a breaker
associated with the autoreclose scheme.
AR BLK TIME UPON MAN CLS — The autoreclose scheme can be disabled for a programmable time delay after an associated
circuit breaker is manually commanded to close, preventing reclosing onto an existing fault such as grounds on the line.
This delay must be longer than the slowest expected trip from any protection not blocked after manual closing. If the
autoreclose scheme is not initiated after a manual close and this time expires the autoreclose scheme is set to the reset
state.
AR 1P INIT — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that is intended to initiate single-pole autoreclosure.
AR 3P INIT — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that is intended to initiate three-pole autoreclosure, first timer (AR 3P
DEAD TIME 1) that can be used for a high-speed autoreclosure.
5-254
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
AR 3P TD INIT — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand intended to initiate three-pole autoreclosure. second timer (AR 3P
DEAD TIME 2) can be used for a time-delay autoreclosure. If the operand assigned to this setting and the AR 3P INIT setting
are asserted simultaneously, then autoreclose does not activate the first and second shot timers at the same time.
Instead, the priority is given to the AR 3P INIT operand.
AR MULTI-P FAULT — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that indicates a multi-phase fault. Set the operand value to
zero for single-phase to ground faults.
BKR ONE POLE OPEN — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that indicates that the breaker has opened correctly
following a single phase to ground fault and the autoreclose scheme can start timing the single pole dead time (for 1-2
reclose sequence for example, breaker 1 trips single pole and breaker 2 trips 3 pole).
The scheme has a pre-wired input that indicates breaker status.
BKR 3 POLE OPEN — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that indicates that the breaker has opened three pole and the
autoreclose scheme can start timing the three pole dead time. The scheme has a pre-wired input that indicates breaker
status.
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 — This is the dead time following the first three pole trip. This intentional delay can be used for a high-
speed three-pole autoreclose. Set it longer than the estimated de-ionizing time following the three-pole trip.
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 — This is the dead time following the second three-pole trip or initiated by the AR 3P TD INIT input. This
intentional delay is typically used for a time delayed three-pole autoreclose (as opposed to high speed three-pole
autoreclose).
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 3 — This setting represents the dead time following the third three-pole trip.
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 4 — This setting represents the dead time following the fourth three-pole trip.
AR EXTEND DEAD T 1 — This setting selects an operand that adapts the duration of the dead time for the first shot to the
possibility of non-simultaneous tripping at the two line ends. Typically this is the operand set when the communication
channel is out of service.
AR DEAD TIME 1 EXTENSION — This timer sets the length of the dead time 1 extension for possible non-simultaneous tripping
of the two ends of the line.
AR RESET — This setting selects the operand that forces the autoreclose scheme from any state to reset. Typically this is a
manual reset from lockout, local, or remote.
AR RESET TIME — A reset timer output resets the recloser following a successful reclosure sequence. The setting is based on
the breaker time that is the minimum time required between successive reclose sequences.
AR BKR CLOSED — This setting selects an operand that indicates that the breakers are closed at the end of the reset time
and the scheme can reset.
AR BLOCK — This setting selects the operand that blocks the autoreclose scheme (it can be a sum of conditions, such as
time delayed tripping, breaker failure, and bus differential protection. If the block signal is present before autoreclose
scheme initiation, the AR DISABLED FlexLogic operand is set. If the block signal occurs when the scheme is in the RIP state,
the scheme is sent to lockout.
AR PAUSE — The pause input offers the ability to freeze the autoreclose cycle until the pause signal disappears. This can be
done when a trip occurs and simultaneously or previously, some conditions are detected, such as out-of step or loss of
guard frequency, or a remote transfer trip signal is received. When the pause signal disappears the autoreclose cycle is
resumed. This feature can also be used when a transformer is tapped from the protected line and a reclose is not desirable
until it is disconnected from the line. In this situation, the reclose scheme pauses until the transformer is disconnected.
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME — This timer is used to set the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose shot. It is
started whenever a reclosure is initiated and is active until the CLOSE BKR1 or CLOSE BKR2 signal is sent. If all conditions
allowing a breaker closure are not satisfied when this time expires, the scheme goes to “Lockout”. The minimum
permissible setting is established by the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 timer setting. Settings beyond this determine the wait time for
the breaker to open so that the reclose cycle can continue and/or for the AR PAUSE signal to reset and allow the reclose
cycle to continue and/or for the AR BKR1 BLK signal to disappear and allow the AR CLOSE BKR1 signal to be sent.
AR BLOCK BKR2 — This input selects an operand that blocks the reclose command for breaker 2. This condition can be for
example: breaker low air pressure, reclose in progress on another line (for the central breaker in a breaker and a half
arrangement), or a sum of conditions combined in FlexLogic.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-255
5
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
AR CLOSE TIME BKR2 — This setting represents the closing time for the breaker 2 from the moment the "Close" command is
sent to the moment the contacts are closed.
AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2 — This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 1-2 and
breaker 1 is blocked. When set to “Yes” the closing command is transferred direct to breaker 2 without waiting the transfer
time. When set to “No” the closing command is blocked by the AR BKR1 BLK signal and the scheme will be sent to lockout
by the incomplete sequence timer.
AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1 — This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 2-1 and
breaker 2 is blocked. When set to “Yes” the closing command is transferred direct to breaker 1 without waiting the transfer
time. When set to “No”, the closing command is blocked by the AR BKR2 BLK signal and the scheme is sent to lockout by
the incomplete sequence timer.
AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION — This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 1-2 and
Breaker 1 has failed to close. When set to “Continue” the closing command is transferred to breaker 2, which continues the
reclosing cycle until successful (the scheme resets) or unsuccessful (the scheme goes to Lockout). When set to “Lockout”
the scheme goes to lockout without attempting to reclose breaker 2.
AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION — This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 2-1 and
Breaker 2 has failed to close. When set to “Continue” the closing command is transferred to breaker 1, which continues the
reclosing cycle until successful (the scheme resets) or unsuccessful (the scheme goes to Lockout). When set to “Lockout”
the scheme goes to lockout without attempting to reclose breaker 1.
AR 1-P DEAD TIME — Set this intentional delay longer than the estimated de-ionizing time after the first single-pole trip.
AR BREAKER SEQUENCE — This setting selects the breakers reclose sequence: Select “1” for reclose breaker 1 only, “2” for
reclose breaker 2 only, “1&2” for reclose both breakers simultaneously, “1-2” for reclose breakers sequentially; Breaker 1
first, and “2-1” for reclose breakers sequentially; Breaker 2 first.
5
AR TRANSFER TIME — The transfer time is used only for breaker closing sequence 1-2 or 2-1, when the two breakers are
reclosed sequentially. The transfer timer is initiated by a close signal to the first breaker. The transfer timer transfers the
reclose signal from the breaker selected to close first to the second breaker. The time delay setting is based on the
maximum time interval between the autoreclose signal and the protection trip contact closure assuming a permanent
fault (unsuccessful reclose). Therefore, the minimum setting is equal to the maximum breaker closing time plus the
maximum line protection operating time plus a suitable margin. This setting prevents the autoreclose scheme from
transferring the close signal to the second breaker unless a successful reclose of the first breaker occurs.
AR BUS FLT INIT — This setting is used in breaker-and-a-half applications to allow the autoreclose control function to
perform reclosing with only one breaker previously opened by bus protection. For line faults, both breakers must open for
the autoreclose reclosing cycles to take effect.
5-256
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
•
Off = 0
Off = 0
Off = 0
Off = 0
Off = 0
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Off = 0
•
AP RIP operand is low, and
•
The mode to be activated is different from the current AR mode
Off = 0
Off = 0
AR DISABLED
EVOLVING FAULT
SETTING
Reset
BKR CLOSED
Off = 0
from autoreclose logic sheet 3
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
SETTING
Multi P Fault
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE SELECT MULTI-P
.
Off.= 0
Off = 0
Mode 4
.
SETTING
AR Mode Activation
Mode
. 1
SETTING
AR Mode Mode 1: 1 & 3 Pole
Mode 2: 1 Pole
Mode 3: 3 Pole-A
Mode 4: 3 Pole-B
SHOT COUNT = MAX
from autoreclose logic sheet 2
SETTING
Pause
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR SHOT COUNT > 0
CLOSE BKR1 OR BKR2
RESET
from autoreclose logic sheet 2
SETTING
AR Initiate Mode
= Protection and CB
BKR 3 POLE OPEN
from autoreclose logic sheet 3
SETTING
Bkr 3 Pole Open
BKR ONE POLE OPEN
from autoreclose logic sheet 3
SETTING
Bkr 1 Pole Open
SETTING
3-P TD Init
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP AR INIT 3 POLE
SETTING
3-P Init
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP 1 POLE
SETTING
1-P Init
BKR MANUAL CLOSE
from autoreclose logic sheet 3
SETTING
Breaker Manual Close
Off = 0
Enabled = 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LINE PICKUP OP
Block
SETTING
Function
AND
Mode
Switching
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
OR
TIMER
10 s
0
5 ms
AND
TIMER
0
OR
0
OR
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
Lockout
Blk Time Upon Man Cls
SETTING
AND
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
R
S
R
S
R
S
Latch
Latch
Latch
OR
OR
OR
R
S
AND
Latch
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
1.25 cycles
TIMER
3-P Dead Time 1
SETTING
1-P Dead Time 1
SETTING
Latch
OR
AND
OR
Inc Seq Time
SETTING
AND
BKR FAIL TO RECLS
0
0
0
OR
from autoreclose logic sheet 2
SHOT COUNT = 3
from sheet 2
AND
SHOT COUNT = 2
from sheet 2
R
S
SHOT COUNT = 1
from autoreclose logic sheet 2
AND
AND
0
OR
AND
AND
AND
OR
3-P Dead Time 4
SETTING
3-P Dead Time 3
SETTING
3-P Dead Time 2
SETTING
0
Off = 0
Dead T1 Extension
SETTINGS
Extend Dead T1
0
0
0
OR
EVOLVING FAULT
AND
CLOSE
827089AT.CDR
PROTECTION & CB
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR ZONE 1 EXTENT
RESET
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR LO
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR 3P/2 RIP
AR 3P/3 RIP
AR 3P/4 RIP
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR 1-P RIP
AR 3-P/1 RIP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR RIP
AR INITIATE
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR ENABLED
AR DISABLED
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Figure 5-132: Single-pole autoreclose logic (Sheet 1 of 3)
5
In runtime, AR mode can be changed through the mode control logic as shown in the following diagram. Initially, the
autorecloser runs in the mode as per AR MODE setting. Then the relay checks the AR activation inputs in each protection
pass. The AR mode is switched to the new mode when
Only one of four activation inputs is high, and
The logic allows activation of one mode at a time. Simultaneous multiple activations are ignored and mode switching does
not happen. However, a FlexLogic operand, AR MODE SWITCH FAIL, is asserted if either simultaneous multiple activations are
initiated, or a single activation is initiated but recloser is already in progress.
5-257
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The active AR mode is memorized (latched) on power cycling. This means that the relay uses the last-used mode on powerup. The AR mode resets to the default mode (specified by the AR MODE setting) when any settings in the autoreclose
function are changed.
Figure 5-133: Mode control logic
Multiple (>1)
inputs are
high
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
AR MODE SWITCH FAIL
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR MODE =1
AR MODE =2
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR MODE =3
AR RIP
AR MODE =4
SETTING
Only 1
out of 4
is high
SETTING
AR M0DE:
Mode 1: 1 & 3 Pole
AR Mode Activation
Mode 1:
AND
Mode 2: 1 Pole
Off = 0
Mode 2:
Off = 0
Mode to be activated
Mode 3:
Off = 0
a=1….4
Mode 4:
Off = 0
Note: only one mode can
be activated at a time.
Simultaneous multiple
modes activation will be
ignored.
a
1 if a ≠ b
=
b
Switch to
new mode
Current AR Mode
b=1….4
Mode 3: 3 Pole - A
Mode 4: 3 Pole -B
0 otherwise
427248A1.vsd
In addition, the current AR mode is available as FlexLogic Operands because AR Mode equals to 1, 2, 3, and 4 respectively
so that it can be monitored and logged.
5
5-258
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
RESET
from sheet 1
SETTING
Bkr Closed
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 OPEN
SETTING
Block Bkr2
No = 0
=1
=2
=1&2
=1–2
=2–1
Off = 0
Off = 0
Continue = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 OOS
SETTING
Bkr2 Fail Option
SETTING
Transfer 2 to 1
CLOSE
from sheet 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR LO
AR INITIATE
from sheet 1
No = 0
Off = 0
Continue = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR RIP
SETTING
Bkr Sequence
SETTING
Bkr1 Fail Option
SETTING
Transfer 1 to 2
PROTECTION & CB
From sheet 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 OOS
SETTING
Block Bkr1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 OPEN
AND
To sheet 3
AND
OR
OR
AND
AND
30 ms
TIMER
30 ms
OR
OR
TIMER
OR
0
OR
0
OR
OR
AND
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR BKR 1 BLK
R
S
Latch
AND
BKR CLOSED
from sheet 3
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
OR
AND
SETTING
Reset Time
AND
0
SETTING
Transfer Time
OR
0
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
Lockout
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR BKR 2 BLK
OR
OR
Lockout
OR
AND
AND
OR
Reset count
Decrement
shout count
Increment
shout count
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
LOCKOUT
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
R
S
Latch
2 ms
OR
R
S
150 ms
Latch
2 ms
SETTING
Close Time Bkr2
=4
=3
=2
=1
=0
= maximum
SETTING
Max Number of Shots
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
LOCKOUT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
150 ms
OR
OR
AND
AND
to autoreclose
logic sheet 1
827090AE.CDR
to autoreclose
logic sheet 3
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR RESET
BKR2 MNL OPEN
RESET
2 ms
SETTING
Close Time Bkr2
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR CLOSE BKR 2
BKR FAIL TO RECLS
to autoreclose
logic sheet 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR SHOT CNT > 0
ACTUAL VALUES
AR SHOT COUNT: 4
AR SHOT COUNT: 3
AR SHOT COUNT: 2
AR SHOT COUNT: 1
AR SHOT COUNT: 0
CLOSE BKR 1 OR 2
to Lockout
to autoreclose
logic sheet 3
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR CLOSE BKR 1
AND
SHOT COUNT = MAX
OR
2 ms
SETTING
Close Time Bkr1
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR SHOT CNT = 4
AR SHOT CNT = 3
AR SHOT CNT = 2
AR SHOT CNT = 1
AND
BKR1 MNL OPEN
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Figure 5-134: Single-pole autoreclose logic (Sheet 2 of 3)
5
5-259
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-135: Single-pole autoreclose logic (Sheet 3 of 3)
}
From sheet 2
From
Breaker Control
scheme
From sheet 2
5
From
Breaker Control
scheme
}
}
}
BKR 1 MNL OPEN
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 OOS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 OOS
OR
BKR 2 MNL OPEN
1
2
1&2
1-2
2-1
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
OR
BKR MANUAL CLOSE
(To sheet 1)
OR
BKR CLOSED
(To sheet 1 and 2)
OR
BKR 3 POLE OPEN
(To sheet 1)
OR
BKR ONE POLE OPEN
(To sheet 1)
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 MNL CLS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
AND
OR
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 OPEN
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 2 OPEN
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BUS-FLT INIT
OR
OFF = 0
AND
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 ONE P OPEN
OR
AND
OR
AND
OR
OR
AND
OR
AND
827833AA.CDR
5-260
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ. TIME
AR TRANSFER TIME
AR CLOSE BKR2
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
AR 3P/2 RIP
AR 3P INIT
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
AR SHOT COUNT > 0
AR RESET TIME
AR CLOSE BKR1
CLOSE
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
AR 1-P RIP
AR RIP
AR 1P INIT
PREFAULT
F
A
U
L
T
T
R
I
P
1.25 cycle
1-P DEAD TIME
T PROT RESET
T TRIP BKR
T PROT
1ST SHOT
T PROT
T TRIP BKR
T CLOSE BKR1
3-P/2 DEAD TIME
T PROT RESET
T CLOSE BKR1
TRANSFER TIME
2ND SHOT
RESET TIME
T CLOSE BKR2
R
E
S
E
T
842703A4.CDR
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Figure 5-136: Example of reclosing sequence
5
5-261
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.9 Inputs/outputs
5.9.1 Contact inputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT INPUTS
 CONTACT INPUTS


 CONTACT INPUT H5a


CONTACT INPUT H5a ID:
Cont Ip 1
Range: up to 12 alphanumeric
characters

CONTACT INPUT H5a
DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms
Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

CONTACT INPUT H5a
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc

5

 CONTACT INPUT xxx


 CONTACT INPUT
 THRESHOLDS

Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each
group of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules)
which contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs.
An alphanumeric ID can be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The CONTACT IP
X On (Logic 1) FlexLogic operand corresponds to contact input “X” being closed, while CONTACT IP X Off corresponds to contact
input “X” being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to overcome ‘contact
bouncing’ conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maximum contact
debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT INPUT EVENTS is
set to “Enabled,” every change in the contact input state triggers an event.
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the following
figure. The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a
user-settable debounce time in order for the C60 to validate the new contact state. In the following figure, the debounce
time is set at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once validated
(de-bounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting.
A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the
contact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the figure).
Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system
cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic operand reflecting
the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the
figure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as
well as FlexLogic equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.
5-262
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The FlexLogic operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one
protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs
just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration
of the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically
a delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is
below 1 ms.
For example, eight protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a
contact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1
ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 s accuracy using the
time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 shown). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the
DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the
debounce timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the
change.
The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks
no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8) transitions.
INPUT
VOLTAGE
Figure 5-137: Input contact debouncing mechanism and time-stamping sample timing
USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD
2
Time stamp of the first
scan corresponding to
the new validated state is
logged in the SOE record
1
At this time, the
new (HIGH)
contact state is
validated
6
3
TM
The FlexLogic
operand is going to
be asserted at this
protection pass
5
5
Time stamp of the first
scan corresponding to the
new validated state is
logged in the SOE record
At this time, the new
(LOW) contact state is
validated
RAW CONTACT
STATE
7
The FlexLogicTM
operand is going to be
de-asserted at this
protection pass
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
FLEXLOGICTM
OPERAND
4
SCAN TIME
(0.5 msec)
The FlexLogicTM operand
changes reflecting the
validated contact state
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
PROTECTION PASS
(8 times a cycle controlled by the
frequency tracking mechanism)
The FlexLogicTM operand
changes reflecting the
validated contact state
8
842709A1.cdr
Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each
group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This
value is selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125 V sources
and 166 for 250 V sources.
For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it
in the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5a ID: "Breaker Closed (52b)"
CONTACT INPUT H5a EVENTS: "Enabled"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-263
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.9.2 Virtual inputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL INPUTS  VIRTUAL INPUT 1(64)
 VIRTUAL INPUT 1


VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
Virt Ip 1
Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE: Latched
Range: Self-Reset, Latched

VIRTUAL INPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
There are 64 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (via the
COMMANDS menu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to “Off” (logic 0) unless the
appropriate input signal is received.
If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to “Disabled,” the input is forced to off (logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the
input. If set to “Enabled,” the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic operands in
response to received input signals and the applied settings.
There are two types of operation: self-reset and latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x type is “Self-Reset,” when the input signal
transits from off to on, the output operand is set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return to
off. If set to “Latched,” the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received
input.
5
The self-reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations. If the
operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic equation, it likely needs to be lengthened in time. A
FlexLogic timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
Figure 5-138: Virtual inputs logic
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
S
AND
Latch
“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1”
SETTING
“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0”
R
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
AND
SETTING
OR
(Flexlogic Operand)
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE:
Latched
AND
Self - Reset
827080A3.CDR
5.9.3 Contact outputs
5.9.3.1 Digital outputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1
 CONTACT OUTPUT H1

5-264

CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID
Cont Op 1
Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

OUTPUT H1 OPERATE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS

CONTACT OUTPUT H1
EVENTS: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor determines from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis
which contact outputs are available and then present the settings for only these outputs.
An ID can be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output can be any FlexLogic operand
(virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic operand can be used to SEAL-IN the
relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so.
For example, the trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A
contacts (see the trip circuit example in the Digital Elements section). The monitor sets a flag (see the specifications for
Form-A). The name of the FlexLogic operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the
name of the flag; for example, Cont OP 1 IOn.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current
flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring
an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect
operation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in
the trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the
tripping circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called trip seal-in.
This can be realized in the C60 using the Cont OP 1 IOn FlexLogic operand to seal-in the contact output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: “Cont Op 1"
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic operand
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: “Cont Op 1 IOn”
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: “Enabled”
5
5.9.3.2 Latching outputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
 CONTACT OUTPUT H1a


OUTPUT H1a ID
L-Cont Op 1
Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

OUTPUT H1a OPERATE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

OUTPUT H1a RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

OUTPUT H1a TYPE:
Operate-dominant
Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant

OUTPUT H1a EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The C60 latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such
they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and
populates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the hardware
before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic).
The latching output modules, either as a part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all
latching contacts opened. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching
contacts when replacing a module.
Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring
capabilities for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR self-test
error is declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic operand, event, and target message.
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE — This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the ‘close coil’ of the contact. The relay sealsin this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the RESET input is logic 0 (off), any activity of the
OPERATE input, such as subsequent chattering, does not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET inputs active
(logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1a TYPE setting.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-265
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
OUTPUT H1a RESET — This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the ‘trip coil’ of the contact. The relay seals-in
this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 (off), any activity of the
RESET input, such as subsequent chattering, does not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET inputs active (logic
1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1a TYPE setting.
OUTPUT H1a TYPE — This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the
OPERATE and RESET signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact closes if set to
“Operate-dominant” and opens if set to “Reset-dominant.”
Application example 1
A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The
following settings are applied.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT
OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “PUSHBUTTON 2 ON”
Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
 USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.00 s”
PUSHBUTTON 2 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 2 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.00 s”
5
Application example 2
A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while
the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed
after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT
OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2”
OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”
OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO1”
Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they do not
operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time can occur.
Therefore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay do not guarantee any specific sequence of operation
(such as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the
control inputs as shown in the next application example.
Application example 3
A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement
this functionality.
5-266
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista example shown).
Set both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT
OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO4”
OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”
OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO3”
Application example 4
A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact is to remain closed as long as VO1
is high, and is to remain opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows.
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista example shown).
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT
OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2”
5.9.4 Virtual outputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(96)
 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1


VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID
Virt Op 1
Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-267
5
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
There are 96 virtual outputs that can be assigned using FlexLogic. If not assigned, the output is forced to ‘OFF’ (Logic 0). An
ID also can be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the
FlexLogic equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings is
programmed as follows:
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip"
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"
5.9.5 Resetting
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  RESETTING
 RESETTING


RESET OPERAND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display. Once
set, the latching mechanism holds all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition
has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic latches) to the reset state.
The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate RESET button, a remote device via a communications channel, or any
programmed operand.
5
When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic operands are created. These operands, which are stored
as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources of RESET commands each create the
RESET OP FlexLogic operand. Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual operand RESET OP
(PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS) or RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. The RESET OPERAND setting here
selects the operand that creates the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.
5.9.6 Direct inputs and outputs
5.9.6.1 Direct inputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  DIRECT INPUTS  DIRECT INPUT 1(32)
 DIRECT INPUT 1


DIRECT INPUT 1
NAME: Dir Ip 1
Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

DIRECT INPUT 1
DEVICE ID: 1
Range: 1 to 16

DIRECT INPUT 1
BIT NUMBER: 1
Range: 1 to 32

DIRECT INPUT 1
DEFAULT STATE: Off
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off

DIRECT INPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
These settings specify how the direct input information is processed.
DIRECT INPUT 1 NAME — This setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct input.
DIRECT INPUT 1 DEVICE ID — Represents the source of direct input 1. The specified direct input is driven by the device
identified here.
DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER — The bit number to extract the state for direct input 1. Direct Input 1 is driven by the bit
identified as DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER . This corresponds to the direct output number of the sending device.
DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE — Represents the state of the direct input when the associated direct device is offline. The
following choices are available:
•
On — Defaults the input to Logic 1
•
Off — Defaults the input to Logic 0
5-268
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
•
Latest/On — Freezes the input in case of lost communications. When the latest state is not known, such as after relay
power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input defaults to Logic 1. When communication resumes,
the input becomes fully operational.
•
Latest/Off — Freezes the input in case of lost communications. When the latest state is not known, such as after relay
power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input defaults to Logic 0. When communication resumes,
the input becomes fully operational.
5.9.6.2 Direct outputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  DIRECT OUTPUTS  DIRECT OUTPUT 1(32)
 DIRECT OUTPUT 1


DIRECT OUT 1 NAME:
Dir Out 1
Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

DIRECT OUT 1 OPERAND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

DIRECT OUTPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
DIRECT OUT 1 NAME — This setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct output.
DIR OUT 1 OPERAND — This sets the FlexLogic operand that determines the state of this direct output.
5.9.6.3 Application examples
The examples introduced in the earlier Direct Inputs and Outputs section (part of the Product Setup section) are continued
here to illustrate usage of the direct inputs and outputs.
5
Example 1: Extending input/output capabilities of a UR relay
Consider an application that requires additional quantities of contact inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable
logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED,
such as the C30, to satisfy the additional inputs/outputs and programmable logic requirements. The figure shows that two
IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards.
Figure 5-139: Input and output extension via direct inputs and outputs
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR
Assume that contact input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings are applied (Direct Input 5 and
bit number 12 are used, as an example).
UR IED 1:
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = “2”
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = “12”
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND = “Cont Ip 1 On”
The Cont Ip 1 On operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 5 ON.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-269
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Example 2: Interlocking busbar protection
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown in the figure.
Figure 5-140: Sample interlocking busbar protection scheme
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
BLOCK
UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Assume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked, Device 1
trips the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay.
The following settings are applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to send the blocking signal and Direct Inputs 7, 8,
and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals).
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
5
UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 4:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 1:
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select "On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
DIRECT INPUT 8 DEVICE ID: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 8 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 8 DEFAULT STATE: select "On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
DIRECT INPUT 9 DEVICE ID: "4"
DIRECT INPUT 9 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 9 DEFAULT STATE: select "On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 7 ON, DIRECT INPUT 8 ON, and DIRECT INPUT 9 ON. Upon losing
communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state is set to “On”), or to trip the bus on any
overcurrent condition (all default states set to “Off”).
Example 3: Pilot-aided schemes
Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the following figure.
5-270
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 5-141: Three-terminal line application
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture shown as
follows. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.
Figure 5-142: Single-channel open-loop configuration
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX2
UR IED 2
RX1
TX1
TX2
5
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
In this architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a ‘bridge’. The following
settings are applied:
UR IEC 1:
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "4" (effectively, this is a message from IED 3)
UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "3" (effectively, this is a message from IED 1)
UR IED 2:
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "2"
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 5" (forward a message from 1 to 3)
DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 6" (forward a message from 3 to 1)
The figure shows the signal flow among the three IEDs.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-271
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-143: Signal flow for direct input and output
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 4 = DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 3 = DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 6
UR IED 3
DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
842717A1.CDR
In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal, direct
inputs 5 and 6 are ANDed in FlexLogic and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB POTT RX1
setting).
5.9.7 Teleprotection inputs and outputs
5
5.9.7.1 Overview
The relay provides 16 teleprotection inputs on communications channel 1 (numbered 1-1 through 1-16) and 16
teleprotection inputs on communications channel 2 (on two-terminals two-channel and three-terminal systems only,
numbered 2-1 through 2-16). The remote relay connected to channels 1 and 2 of the local relay is programmed by
assigning FlexLogic operands to be sent via the selected communications channel. This allows the user to create
distributed protection and control schemes via dedicated communications channels. Some examples are directional
comparison pilot schemes and direct transfer tripping. Note that failures of communications channels affect
teleprotection functionality. The teleprotection function must be enabled to utilize the inputs.
5.9.7.2 Teleprotection inputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  TELEPROTECTION  TELEPROT INPUTS
 TELEPROT INPUTS


TELEPROT INPUT 1-1
DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On


TELEPROT INPUT 1-16
DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On

TELEPROT INPUT 2-1
DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On


TELEPROT INPUT 2-16
DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Setting the TELEPROT INPUT ~~ DEFAULT setting to “On” defaults the input to logic 1 when the channel fails. A value of “Off”
defaults the input to logic 0 when the channel fails.
The “Latest/On” and “Latest/Off” values freeze the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known,
such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, then the input defaults to logic 1 for “Latest/
On” and logic 0 for “Latest/Off.”
5-272
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.9.7.3 Teleprotection outputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  TELEPROTECTION  TELEPROT OUTPUTS
 TELEPROT OUTPUTS


TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand


TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-16:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand


TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-16:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
As the following figure demonstrates, processing of the teleprotection inputs/outputs is dependent on the number of
communication channels and terminals. On two-terminal two-channel systems, they are processed continuously on each
channel and mapped separately per channel. Therefore, to achieve redundancy, the user must assign the same operand
on both channels (teleprotection outputs at the sending end or corresponding teleprotection inputs at the receiving end).
On three-terminal two-channel systems, redundancy is achieved by programming signal re-transmittal in the case of
channel failure between any pair of relays.
Figure 5-144: Teleprotection input/output processing
UR-1
UR-2
ACTUAL VALUES
SETTING
CHANNEL 1 STATUS:
TELEPROT INPUT 1-1
DEFAULT:
(same for 1-2...1-16)
SETTING
TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1:
(same for 1-2...1-16)
TELEPROT INPUT 1-1
DEFAULT:
(same for 1-2...1-16)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
(same for 1-2...1-16)
On
OR
Off
CHANNEL 1 STATUS:
(Teleprotection I/O Enabled)
SETTING
(same for 1-2...1-16)
Fail
Off (Flexlogic Operand)
OK
SETTING
TELEPROT INPUT 2-1
DEFAULT:
(same for 2-2...2-16)
OK
(same for 1-2...1-16)
On
OR
Off
UR-2 or UR-3
ACTUAL VALUES
CHANNEL 2 STATUS:
Fail
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
(same for 1-2...1-16)
TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1:
Off (Flexlogic Operand)
TELEPROT INPUT 2-1
DEFAULT:
(same for 1-2...1-16)
TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On
Communication channel #1
TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-1:
(same for 1-2...1-16)
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
ACTUAL VALUES
SETTING
TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On
Off
OK
SETTING
TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On
On
Fail
Off (Flexlogic Operand)
5
On
Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On
(same for 2-2...2-16)
ACTUAL VALUES
CHANNEL 2 STATUS:
Communication channel #2
(On 3-terminal system or 2-terminal
with redundant channel)
Fail
OK
SETTING
TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-1:
(same for 2-2...2-16)
Off (Flexlogic Operand)
842750A2.CDR
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-273
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.10 Transducer inputs/outputs
5.10.1 DCmA inputs
SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  DCMA INPUTS  DCMA INPUT H1(W8)
 DCMA INPUT H1

5

DCMA INPUT H1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

DCMA INPUT H1 ID:
DCMA Ip 1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

DCMA INPUT H1
UNITS: A
Range: six alphanumeric characters

DCMA INPUT H1
RANGE: 0 to -1 mA
Range: 0 to –1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, –1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5
mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 m

DCMA INPUT H1 MIN
VALUE: 0.000
Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001

DCMA INPUT H1 MAX
VALUE: 0.000
Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
Hardware and software are provided to receive signals from external transducers and to convert these signals into a
digital format for use as required. The relay accepts inputs in the range of –1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most
common transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Hardware details are
contained in chapter 3.
Before the DCmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range
and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies
this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter.
DCmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. Configure the individual channels with the
settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8
inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are generated automatically for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel
of a type 5F transducer module installed in slot H.
The function of the channel can be “Enabled” or “Disabled.” If “Disabled,” no actual values are created for the channel. An
alphanumeric “ID” is assigned to each channel; this ID is included in the channel actual value, along with the programmed
units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as volts, °C, megawatts, and so on. This ID is also
used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The DCMA
INPUT H1 RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel.
The DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in
primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250 °C; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1
MIN VALUE value is “0” and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE value is “250.” Another example is a watts transducer with a span
from –20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE value is “–20” and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE value is
“180.” Intermediate values between the minimum and maximum values are scaled linearly.
5.10.2 RTD inputs
SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  RTD INPUTS  RTD INPUT H1(W8)
 RTD INPUT H1

5-274

RTD INPUT H1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

RTD INPUT H1 ID:
RTD Ip 1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

RTD INPUT H1 TYPE:
100Ω Nickel
Range: 100Ω Nickel, 10Ω Copper, 100Ω Platinum,
120Ω Nickel
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external resistance temperature detectors and convert these
signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in
common use. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3.
RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with
the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8
inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel
of a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot.
The function of the channel can be either “Enabled” or “Disabled.” If “Disabled,” there is not an actual value created for the
channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel; this ID is included in the channel actual values. It is also used to
reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. Selecting the type of
RTD connected to the channel configures the channel.
Actions based on RTD overtemperature, such as trips or alarms, are done in conjunction with the FlexElements feature. In
FlexElements, the operate level is scaled to a base of 100°C. For example, a trip level of 150°C is achieved by setting the
operate level at 1.5 pu. FlexElement operands are available to FlexLogic for further interlocking or to operate an output
contact directly.
See the following table for reference temperature values for each RTD type.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-275
5
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Table 5-37: RTD temperature vs. resistance
Temperature
5
Resistance (in ohms)
°C
°F
100 Ω Pt
(DIN 43760)
120 Ω Ni
100 Ω Ni
10 Ω Cu
–50
–58
80.31
86.17
71.81
7.10
–40
–40
84.27
92.76
77.30
7.49
–30
–22
88.22
99.41
82.84
7.88
–20
–4
92.16
106.15
88.45
8.26
–10
14
96.09
113.00
94.17
8.65
0
32
100.00
120.00
100.00
9.04
10
50
103.90
127.17
105.97
9.42
20
68
107.79
134.52
112.10
9.81
30
86
111.67
142.06
118.38
10.19
40
104
115.54
149.79
124.82
10.58
50
122
119.39
157.74
131.45
10.97
60
140
123.24
165.90
138.25
11.35
70
158
127.07
174.25
145.20
11.74
80
176
130.89
182.84
152.37
12.12
90
194
134.70
191.64
159.70
12.51
100
212
138.50
200.64
167.20
12.90
110
230
142.29
209.85
174.87
13.28
120
248
146.06
219.29
182.75
13.67
130
266
149.82
228.96
190.80
14.06
140
284
153.58
238.85
199.04
14.44
150
302
157.32
248.95
207.45
14.83
160
320
161.04
259.30
216.08
15.22
170
338
164.76
269.91
224.92
15.61
180
356
168.47
280.77
233.97
16.00
190
374
172.46
291.96
243.30
16.39
200
392
175.84
303.46
252.88
16.78
210
410
179.51
315.31
262.76
17.17
220
428
183.17
327.54
272.94
17.56
230
446
186.82
340.14
283.45
17.95
240
464
190.45
353.14
294.28
18.34
250
482
194.08
366.53
305.44
18.73
5.10.3 DCmA outputs
SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  DCMA OUTPUTS  DCMA OUTPUT H1(W8)
 DCMA OUTPUT H1

5-276

DCMA OUTPUT H1
SOURCE: Off
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter

DCMA OUTPUT H1
RANGE: –1 to 1 mA
Range: –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA

DCMA OUTPUT H1
MIN VAL: 0.000 pu
Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001

DCMA OUTPUT H1
MAX VAL: 1.000 pu
Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Hardware and software is provided to generate DCmA signals that allow interfacing with external equipment. Hardware
details are contained in chapter 3. The DCmA output channels are arranged in a manner similar to transducer input or CT
and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings as follows.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the
relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same manner used
for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as
the channel number.
Both the output range and a signal driving a given output are user-programmable via the following settings menu (an
example for channel M5 is shown).
The relay checks the driving signal (x in equations below) for the minimum and maximum limits, and subsequently rescales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE. The
following equation is applied:
I out
 I min if x < MIN VAL

=  I max if x > MAX VAL

 k  x – MIN VAL  + I min otherwise
Eq. 5-25
where
x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting
Imin and Imax are defined by the RANGE setting
k is a scaling constant calculated as:
I max – I min
k = ------------------------------------------MAX VAL – MIN VAL
Eq. 5-26
The feature is intentionally inhibited if the MAX VAL and MIN VAL settings are entered incorrectly, for example when MAX VAL
– MIN VAL < 0.1 pu. The resulting characteristic is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 5-145: DCmA output characteristic
OUTPUT CURRENT
Imax
Imin
DRIVING SIGNAL
MIN VAL
MAX VAL
842739A1.CDR
Settings
DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE — This setting specifies an internal analog value to drive the analog output. Actual values
(FlexAnalog parameters) such as power, current amplitude, voltage amplitude, power factor, etc. can be configured as
sources driving DCmA outputs. See Appendix A for a list of FlexAnalog parameters.
DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE — This setting allows selection of the output range. Each DCmA channel can be set independently
to work with different ranges. The three most commonly used output ranges are available.
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL — This setting allows setting the minimum limit for the signal that drives the output. This setting
is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered in per-unit
values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units.
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-277
5
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL — This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output. This setting
is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered in per-unit
values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units.
The DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL and DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL settings are ignored for power factor base units
(i.e. if the DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE is set to FlexAnalog value based on power factor measurement).
NOTE
Three application examples follow.
Example: Power monitoring
A three phase active power on a 13.8 kV system measured via UR-series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the DCmA H1
output of the range of –1 to 1 mA. The following settings are applied on the relay: CT ratio = 1200:5, VT secondary 115, VT
connection is delta, and VT ratio = 120. The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal power factor is 0.90. The
power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20% overload compared to the nominal.
The nominal three-phase power is:
P =
3  13.8 kV  0.8 kA  0.9 = 17.21 MW
Eq. 5-27
The three-phase power with 20% overload margin is:
P max = 1.2  17.21 MW = 20.65 MW
Eq. 5-28
The base unit for power (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
5
P BASE = 115 V  120  1.2 kA = 16.56 MW
Eq. 5-29
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
– 20.65 MW
minimum power = -------------------------- = – 1.247 pu,
16.56 MW
20.65 MW
maximum power = ----------------------- = 1.247 pu
16.56 MW
Eq. 5-30
The following settings are entered:
DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: “SRC 1 P”
DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: “–1 to 1 mA”
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAl: “–1.247 pu”
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: “1.247 pu”
With the above settings, the output will represent the power with the scale of 1 mA per 20.65 MW. The worst-case error for
this application can be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
•
±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or  0.005   1 –  – 1    20.65 MW =  0.207 MW
•
±1% of reading error for the active power at power factor of 0.9
For example at the reading of 20 MW, the worst-case error is 0.01  20 MW + 0.207 MW = 0.407 MW.
Example: Current monitoring
The phase A current (true RMS value) is to be monitored via the H2 current output working with the range from 4 to 20 mA.
The CT ratio is 5000:5 and the maximum load current is 4200 A. The current is to be monitored from 0 A upwards, allowing
for 50% overload.
The phase current with the 50% overload margin is:
I max = 1.5  4.2 kA = 6.3 kA
Eq. 5-31
The base unit for current (see the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
I BASE = 5 kA
Eq. 5-32
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
0 kA
minimum current = ---------- = 0 pu,
5 kA
5-278
6.3 kA
maximum current = -------------- = 1.26 pu
5 kA
Eq. 5-33
C60 BREAKER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
TESTING
The following settings are entered:
DCMA OUTPUT H2 SOURCE: “SRC 1 Ia RMS”
DCMA OUTPUT H2 RANGE: “4 to 20 mA”
DCMA OUTPUT H2 MIN VAL: “0.000 pu”
DCMA OUTPUT H2 MAX VAL: “1.260 pu”
The worst-case error for this application can be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
•
±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or  0.005   20 – 4   6.3 kA =  0.504 kA
•
±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) for currents between 0.1 and 2.0 of nominal
For example, at the reading of 4.2 kA, the worst-case error is max(0.0025  4.2 kA, 0.001  5 kA) + 0.504 kA = 0.515 kA.
Example: Voltage monitoring
A positive-sequence voltage on a 400 kV system measured via source 2 is to be monitored by the DCmA H3 output with a
range of 0 to 1 mA. The VT secondary setting is 66.4 V, the VT ratio setting is 6024, and the VT connection setting is “Delta.”
The voltage is to be monitored in the range from 70% to 110% of nominal.
The minimum and maximum positive-sequence voltages to be monitored are:
400 kV
V min = 0.7  ---------------- = 161.66 kV,
3
400 kV
V max = 1.1  ---------------- = 254.03 kV
3
Eq. 5-34
The base unit for voltage (see the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
V BASE = 0.0664 kV  6024 = 400 kV
Eq. 5-35
The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored (in pu) are:
161.66 kV
minimum voltage = ----------------------- = 0.404 pu,
400 kV
254.03 kV
maximum voltage = ----------------------- = 0.635 pu
400 kV
Eq. 5-36
The following settings are entered:
DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE: “SRC 2 V_1 mag”
DCMA OUTPUT H3 RANGE: “0 to 1 mA”
DCMA OUTPUT H3 MIN VAL: “0.404 pu”
DCMA OUTPUT H3 MAX VAL: “0.635 pu”
The limit settings differ from the expected 0.7 pu and 1.1 pu because the relay calculates the positive-sequence quantities
scaled to the phase-to-ground voltages, even if the VTs are connected in “Delta” (see the Metering Conventions section in
chapter 6), while at the same time the VT nominal voltage is 1 pu for the settings. Consequently the settings required in this
example differ from naturally expected by the factor of 3